Delorme 6 Users Manual

6 to the manual b824f86b-c4c2-4e71-af58-e11e454465f0

2015-02-04

: Delorme Delorme-6-Users-Manual-511767 delorme-6-users-manual-511767 delorme pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 437

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

XMap 6 User Guide
Updated for XMap 6.2
This user guide is a printable version of the XMap Help system. When you are using
XMap, use the Help system to take advantage of links to related Help topics and
tutorials.
Note: Some content from the Help system is not available in the print version.

Table of Contents
Getting Started.............................................................................................. 1
Welcome to XMap 6 ..................................................................................... 1
What's New in XMap 6 ................................................................................. 2
Frequently Asked Questions .......................................................................... 3
Helpful Tips ...............................................................................................10
Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Locations ........................................13
Basic Functions ..........................................................................................17
About the Interface ....................................................................................24
Map Legend .................................................................................................29
Map Legend...............................................................................................29
Using the Toolbar..........................................................................................33
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options ...................................................................33
Reordering the Toolbar Options ....................................................................33
To Use the GIS Tools ..................................................................................33
To Create New Projects ...............................................................................34
To Open a Project.......................................................................................34
To Migrate a Project....................................................................................35
To Save a Project .......................................................................................35
To Use the Map Navigation Tool....................................................................35
To Print.....................................................................................................35
To Print the Map Screen ..............................................................................35
To Share Maps ...........................................................................................36
To Share Online With Eartha Community Atlas................................................36
To Send Maps to Your Portable Media Player ..................................................36
To Create a Route ......................................................................................36
To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection ..............................................................37
To Exchange Files with a Handheld Device .....................................................37
To Use GPS NavMode..................................................................................38
To Grab and Pan the Map ............................................................................38
To Create a Profile......................................................................................38
To Measure Distance...................................................................................39
To Get Information About a Location .............................................................39
To Choose Options .....................................................................................40
To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location....................................................40
Customizing the Map and Tab Display ..............................................................41
Display Options Overview ............................................................................41
Customizing the Interface............................................................................41
Displaying Basic Map Features......................................................................41
Customizing the Map Feature Preferences ......................................................44
Changing the Map Colors.............................................................................45
Changing the Map Magnification Level ...........................................................45
ii

Table of Contents
Changing How POIs Display on the Map.........................................................46
Setting Units of Measure Preferences ............................................................47
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ...................................................................49
Viewing Two Maps at the Same Time ............................................................51
Showing or Hiding Tabs...............................................................................52
Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences ...............................................53
Reordering the Tabs ...................................................................................53
Using Keyboard Shortcuts ..............................................................................55
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme .........................................................55
Creating a New Custom Scheme ...................................................................55
Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme.........................................55
Customizing a DeLorme Scheme...................................................................57
Renaming a Custom Scheme........................................................................57
Deleting a Custom Scheme ..........................................................................58
Importing a Custom Scheme........................................................................58
Exporting a Custom Scheme ........................................................................59
Searching For Commands ............................................................................59
Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme................................................59
Using Projects ..............................................................................................61
Map Data Overview ....................................................................................61
Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Locations ........................................61
Managing Data...........................................................................................64
Managing Projects ......................................................................................67
Using Transfer Files ....................................................................................70
Changing the Properties of Your Data ............................................................73
Working With GIS .........................................................................................83
GIS Overview ............................................................................................83
Handling Disconnected or Deleted Layers.......................................................84
GIS Options...............................................................................................85
Using Database Manager .............................................................................86
Using Layers in a Subscription......................................................................99
Using ArcSDE Databases ...........................................................................101
Redlining.................................................................................................104
Stationing ...............................................................................................106
Bulk Importing and Exporting.....................................................................107
Managing Layers in Your Workspace ...........................................................115
Classifying, Symbolizing, and Labeling a Layer .............................................143
Using XMap Web ......................................................................................159
Attributes-Datasheet View .........................................................................165
Attributes-Design View..............................................................................171
Query .....................................................................................................183
Layering .................................................................................................189

iii

XMap User Guide
Checking Layers Out and In .......................................................................190
Printing .....................................................................................................193
Printing a Map .........................................................................................193
Printing a Route and Directions ..................................................................194
Printing a Profile.......................................................................................195
Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map...........................................................196
Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map...............................................199
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map .............................................200
Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed Map ............................ 200
Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map ..........................................201
Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map........................................................201
Finding a Location on the Map.......................................................................206
Find Overview..........................................................................................206
Performing a Basic Search .........................................................................206
Performing an Advanced Search .................................................................207
Performing a POI Search ...........................................................................211
Finding Points Near Your Current Location....................................................212
Finding a Symbol by its Name ....................................................................213
Tips on Viewing Search Results ..................................................................214
Keywords for Category Searches ................................................................215
MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting ......................................218
Using Address Book Contacts........................................................................220
Searching for Address Book Contacts ..........................................................220
Importing Existing Address Book Information ...............................................220
Manually Entering Address Book Information ................................................221
Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact ............................................221
Editing a Contact In Your Address Book .......................................................222
Manually Moving a Contact on the Map ........................................................222
Relocating Address Book Contacts ..............................................................223
Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map.......................................223
Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book .....................................................224
Deleting Your Entire Address Book ..............................................................224
Exporting Your Address Book .....................................................................225
Searching for Phone Book Listings .................................................................226
Using Phone Data .....................................................................................226
Searching for a Phone Book Listing .............................................................227
Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road ............................................231
Using the Draw Tools...................................................................................233
Draw Overview ........................................................................................233
Viewing Hidden Draw Tools........................................................................238
Geocaching Features.................................................................................238
Draw File Management..............................................................................239

Table of Contents
Using Draw Objects ..................................................................................252
Routable Roads, Trails, Tracks, Lines, Arcs , and Splines ................................259
Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons ...............................................................265
Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and Images ..............................267
Custom Symbols ......................................................................................272
Using XData ...............................................................................................284
XData Overview .......................................................................................284
Importing Data ........................................................................................284
Managing Datasets ...................................................................................286
Viewing Dataset Records ...........................................................................287
Creating a Route with XData Records ..........................................................288
Geocoding or Moving a Record's Location.....................................................289
Exporting Data.........................................................................................289
Printing XData Dataset Records ..................................................................291
Registering Images .....................................................................................293
ImageReg Overview .................................................................................293
Creating Data for a Registered Image..........................................................293
Opening and Closing Existing WorkFiles .......................................................293
Registering an Image................................................................................294
Modifying Existing WorkFiles ......................................................................296
Deleting an Existing WorkFile .....................................................................297
Hints for Placing Points..............................................................................297
Profiling Linear Objects ................................................................................299
Creating a Profile .....................................................................................299
Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs ...........................................................300
Statistical Data ........................................................................................302
Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation .......................................305
Clearing a Profile ......................................................................................306
User Profile Data ......................................................................................306
Viewing Your Map in 3-D ..............................................................................308
Viewing a 3-D Map ...................................................................................308
Flying Over a 3-D Map ..............................................................................309
Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences...............................................................310
Routing .....................................................................................................312
Creating a Route ......................................................................................312
Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias ...........................................................314
Changing the Routing Method ....................................................................316
Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route ......................................317
Viewing Route Directions ...........................................................................317
Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing ......................................................318
Saving Route Directions as Text .................................................................319
Setting Your Routing Preferences................................................................319

XMap User Guide
Editing a Route ........................................................................................320
Editing Roads ..........................................................................................321
Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote ........................................................322
Moving Route MapNotes ............................................................................323
Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map ................................................323
Saving a Route ........................................................................................324
Deleting a Route ......................................................................................324
Importing Routes .....................................................................................324
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences......................................325
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route ........................................................326
Converting a Route to a GPS Log ................................................................326
Using GPS..................................................................................................328
GPS Overview ..........................................................................................328
Initializing GPS ........................................................................................329
Using NavMode or GPS Tab View ................................................................332
Tracking a Route with GPS.........................................................................333
Getting Back on Track When Off Course ......................................................334
Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking .......................................335
Playing Back a Log File..............................................................................335
Previewing a GPS Log File..........................................................................336
Viewing File Details for a GPS Log...............................................................337
Monitoring Your GPS Status .......................................................................337
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information ...........................................................339
Viewing Sun and Moon Information.............................................................340
Averaging ...............................................................................................341
About GPS...............................................................................................341
Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition...............................................343
Voice Overview ........................................................................................343
Voice Options Overview.............................................................................344
Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition ..............................................344
Training the Speech Recognition Engine.......................................................345
Voice Commands......................................................................................346
Speech Recognition Tips............................................................................349
Changing Voice Output..............................................................................350
Voice Preferences .....................................................................................351
Voice Prompts..........................................................................................352
Using Handheld Devices ...............................................................................354
Handheld Export ......................................................................................354
Exchanging Information with an Earthmate PN-Series GPS .............................358
Exchanging Information with a Third-party GPS Device ..................................377
Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device ............................................383
Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device ..........................................388

Table of Contents
Using UMPC and Small-screen Devices ...........................................................394
Using UMPC and Small-screen Devices ........................................................394
Using NetLink .............................................................................................395
NetLink Overview .....................................................................................395
Using GeoTagger ........................................................................................397
Getting Started with GeoTagger .................................................................397
Tagging an Image ....................................................................................397
Tagging Data ...........................................................................................398
Calculate the Timestamp Offset ..................................................................399
Sharing Online............................................................................................401
Using Eartha Community Atlas ...................................................................401
Using MapShare .......................................................................................401
Using the XMap API Command Window ..........................................................402
XMap API Command Window .....................................................................402
API Commands and Parameters..................................................................403
Legal Information........................................................................................406
DeLorme XMap GIS Single-User License Agreement ......................................406
Important Notices ....................................................................................410
Apache License, Version 2.0.......................................................................416
Index ........................................................................................................421

vii

Getting Started
Welcome to XMap 6
Tips
•

Double-click a book in the Table of Contents to view all of its associated
topics. Click a topic to read its contents.

•

Additional information is available in the Technical Support section of our
website. Visit www.delorme.com to view tutorials, search the forums, and
more.

The following features and more are available in XMap.
•

Import or create GIS layers, link attribute data, classify and adjust how the
data displays, build queries, and more.

•

Add data and manage projects.

•

Use the split-screen to simultaneously view two types of data for the same
location.

•

Print high quality, detailed, single-page maps or mural maps as large as 3 x 3
pages.

•

Print route directions and profiles.

•

Search for locations on the map.

•

Search for residential or business phone listings (Phone Data required).

•

Get information about map features.

•

Add annotation or redline edits to the map.

•

View profile elevation graphs for a selected linear object on the map.

•

View and fly over your map in 3-D.

•

Create a route by adding start and finish points on your map. Customize your
route by adding stops and vias.

•

Connect your GPS device to the program and track your progress on a
portable computer as you travel. View your next turn as well as the turn after
that—very helpful when you need to make a turn directly after another turn.
You can even use the automatic back-on-track feature to recalculate your
route when detours veer you off course.

•

Issue voice commands and receive spoken directions.

•

Export a map to a handheld device.

•

Create custom keyboard shortcuts or select a DeLorme shortcut scheme, such
as 3-D Navigation, to navigate the program more easily than ever.

•

Use the toolbar to share maps, open/create/save projects, start/stop GPS,
edit your preferences, and more.

•

Combine digital photos and data with GPS locations using GeoTagger.

XMap User Guide

What's New in XMap 6
What's New in XMap 6.2
•

Updated and enhanced ArcSDE 9.3 support improves the ability to import and
deploy GIS databases to the field—synchronize large GIS layers for the field
in record time!

•

Shapefile support for XMap 6 Professional—import shapefiles into the GIS tab
and apply symbolization
Note This is already available in XMap GIS Enterprise and XMap GIS Editor

•

Faster data cutting for Earthmate GPS PN-Series GPS devices

What's New in XMap 6.1
•

GIS Options Dialog Box – customize your GIS default layer and query settings

•

NetLink Map Library offers data download subscriptions

•

Export XMap GIS files to Drawing Exchange (AutoCAD .dxf) format

•

Enhanced MrSID import now includes aux.xml support

•

Simplified XMap data export (draw layers, GIS layers, user raster data) for
the recently released Earthmate GPS PN-40 handheld

•

Access downloadable feature enhancements and bug fixes (No re-installation
required)

What's New in XMap 6

•

Works with the Windows Vista™ operating system

•

DeLorme Docs folder is in a new location—for more information, see Migrating
Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location

•

Improved multi-user permissions

•

ArcSDE 9.2 support

•

GIS layer append and replace features during import

•

Improved GIS database synchronization (Enterprise only)

•

GIS stationing support for field line assets with user-defined distance
measures (Editor and Enterprise only)

•

Create map packages with draw and GIS data for use on Earthmate PN-Series
GPS devices; independently layer them over other datasets

•

Download NOAA charts from NetLink for display in XMap and on Earthmate
PN-Series GPS devices

•

API access to routing, GPS navigation, and map controls

•

GPS NavMode—a new hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or
3-D

•

Improved terrain profiling for multi-channel data—show travel speed,
temperature, and other variables against the terrain

•

GeoTagger, a new toolbar feature, provides updated image and data-tagging
features allows you to combine digital photos or data with GPS locations in a
completely new way

•

New route references for Walking/Jogging, Cycilng, Off-Roading, Driving

Getting Started
•

Support for opening DeLorme Topo USA and Street Atlas projects; easily
migrate your old projects to XMap

Frequently Asked Questions
These questions are asked most frequently by our customers.
•

Why doesn't map data display in all projects?
The procedure for adding data to XMap varies; it depends on if you want to
add the data to the current project or if you want to add it to all projects. If
you added the data to only the current project and you want to view it in all
projects, you must add the data as base data in the application.
Use the steps below to add a map dataset as base data.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click Data and then click Base Data.
The Base Data Locations dialog box opens listing each of the data
sources on your system.
3. Click Add, select the hard drive location where you saved your data
from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and click OK.
The OK button is enabled when you select a folder containing a file
that contains the properties of the map data being added.
4. Click Done.

•

What map data is included with XMap?
XMap includes a worldwide reference base map dataset that includes major
roads, cities, boundaries, and geographic features, which is visible between
data zoom levels 1 and 6. For more detailed map features or aerial imagery,
you can purchase a variety of base map datasets from DeLorme or integrate
your own data using XMap's import and data adding tools. Note that most of
the maps used by DeLorme to convey the capabilities of the software are
created using an optional DeLorme base map dataset and/or data or imagery
from third-party sources.

•

How do I add non-DeLorme imagery to my map?
Use the Map Data tab to add imagery in MrSID and GeoTIFF format to your
map.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the file you want to add, select it, and then click Add.
The imagery is added to the current project.
Note Imagery will not display unless projection information is specified in the
file.

•

How do I import files from an earlier version of XMap into this version?
Use the Map Data tab to import projects, routes, draw files, and XData from
many other DeLorme mapping programs. For information about migrating
data to XMap 6, see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location.

XMap User Guide
To Open A Project
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click File and then click Open.
3. Select the project you want to view and then click Open.
4. Click OK.
To Open a Route
5. Click the Map Data tab.
6. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
7. Browse to the file you want, select it, and then click Add.
The route is added to the current project.
To Open a Draw File
8. Click the Map Data tab.
9. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
10. Browse to the file you want, select it, and then click Add.
The draw file is added to the current project.
To Open an XData File
11. Click the Map Data tab.
12. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
13. Browse to the file you want, select it, and then click Add.
The XData file is added to the current project.
•

What is my server name?
XMap uses Microsoft SQL Server as its DeLorme OpenSpace database engine.
Your server name varies, depending on if you are connecting to or creating a
DeLorme database in Microsoft MSDE SQL Server 2000, Microsoft SQL Server
2005 Express, or a Microsoft Enterprise SQL Server at your company.

•

To establish a local connection to MSDE 2000, use
localhost\DELORMEMAPPING or (local)\DELORMEMAPPING for the
server name.
To establish a connection to MSDE 2000 on another computer in your
network, use \DELORMEMAPPING.

•

To establish a local connection to SQL Server 2005 Express, use
localhost\XMAP5 or (local)\XMAP6 for the server name.
To establish a connection to SQL Server 2005 Express on another
computer in your network, use \XMAP6.

•

To establish a connection to a Microsoft Enterprise Microsoft SQL
Server, use for the server name. You will need to
ensure that you have the proper server and database permissions and
you are connected to the network. Contact your IT department if you
experience problems.

Getting Started
Note MSDE 2000 installs to your computer with XMap 4.5 and SQL Server
2005 Express installs to your computer with XMap 5 and above if MSDE 2000
is not already present.
•

Why doesn't my Workspace display any layers?
If there are no layers in your Workspace, you may have accidentally removed
them. To retrieve the layers, click the GIS tab, click the Workspace subtab
(if it is not currently selected), click the Layers button, and then click
Manage. Select the Source Database you want to pull layers from, highlight
the Layers in the Database, and then click the move or move all button to
move the layers into your workspace.
If the database where your layers are present is not listed in the Source
Database drop-down list, you can connect to it by selecting the Other…
option. If you have not yet created a database, you can do so using Database
Manager or by selecting the New… option in the Target Database dropdown list in the Create Layer and Import Wizard dialogs.

•

Where do I find the map settings and other Options settings?
Click the Options button
on the toolbar to modify GPS, voice,
GIS, map feature, display, handheld, and keyboard shortcut, and 3-D
preferences. For more information, see To Open the Options Dialog Box.

•

Upgraders only: What happens to my projects when I upgrade?
In previous versions of XMap, your projects, draw files, route files, log files,
XData files, and other DeLorme files were stored by default in the DeLorme
Docs folder on the root of your computer's C drive unless you specified a
different directory during installation.
In XMap 6, the DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is
located in the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista)
folder under your user name. For NetLink downloads, the Downloads folder is
located in the DeLorme Docs folder under Shared Documents (Windows XP)
or Public Documents (Windows Vista).
For information about migrating data to XMap 6, see Migrating Data to the
New DeLorme Docs Location.

•

Upgraders only: Why doesn't XMap overwrite the older version?
XMap 5 and later versions do not overwrite older versions of XMap, such as
XMap 4.5 or earlier. This allows you to view both versions on the same
computer.

•

Upgraders only: Should I uninstall my previous version before installing the
new version?
You are not required to uninstall XMap 4.5 or earlier versions before installing
XMap 6. You do not have to uninstall XMap 6 to upgrade to a later version of
XMap6, such as XMap 6.1.

XMap User Guide
•

Can I see imagery and data from Topo USA or Street Atlas USA within XMap?
Yes. The location of the Downloads folder changed in XMap 6. If you stored
your data in the DeLorme Docs Downloads folder, it will automatically migrate
to the new location. If you stored it in a different location, you can use the
Map Data tab to browse to the location and add it.
For information about migrating data to XMap 6, see Migrating Data to the
New DeLorme Docs Location.

•

How do I get data updates or fix the roads on my map?
If you find there is a local road that is missing, you can add it to the current
draw layer using the Routable Roads Draw tool. For more information, see
Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map.
To report a correction to us:
1. Click the NetLink tab.
2. Click the Support subtab.
3. Click the Submit Correction link.
4. Use the Customer Revisions Wizard to submit the change.

•

How do I activate my Earthmate PN-Series GPS device to exchange
information with XMap?
Use the following steps to activate your device before you exchange maps.
1. With XMap open, connect your device to your computer and power it
on.
2. PN-40 only: The Connect to Computer screen appears on the device
and Data Exchange is highlighted.
Press ENTER on the device.
on the toolbar to open the
3. In XMap, click the Exchange button
Earthmate PN-Series Exchange Dialog box.
The device is activated when it appears in the drop-down list in the top
right corner of the dialog box.
For more information, see Activating an Earthmate PN-Series GPS.

•

How do I initialize my GPS receiver?
Each time you use your GPS receiver, you initialize it, which means you set
your starting position on the map by obtaining the initial coordinates of your
location. This can be done automatically or manually.
For more information, see Initializing GPS.

•

What is the difference between NavMode and the GPS tab view when using
GPS?
The default GPS view is NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can
display in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are
minimized; however, you can customize your interface. For more information,
see the NavMode tutorial in the application’s Help.

Getting Started
The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating
and tracking. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but you can
opt to hide them. It is available only in 2-D mode.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode button
When the button appears indented,
Note The button is greyed out
or are playing back a GPS log file

on the toolbar.

NavMode is on.
unless you have a GPS device plugged in

You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button

on the toolbar and click the

GPS tab. You can also click the Options button

on the GPS tab.

2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off, or select the check
box to turn it on.
3. Click OK.
•

What's the difference between a stop and a via?
When routing, you have the option of adding or inserting stops or vias in the
route. A stop is a location in the middle of a route where you want to stop and
then proceed from. A via is a road on the map that you want to specifically
use when routing.
For example, if you create a route between Portland, Maine, and Yarmouth,
Maine, without any stops or vias, the route directions will tell you to take I295. However, if you want to take US Route 1 instead, you can place vias in
the route on US Route 1 to force the route to go by way of US Route 1. If you
plan on stopping in Falmouth Foreside for lunch, you will want your route
directions to reflect that stop. When you add a stop, the route can be
recalculated to include the stop in the middle of your route.
The map below shows the area between Portland, Maine, and Yarmouth,
Maine, with two vias and one stop.

XMap User Guide

•

What's the difference between adding and inserting a stop or via?
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route.
The Add Stop/Via function adds stops/vias in the order you add them to the
route.

•

Why did my route fail to calculate?
Your route will fail to calculate if you create a route:

•

With a route start, stop, via, or finish point in an area that you have
designated as a Route Avoid.

•

That includes route points outside the United States, Mexico, or
Canada.

•

On an island without roads. In this case, XMap will look for the nearest
road to that island to place the route point. If the nearest road is not
routable (for example, it is the only road on the island and/or the
island does not have ferry access), you will get an error message
saying "Route failed to calculate."

Getting Started
•

•

Why do X marks display on the map when I calculate a route?
•

When you place a route point in a location that isn't on a street, XMap
finds the closest street to that location, marks the space between the
point you clicked and the street with X marks, and starts the route at
the street.

•

If you perform a Find for an address that is on a walkway and place a
route point on it, XMap finds the closest street to that location, marks
the space between the point you clicked and the street with X marks,
and starts the route at the street.

Why are the tab area and control panel so narrow?
XMap was designed to accommodate resolutions of 1024 x 768 or higher. If
you are using a very high resolution (such as 1920 x 1200), the tab area and
control panel in XMap may appear to be very narrow. You can modify the size
of the map and tab area or use the Windows Control Panel to adjust your
display settings.

•

What's the best way to measure the distance of a road or trail?
The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail, is to
create a route. You can create a route using right-click functionality, the
toolbar, or the Route tab. For more information, see Creating a Route.
The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail, is to
create a route. You can create a route using right-click functionality, the
toolbar, or the Route tab. For more information, see Creating a Route.
The best way to determine the distance of a particular road or trail is to
create a route. You can create a route using right-click functionality, the
toolbar, or the Route tab. For more information, see Creating a Route.

•

What's the best way to measure a large area on the map?
The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the area tools in the
Draw tab, such as the polygon tool. When you draw an area object on the
map, the area displays next to the object on the map. If you click off of the
object, you can view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab
and then clicking the area object on the map. For more information about
drawing area objects, see Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map.

•

What's the best way to measure a short distance on the map?
The best way to measure a short distance that is not made up of a road/trail
on the toolbar. The measure tool
on the map is to use the Measure tool
allows you to measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units
chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box. For instructions on how to
use the measure tool, see Measuring Distance and Area.

•

Why won't 3-D billboards display?
If you receive a message saying that 3-D billboards cannot be displayed,
ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest drivers and that it
supports DirectX and transparencies. For more information, see the DeLorme
Forums.

XMap User Guide

Helpful Tips
These tips may help you use the features in your DeLorme mapping program. The
Did You Know? pop-up tutorials provide hints while you are working in the
application.
Tips
•

To disable a specific pop-up tutorial, select the Don't Show Again check box
before you close it.

•

To disable all pop-up tutorials, click the Help button
click Shut Off All Pop-up Tutorials.

•

To enable all pop-tutorials after you have shut off one or more, click the Help
button on the toolbar and click Reset All Pop-up Tutorials.

on the toolbar and

Control Panel
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Zoom the map out/in
quickly

Drag the map cursor in an up-left direction to zoom
the map out or drag it in a down-right direction to
zoom the map in.

Pan the map quickly

Position your cursor on the edge of the map; it
becomes a white hand that you can use to drag the
map to the new location.

Update the coordinate
format that displays in
the Control Panel

Update your measurement preferences at any time
using the Display tab in the Options dialog box.

View the last map center

Press the middle button in the Compass Rose in the
Control Panel to center the map on the previous map
view. This button performs an undo function for the
last pan or zoom (up to 256 times).

Draw
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Create a route using a
road or trail you have
added to the map with
the Draw tab

When drawing a routable road/trail, click each existing
road it crosses to ensure that you can route on the
new road/trail. When you open a track you've
imported from your GPS device, join the imported line
with existing lines by right-clicking each intersection
and selecting Manage Draw/Join.

Getting Started

Find
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Modify a Find search
result

Right-click a result item in the Find tab to add it as a
MapNote, insert it as a stop in your route, copy the
information to your clipboard, and so on.

Find a custom point of
interest (such as a
Chinese restaurant)
when performing a GPS
radar search in Find

You can use the Custom option to find other
categories besides those listed, or to find multiple
categories at once.

GPS
If you want to...

Use this tip...

View a GPS log on the
map

Use the Draw tab to import a GPS log file and view it
as a line object on the map.

Handheld Export
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Modify the export area
in Handheld Export

When you click Preview, the default export area for
the location you selected displays on the map as
shaded rectangles. Click Select to confirm the area.
To edit the area, click the Select/Edit tool and then
click the map to add or remove rectangles to/from the
export area.

Info/NetLink
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Quickly view information
for a location on the
map.

Hover your cursor over objects on the map to see
information (such as road names, city/town, details
about draw objects, etc.) in the status line that
appears at the bottom of the map, just above the tab
area.

Map Data
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Learn how to add route
and/or draw layers to
your project

Add existing route and/or draw files to your project by
clicking the Add button and selecting the Draw File
or Route File option.

XMap User Guide

Measurement Tool
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Measure the
area/perimeter of a
location on the map

Use the measure tool to draw a polygon on the map
and determine its area and perimeter. Just click pointby-point to draw the polygon on the map and then
double-click to close the polygon. The area and
perimeter display in the center of the polygon.

Phone
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Get all of the phone
listings for a particular
road.

You can right-click the map on a road to view phone
listings for that road.

Note The Phone tab in XMap requires DeLorme Phone Data (available separately
from DeLorme). For information on purchasing DeLorme Phone Data, click NetLink,
visit www.delorme.com, or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

Print
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Stop a page in a multipage map from printing

If you do not want to print all the pages in a multipage map, on the Layout graphic, click each page you
do not want to print.

Route
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Reorder inserted stops

Reorder your inserted route stops using the Advanced
features in the Route tab.

Create a route quickly

For quick route creation, right-click the map and
select one of the Create Route options or use the
Route buttons on the toolbar.

Reorder the columns in
the Route Directions list

Click the Directions list column headers to change
the column order.

Determine the difference
between adding and
inserting stops and vias

Added stops/vias are placed in the order you add
them to the route. Inserted stops/vias are placed in
the order you would approach them between the Start
and Finish points of the route.

View information about
your second turn

Click the Show Turns button when GPS tracking to
view information about the following turn.

Getting Started

Tab Area
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Adjust the size of the
tab area

Adjust the size of the tab area by dragging the top or
right side of the tab area.

Show, hide, or reorder
tabs

Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to
show, hide, or reorder tabs.

Import or export a tab
configuration file

Use the Tab Manager option in the Help menu to
import or export a tab configuration file

Voice
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Create new speech
recognition profiles

You can create a new speech recognition profile for
each of your working environments (noisy, quiet) and
users (your spouse or child) by clicking the Speech
settings in the Windows Control Panel.

Learn how to make the
microphone more
sensitive to your
commands in noisy
environments

If there is background noise while you are speaking, it
may be helpful to precede all of your voice commands
with a special phrase (like Simon Says). See the Voice
Settings tab of the Options dialog box.

XData
If you want to...

Use this tip...

Geoplace XData records
that do not have
complete address
information or were not
correctly located during
the import process

You can drag a record from the Query list and place it
at the correct geo-location on the map.

Add a blank record to
your XData database

To add a blank record to an XData database, you
must select All Records as the Table Display type.

Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Locations
In previous versions of XMap, and in other DeLorme products, your projects, draw
files, route files, log files, XData files, imagery, and other DeLorme files were stored
by default in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your computer's C drive unless
you specified a different directory during installation.
In XMap 6:
•

The DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is located in
the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder under
your user name.
13

XMap User Guide
•

The DeLorme Docs folder for NetLink downloads is located in the DeLorme
Docs folder under Shared Documents (Windows XP) or Public Documents
(Windows Vista). This allows all users on the computer to access NetLink
downloads.

What is Migration?
The migration process does not move your files—it copies them to the new locations.
When you are sure your files are working correctly in the new locations, you can
delete them from the old locations as long as you are not using them for another
DeLorme program. For example, if you have an imagery file you use in a previous
version of XMap or in Topo USA or XMap, keep both files. Eventually, all DeLorme
programs will be moved to the new file system.
Because all new information you add to a project will be saved to the new file
location—even if you open it from the old location, we strongly recommend that you
migrate your files. If you do not, you could have project data in two DeLorme Docs
locations; your project will work correctly, but your data will not all be in the same
location.

Initial Migration
The initial migration process, which occurs when you open XMap 6 the first time,
copies the data in the existing NetLink Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders to
their new locations as indicated above.
Note The automatic migration process copies files from only one existing DeLorme
Docs location. If you have more than one DeLorme Docs location on your computer,
only one location will be recognized
New Users
When you installed XMap 6 on your computer, you were asked if you had previously
installed a DeLorme program. If you had not, you clicked New User and the
application opened. The migration process does not apply to you if you have never
installed a DeLorme program on your computer.
Existing Users
When you open XMap 6 for the first time after installation, your computer is scanned
for an existing DeLorme Docs directory. If a DeLorme Docs directory is found, any
data in the existing NetLink Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders was copied to
their new locations as indicated above.
If an existing DeLorme Docs folder is not automatically detected on your computer,
you were asked if you had previously installed a DeLorme program. If you had, you
clicked Existing User which opened a dialog box for browsing to the existing DeLorme
Docs location and choosing one of the following migration options:

•

Migrate–The data in the NetLink Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders
was migrated to their new DeLorme Docs locations.

•

Don't Migrate–The migration was cancelled and any data in the NetLink
Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders was not migrated. You will not be
prompted to migrate again.

•

Try Again Later–Cancels the migration, but you are prompted to migrate the
next time you open XMap. You will be prompted each time you open the
program until you select Migrate or Don't Migrate.

Getting Started

Project Migration
When you migrate a project, all associated files (routes, draw layers, XData sets, and
connections to GIS layers in a database) are moved with it. When you open a project
from any location other than the new DeLorme Docs location, you are prompted to
migrate it. You can also directly migrate projects.

To Migrate a Project When You Open It
Use the following steps to migrate a project when you open it.
1. Open a project.
2. When the Migrate Project dialog box opens, click Migrate.
The Migration Completed dialog box opens. Go to step 4.
OR
If a file with the same name already exists in the new DeLorme Docs location,
the Confirm Link to Existing File dialog box opens. Go to step 3.
3. Click Link to replace the project link to the existing file in the new location
and then go to step 4.
OR
Click Link All to replace any project links to existing files in the new location
and then go to step 4.
OR
Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it
with a different name.
OR
Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration
that has occurred up to this point.
4. In the Migration Completed dialog box, click OK to open the migrated project.
Note If there is a problem with the migration, a message will notify you of
any corrective action you need to take.

XMap User Guide
Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it
with a different name.
OR
Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration
that has occurred up to this point.
5. In the Migration Completed dialog box, click Open to open the migrated
project or Close to close the dialog box and return to your last active project.
Note If there is a problem with the migration, a message will notify you of
any corrective action you need to take.

Getting Started

Basic Functions
Zooming In and Out
You can use the drag and zoom feature, zoom tools, or the data zoom level (Data
zoom level is the relationship between what you see in a map view and how it exists
in reality. It is the amount of geographic data displayed on a computer monitor. The
data zoom level is similar to the traditional fractional relationship expressed on paper
maps. For example, 1:24,000, 1:100,000, 1:500,000, and so on.) to quickly change
the zoom level of the map view.
Notes
•

Increasing the data zoom level number shows a smaller geographic area at
greater detail.

•

Decreasing the data zoom level number shows a larger geographic area at
lesser detail.

•

If you view both the right (primary) and left (secondary) maps at different
data zoom levels, a box (or lines, depending on the current data zoom level)
displays on the map that is zoomed out the furthest. The box/lines indicate
the area that is in view on the other map. You can disable this feature by
clearing the Show Ref check box at the top of the secondary map window.

•

If you view the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but they are
not equally represented on the screen (50/50), a box (or lines) displays on
the map that is covering the most screen area. The box/lines indicate the
area that is in view on the other map.

To Drag and Zoom In
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in a downright direction on the map to encompass the area you want to display. A view
box displays on the screen and changes dimension as you move the mouse. A
label displays the data zoom level at the current map center.
2. Once you reach the map area or data zoom level you want to display, release
the mouse button. The area you selected fills the map window, the map recenters, and the map view adjusts to show the appropriate level of detail.
Tip You can move the view box to another location by pressing the SHIFT
key at anytime during this procedure.
To Drag and Zoom Out
Use the following steps to zoom in either the right or left map.
1. Click and hold down the left mouse button as you drag the mouse in an upleft direction on the map. A staircase with a small circle displays on the
screen.
2. Continue dragging the mouse in an up-left direction. The small circle moves
up the steps, one step per data zoom level. A label displays the data zoom
level to the bottom-right of the staircase.
3. Once you reach the data zoom level you want to display, release the mouse
button. The map view adjusts to display the appropriate level of detail. The
map center is retained on your screen.

XMap User Guide
To Zoom In/Out Using the Zoom Tools
There are two sets of zoom tools. The zoom tools for the right map are located in the
Control Panel. The zoom tools for the left map are located at the top of the left map
view.
Click the up arrow to zoom out one minor data zoom
level at a time. Click the down arrow to zoom in one
minor data zoom level at a time.
Right
Map
Controls

Click the Zoom In 1 tool to increase the detail
number to the next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 1 tool to decrease the detail
number to the next full level.
Click the Zoom Out 3 tool to decrease the detail
number by three full levels.

Left
Map
Controls

Click the plus button to increase the detail number to
the next full level.
Click the minus button to decrease the detail number
to the next full level.
The data zoom level of the left map displays in the
text area to the left of the buttons.

Tips
•

Press ALT+PAGE UP on your keyboard to zoom out to the next full data zoom
level. Press ALT+PAGE DOWN on your keyboard to zoom in to the next full
data zoom level.

•

Use the mouse wheel to zoom the map in and out. Rotate the mouse wheel to
zoom in by individual data zoom level steps or hold the SHIFT key while
rotating the mouse wheel to zoom to the next full data zoom level.

Panning/Centering the Map
Use any of the following methods to pan (move) or center the map.

•

Click anywhere on the current map view. The point you click becomes the
new map center.

•

Double-click a layer name in the GIS workspace.

•

When you point near the map edge, a white hand displays. Drag the hand to
move the map in that direction.

•

Click the Grab and Pan button
D map in any direction.

•

Click anywhere on the overview map. The point you click becomes the new
map center. This allows you to traverse greater distances with each mouse
click than you can within the main map.

on the toolbar to drag/pan the 2-D or 3-

Getting Started
•

Point anywhere on the black view box in the overview map window. When the
pointer becomes a

, drag the view box to the new location.

•

Use the search features in the Find tab to center the map on a particular
location.

•

Assign shortcut keys to pan the map up, down, left, or right in small
increments.

Copying Your Map to the Clipboard
Click the Copy to Clipboard button
on the Print tab to copy your map to the
clipboard. You can then paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft® Paint or
Adobe® Photoshop®.
You can also right-click anywhere on the map and click Copy Map to Clipboard.

Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image
You can save the current map view as a bitmap (.bmp) or JPEG (.jpg) image in all
page layout formats: Single, 2 x 2, and 3 x 3. If you select a multi-page format, all
the active pages are saved as individual bitmaps or JPEGs. The file name is the
specified file name with an incremental page number at the end.
See Printing a Map for information about printing a map without saving it as a file.
To Save a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG
Use the following steps to save a map as an image.
1. Locate the area on the map that you want to save as an image.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab (if it is not already
selected).
3. Under Map, select Left, Right, or Both.
4. Under Print Layout, select Page (the map print area is based on the paper
size specified in the Setup options) or Screen (the map print area is based on
the screen size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box and the print area for a
Screen map displays as a blue box on the overview map.
5. If you selected Page in step 4, the following options are available.
•

Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3).
The print area displays on both the Map and the Overview Map. In the
example below, 2 x 2 is selected. This means the print area
encompasses four standard pages at whatever paper size you specified
in the Setup options. You can assemble a multipage map into a large

XMap User Guide
map.

•

If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 and do not want to save all the pages in
the multipage map on the map layout graphic, click each page you do
not want to save. The page appears dimmed or gray. In the example
below, page 4 will not print.

•

Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to save. If not,
pan the map to the location and zoom to the level you want.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges/reduces the map features
and changes the map area that you save as an image. If you increase
the photo zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc. are larger and
your map area is reduced. If you decrease the photo zoom level, map
text, lines, symbols, etc. are smaller and your map area is enlarged.
The reduction/enlargement percentages for your photo zoom level
display under the Photo Zoom drop-down list.

•

If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current
print area, print photo zoom, or other settings, select the Lock Print
Center check box. This locks the print area and changes the tab label
to red.

•

Add text or graphics to your map.

•

Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the
entire area that will be saved as a bitmap image. Clear the check box
to return to your previous data zoom level.

.
6. Click the Save button
The Save 2D Map Image dialog box opens.
7. Type the file name in the File Name text box, select to save the file as a
.bmp or .jpg from the Save as Type drop-down list, select the DPI (dots per
inch) value (optional), and click Save.

Measuring Distance and Area
Use the Measure tool
on the toolbar to measure linear distance and area on
the map based on the units chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
The snap function snaps (attaches) the point of a measurement line to a point on a
road or another measurement object. This ensures a more accurate measurement of
distance or area.
The snap function is essential when measuring area. To measure area, you must
completely enclose the area by snapping your finish point to your starting point.

Getting Started
Notes
•

The measure tool is the best way to measure short distances on the map. If you
want to measure the distance of a road, try creating a route. If you want to
measure a large area on the map, use the area object tools in the Draw tab.

•

To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard
while using the Measure tool.

•

Measure objects (lines and areas) are saved with the current project. When you
create a new project, the measure objects do not display. If you want the same
measure objects on your new project, you must recreate them.

•

To view information about a measurement line, right-click it and click Info. The
measurement information is automatically displayed in the Info tab.

To Measure Distance or Area
Use the following steps to measure linear distance or area on the map.
1. Verify you have the correct units of measure selected in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box. For more information, see Setting Units of Measure
Preferences.
2. On the toolbar, click the Measure tool

. The pointer changes to

3. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box
displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement
taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or
measurement area to which you can snap, a yellow circle defines the snap
point. Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement
object's point coordinate.
4. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement
line.
OR
Click the last point of your measure line or area and then click the Measure
tool on the toolbar.
The measure line is a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total length of the line
is displayed in a label at each endpoint of the line.
5. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap
circle displays, and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The
closure area is transparently shaded, and the area and perimeter
measurements display.

Chart of Supported Coordinate Formats
These are the supported search formats. Sample coordinates are for Yarmouth,
Maine.
Tip Examples of search formats are listed in the Advanced search drop-down text
boxes along with a history of your most current search criteria.
Coordinate
Format

QuickSearch

Advanced Search

Latitude/Longitude

N 43 48 30, W70 9 52

N 43 48 30

W70 9 52

N 43 48.4910, W 070

N 43 48.4910

W 070 09.8440

XMap User Guide
09.8440

MGRS/USNG

N434829.4600,
W0700950.6400

N434829.4600

W0700950.6400

N43-48-30, W70-9-52

N43-48-30

W70-9-52

N 43:48:29.46, W
70:9:50.64

N 43:48:29.46

W 70:9:50.64

4348, -7009

4348

-7009

4348N, 7009W

4348N

7009W

N4348, W7009

N4348

W7009

4348n, 7009w

4348n

7009w

n4348, w7009

n4348

w7009

4348 N, 7009 W

4348 N

7009 W

N 4348, W 7009

N 4348

W 7009

4348 n, 7009 w

4348 n

7009 w

n 4348 w 7009

n 4348

w 7009

434829, -700950

434829

-700950

4348.491, -7009.844

4348.491

-7009.844

4348.491, -7009.844

4348.491

-7009.844

434829.46, -700950.64

434829.46

-700950.64

43.80818333, 70.16406667

43.80818333

-70.16406667

43 48.4910 N, 70 09
50.64 W

43 48.4910 N

70 09 50.64 W

43 48.4910 n, 70 09
50.64 w

43 48.4910 n

70 09 50.64 w

N 43 48.4910, W 70 09
50.64

N 43 48.4910

70 09 50.64 W

434829.46 N,
700950.64 W

434829.46 N

700950.64 W

43, -70

-70

19TDJ 06354 51187

Same as QuickSearch

19TDJ0635451187
(NAD27)*
19TDJ06355109
19TDJ064511
19TDJ0651
UTM/UPS

19T 0406311E 4850964N

Zone:

Easting:

Northing:

Getting Started

19T 0406311 4850964
19T / 0406311 / 4850964
SPCS

ME-W 0500490 0355150

19T

0406311E

4850964N

Zone:

Easting:

Northing:

19T

0406311

4850964

Zone:

Easting:

Northing:

19T

0406311

4850964

Zone:

Easting:

Northing:

ME-W

0500490

0355150

* Use this example for USNG with non-standard datum.

Searching Tips
When you use the Quick Search subtab on the Find tab or the Route tab to search for
a location, you must enter the information in a specific format.
Tips
•

Use punctuation as in the examples in the table below.

•

Do not use periods.

•

Search with the minimum amount of information to increase the number of
results. For example, if you are searching for a road, and you are not sure of
the spelling, type in part of the name and then scroll through the list of
results until you find a match.

This table shows formats for search types.
For this type of
search...

Use this format...

Example

Address

Street address, City,
State

100 Baxter Blvd, Portland,
ME

Street address, ZIP Code

100 Congress St, 04101

Street address, City,
State, ZIP Code

100 Congress St,
Portland, ME 04101

City

City, State

Atlanta, Georgia

ZIP/Postal Code

Within the U.S.: #####
(5-digit ZIP Codes only)
or

04096
J8E756

Within Canada: ### 6digit Postal Codes only)
Minor Point of Interest

POI name, City, State

Subway, Columbus, OH

Major Point of Interest or
Landmark

POI/landmark name

Mount Rushmore

POI/landmark name,
State

Space Needle, WA

Latitude/Longitude

See Chart of Supported of Supported Coordinate
Formats

XMap User Guide
For more information about the Find tab, see the Help topics under Finding a
Location on the Map.

About the Interface
Tab Area
You can access most of the application's functions from the tab area at the bottom of
on the tab.
the screen. To access Help for a specific tab, click the Help button
You can also reorder the tabs, show or hide individual tabs or show or hide the tab
panel.
•

Map Data

•

GIS

•

Find

•

Phone

•

Draw

•

GPS

•

Voice

•

Route

•

Profile

•

3-D

•

Info

•

NetLink

•

ImageReg

•

Handheld Export

•

XData (Hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to view the tab.)

Control Panel
The Control Panel, located to the right of the map view, displays information
pertinent to the current map view and map cursor position. It also includes zoom and
map pan buttons.
You can customize your interface to show or hide the Control Panel.

Getting Started
Data Zoom Level—The current data zoom level of the map
view; ranges between 0-0 (maximum zoom out) and 20-0
(maximum zoom in).
Zoom Tools—Buttons that quickly zoom out three levels, out
one level, or in one level. For more information, see Zooming In
and Out.
Compass Rose—A group of nine buttons on a globe. The outer
buttons have yellow arrows; click one of the arrow buttons to
pan the map in that direction. Click the middle button to center
the map on the previous map view. This button performs an
undo function for the last pan or zoom (up to 256 times).
Map Rotation Tool—The arrow in the graphic indicates True
North in relation to the rotated map. Use the Map Rotation Tool
to rotate the map in any direction. You can rotate the map by
clicking or dragging the square map graphic in the direction you
want or by selecting/typing the degree of map rotation from the
drop-down list.
Map Coordinates—Coordinates for the current map cursor
position display based on the units of measurement preferences
chosen in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
Elevation and Interval—Display in the measurement chosen in
the Display tab of the Options dialog box. The data zoom level
affects interval display.
Scale Bar—Indicates the distance one scale bar unit equals in
the measurement chosen under in the Display tab of the Options
dialog box.

Overview Map
The overview map is a small map in the lower-right corner of the screen that offers a
wide-angle view of your current map view area. It is approximately three data zoomlevels out from the current map view.
Tips
•

Click anywhere on the overview map and that point becomes the new map
center. This allows you to travel greater distances with each mouse click than
you can within the larger, current map view.

•

Use the black view box in the overview map window to pan the map. Point
anywhere on the view box. When the pointer becomes a
box to the new location.

, drag the view

XMap User Guide

Toolbar
Use the toolbar to perform many functions in the application without navigating
through the tab area.
*These tools are available only in XMap Editor and XMap Enterprise.
**These tools appear only when an active database subscription exists.
Exchange
•

Exchange routes, waypoints, or tracks with a GPS or PDA.
Note The GPS and Exchange groups are combined into the GPS/Exchange
group in XMap Professional.

GeoTagger
•

Combine images and data with GPS information on the map.

GIS Layer Management
•

Import a layer into a database from a file or ArcSDE database.

•

Add and remove layers from your workspace, delete layers from the source
database, or remove a database reference.

GIS Tools
•

Select a layer from your workspace as the active layer.

•

Save all your changes to the active layer.*

•

Select geometries on the map without risk of accidental editing.

•

Analyze the topographical relationship of lines based on their attributes.

•

Move or change the size of a geometry.*

•

Edit points in a polygon/line layer.*

•

Rotate a geometry.*

•

Add geometries to a layer.*

•

Build polygon, line, or point geometries by coordinates, angle/distance
measurements, or bearing/distance measurements.*

•

Modify the class for a selected geometry or automatically create geometries
as with a specified class.*

GPS
•

Start or stop your GPS connection (also available on the GPS tab).

•

Turn GPS NavMode on or off.
Note The GPS and Exchange groups are combined into the GPS/Exchange
group in XMap Professional.

Getting Started
Map Navigation
•

Recenter the map and zoom it in and out.

•

Grab and pan the map in any direction.

Map Tools
•

Measure linear distance and area on the map based on the units chosen in the
Display tab of the Options dialog box.

•

Get information about a location on the map. You can also right-click a
location on the map and click Info.

•

Profile a linear object on the map. You can also select the Profile tab, rightclick the linear object on the map and then click Profile.

MapShare/Portable Maps
•

Share maps, route directions, or profiles with friends, family, or associates
with MapShare using the Internet.

•

Launch the Earth Community Atlas wizard.

•

Send static maps to your iPod with Portable Maps.

Options/Help
•

Open the Options dialog box to set GPS, display, map feature, voice
navigation, 3-D, handheld export, and keyboard shortcut preferences. This is
also available in the tab area on the GPS, 3-D, and Handheld Export tabs).

•

Open the Help menu to access the XMap Help topics, Map Legend, and more.

Print
•

Print your current map screen. See the Print tab for more printing options.

•

Quick print with the current Print tab settings.

Project
•

Create, save, and/or open projects. You can also access these options on the
Map Data tab.

Redline/Sync Tools
•

Redline/mark up a GIS layer.**

•

Refresh subscription layers and send redline layers to the source database.**

•

Add all of the layers that are in the active subscription to your workspace.**

Route
•

Set route start, finish, and stop, and via points and calculate a route. You can
also access these options from the Route tab.

Undo/Redo
•

Undo/redo your last GIS edit and measure tool actions.

Notes
•

•

Not all of the toolbar features are activated by default. To modify which toolbar
items you want to view, right-click the toolbar. Toolbar options with selected
check box next to them are currently displayed on the toolbar. Click the item to
activate or inactivate it on the toolbar.
In addition to customizing which toolbar features are displayed, you can also
reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically. Just drag the vertical
27

XMap User Guide

that separates each segment to the new location (left, right, up, or
dotted bar
down). You cannot move a toolbar segment above the top-most line on the
toolbar, customize toolbar groups, or remove toolbar groups from the toolbar.

Map Legend
Map Legend
The features that display on the map may display differently depending on which
map colors you chose on the Display tab of the Options dialog box. The tables below
show the symbolization of each feature, by map color.
Notes
•

Not all features are available at all zoom levels.

•

Not all features are available in all datasets.

•

High-contrast Color features display the same as Street Color features (except
for land, which displays as black).

Routable Trail Features
Topo
Colors

Street
Colors

Description
Major Trail
Important Some trails may cross private property. Contact
the applicable trail department to ensure you have the
appropriate permissions before following a major trail. For
contact information, see Recreational Contacts.
4-wheel Drive Trail
Trail/Walkway/Foot Trail

Routable Road Features
Topo
Colors

Street
Colors

Description
Ferry Passenger
Ferry Vehicle
Interstate Highway (can also include this symbol:

)

Limited Access Road
Local Road
Major Connector, Forest Road
Minor Connector
Non Limited Access Interstate
Primary State Route
State Route (can also include this symbol:

)

Toll Road
U.S./National Route (can also include this symbol:

)

XMap User Guide
Unclassified Road
Unimproved Road

Land Cover
Topo
Colors

Street
Colors

Description
Bare Rock or Sand
Bureau of Land Management Land
Bureau of Mine Reclamation Land
Forest, evergreen
Forest, mixed
Ice or Snowfield
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 11)
Indian Reservation (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
Intermittent Water
Land
Military Area (at data zoom level 11)
Military Area (at data zoom level 2 thru 10-7)
Mine or Quarry
Parks
River/Stream
Transitional Area, Lava, Salt Flats, or Mixed Barren
Water
Wetlands

Point Features
Topo
Colors

Street
Colors

Description
Amusements
Airport (private)
Airport (commercial public)
Airport (general aviation public)
Business (Amusement, Recreation, Specialty or Department
Store)
Camping (at data zoom level 14)

Map Legend
Camping (at data zoom level 11 thru 13)
Cemetery
Educational Facility
Exit, with services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, without services (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11-7)
Exit, food (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, gas (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, lodging (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Exit, other (at data zoom levels 12 thru 17)
Fast Food
Gas
Hospital
Lodging
Metropolitan City
National Capital (data zoom level 7 thru 10)
National Capital (data zoom levels 2 thru 6)
Point of Interest (smaller black square)
Population Center
Public Service
Religious (buildings)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11)
Rest Area with Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom levels 10 thru 11)
Rest Area without Facilities (at data zoom level 12)
Restaurants (general)
Restaurants (specialty)
Small City
State Capital
Unique Natural Feature (at data zoom level 8)

XMap User Guide

Line Features
Topo
Colors

Street
Colors

Description
County Boundary
Dam
Game Management District
International Boundary
Park Boundary
Pipeline
Power Line
Railroad (Abandoned)
Railroad
Runway
State Boundary

DeLorme Atlas and Gazetteer Symbols
Symbol

Description
Developed Boat Ramp (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Developed Boat Ramp (at data zoom level 13)
Freshwater Fishing (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Freshwater Fishing (at data zoom level 13)
Hunting (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Hunting (at data zoom level 13)
Saltwater Fishing (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Saltwater Fishing (at data zoom level 13)
Undeveloped Boat Ramp (at data zoom levels 11 and 12)
Undeveloped Boat Ramp (at data zoom level 13)

Using the Toolbar
Showing/Hiding Toolbar Options
You can customize the toolbar to show the options you use most. You can also
activate toolbar options that are not turned on by default.
To modify the toolbar.
1. Right-click the toolbar.
Toolbar options with a selected check box next to them are displayed on the
toolbar.
2. Click an item to activate or inactivate it in the toolbar.

Reordering the Toolbar Options
To reposition the toolbar segments horizontally or vertically, just drag the dotted
vertical bar
that separates each segment to the new location (left, right, up, or
down). You cannot move a toolbar segment above the top line on the toolbar.

To Use the GIS Tools
There are many GIS tools available on the toolbar, including tools that allow you to
edit geometries, create redline layers, perform COGO editing, and more.
•

to add and remove layers from your
Click the Manage Layers tool
workspace, delete layers from the source database, or remove a database
reference.

•

Click the Import Layers tool
file or ArcSDE database.

•

Click the Selection tool
risk of accidental editing.

•

Click the Edit tool

•

Click the Edit Points tool

•

Click the Rotate tool

•

Click the Draw Geometries tool (
,
, or
depending on the active
layer type) to add points, lines, or polygons to a layer.

•

to place a polygon/line/point by coordinates,
Click the COGO tool
angle/distance measurements, or bearing/distance measurements.

•

,
, or
depending on the active layer
Click the Classification tools (
type) modify the classification for a selected geometry.

•

Use the Active Layer drop-down list to select a layer from your workspace as
the active layer.

to import a layer into a database from a

to highlight geometries on the map without the

to move or change the size of a geometry.
to edit points in a polygon/line layer.
to rotate a geometry.

XMap User Guide

to save all of the changes you have

•

Click the Commit Changes tool
made to the active layer.

•

Click the Undo

•

Click the Redlining tool

•

to refresh subscription layers and send
Click the Synchronizing tool
redline layers to the source database.

•

to add all of the layers that
Click the Add Synchronized Layers tool
are in the active subscription to your workspace.

•

Click the Magic Wand tool

and Redo

tools to undo/redo your last action.
to mark up a GIS layer.

to edit topological lines.

To Create New Projects
To create a new project, click the New button
on the toolbar. If you made
changes to the open project, the Save Changes dialog box opens to ask you if you
want to save your changes.
For more information, see Creating and Deleting Projects.

To Open a Project
To open an existing project:
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Open button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Open button, and then click Open Project.
If you made changes to a project that is already open, the Save Changes
dialog box opens. Note Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by
default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
The Open File dialog box opens.
2. Select the project you want to view and click Open.
Note If the project has not been migrated to the new DeLorme Docs location,
you will be prompted to migrate it. Click Migrate to create a copy of the file
in the new DeLorme Docs location. Click No to cancel. For more information
about migrating projects, see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs
Location.
For more options for opening files, see Opening a Project.

Using the Toolbar

To Migrate a Project
To migrate an existing project from C:\DeLorme Docs\Projects to C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Projects:
1. Click the arrow next to the Open button, and then click Migrate Project.

The Migrate Project dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the project you want to migrate and click Migrate.
After the migration is complete, a confirmation message appears.
3. Click Open to open the project or Close to close the message.
For more information about migrating projects, see Migrating Data to the New
DeLorme Docs Location.

To Save a Project
To save the project that is currently open:
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Save button
The Save File dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the location where you want to save the project.
If you want to rename the project, type a new name in the File Name text
box.
3. Click Save.

To Use the Map Navigation Tool
Click the Navigation tool

on the toolbar to enable Navigation mode.

•

To zoom in, click the map, hold down the left mouse button, and drag down
and right. (2-D maps only)

•

To zoom out, click the map, hold down the left mouse button, and drag up
and left. (2-D maps only)

•

To re-center the map, click the map where you want to center it.

To Print
To print a map using the current settings in the Print tab, click the Print button
on the toolbar.
For more information, see Printing a Map.

To Print the Map Screen
To print the current view as it displays on the screen, click the Print Screen button
on the toolbar.

XMap User Guide

To Share Maps
To share your current map view, a route map and directions, or a profile, click the
MapShare button

on the toolbar to open the MapShare Wizard.

MapShare lets you share maps — even 3-D maps, routes, and profiles.
For information on e-mailing maps, routes, and profiles with the MapShare Wizard,
click the Help button in the MapShare Wizard.

To Share Online With Eartha Community Atlas
To launch the Eartha Community Atlas (ECA) wizard, click the ECA button
on
the toolbar. You can also access the Eartha Community Atlas website or click here to
open the website in a new window.
See Using Eartha Community Atlas for more information.

To Send Maps to Your Portable Media Player
To send your current map view as multiple static maps to your portable media
player, click the Portable Maps button
Maps Wizard.

on the toolbar to open the Portable

For more information, click the Help button in the Portable Maps dialog box or see
the Portable Maps tutorial in the application’s Help.

To Create a Route
To set route points using the toolbar:
1. Type the location where you want to start your route in the Start text box
(next to the green Start button).
OR
and then click the location on the map
Click the green Start button
where you want to start your route.
OR
Select an address book entry, a previous location, or your current GPS
position from the Start drop-down list.
2. Type the location where you want to end your route in the Finish text box
(next to the red Finish button).
OR
and then click the location on the map
Click the red Finish button
where you want to end your route.
OR
Select an address book entry or your current GPS position from the Finish
drop-down list.
3. Optional. If you want to add a stop or via to your route, click the Stop button
or the Via button
and then click the location on the map where you
want to add or insert the stop or via. Repeat this step for each stop or via you
want to add to your route.

Using the Toolbar
Note If the Add option is selected in the Route tab, stops and vias are added
in the order they are added to the route. If the Insert option is selected in the
Route tab, stops and vias are added in the order they are approached in the
route. For more information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.
4. Click the Calculate button

Important If you have only the left map window open, the route Start, Finish, and
Stop buttons on the toolbar and on the Route tab are grayed out. To activate the
options, use the map resize tool to expose the right map window.
Note To use the current GPS location in a route, you must connect your device to
your computer and click the Start GPS button on the toolbar or on the GPS tab.
Tip Once a route is calculated, you can use the subtabs in the Route tab to view
route directions, edit a route, and more. Click the Directions subtab to view the
route directions, the Advanced subtab to display the advanced routing options, or
click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.

To Start/Stop Your GPS Connection
To start or stop your GPS connection, click the GPS button

on the toolbar.

•

If you start a connection and you are using the UMPC option or NavMode, the
GPS tab is minimized, but you can show it. For more information, see
Customizing the Interface.

•

If you start a connection and you are not using the UMPC option or NavMode,
the GPS tab area opens so you can monitor your GPS status.

Note The GPS button on the toolbar is a toggle button that lets you start your GPS
connection if the device is not active or stop the connection if it is active.

To Exchange Files with a Handheld Device
Use the Exchange button
on the toolbar (also on the GPS and Handheld
Export tabs) to exchange objects such as maps, waypoints, tracks, and routes with a
handheld device.
•

If you have enabled an Earthmate PN-Series GPS device on your computer,
click the Exchange button to open the Earthmate PN-Series GPS Exchange
dialog. You can switch to another device from this dialog.

•

If you have another GPS device, a Palm OS device, or a Pocket PC device,
click the Exchange button to open the Earthmate PN Series GPS Exchange
dialog and then click Use Other Device.

For more information on exchanging objects, see Help topics listed under Using
Handheld Devices.

XMap User Guide

To Use GPS NavMode
NavMode—a hands free full-screen view that you can view in 2-D or 3-D — is the
default view when you navigate or track with GPS. You can turn off NavMode to
display the GPS tab view.

To Turn NavMode On/Off
Click the NavMode button
indented

to turn it on or off. When the button appears

, NavMode is on.

Note The button is greyed out
playing back a GPS log file.

unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are

You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
on the toolbar and click the GPS tab.

1. Click the Options button
You can also click the Options button

on the GPS tab.

2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off, or select the check box to
turn it on.
3. Click OK.

To Grab and Pan the Map
To drag and pan the 2-D or 3-D map in any direction, click the Grab and Pan button
on the toolbar.

To Create a Profile
To create a profile:
1. Center your 2-D map on the area with the linear object you want to profile.
OR
Center the route you want to profile on the map.
2. Click the Profile button

on the toolbar.

3. Move your pointer over the map. The pointer changes from
when it passes over an object that you can profile.

4. Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile.
When the object is selected, it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in
the Profile tab area.
Note Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph. The
intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top of
the terrain profile. These lines indicate the height and distance of the
particular location. A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object
on the map.
You can also right-click a linear object or route on the map and click Profile. For
more information about profiles, see the Help topics under Profiling Linear Objects.

Using the Toolbar

To Measure Distance
Use the following steps to measure linear distances and perimeter/area on the map.
For more information, see Measuring Distance and Area.
1. Click the Measure tool

on the toolbar.

2. Click point-by-point to draw a measurement line on the map. A text box
displays next to your pointer indicating the total distance of the measurement
taken.
Note When you pass over a point in a road, measurement line, or
measurement area to which you can snap, a yellow circle defines the snap
point. Click to snap the point of the measure line to the road or measurement
object's point coordinate. Press and hold the ALT key on your keyboard to
disable snapping.
3. To end a measurement line, double-click the last point of the measurement
line. The measure line displays as a two-pixel wide yellow line and the total
length of the line displays in a label at each endpoint of the line.
4. To end a measure area, hover over the starting point until the yellow snap
circle displays and then double-click the last point to the starting point. The
perimeter measurements display.

To Get Information About a Location
Use the Information button
on the toolbar to click a point, symbol, feature,
measurement line, track, or area on the map to identify it and view detailed
information about it.
Use the following steps to get information about a particular map feature.
1. Click the Information button.
2. Click the map feature you want information for, such as a road, town,
measurement line, waypoint, track, draw symbol, or point of interest.
The Info tab opens and displays a list of information categories.
Note Descriptive information may include a name or feature type,
length/area, ZIP/Postal Code, town name, county name, state/province,
coordinates, and Standard Industrial Classification categories.
3. Click the plus sign next to each of the information categories to expand the
category to view more detailed information.
OR
Right-click in the information box and click Expand All to expand all of the
information categories. Right-click in the information box again and click
Collapse All to minimize all of the information categories.
4. Optional. Repeat steps 1–3 to get information about another location.
5. Optional. Right-click in the information box and click Print to print your map
feature information.
Notes
•

You can also get information about a location using the right-click option. Just
right-click the location and click Info.

•

The status bar (located above the tab area) displays draw object type, draw file
information, point of interest name (if applicable), street name/address,

XMap User Guide
highway, city, state/province, and ZIP/Postal Code information for the map
location that your cursor is positioned on.
•

Some map features (such as campgrounds, national scenic/historic trail
information centers, and state parks) display with a blue outline at higher data
zoom levels. The blue outline indicates that the feature has a hyperlink to its
website. To open the hyperlink, right-click the feature and then click Open
Hyperlink OR click the URL in the Info tab.

To Choose Options
To open the Options dialog box, click the Options button
on the
toolbar. Use the Options dialog box to set GPS, voice, display, map feature,
handheld, 3-D, and keyboard shortcut preferences. An Options button that opens the
Options dialog box is also available on the 3-D, Handheld Export, and GPS tabs.
To open the Options menu, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar. The following menu options are available:
•

Options—Opens the Options dialog box.

•

Tab Manager—Opens the Tab Manager dialog box where you can show or
hide individual tabs and reorder tabs.

•

UMPC Mode—Allows you to turn the default UMPC view on or off. If UMPC
mode is turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click UMPC Mode to
turn it on or off. For more information, see Using Small-screen Devices.

You can also customize your interface:
•

Show Tab Area Panel—Allows you to show or hide all the tabs. If Show All
Tabs is turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show Tab Area
Panel to show or hide the tab area.

•

Show Control Panel—Allows you to show or hide the Control Panel. If Show
Control Panel is turned on, the check box next to it is selected. Click Show
Control Panel to show or hide it.

To Add Images and Data to a GPS Location
To open the GeoTagger Wizard, where you can combine images and data with GPS
information on the map, click the GeoTagger button
information, see Getting Started with GeoTagger.

on the toolbar. For more

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Display Options Overview
The following topics explain how to use the Display options in the Options dialog box:
•

Displaying Basic Map Features

•

Customizing the Interface

•

Customizing the Map Features Preferences

•

Changing the Map Colors

•

Changing the Map Magnification Level

•

Changing How POIs Display on the Map

•

Setting Units of Measure Preferences

Customizing the Interface
You can customize the interface for your application by hiding the tab panel area and
the Control Panel. You can also turn UMPC Mode on or off.

To Customize the Interface
Click the arrow next to the Options button

on the toolbar.

•

Click Tab Manager to show or hide individual tabs or reorder tabs.

•

If the tab panel area is showing and you want to hide it, click Show Tab Area
Panel to clear the check box next to it.
OR
If the tab panel area is hidden and you want to show it, click Show Tab Area
Panel to select the check box next to it.

•

If the Control Panel is showing and you want to hide it, click Show Control
Panel to clear the check box next to it.
OR
If the Control Panel is hidden and you want to show it, click Show Control
Panel to select the check box next to it.

•

You can click UMPC Mode to turn the optimized UMPC view on or off. UMPC
Mode is on when the check box next to it is selected. For more information, see
Using UMPC and Small-screen Devices.

Notes
•

You can also use keyboard shortcuts to hide and show the tab area panel and
Control Panel and to optimize the interface for small-screen devices.

•

Your settings are saved until you change them.

Displaying Basic Map Features
You can show or hide basic map features on your map.
You can also customize map features and customize the interface.
Notes
•

If you cannot make changes to the basic preference check boxes, verify the Use
Custom Map Features check box is not selected.

XMap User Guide
•

Click Use Defaults to change the map feature settings to the default
preferences.

•

The options available depend on the datasets you are using.

To Select Basic Map Feature Preferences
Use the following steps to change the basic map feature preferences. Changes made
to the map view display almost immediately after selection.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the check box next to the map features you want to display on the
map.
OR
Clear the check box next to the map features you want to hide on the map.
•

•

Grids—The Grids option can be used to identify coordinate points on
the map. Grid lines automatically adjust for the data zoom level of
your map.

•

Parks or Reserves—Parks and Reserves are available at data zoom
level 7-0 or greater and include areas such as parks, preserves,
recreational area and public forests.
Publicly Managed Lands—Publicly Managed Lands are only available
when the Bureau of Land Management (BLM) dataset is downloaded
and installed. The feature includes areas such as lands managed
through the Bureau of Land Management and displays at all data zoom
levels.
Game Management Districts—Wildlife Management Units are only
available when the Wildlife Management Units (WMU) dataset is
downloaded and installed. The feature includes areas of managed
wildlife and game and displays at data zoom level 6-0 or greater.
USGS Quadrangle Coverage—The USGS 7.5 minute quadrangle
coverage is indicated by red lines. These display at data zoom level 80 or greater. Quadrangle names display at data zoom level 9-0 and
higher. To view quad info such as Orig Date and Quad Order ID

•

Shaded Relief—Shaded relief becomes visible at data zoom level 6-0
or greater. It simulates the effect of sun shining on terrain features
and casting shadows, providing greater depth perception of the image.
Lighter shades of gray indicate gentle terrain and darker shades
indicate steep terrain. Using shaded relief may slow down the draw
time of the map screen as you pan.
Contours—Contour lines are available at data zoom level 6-0 or
greater. Contour lines show the elevation of the land in feet or meters.
The closer the contour lines, the greater the slope. The distance
between the lines is the contour interval, which is indicated in the
Control Panel (distance units are controlled in the Options dialog box).
Land Cover—Land cover colors are available at all data zoom levels.
Colors indicate vegetation and land cover areas on the map such as
rock and sand, forests, transitional areas, and wetlands.

Customizing the Map and Tab Display

•

number (needed when purchasing quads), right-click a point within the
quad and then click Info. An information box displays in the lowerright corner of the screen.
3DTQ Region Coverage—Displays the DeLorme 3DTQ product CD
volume label, which covers each map area at data zoom level 10-0 or
greater.

•

Map Center Crosshair—The map center crosshair indicates the map
center at any data zoom level.

•

Exits—View exits on primary limited access roads, interstates, and toll
roads. Available at data zoom level 10-0 or greater.

•

One Ways—One ways display as bright green triangles on roads,
pointing toward the direction of travel (most noticeable in large cities).
They are available at data zoom level 13-0 or greater.

•

Places (Minor)—View smaller towns, suburbs, locales, and natural
features. Zoom levels vary.

•

Roads (Minor)—View secondary roads, local and rural routes, trails,
and railroads. Zoom levels vary.

•

Points of Interest
•

Major—View many different points of interest, including
recreational areas, public safety, rest areas, and more.

•

Minor—View general points of interest including educational,
technology, government, and religious buildings/locations.

•

Business (Major)—View many different travel-related points
of interest including hospitals, camping, restaurants, and more.

•

Business (Minor)—View general points of interest including
small shops and food stores, laundromats, and golfing.

•

ZIP-Postal Codes—ZIP/Postal Code boundaries display at data zoom
level 8-0 and greater, with ZIP/Postal Code labels displaying at data
zoom level 10-0 and greater.

•

Town Borders—View town borders at data zoom level 10-0 and
greater for the following states:
Arkansas

Louisiana

Mississippi

Connecticut

Maine

Missouri

Illinois

Maryland

Nebraska

Indiana

Massachusetts

Iowa

Michigan

New
Hampshire

Kansas

Minnesota

New
Jersey
New York

North
Carolina

Vermont

North
Dakota

Washington
DC

Ohio
Pennsylvania
Rhode
Island

Virginia

West
Virginia
Wisconsin

South
Dakota

•

County Borders—View shaded outlines of U.S. counties at data zoom
levels 7-0 or greater.

•

International Labels—View country labels at data zoom levels 0-0
through 4-0.

•

Urban Area Color—Displays a shaded map area in populated regions
at data zoom levels 5-0.

XMap User Guide
3. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog
box.

Customizing the Map Feature Preferences
You can change the display of a wide variety of map features so you can customize
your map to meet your specific needs. You can even customize which POIs display.

To Set Custom Map Features
This is an advanced feature that lets you create a specific, custom set of map
features for your map display from hundreds of options. Note that changes are not
visible until you click the Done button.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Map Features tab.
3. Select the Use Custom Map Features check box and then click Customize
Features to display the custom options.
Note Custom map feature selections override selections in the basic features
list.
4. To quickly search for a particular type of feature, type the name of the item in
the Search text box.
A list of matching keywords displays and corresponding feature types are
listed in the Search Results window. Results for the number of keywords
and types found also display.
A selected check box indicates the feature displays on the map.
•

Select/clear the individual feature check box to show or hide that
feature.

•

Click the small None button to the right of the Search Results
window to show none of the features listed.

•

Click the small All button to the right of the Search Results window
to display all of the features listed.

•

Click Only to display only those features listed in the Search Results
window.

•

Click Exclude to display all features except those listed in the Search
Results window.

5. To use the map feature tree to select which POIs display on the map, click the
plus signs to expand the individual branches. A selected check box indicates
the feature type displays on the map.
Note Some branches expand further than others. Selecting/clearing a check
box at a certain branch of the tree shows/hides all the items below that level.

•

Select/clear the individual map feature check box to show or hide that
feature.

•

Click All to select all map features in the program.

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
•

Click None to select none of the types in the program.
Note A small number of features cannot be turned off. They are part
of the base map display and cannot be changed. This is why certain
levels on the tree remain unavailable (appear dimmed or gray).

6. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
•

When you save the current project, the following feature preferences are saved
in reference to map features:
o

Major map features preferences

Individual custom feature preferences

When you create a new project, the current map settings are used. Click Use
Defaults to return to the default settings.

Changing the Map Colors
When you use a laptop computer while traveling, it can be difficult to see the map
display on your screen. This can be especially true at night or on a bright sunny day.
Changing your default map colors to high-contrast map colors can make your map
display easier to see.

To Change the Map Colors
Use the following steps to change the map display.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. From the Map Colors drop-down list, select High-Contrast Colors to make
the map display darker for improved in-vehicle visibility, Street Colors to
emphasize streets and highways on the map, or Topo Colors to emphasize
contours, parks and public lands, land cover, and so on.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.

Changing the Map Magnification Level
If you want to change the size of the map image, but not change the degree of
geographic detail on the map, use the magnification settings in the Options dialog
box.

To Change the Map Magnification
Use the following steps to change the map magnification.
1. Click the Options button
OR

on the toolbar.

XMap User Guide
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select a magnification percentage (50%, 75%, 100%, 125%, 150%,
175%, or 200%) from the Magnification drop-down list.
Note Although the size of the image changes, the degree of geographic
detail does not.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.

Changing How POIs Display on the Map
You can change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols display on the map.

To Change the Data Zoom Level for Large POI Symbols
Use the following steps to change the data zoom level at which large POI symbols
are displayed on the map.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the data zoom level from the Large Symbols At drop-down list.
4. Click OK to accept the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the change and keep working in the Options dialog box.
Notes
•

The appearance of a POI many change at different data zoom levels.

•

The number of points of interest that displays is dependent on the basic map
features you selected on the Map Features tab in the Options dialog box. For
more information, see Displaying Basic Map Features.

This table shows the actions that may happen if you display major and minor POIs.
If you
view
large
symbols
at data
zoom
level...

You will see
the
following
information
at data
zoom level
13-0

You will see
the
following
information
at data
zoom level
14-0

You will see
the
following
information
at data
zoom level
15-0

You will see
the
following
information
at data
zoom level
16-0

You will see
the
following
information
at data
zoom level
17-0

names and
small
square
symbols

name of
the POI
and the
large
symbol

small

name of

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
squares
only

the POI
and a small
square
symbol

the POI
and the
large
symbol

N/A

small
square
symbols
only

name of
the POI
and a small
square
symbol

name of
the POI
and the
large
symbol

17, 18,
19, or
20

N/A

small
square
symbols
and some
names of
POIs

name of
the POI
and a small
square
symbol

name of
the POI
and the
large
symbol

Setting Units of Measure Preferences
You can change the units of measure used to represent how coordinate formats,
distance, datum, and bearing listings display. Changing these preferences affects
how units of measure display in several areas of the program: such as on the map
and in the Control Panel.
As you change your unit of measure preferences, a description of each choice
displays in the information box (in the center of the Options dialog box) immediately
after you select it.

To Change the Coordinate Preferences
Changing the coordinate preferences affects the:
•

Coordinates display on the Control Panel.

•

Coordinate MapNotes.

•

Grid label display, if Grids are selected in Map Features.

•

Any other place where coordinates display or print.

Use the following steps to change how coordinate measurement units display.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the coordinate display format from the Coordinates drop-down list.
•

Degrees

•

Degrees, Minutes

•

Deg, Min, Sec

•

UTM/UPS (Universal Transverse Mercator/Universal Polar
Stereographic)

XMap User Guide
•

MGRS (Military Grid Reference System)

•

USNG (United States National Grid)

•

SPCS (State Plane Coordinate System)
Note When you select SPCS, an additional drop-down box displays for
Zone. Select the zone from the list.

3. Select the datum from the Datum drop-down list.
•

WGS84 (World Geodetic System of 1984)

•

NAD27 (North American Datum of 1927), which also includes OOH
(Old Hawaiian) Datum when in Hawaii

•

NAD83 (North American Datum of 1983)

4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog
box.
Notes
•

UTM/UPS and MGRS coordinate systems are best used with NAD27 datum.
95% of the USGS quads containing UTM grid lines uses the NAD27 datum,
which is helpful if you are comparing a map generated from your mapping
application to a USGS map.

•

If the USNG coordinate system is not matched with NAD83 datum, a warning
message displays (unless you selected the Do Not Show This Message Again
option).

•

If the UTM/UPS or MGRS coordinate system is mismatched to WGS84 datum,
a warning message displays (unless you selected the Do Not Show This
Message Again option).

•

The State Plane Coordinate System originally used NAD27 datum and was
measured in statute miles. Some states have updated their systems to
WGS84 datum and/or kilometers. If you are working with a site map, verify
the datum, distance measures, and zone used and match them in your
application.

To Change the Distance Preferences
Distance preferences affect how distance and areas display throughout the program.
Use the following steps to change the measurement units for distance and area.
1. Click the Options button

on the toolbar and then click Options.

2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the measurement from the Measurements drop-down list.
•

Statute Miles (statute feet are used for small distances)

•

Kilometers (meters are used for small distances)

•

Nautical Miles/Feet (statute feet are used for small distances)

•

Nautical Miles/Meters (meters are used for small distances)

3. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog
box.

Customizing the Map and Tab Display

To Change the Bearing Preferences
Bearing listings are created as the result of creating route directions in the Route tab
or from an Advanced (Distance From) search in the Find tab. Bearing refers to the
compass direction of a given object measured clockwise in degrees (for example,
30°) or nearest compass point (for example, NNE) and indicated from True North or
Magnetic North.
Notes:
•

Magnetic declination is the difference in degrees between True North and
Magnetic North at a specific location.

•

The bearing setting does not affect map appearance.

Use the following steps to change the bearing.
1. Click the Options button

on the toolbar and then click Options.

2. Click the Display tab.
3. Select the bearing from the Bearing drop-down list.
•

True North—The direction to the north pole. This is the default setting.

•

Magnetic North—The direction that a compass needle points.

3. Click OK to commit the change and exit the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to commit the change and keep working in the Options dialog
box.

Resizing the Map and Tab Areas
You can horizontally and vertically resize the primary (right) map, secondary (left)
map, tab area, and overview map with the map and tab area resize tools.
Notes
•

The tab and overview map window size does not change when you choose
another tab.

•

Some tab areas that provide search results automatically resize depending on
the number of results.

•

You can also hide the tab area panel.

To Resize the Map and Tab Area Using the Drag Method
Use the drag method to horizontally or vertically resize these areas.
1. Point to the frame area between the tab and overview map windows. The
pointer becomes a
.
OR
Point to the horizontal edge of the tab/main map window. The pointer
becomes a

2. Drag to resize.
3. To cancel the resize while dragging, press the ESC key on your keyboard. The
size just prior to this resize is restored.

XMap User Guide

To Resize the Map Area Using the Resize Tools
The map resize tool runs perpendicular to the tab area. If the secondary and primary
maps are both displaying, the resize tool is the bar that separates them. When the
bar is moved all the way to the left of the map, only the primary map displays. When
the bar is moved all the way to the right of the map, only the secondary map
displays.
There are several methods you can use to resize the map area:
•

Drag the bar left to expose the area of the primary map you want to see.

•

Drag the bar right to expose the area of the secondary map you want to see.

•

Click the right arrow on the resize tool once to move the secondary map 1/4
of the screen width. You can repeat this step until the primary map is no
longer visible.

•

Click the left arrow on the resize tool once to move the primary map 1/4 of
the screen width. You can repeat this step until the secondary map is no
longer visible.

•

Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the secondary map.

•

Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the primary map.

•

Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to display an equal
percentage of both the secondary and primary maps.

To Resize the Tab and Map Area Using the Resize Tools
There are two tab area resize tools. The horizontal resize tool is located above the
tab area and lets you adjust the height of the tab area. The vertical resize tool is
located between the tab area and the overview map lets you resize the width of the
tab area.
Using the Horizontal Resize Tool

•

Drag the horizontal bar up/down to expose the tab area you want to see.

•

Click the up arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally increase
the tab height. You can repeat this step until the top of the tab area is flush
with the bottom of the compass rose in the control panel.

•

Click the down arrow on the horizontal resize tool once to incrementally
decrease the tab height. You can repeat this step until only the tab names
display.

•

Double-click the bar to the right of the up arrow to expand the tab height to
its maximum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode or higher).
Note If the tab area is below the default mode, double-click the bar to return
the tab height to its default percentage.

•

Double-click the bar to the left of the down arrow to decrease the tab height
to its minimum percentage (if the tab height is at the default mode).
Note If the tab area is above the default mode, double-click the bar to return
the tab height to its default percentage.

•

Double-click the bar between the up and down arrows to return the tab height
to its default view.

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
Using the Vertical Resize Tool
•

Drag the vertical bar left to expose the area of the overview map you want to
see.

•

Drag the vertical bar right to expose the tab area you want to see.

•

Click the right arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase
the tab width. You can repeat this stop until the overview map is no longer
exposed.

•

Click the left arrow on the vertical resize tool once to incrementally increase
the width of the overview map. You can repeat this step until the tab area is
no longer exposed.

•

Double-click the bar above the right arrow to show only the tab area.

•

Double-click the bar below the left arrow to show only the overview map.

•

Double-click the bar between the right and left arrows to return the tab and
overview maps to their default views.

Viewing Two Maps at the Same Time
The split-window lets you view two maps at the same time.
The maps interact as follows:
•

If you are viewing both the right and left maps at different data zoom levels,
a box (or lines, depending on the current data zoom level) displays on the
map that is zoomed out the furthest. The box/lines indicate the area that is in
view on the opposite map.

•

If you are viewing the right and left maps at the same data zoom level but
they are not equally represented on the screen (50/50), a box (or lines)
displays on the map that is covering the larger amount of screen area. The
box/lines indicate the area that is in view on the opposite map.

•

Both windows are centered on the same coordinate position. Panning or
rotating in one map causes the same action on both maps.

•

The left map window has its own zoom level controls. You can change the
zoom level of the left map without affecting the zoom level in the right map
window. However, after you adjust the zoom level in the left map window, the
zoom tools on the Control Panel incrementally adjust the map. For example, if
the left map is at zoom level 6-0 and the right map at zoom level 8-0, and
you click the Zoom Out 1 tool, the left map displays at zoom level 5-0 and the
right map at 7-0.

•

The overview map in the tab area is always associated with the right map
window.

•

Other tab functionality may be affected by use of the split-screen function, as
follows:

Draw—The line and polygon draw tools work in either map window.
highlights the same draw object on both maps
The Select tool
and you can then manipulate both objects at the same time. Draw files
are created for both windows in the same project.

Route—You can create routes only in the right window; routes display
in both windows.

XMap User Guide

GPS—You can log with GPS in the right map window; log playback
displays in both windows.

3-D—The 3-D map always displays in the left map window.

Showing or Hiding Tabs
The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by showing or hiding
individual tabs. You can access Tab Manager:
•

During installation

•

After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu

•

From the Start menu

Notes
•

If you use Tab Manager while the program is open, you must exit and restart
the program to view the tab changes.

•

To show or hide the entire tab area panel, click the arrow next to the Options
on the toolbar. If the tab area is showing and you want
button
to hide it, click Show Tab Area Panel to clear the check box next to it. If the
tab area is hidden and you want to show it, click Show Tab Area Panel to
select the check box.

To Show Individual Tabs
Use the following steps to show tabs using Tab Manager.
on the
1. Open XMap, click the arrow next to the Options button
toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>XMap...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Select the check box next to each tab you want to display in the program.
Note Click Default to show all the tabs in the program in the default order.
3. Click OK.
4. Exit XMap.
5. Open XMap.

To Hide Individual Tabs
Hiding tabs may significantly increase the startup speed of XMap.
Use the following steps to hide tabs using Tab Manager.
on the
1. Open XMap, click the arrow next to the Options button
toolbar, and select Tab Manager from the menu.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>XMap...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Clear the check box next to each tab you want to hide in the program.
OR
Click Minimum. Only the required tabs will display in the program.
Note Find, Map Data, Info, GIS, and NetLink are required tabs and cannot be
hidden.
52

Customizing the Map and Tab Display
3. Click OK.
4. Exit XMap.
5. Open XMap.

Importing/Exporting Tab Manager Preferences
Tab Manager includes a feature that allows you to share your custom tab manager
preferences with other XMap users.

To Import Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to import another user's Tab Manager preferences.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>XMap...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the location of the configuration (preferences) file, select it, and
then click Open.
Tab Manager displays with the preferences saved in the imported
configuration file.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.
5. Exit your application.
6. Open your application.

To Export Tab Manager Preferences
Use the following steps to export your Tab Manager preferences as a configuration
file.
1. If your application is open, click the arrow next to the Options button
on the toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>XMap...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Tab Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Type a name for the configuration (preferences) file in the File Name text
box and then click Save. Configuration files are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Configuration.
4. Click OK to close Tab Manager.

Reordering the Tabs
The Tab Manager feature allows you to customize your program by reordering tabs.
You can access Tab Manager:
•

During installation

•

After installation using the Tab Manager option in the Options menu

XMap User Guide
•

From the Start menu

Note If you use Tab Manager to make changes while the program is open, you must
exit and restart the program to view the tab changes.

To Reorder the Tabs
Use the following steps to reorder the tabs with Tab Manager.
on the
1. Open XMap, click the arrow next to the Options button
toolbar and click Tab Manager.
OR
From the Start menu, point to Programs> DeLorme>XMap...>Tools, and
then click Tab Manager.
2. Click the tab you want to reorder to highlight it.
3. Click the up arrow
position.

or the down arrow

to move the tab to the new

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each tab you want to reorder.
5. Optional. Click Default to cancel the reordering process and use the default
tab order (showing all available tabs).
6. Click OK.
7. Exit XMap.
8. Open XMap.

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Your application comes with the following DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes:
•

3-D Navigation

•

Desktop Mapping

•

In-vehicle Navigation

You cannot edit DeLorme schemes; however, you can create custom schemes that
you can edit. You can create as many additional custom schemes as you need.

To Select a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
Use the following steps to select a keyboard shortcut scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click Apply to activate the selected scheme.

Creating a New Custom Scheme
You can create a custom keyboard shortcut scheme for different program uses.

To Create a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to create a custom scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click New.
The Scheme drop-down list is completed with Custom Scheme# (where #
indicates the incremental number for the number of custom scheme files you
have created).
Note If you want to rename the new scheme file, click File, click Rename,
and then type a new name in the Scheme text box. Press the ENTER key on
your keyboard when finished. The new name displays.
4. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the commands that are listed.

Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
There are three DeLorme keyboard shortcut schemes that you cannot edit; however,
you can create a custom scheme that you can edit with Keyboard Shortcuts tab in
the Options dialog box.

XMap User Guide

To Assign Keyboard Shortcuts in a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to edit a custom scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select a custom scheme from the Scheme drop-down list.
Note You cannot edit DeLorme schemes.
4. Select the List option (if it is not already selected).
5. Select the command grouping you want to assign shortcuts to from the
Commands drop-down list. If you want assign shortcuts to several
groupings, select All Commands.
6. Click to select the command you want to assign a shortcut to.
7. Click inside the Customize Shortcut text box.
8. Press the shortcut key combination on your keyboard that you want to assign
for that command.
9. Click Assign. The shortcut for that command changes to the combination you
assigned and displays as "pending."
10. Repeat the steps for each command you want to assign.
11. Click Apply to save the changes.
OR
Click OK to save the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Cancel to cancel your pending changes and close the Options dialog
box.
Notes
•

You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you want
to sort by (Group, Command, or Shortcut).

•

You cannot change the following keyboard shortcut combinations:
o

ALT+F4 (Close Window)

F1 (Help)

ALT+F1 (Help Menu)

SHIFT+F10 (Context Menu)

CTRL+C (Copy)

CTRL+V (Paste)

CTRL+X (Cut)

CTRL+Y (Redo)

CTRL+Z (Undo)

ALT+M (Set Focus on Map)

a. You cannot use the following keys when assigning shortcuts:

Windows Key

Application Key

Print Screen

Using Keyboard Shortcuts
o

Scroll Lock

Sleep

Pause/Break

Enter

Caps Lock

Num Lock

Spacebar

Insert

Backspace

Multi-media Keys

b. You cannot assign a letter or number on its own. For example, you cannot assign
a keyboard shortcut with the number 3; you must use a modifier (such as CTRL
or ALT) with letters and numbers.

Customizing a DeLorme Scheme
You cannot edit DeLorme schemes; however, you can create a copy of a DeLorme
scheme that you can modify to fit your needs.

To Customize a DeLorme Scheme
Use the following steps to customize a DeLorme scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the DeLorme scheme you want to copy from the Scheme drop-down
list.
4. Click File and then click Copy.
The active scheme changes to Copy of Desktop Mapping#, Copy of In-vehicle
Navigation#, Copy of 3-D Navigation#, etc. (depending on the DeLorme
scheme you chose to copy).
5. Assign keyboard shortcuts for the copied scheme.
6. Optional. Rename the scheme.

Renaming a Custom Scheme
Custom schemes can be renamed to whatever name you choose. You cannot rename
DeLorme schemes.

To Rename a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to rename a custom scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.

XMap User Guide
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to rename from the Scheme drop-down
list.
4. Click File and then click Rename.
The Scheme text box becomes active.
5. Type the name in the Scheme text box.
6. Click Apply. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard. The new name displays.
OR
Press the ESC key on your keyboard to keep the old name.

Deleting a Custom Scheme
Once you have created a custom scheme, you can delete it at any time. You cannot
delete DeLorme schemes.

To Delete a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to delete a custom keyboard shortcut scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the custom scheme you want to delete from the Scheme drop-down
list.
4. Click File and then click Delete.
5. Click Yes when asked if you are sure you want to delete the scheme.

Importing a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.

To Import a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to import a custom scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Click File and then click Import.
The Import Scheme File dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the location where you saved the .keyscheme file, select it, and
then click Open.
The imported file is now your active scheme.

Using Keyboard Shortcuts

Exporting a Custom Scheme
You can share their keyboard shortcut schemes with other DeLorme users.

To Export a Custom Scheme
Use the following steps to export a custom scheme.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the scheme you want to export from the Scheme drop-down list.
4. Click File and then click Export.
The Export Scheme File dialog box opens.
5. Type a name in the File Name text box, browse to the location where you
want to save the .keyscheme file, and then click Save.

Searching For Commands
The Keyboard Shortcuts tab in the Options dialog box has a Search feature that lets
you search for a specific command or command group.
Note You can sort the command list view at any time by clicking the heading you
want to sort by (Group, Command, or Shortcut).

To Search For a Command or Command Group
Use the following steps to search for a command or command group.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the Search option.
4. In the Commands text box, begin typing the name of the command or
command group you are searching for. As you type, the list box under the
Commands text box displays word matches.

Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a Scheme
The Reference Card option in the Keyboard Shortcuts tab lets you view a complete
list of all of the scheme's shortcut keys.

To View a List of Shortcut Keys
Use the following steps to view a list of shortcut keys for a scheme.
1. Click the Options button
OR

on the toolbar.

XMap User Guide
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
3. Select the scheme that contains the shortcut keys you want to view from the
Scheme drop-down list.
4. Optional. To sort the list view, click the heading you want to sort by (Group,
Command, or Shortcut).
5. Click Reference Card.
The list displays in your default Web browser and is sorted by the same
column you selected in step 3.
6. Optional. Print the list from your Web browser.
Tips for printing a reference card from your Web browser

•

Use the Print Preview functionality in your Web browser to see if the list will
display as you want it to. If you do not like the way the list looks in the
preview (for example, the list prints without grid lines in the table or does not
print in color), change the advanced print settings in your Web browser.

•

If you want to remove the header and footer text from the printout, from the
File menu, select Page Setup. Remove the text and the header and footer
text boxes and then click OK.

•

Changes made to the browser's advanced print settings and page setup affect
the printing of all Web pages.

Using Projects
Map Data Overview
XMap lets you save all of the work that you have done as a single project file so you
can open it again later. You can create various map views and save each in a
different project.

What is a Project?
A project includes the current GIS workspace, map center coordinates, the current
data zoom level, the current magnification, rotation, preferences, and links to routes
or draw layers you have added to it.
As you create routes, draw, and GIS layers, they are added to the currently selected
project. Projects are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Each associated file is saved in its respective folder in the DeLorme Docs directory.
For example, a draw layer is saved in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Draw.

Can I Reuse Draw Layers and Routes in Other Projects?
After you create routes or add your own roads, you may not want to do all of the
work again in another project. You can share routes and draw layers between
projects using the Add button on the Map Data tab.

Can I Send Routes or Draw Layers to Another XMap User?
You can package projects, including their routes and draw layers, into one transfer
file for convenience. The transfer file facilitates e-mailing, copying project
information to other computers, and copying projects between DeLorme programs.
You can use MapShare to share maps, routes, or profiles with non-XMap users. For
more information, see To Share Maps.

The DeLorme Docs folder for all files except NetLink downloads is located in
the My Documents (Windows XP) or Documents (Windows Vista) folder under
your user name.

•

XMap User Guide
version of XMap or in Topo USA or XMap, keep both files. Eventually, all DeLorme
programs will be moved to the new file system.
Because all new information you add to a project will be saved to the new file
location—even if you open it from the old location, we strongly recommend that you
migrate your files. If you do not, you could have project data in two DeLorme Docs
locations; your project will work correctly, but your data will not all be in the same
location.

Migrate–The data in the NetLink Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders
was migrated to their new DeLorme Docs locations.

•

Don't Migrate–The migration was cancelled and any data in the NetLink
Downloads, Symbols, and GPSLogs folders was not migrated. You will not be
prompted to migrate again.

•

Try Again Later–Cancels the migration, but you are prompted to migrate the
next time you open XMap. You will be prompted each time you open the
program until you select Migrate or Don't Migrate.

Using Projects
OR
If a file with the same name already exists in the new DeLorme Docs location,
the Confirm Link to Existing File dialog box opens. Go to step 3.
3. Click Link to replace the project link to the existing file in the new location
and then go to step 4.
OR
Click Link All to replace any project links to existing files in the new location
and then go to step 4.
OR
Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it
with a different name.
OR
Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration
that has occurred up to this point.
4. In the Migration Completed dialog box, click OK to open the migrated project.
Note If there is a problem with the migration, a message will notify you of
any corrective action you need to take.

To Directly Migrate a Project
Use the following steps to migrate a project at any time.
on the toolbar and then click
1. Click the arrow next to the Open button
Migrate Project.
OR
Click the Map Data tab, click File, and then click Migrate Project.
The Migrate Project dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the project you want to migrate, click the project, and then click
Migrate.
3. The Migration Completed dialog box opens. Go to step 5.
OR
If a file with the same name already exists in the new DeLorme Docs location,
the Confirm Link to Existing File dialog box opens. Go to step 4.
4. Click Link to replace the project link to the existing file in the new location
and then go to step 5.
OR
Click Link All to replace any project links to existing files in the new location
and then go to step 5.
OR
Click Save Copy to maintain the project link to the current file and save it
with a different name.
OR
Click Cancel to stop the migration process and roll back any file migration
that has occurred up to this point.
5. In the Migration Completed dialog box, click Open to open the migrated
project or Close to close the dialog box and return to your last active project.
Note If there is a problem with the migration, a message will notify you of
any corrective action you need to take.

XMap User Guide

Managing Data
Adding Data and Imagery to XMap
XMap is compatible with a variety of DeLorme datasets and imagery formats. You
may have some of these datasets installed on your hard drive, or you may access
the data on a DVD.
Whether the data is on a DVD or saved on your hard drive, you can choose to add
the data to current and future projects or only the current project.
Notes
•

When adding third-party imagery formats, such as MrSID (.sid) and GeoTIFF
(.tif), a DeLorme .adc file is automatically created in the directory where the
data resides. This file is a connection between the original data and the
DeLorme application.

•

When you add MrSID or GeoTIFF to future projects, you can select the .adc
file to automatically add the data. If you select the .sid or .tif extension, an
.adc file with the same name is created and you are prompted to overwrite
the file name if it exists.

Adding Data to Current and Future Projects
Data that is in current and future projects is considered "base data." If your data is
saved on your hard drive, you must update the Base Data settings in the Map Data
tab to include that data in your current and future projects.
Note If you are accessing data from a DVD, your data is added to every project you
create while the DVD is in the DVD drive and it is not necessary for you to follow the
steps below.
Use the following steps to add data to current and future projects.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Create a new or open an existing project.
3. Click Data and then click Base Data.
The Data Locations dialog box opens listing each of the data sources on your
system.
4. Click Add, select the hard drive location where your saved your data from the
Browse for Folder dialog box, and click OK. The OK button is enabled when
you select a folder containing a file that contains the .adc file of the map data
being added.
Note Your hard drive location may already be listed in the Data Location
dialog box, but the check box for that location might not be selected. Ensure
all of the data locations you want to display in your current and future
projects have selected check boxes.
5. Click Done.
Adding Data to the Current Project
You can choose to add data to only the current project if the data is saved on your
hard drive. Any data on a DVD in your DVD drive displays in your projects as long as
the DVD is in the drive.
Use the following steps to add data to the current project.
1. Click the Map Data tab.

Using Projects
2. If the project you want to add data to is not displaying, open the project.
Note To verify the project you want is displaying, check the title bar. The
project name displays directly after the product name.
3. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the folder where the file you want to add is located and click the
file to select it.
5. Select the map you want to add the file to (primary, secondary, or both) from
the Add To drop-down list.
6. Click Add. The file is added to the current project under the selected map.
Note If you add a file to a project and later update the file, the file is
updated in every project you have added to.
7. Save your project. Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Notes
•

For information about migrating data to XMap 6, see Migrating Data to the New
DeLorme Docs Location.

•

Select the check box next to a file to display it. Clear the check box to hide it.

•

and Move to Secondary Map
Use the Move to Primary Map
move datasets from one map to the other.

buttons to

Adding/Removing Base Data
Use the Base Data function in the Map Data tab to modify the default map data
source(s) for your current and future projects.
To Add Base Data
Use the following steps to add base data to your current and future projects.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Create a new or open an existing project.
3. Click Data and then click Base Data.
The Data Locations dialog box opens and lists each of the data sources on
your system.
4. Select the check box next to the data source you want to use as a data
source for your current and future projects.
AND/OR
Click Add, select a data folder from the Browse for Folder dialog box, and
click OK.
5. Click Done.
To Remove Base Data
Use the following steps to remove base data from your current and future projects.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Create a new or open an existing project.
3. Click Data and then click Base Data.
The Data Locations dialog box opens and lists each of the data sources on
your system.
4. Click to select the data source you want to remove from your current and
future projects. Click Remove. Click OK when the confirmation message

XMap User Guide
displays. The base data is removed from the list.
OR
Clear the check box next to the base data you want to remove. The base data
is kept in the list, but is removed from the current and future projects.
5. Click Done.

Setting Data as Routing Data
The first dataset added to your project is the default routing dataset; however, not
all datasets support road and direct routing. If you are using more than one dataset
in XMap, you can determine which dataset to use for routing.
To Set Data to be Used as Routing Data
Use the following steps to assign a dataset for routing.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
In the Primary Map window, the dataset that is currently set to be used for
to the left of the dataset name.
routing displays the routing icon
2. Under Primary Map, highlight the dataset you want to assign as your routing
dataset.
3. Click Data and then click Set as Routing Data.
displays next to the
The routing data is updated and the routing icon
dataset highlighted in step 2.
OR
Right-click the selected dataset and click Set as Routing Data.
displays next to the
The routing data is updated and the routing icon
dataset highlighted in step 2.

Viewing Data from NetLink
When you use NetLink to download imagery and data, the dataset is automatically
listed as base data. Downloaded imagery is saved by default in saved in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Downloads. If you purchased a DVD, you can add your imagery
and data to your current and future projects by adding it as base data.
Note Not all data displays at all data zoom levels.
To View Imagery
Use the following steps to view imagery.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Primary Map and/or Secondary Map (depending on the map window
you want to use to view the dataset), click the plus sign next to the dataset.
3. Double-click the file name.
The imagery displays on the map(s).

ADP Data
If you have an ADP (Aerial Data Packet) dataset from a previous version of a
DeLorme application, you still have access to it.
To Designate Which ADP Layer Displays on the Map
Once the dataset is listed in the Map Data tab, you can designate which layer you
want to display on the map. For example, an ADP dataset may consist of DOQQ data
and Sat 10 data. If you select both of these, the last check box you select is the data
that displays on the map.
Use the following steps to designate which data layer to display on the map.
66

Using Projects
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Primary Map and/or Secondary Map (depending on the map window
you want to use to view the dataset), click the plus sign next to ADP
Dataset.
Each of your ADP datasets display.
3. Click the plus sign next to the ADP location.
The contents of the dataset display.
4. If the check box next to the data layer you want to display on the map is
selected, clear the check box and then select it again. The data layer displays
on the map.
OR
If the check box next to the data layer you want to display is cleared, select
the check box. The data layer displays on the map.

Managing Projects
Creating and Deleting Projects
You can create different data configurations and save them in separate projects.
To Create a New Project
When you create a new project, all of the data selected as your base data is
available in the new project. For more information, see Adding/Removing Base Data.
Use the following steps to create a new project.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click File and then click New.
A new untitled project opens, using the last map view as the default view.
Untitled # displays in the title bar after the product name.
OR
To name the file and save it, click File and then click Save As. Type the
name in the File Name text box and then click Save.
Note Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
To Delete a Project
Use the following steps to delete a project.
1. On your computer, browse to the location of the project you want to delete.
Note Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects. Projects created in XMap 5.x or earlier are
stored in the DeLorme Docs folder on the root of your C drive. For more
information, see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs Location.
2. Select the file from the file list and then click the Delete button on the
toolbar or press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the file in the file list and click Delete.
Tip You can open a project to verify it is the one you want to delete. For more
information, see Opening a Project.

Opening a Project
You can open projects created in all versions of XMap.
To Open a Project

XMap User Guide
Use the following steps to open a project.
1. Open a project from the toolbar.
OR
Click the Map Data tab, click File, and then click Open.
The Open File dialog box opens.
Note If you made changes to a project that is already open, the Save
Changes dialog box opens. Note Projects have .xmp extensions and are
saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
2. Click the project and then click Open.
The last saved map view for that project displays.
OR
Double-click the project. The last saved map view for that project displays.
Note If the project has not been migrated to the new DeLorme Docs location,
you will be prompted to migrate it. Click Migrate to create a copy of the file
in the new DeLorme Docs location. Click No to cancel. For more information
about migrating projects, see Migrating Data to the New DeLorme Docs
Location.

Saving a Project
Use the Map Data tab to save each of your projects quickly and easily using one of
the following methods:
•

•

Click File and then click Save or click the Save button

If you have not saved the project before, the Save File dialog box
opens. Type a file name in the File Name text box and click Save.

If you have saved the project before, the Save dialog box opens. All of
the changes made to the current project display as a check list. Select
the check box next to each change you want to save and clear the
check box next to each change you do not want to save. Click Yes to
save the selected changes, click No to save the file without the
changes, or click Cancel to cancel the saving process.

Click File and then click Save As.
The Save File dialog box opens. Type a file name in the File Name text box
and click Save.

You can also click the Save button

on the toolbar.

Adding/Removing Files in a Project
As you create new GIS layers, routes, draw layers, XData datasets, and so on, or
need to add more datasets to the Map Data tab, they are added to the current
project.
To Add Files to a Project
Use the following steps to add specific files to a particular project.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. If the project you want to add files to is not displaying, open the project.
The contents of the current project display in the primary map window on the
right side of the dialog area.
Note To verify the correct project is displaying, check the title bar. The
project name displays directly after the product name.

Using Projects
3. To add a new route or draw file, click Data, click New, and then click Draw
File or Route File.
A new draw or route file is added to your project.
OR
To add an existing route, draw, .adc, .dcf, .tif, .sid, .txt, or .dds file:
a. Click Data and then click Add.
The Add Data to Maps dialog box opens.
b. Browse to the folder where the file you want to add is located and click
to select it.
c. Select the map you want to add the file to (primary, secondary, or
both) from the Add To drop-down list.
Notes
•

.adc, .txt, .tif, and .sid files are the only files you can add to
both the primary and secondary maps.

•

.sid and .tiff/.tif files must contain spatial reference information
to add them. If they do not, an error message displays and you
must use a third-party application to specify the spatial
reference information.

d. Click Add.
The file is added to the current project under the selected map.
Note If you add a file to a project and then edit and save it later, the
file is updated in every project you have added it to. This does not
apply to raster property settings for .sid and .tiff/.tif data.
4. Save the project. Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
To Remove Files in a Project
Use the following steps to add or delete specific files in a particular project.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. If the project you want to remove files from is not displaying, open the
project.
The contents of the current project display in the primary map window on the
right side of the dialog area.
Note To verify the correct project is displaying, check the title bar. The
project name displays directly after the product name.
3. To remove a file, select that file from the project list on the Map Data tab and
.
then click the Remove button
Note This does not delete the file; it removes it from the selected project.
4. Save the project. Projects have .xmp extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Notes
•

Projects created in XMap 5.x or earlier are stored in the DeLorme Docs folder
on the root of your C drive. For more information, see Migrating Data to the
New DeLorme Docs Location.

•

Select the check box next to a file to display it. Clear the check box to hide it.

•

and Move to Secondary Map
Use the Move to Primary Map
move datasets from one map to the other.

buttons to

Renaming a Project
69

XMap User Guide
Projects are untitled when you first add them to XMap. When you save the map, you
can accept the default name or give it a specific name. When you have many
different projects and are trying to locate a specific map view, you may find it more
helpful to rename the project.
To Rename a Project
Use the following steps to rename a project.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. If the project you want to add/delete files for is not displaying, open the
project.
The contents of the current project display in the Primary Map window on the
right side of the dialog area.
Note To verify the correct project is displaying, check the title bar. The
project name displays directly after the product name.
3. Click File and then click Save As.
The Save File dialog box opens.
4. Type the name in the text box and then click Save.
You now have two files; one with the original name and one with the new
name.

Using Transfer Files
Using Transfer Files Overview
This section describes how to create, import, and e-mail a transfer file. You can
package projects, including their routes, draw layers, and other contents, into one
transfer file for convenience. The transfer file facilitates e-mailing, copying project
information to other computers, and copying projects between DeLorme programs.
Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data.

Creating Transfer Files
A project and its contents can be packaged into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mailing or copying.
You can create a transfer file with or without hyperlinked file attachments. When you
create a transfer file with hyperlinked files, you have the option of saving the
common directory structure of the hyperlinked files. Saving the directory structure of
common files can be helpful when you are sharing and updating transfer files.
Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data.
To Create a Transfer File
Use the following steps to create a transfer file.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Open the project you want to create as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
4. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
5. Click Create.
Your file is created and saved in the specified location.

Using Projects
To Maintain the Directory Structure When Creating a Transfer File with
Hyperlinked Files
When you create a transfer file containing hyperlinked files, you can select to
maintain part of the directory structure for files with at least a common drive
location.
Use the following steps to create a transfer file with hyperlinked files.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Open the project you want to create as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Create. The following dialog box
opens.

4. Verify the Include Hyperlink Files for Transfer check box is selected.
If you do not want to include hyperlink files in your transfer file, clear this
check box and go to step 8.
5. Under File Options, select Maintain Directory Info to save the directory
structure of the hyperlinked files.
If you do not want to include the directory information for the hyperlinked
files in the transfer file, select Do Not Include Directory Info and go to
step 7.
6. Type the common base directory location of the hyperlinked files (up to the
folder location that you want to maintain) in the text box.
OR

XMap User Guide

Click the Browse button
location.

and browse to the common base directory

7. Under Select Files to Be Included, clear the check box next to each file you
do not want to include in your transfer file.
8. Click OK.
The Create Transfer File dialog box opens.
9. In the File Name text box, type the file name.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions and are saved by default in
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
10. Click Create.
Your file is created and saved in the specified location. The default location for
imported transfer file attachments is C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files.

Importing Transfer Files
You can package a project and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mailing or copying. You can also import transfer files, allowing you to
share your projects with other DeLorme users.
You can import a transfer file with or without attached hyperlink files. When you
create a transfer file with hyperlinked files, you can choose to maintain the directory
information of common files. By doing this, the recipient of the transfer file can keep
a similar directory structure as the creator. This is helpful when a transfer file is
shared and updated between users. Transfer files do not include map data or GIS
data.
To Import a Transfer File
Use the following steps to import a transfer file, including transfer files that have
been e-mailed to you by other DeLorme users.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The default location is
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects. Browse to another location to change it.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions.
3. Click a file to select it.
The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import to finish the import process.
The imported project opens and displays in the map view.
To Import a Transfer File with Hyperlinked Files
Use the following steps to import a transfer file that includes hyperlinked file
attachments.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Click File, click Transfer, and then click Import.
The Import Transfer File dialog box opens. The C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects
directory displays by default. Browse to another location to change it.
Transfer files have .dmt extensions.
3. Click a file to select it. The name displays in the File Name text box.
4. Click Import. The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.

Using Projects
5. Select the folder where you want to save the hyperlinked files. The default
location is C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Transfer Files. Transfer files have .dmt
extensions.
6. Click OK.
The imported project opens in the map view.

E-mailing a Transfer File
You can package a project and its contents into a single file, called a transfer file, to
facilitate e-mailing or copying. Transfer files do not include map data or GIS data.
To E-mail a Transfer File
This procedure creates an attachment file but does not permanently save a file to
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Projects.
Use the following steps to e-mail a transfer file.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Open the project you want to e-mail as a transfer file.
3. Click File, click Transfer, and then click E-mail.
A transfer file is created and your computer's default operating system e-mail
program opens with the transfer file included as an attachment.
4. Complete the e-mail in accordance with your e-mail program.

Changing the Properties of Your Data
Changing the Properties in Your Data Overview
You can adjust the properties of some data categories to accommodate your needs.
For example, you can adjust the shaded relief properties to account for the sun
shining in a different direction, have contours display at varying densities at
particular zoom levels, etc.
Each dataset contains its own sub-categories of data (raster, vector, contours, etc.).
Because of this, not all of the property information in this section of the Help will
pertain to every dataset.
Note It is important to remember that any changes made to the dataset properties
are permanent only when saved in a project.

Changing Imagery Display
When you use the Map Data tab to add imagery files, such as GeoTIFF, imagery, and
ImageReg data, or data and imagery downloads from NetLink, to a map—by default,
the image appears on top of any DeLorme vector base map by default. However, you
can customize the layering sequence so that selected vector map features (roads,
contours, etc.) appear on top of the image. Any added imagery files are listed in the
Map Data tree view under the appropriate series.
To Change the Properties of an Imagery File
Use the following steps to change the properties of an imagery file.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
imagery series you want to modify.
3. Click the plus sign next to the specific imagery file you want to modify.
The types of imagery in the file display.

XMap User Guide
4. Right-click the imagery file and click Properties.
The Raster Properties dialog box opens.
5. Optional. For MrSID and some types of GeoTIFF data, you may be able to
select a color to display as transparent (for example, black). To do so, select
the Transparent Color check box, select a color, and click OK. Note that
doing so makes the default transparent color (bright pink) show around the
imagery.
OR
If you do not want to select a color to display as transparent, click Next.
6. Type the minimum and maximum data zoom range for your custom raster
properties in the text boxes.
7. Select the raster data position for that data zoom range from the drop-down
list.
Note The raster data position you select includes all of the options above it
in the list.
8. Click Add Change to update your data positioning selections to the map. You
must perform this step to apply any change.
9. Click Next.
10. Drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and maximum data zoom levels
at which you want to see the imagery file on the map.
11. Click Next.
12. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your raster properties.
13. Click Finish.

Changing Point Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points, etc.
Note You must select to show points of interest in the Display tab of the options
dialog box to view any changes made to the point properties on the map. See
Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing/hiding points of interest.
To Change Point Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of point data.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Highlight Map Points, click Data, and then click Properties.
The Point Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click Map Points and click Properties.
The Point Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
Note The Show URLs check box is enabled if your dataset supports showing
points as hyperlinks on the map.

Using Projects
6. Click Next.
7. Review the dataset information and click Next, if applicable.
8. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your point properties.
9. Click Finish.
The Point Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the map.
Note The point property changes are made only in the current project. You
must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing Vector Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points, etc.
Note You must select to show land thoroughfares in the Display tab of the Options
dialog box to view any changes made to the vector properties on the map. See
Customizing the Map Features Preferences for information on showing/hiding land
thoroughfares.
To Change Vector Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of vector data.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Highlight Vectors, click Data, and then click Properties.
The Vector Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click Vectors and click Properties.
The Vector Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your vector properties.
8. Review the dataset information and click Next, if applicable.
9. Click Finish.
The vector properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the
map.
Note The vector property changes are made only in the current project. You
must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing the Contour Properties
Use the Properties option in the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points, DEM
properties, etc.
Notes

XMap User Guide
•

You must select to show contours in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to
view any changes made to the contour properties on the map. See Displaying
Basic Map Features for information on showing/hiding contours.

•

XMap remembers the last customized contour values. For example, if you
customize your contour settings and then change the settings to the default, the
next time you try to customize your contour settings the last saved customized
values display.

To Change the Contour Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of contours.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Right-click Contours and click Properties.
The Contour Properties dialog box opens (for Contours).
5. Select a contour option (Default, High Density, Low Density, or Custom) from
the drop-down list.
•

Default—Uses the default values for displaying contours and labels.

•

High Density—Approximately doubles the default values for
displaying contours and labels.

•

Low Density—Approximately halves the default values for displaying
contours and labels.

•

Custom—Allows you to customize how contours and labels display on
the map.

6. For Contours, select the data zoom level at which you want labels to begin to
display.
7. Click Next.
8. If you selected Default, High Density, or Low Density in step 5, go to step 9.
OR
If you selected Custom in step 5, you can customize the contour display by
choosing the distance (in feet or meters) between contours and how many
minor (unlabeled) contour lines for every major (labeled) contour line.
•

For a given range of data zoom levels, type the distance (in feet or
meters) between contour lines for those data zoom levels.

•

Type the number of minor lines for each major line. For example, type
0 to label every contour line or type 2 to label every third contour line.
Note Labels display only on major lines beginning at the zoom level
that you specified step 6.

•

Click Add/Change to update the contour rules list.
OR
Click Reset to reset the settings to what displayed when you first
launched the dialog box.
OR
Click Use Defaults to use the default values to display contours and
labels.

9. Click Next.
10. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab marker to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
76

Using Projects
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
11. Click Next.
12. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your point properties.
13. Click Finish.
The Contour Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the
map.
Notes
•

The contour property changes are only made in the current project.
You must save your project to retain the property changes.

•

Selecting Custom changes the Interval section in the Control Panel to
read, "Custom."

Changing Coordinate Grid Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features, such as coordinate grids, rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours,
points, and so on.
You must select to show grids in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to view
any changes made to the coordinate grid properties on the map. See Displaying
Basic Map Features for information on showing/hiding grids.
To Change Coordinate Grid Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of coordinate grids.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Highlight Grid Lines, click Data, and then click Properties.
The Coordinate Grid Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click Grid Lines and click Properties.
The Coordinate Grid Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your coordinate grid properties.
8. Click Finish.
The Coordinate Grid Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible
on the map.
Note The coordinate grid property changes are made only in the current
project. You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing USGS Quad Line Connection Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as USGS quad line connections, rasters, vectors, shaded relief,
contours, points, etc.
77

XMap User Guide
Note You must select to show USGS quadrangle coverage in the Display tab of the
Options dialog box to view any changes made to the USGS quad line connection
properties on the map. See Displaying Basic Map Features for information on
showing/hiding USGS quadrangle coverage.
To Change USGS Quad Line Connection Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of USGS quad line connections.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Highlight USGS Quad Lines, click Data, and then click Properties.
The USGS Quad Line Connection Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click USGS Quad Lines and click Properties.
The USGS Quad Line Connection Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your USGS quad line connection properties.
8. Click Finish.
The USGS quad line connection properties for that dataset are modified and
are visible on the map.
Note The USGS quad line connection property changes are only made in the
current project. You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing Draw Connection Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features, such as draw objects, rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points,
and so on.
To Change Draw Connection Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of draw objects.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the draw
file for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Right-click the draw file and click Properties.
The Draw Connection Properties dialog box opens.
4. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your draw connection properties.
7. Click Finish.
The Draw Connection Properties are modified and are visible on the map.
78

Using Projects
Note The draw connection property changes are made only in the current
project. You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing the Raster Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points, DEM
properties, etc.
Note You must select to show images in the Display tab of the Options dialog box to
view any changes made to the raster properties on the map. See Customizing the
Map Features Preferences for information on showing/hiding images.
To Change Raster Properties
Use the following steps to change the raster properties.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Right-click Quad Rasters and click Properties.
The Raster Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab marker to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum data zoom range displays above the Set Data
Zoom Range For Display area.
6. Click Next.
7. Type the minimum and maximum data zoom range for your custom raster
properties in the text boxes.
8. Select the raster data positions from the drop-down list for that data zoom
range.
Note The raster data position you select also includes all of the options
above it in the list.
9. Continue to enter data zoom ranges and choose a position for each range.
10. Click Add Change to update your data positioning selections to the map.
Note You must perform this step to apply any change.
11. Optional. Click Use Default to use the default zoom range and data
positioning options.
12. Click Next.
13. Review the dataset information and click Next, if applicable.
14. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your raster properties.
15. Click Finish.
The Raster Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the
map.
Note The raster property changes are only made in the current project. You
must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing the Shaded Relief Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points, etc.

XMap User Guide
Note You must select to show shaded relief in the Display tab of the Options dialog
box to view any changes made to the shaded relief properties on the map. See
Displaying Basic Map Features for information on showing/hiding shaded relief.
To Change the Shaded Relief Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of shaded relief.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Right-click Shaded Relief and click Properties.
The Digital Elevation Model (DEM) Properties dialog box opens (for Shaded
Relief).
5. Select the direction from which you want the sun to shine for displaying the
shaded relief from the Sun Bearing drop-down list.
6. Select how many degrees you want the sun to be above the horizon from the
Sun Inclination drop-down list.
7. Under Brightness Range, drag the gray tab markers to the minimum and
maximum levels you want.
8. Optional. Click Reset if you have previously changed your shaded relief
properties and want to return to the settings which were in effect before you
opened the Properties dialog.
9. Optional. Click Use Defaults to change to the product defaults.
10. Click Next.
11. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
desired minimum and maximum levels.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
12. Click Next.
13. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your shaded relief properties.
14. Click Finish.
The Shaded Relief Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on
the map.
Note The shaded relief property changes are made only in the current
project. You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing the Radio Coverage Ellipses Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as radio ellipses, rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points,
etc.
To Change the Radio Coverage Ellipses Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of radio coverage ellipses.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.

Using Projects
4. Highlight Radio Coverage Ellipses, click Data, and then click Properties.
The Ellipse Connection Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click Radio Coverage Ellipses and click Properties.
The Ellipse Connection Properties dialog box opens.
5. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your properties.
8. Click Finish.
The Radio Coverage Ellipse Connection Properties for that dataset are
modified and are visible on the map.
Note The radio coverage ellipse property changes are made only in the
current project. You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing the Elevation Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as elevations, rasters, vectors, shaded relief, contours, points,
DEM properties, etc.
To Change the Elevation Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of elevation.
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Click the plus sign next to the sub-data category.
4. Right-click Elevation and click Properties.
The Digital Elevation Model (DEM) Properties dialog box opens (for Elevation).
5. Select a priority (1-100) from the Priority scroll list.
Note When the program has more than one elevation connection, the
connection with the highest priority takes precedence in areas where there is
coincident data.
6. Select the data zoom level at which you want elevations to begin to display.
7. Click Next.
8. Under Connection Usages, select or clear the appropriate check boxes to
show or hide elevation data.
9. Click Finish.
The Elevation Properties for that dataset are modified and are visible on the
map.
Note The elevation property changes are made only in the current project.
You must save your project to retain the property changes.

Changing XData Dataset Properties
Use the Properties option on the Map Data tab to change the properties of various
map features such as XData datasets, radio ellipses, rasters, vectors, shaded relief,
contours, points, etc.
To Change the XData Dataset Properties
Use the following steps to change the properties of XData datasets.

XMap User Guide
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Under Secondary Map or Primary Map, click the plus sign next to the
XData dataset for which you want to modify the properties.
3. Highlight the dataset name, click Data, and then click Properties.
The User Database Connection Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the XData dataset and click Properties.
The User Database Connection Properties dialog box opens.
4. Under Set Data Zoom Range For Display, drag the gray tab markers to the
minimum and maximum level you want.
The minimum and maximum zoom range displays above the Set Zoom Range
For Display area.
5. Click Next.
6. Select the check box next to each connection usage you want to include with
your properties.
Note Select the Include in Name Search check box to search for the
contents of your XData dataset using the Find tab (additional address
information is required). If you select the Add to World Placename
Dictionary check box in addition to the Include in Name Search check box,
you can use the Find tab to search the contents of your XData dataset without
providing additional address information.
7. Click Finish.
The properties for that XData dataset are modified and are visible on the
map.
Note The property changes are made only in the current project. You must
save your project to retain the property changes.

Working With GIS
GIS Overview
The topics that are in the Working with GIS Help section cover
functionality that is included in XMap Professional, XMap GIS
Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise. Be sure to check the
important note at the top of each topic to see if its content
pertains to your version of XMap.
With the GIS tab, you can view and analyze the data in your ESRI files (.shp, .e00),
MapInfo (.mif, .tab), AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwf, dwg), OGIS Geographic Markup Language
files (.gml, .xml), Geocode Type files (.asc, .csv, .dbf, .txt, .tab, .mdb, .xls), XData
datasets (.dds), Draw files (.an1), or DeLorme OpenSpace transfer files (.openspace)
on the map. Once the data is imported as a layer, you can choose to classify,
symbolize, and label the data in the layers to your specifications. You can also:
•

Create a database on a network server to share data among group members.

•

Create attribute queries using the fields in your layer.

•

Create spatial queries between layers.

•

Add fields to your layer.

•

Create a new layer— a new empty layer or a new layer based on an existing
layer, query results, or map selections.

•

Use XMap Web to publish your newly analyzed data and let other registered
users view the information.

•

Send GIS data to an Earthmate® PN-Series GPS device.

•

Create default option settings for layers and queries.

•

And much more!

The GIS tab has five subtabs:
Subtab
Name

Description

Workspace

The Workspace subtab is the primary area for using the GIS tab.
You can use the tools in the Workspace subtab to manage and
analyze layers in your databases as well as manage the databases
themselves. See also, Handling Disconnected or Deleted Layers.

Attributes

The Attributes subtab has two different views, the Datasheet View
and the Design View. The Datasheet View displays the fields that
are selected to be "visible" in the Design View and lets you edit the
attribute values. The Design View lets you edit properties of the
fields, view field metadata, create fields, and import and link
additional fields to your layer.

Query

The Query subtab lets you create custom attribute and spatial
queries to perform analysis on your layers. You can also rename,
save, copy, delete, and symbolize custom queries in the selected
layer.

XMap User Guide
Layering

The Layering subtab lets you move the layers in your workspace
above, below, or equal to other layers and/or the standard
DeLorme data layers. Moving a layer up in the list helps to ensure
the layer will be visible on the map.

Checkout/in

The Check-out/in tab lets you check out/reserve portions of layers
for editing outside of the source database and then check them
back in, updating the source layer.

Registration

The Registration tab appears when you import a CAD layer that
has no spatial reference to the Earth’s surface. The tab functions
the same as the ImageReg tab by allowing you to place control
points between the unregistered layer (in the left map) and the
corresponding location on the ground (in the right map).

Note If a shared layer in a single database is being manipulated by more than one
user at the same time, any analysis of that layer may produce unpredictable results.

Handling Disconnected or Deleted Layers
When a layer is disconnected or deleted, a red exclamation point (disconnected) or a
red X (deleted) displays next to the layer name in the Workspace.
This happens if the database the layer was connected to has been moved or deleted
or if the local source is unavailable (for example, if the database is on a laptop
computer that is turned off, the connection will be broken).

You can try to refresh the connection, establish a new connection, or remove the
disconnected or deleted layer from the Workspace.

•

To refresh the connection for all layers, click the Layers button and click
Refresh All Layers.
OR
To refresh the connection for specific layers; highlight the layers, right-click
the highlighted area, and click Refresh Selected Layers.

•

To reconnect all layers to the original database or to connect them to a new
database, click the Layers button and click Reconnect. The Connect Layers
dialog box opens.
OR
To reconnect/connect specific layers, highlight the layers, right-click the
highlighted area, and click Reconnect. The Connect Layers dialog box opens.

•

To remove the active layer, click the Layers button and click Remove.
OR
To remove specific layers, highlight the layers, right-click the highlighted
area, and click Remove.

Working With GIS

GIS Options
GIS Layer Options
You can customize the default settings for managing GIS layers.
To Set GIS Layer Options
Use the following steps to create default settings for GIS layers.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the GIS tab, and then click the Layers subtab.
3. Set the following options:
•

Add imported layers to Workspace–Select this check box to
automatically add imported layers to the Workspace subtab.

•

Show imported layers on map–If you selected the above check box,
select this check box to show layers on the map after they are
imported to the Workspace subtab.

•

Show layers added from Manage Layers on map–Select this check
box to show layers on the map when you add them from the Manage
Layers dialog box.

•

Zoom map when centering on points–Use the drop-down list to
select the zoom level to use when you double-click a point geometry to
center it on the map in the Attributes subtab Datasheet View.

•

Default attribute records filter–Use the drop-down list to select the
default setting for the Show drop-down list on the Attributes subtab for
layers added to the Workspace. You can manually change the filter
after a layer is added to Workspace. Options are Mag Region (default),
All, and Toolbar Select.

•

Refresh attribute records for Map Region filter–Select this check
box to automatically refresh the Attributes subtab Datasheet View
when the map extent changes and Map Region is selected in the Show
drop-down list. The Map Region filter hides all attribute records whose
map bounding region (MBR) is not currently within the map window.

•

Large layer definition (# of geometries)–Type the minimum
number of geometries a layer must include to define it as a large
layer. When a layer includes at least that number of geometries, XMap
will handle the layer differently to improve processing speed. For
example, the map will not zoom to the location of the geometries and
the count function for query results is suppressed. The default number
of geometries for a large layer is 50,000.

•

Geometry selection color–Click the button to open the Color dialog
box and click the color for selection highlights on the map. Select
in the toolbar or by selecting
geometries with the Selection Tool
records on the Attributes subtab in datasheet view.

XMap User Guide

GIS Query Options
Use the Query subtab on the GIS tab in the Options dialog box to create default
settings for managing queries.
Note Changes to query options apply only to the queries you create after you make
the changes.
To Set GIS Query Options
Use the following steps to create default settings for GIS queries.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the GIS tab, and then click the Queries subtab.
3. Set the following options:
•

Zoom map to query results–Select this check box to zoom the map
to show the results of a query.

•

Count results when running query–Select this check box to show a
count of the results in the Query Results area on the Query subtab
when you run a query.

•

Attribute effect–Use the drop-down list to select the default attribute
effect of a new query for any layer. Options are Highlight, Filter, and
None.

•

Map effect–Use the drop-down list to control the default map effect of
a new query for any layer. Options are Highlight, Filter, and None.

Using Database Manager
Database Manager Overview
Database Manager delivers essential tools for DeLorme OpenSpace database
management. Its easy-to-use interface allows database administrators to add new
SQL server connections, add server account users, create databases and add users,
modify database permissions, create database subscriptions, and more. You can
open the Database Manager from the GIS tab or from the XMap GIS install directory.
The following topics are covered in this section.
Connecting to a Server
Adding a User to a Server
Disconnecting from/Reconnecting to a Server
Removing a Server
Creating a New Database
Attaching a Database
Adding/Removing a Database User
Activating/Deactivating a Database
Deleting a Database
Database User Roles
Creating User Subscriptions
XMap Database Limitations

Working With GIS
Backing Up a Database
Restoring a Backed Up Database

Connecting to a Server

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can use Database Manager to connect to single or multiple SQL servers.
To Connect to a Server
Use the following steps to connect to a server with Database Manager.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. From the Server menu, click New Connection.
The Connect dialog box opens.
5. Type the name of the server in the Server text box.
Note If SQL Server was installed on your local machine, type
localhost\xmap6 (or localhost\delormemapping if SQL Server was installed in
a previous version of XMap). If you are connecting to a remote server, see
your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information.
6. Select the authentication method; Windows Authentication or SQL Server
Authentication.
7. If you selected SQL Server Authentication, type the appropriate login name
and password in the applicable text boxes.
8. Click Connect.

Adding a User to a Server

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you connect to a SQL server, you can give users access to the databases on
the server. The Server Administrator can modify a user's role on that server to be
Server User (default), Database Creator, or Server Administrator.
To Add a User to a Server
Use the following steps to add a user to a server.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2.

Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.

3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click the server to which you want
add a new user.
5. From the Server menu, click New User.
The Add Server Account dialog box opens.
6. Type the individual's network user name in the User Name text box.

XMap User Guide
7. If you are using Windows Authentication, select that option and then type the
user's network domain.
OR
If you are using SQL Server Authentication, select that option and then type
and confirm a password for that user in the applicable text boxes.
8. Click OK.
9. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server menu and click
Server Users.
A list of all of the users who have access to the server displays on the right
side of the window.
10. To change a user's role for that server, find the name in the list and click the
System Role. Double-click to select a role (Server User, Database Creator,
or Server Administrator) from the drop-down list.
•

Server Users have limited access to the server. They can log in and
access any databases that they have been granted access to, but they
cannot create or delete (drop) databases. Their permissions on each
OpenSpace database are governed by the database role they have
been assigned.

•

Database Creators can log in to the server and create databases.
Database creators have full access to the databases that they create,
including deleting the databases. Their database role on their own
OpenSpace databases is automatically XMap Owner. Their permissions
on OpenSpace databases that they did not create are governed by the
database role they have been assigned.

•

Server Administrators have full access to the server and any
database on the server regardless of their database roles. They can
add and remove server users and assign server roles to users.

Tip Users can modify their SQL Server Authentication passwords at any time using
the Change Password feature in Database Manager.

Disconnecting from/Reconnecting to a Server

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use Database Manager to disconnect a server or completely remove the connection.
Connected servers display in Database Manager with a green arrow next to the
server icon. Disconnected servers display with a red arrow next to the server icon.
Once a server is disconnected, XMap cannot connect to it.
For information on removing a server, see Removing a Server.
To Disconnect a Server
Use the following steps to disconnect from a server with Database Manager.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click the server that you want
disconnect.
5. From the Server menu, click Disconnect.

Working With GIS
To Reconnect a Server
Use the following steps to reconnect to a server with Database Manager.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click the server that you want
reconnect.
5. From the Server menu, click Connect.

Removing a Server

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use Database Manager to completely remove a server connection or simply
disconnect it. For information on disconnecting a server, see Disconnecting
from/Reconnecting to a Server.
To Remove a Server
Use the following steps to remove a server and the databases it contains with
Database Manager.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click the server that you want
remove.
5. From the Server menu, click Remove.

Creating a New Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
There are two ways to create a new database in XMap. You can use the Create
Database dialog box within XMap, which is accessed from the Import Layer wizard or
Create Layer dialog box, or use the Database Manager utility to create a new
database.
To Create a New Database with the Create Database Dialog Box
Use the following steps to create a new database.
1. Click the GIS tab, click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
2. Click the Layers button, point to Create, and then click Empty Layer.
The Create Empty Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Click the Import Layer menu button
Import - New Layer.
The Import Layer Wizard opens.

on the toolbar, and then click

XMap User Guide
3. At the bottom of the dialog box, select New from the Target Database
drop-down list.
The Create Database dialog box opens.
4. Select the server you want the database to be created on from the Server
drop-down list.
If the server you want to use does not display in the list, type the server
name in the text box.
Note If SQL Server was installed on your local machine, type
localhost\xmap6 (or localhost\delormemapping if SQL Server was installed in
a previous version of XMap). If you are connecting to a remote server, see
your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information.
5. Select the authentication method; Windows authentication or SQL Server
authentication (Windows Authentication (NTLM) is an authentication process
used by all members of the Windows NT family of products. It uses a
challenge/response process to prove the client’s identity without requiring
that either a password or a hashed password be sent across the network. If
Use Windows Authentication is selected, the user does not need to provide
login name or password information to create a new database on the specified
server machine. This is because SQL Server revalidates the Windows user
account name and password. SQL Server Authentication uses credentials
stored in a SQL Server database to get access to the server. When this choice
is selected, the Login and Password text boxes are enabled.)
.
6. If you selected to use SQL Server Authentication, type a login name in the
Login text box and a password in the Password text box.
7. Type a name for the new database in the Database Name text box. The
name should be alphanumeric (not case sensitive), may include underscores,
has a 128 character limit, and cannot include spaces or start with a number.
8. From the Compatibility drop-down list:
Select XMap 6 if you want the layers you import into this database to have
access to all of the features of XMap 6.
OR
Select XMap 5 if you want the layers you import into this database to have
access to all of the features of XMap 5.
OR
Select XMap 4.5 if the layers that you import into this database need to be
accessed from that version of XMap. This option is only available if you are
using Microsoft SQL 2000.
Note XMap 4.5 databases will not have access to all of the functionality
available in XMap 5 and above. See XMap Database Limitations for more
information.
9. Click OK.
The database is added to the server.
To Create a New Database with Database Manager
Use the following steps to create a new database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. Connect to the server where your new database will be stored.

Working With GIS
5. Use the tree view on the left to select the server where you will store the new
database.
6. From the Database menu, click New.
7. Type a name for the new database in the Database Name text box. The
name should be alphanumeric (not case sensitive), may include underscores,
has a 128 character limit, and cannot include spaces.
8. Select a schema type (XMap 6, XMap 5, or XMap 4.5) from the Schema dropdown list.
9. Click OK.
The database is added to the server.

Attaching/Connecting a Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Attach Database: When importing a layer with the Import Layer or Manage Layers
dialog box, the Attach Database dialog opens if you Other as the database.
Connect Database: If you are attempting to reconnect to a database for a
disconnected or deleted layer, the Connect Database dialog opens.
To Attach/Connect a Database
Use the following steps to attach a database.
1. Select the server you want the database to be connected to from the Server
drop-down list.
If the server you want to use does not display in the list, type the server
name in the text box.
Note If SQL Server was installed on your local machine, type
localhost\xmap6 (or localhost\delormemapping if SQL Server was installed in
a previous version of XMap). If you are connecting to a remote server, see
your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information.
2. Select the authentication method; Windows Authentication or SQL Server
Authentication. (Windows Authentication (NTLM) is an authentication process
used by all members of the Windows NT family of products. It uses a
challenge/response process to prove the client’s identity without requiring
that either a password or a hashed password be sent across the network. If
Use Windows Authentication is selected, the user does not need to provide
login name or password information to create a new database on the specified
server machine. This is because SQL Server revalidates the Windows user
account name and password. SQL Server Authentication uses credentials
stored in a SQL Server database to get access to the server. When this choice
is selected, the Login and Password text boxes are enabled.)
3. If you selected to use SQL Server Authentication, type a login name in the
Login text box and a password in the Password text box.
4. Type a name for the new database in the Database Name text box.
5. Click OK.
The database is added.

Adding/Removing a Database User

XMap User Guide

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you add users to a server, you can give them access to the databases that are
on that server. Once a user is added to a database, an administrator can assign the
user's role for using the database (for example, XMap User, XMap Edit, XMap
Checkout Creator, XMap Administrator, or XMap Owner). You can add or remove
individual users or a Windows Group.
To Add a Database User
Use the following steps to give a user access to a particular database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server and databases
menus.
5. To add a user to an individual database, click a database in the tree view or in
the working view (right side).
OR
To add a user to multiple databases, in the working view (right side of the
window), hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click each of the
databases to which you want to add a user.
6. From the Database menu, click Add User.
The Add Users dialog box opens all of the users who have access to the
database's server.
7. Click to select a user from the Add Users dialog box. If you want to add
multiple users at once, press the CTRL key on your keyboard and click each
user.
8. Click OK.
9. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the database's menu and
then click the Database Users option underneath it.
A list of all of the users who have access to the database displays on the right
side of the window.
10. To change a user's role for that database, find the name in the list, click the
role, and then select a new role (XMap User, XMap Edit, XMap Checkout
Creator, XMap Administrator, or XMap Owner) from the available drop-down
list. For definitions of each role, see Database User Roles.
To Remove a Database User
Use the following steps to remove a user's database privileges.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server and database
menus to view the database to which you want to remove a user.
5. Expand the database and then click the Database Users option underneath
it.

Working With GIS
A list of all of the users who have access to the database displays on the right
side of the window.
6. Click to select the user that you want to remove.
7. From the Database menu, click Remove User.

Activating/Deactivating a Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can deactivate and then reactivate a database using Database Manager. In
Database Manager, active databases have a green arrow next to the database icon.
Inactive databases have a red arrow next to the database icon.
Deactivating a database removes it from the list of databases in the Manage Layers
and Import Layer dialog boxes. XMap® will not try to connect to an inactive
database.
You can also use the remove connection feature in the Manage Layers dialog box to
deactivate a database.
To Activate/Deactivate a Database with Database Manager
Use the following steps to deactivate a database with Database Manager.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server and database
menus to find the database you want to activate/deactivate.
5. To deactivate a database, click the database to deactivate. Then, from the
Database menu, click Deactivate.
OR
To activate a database, click the database you want to activate. Then, from
the Database menu, click Activate.
To Deactivate a Database with the Manage Layers Dialog Box
Use the following steps to remove a database using the Manage Layers dialog box.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently selected.
3. Click the Layers button and then click Manage.
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
OR
on the toolbar.
Click the Manage Layers tool
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
4. From the Source Database drop-down, select the database that you want to
deactivate.
5. Click the Remove Database Connection button

6. Click Yes to confirm that you want to deactivate (remove) the database
connection.

Deleting a Database
93

XMap User Guide

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you create a database, you can use Database Manager to delete (drop) it from
the server.
Notes
•

You can delete a database only if you are the database owner or if you are a SQL
System Administrator.

•

You cannot delete a database that is currently in use. If the database is currently
in use, you will receive the following error, "A database error occurred while
dropping the database..."

•

The process of deleting a database may take over a minute.

To Delete a Database
Use the following steps to delete a database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click the database that you want to
delete.
5. From the Database menu, click Delete.
A confirmation message displays.
6. Click Yes to delete the database.
Deleted databases and their contents cannot be retrieved unless you created
a backup using Backup/Restore.
OR
Click No to cancel the deletion process.

Database User Roles

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
A Server Administrator can give multiple users access to one or all of the databases
that are stored on a server. Each user must be assigned a role for using a particular
database; the default role is XMap User. The table below shows the functionality that
is available for each of the role types; XMap User, XMap Edit, XMap Checkout
Creator, XMap Administrator, or XMap Owner.
Feature

View GIS layers
and associated
information
(attributes,
classifications,
layer properties,

XMap
User

XMap
Edit

XMap
Checkout
Creator

XMap
Administrator

XMap
Owner

Working With GIS
etc.)
Run queries

Export layers

Subscribe to an
Enterprise
database

Create redlines

Synchronize to an
Enterprise
database

Create queries

Edit geometries
and attributes

Create check-outs
from an
Enterprise
database

Save check-outs
on an existing
database

Import layers

Delete layers

Add/delete
attribute fields

Import/link
attribute sets

Edit layer
properties

Create
classifications

Save classification
templates

Enable
subscriptions on
an Enterprise
database*

Create
subscriptions on
an Enterprise
database*

Enable/disable a

XMap User Guide
layer for checkouts
Add users to a
database

Change database
user roles

Drop (delete)
databases

* Requires XMap GIS Enterprise.

Creating User Subscriptions

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Enterprise.
A subscription is a read-only copy of a layer in an enterprise database. A subscription
must be created by an administrator and activated on a user’s computer. When a
user clicks the Synchronize button on the toolbar, a copy of the Enterprise database
that contains read-only copies of all layers they are subscribed to is created on the
user's local machine. Layer copies are updated to include changes to each original
layer every time the Synchronize button is clicked. This allows XMap users to quickly
ensure they have the most up-to-date versions of the layers they need for reference
in the field or office.
Note Enterprise databases can be created only with XMap GIS Enterprise.
To Create a User Subscription
Use the following steps to create a user subscription.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server menu that
includes the database where your layers are stored.
5. Expand the Database menu and click Subscriptions. If Subscriptions are
disabled for that database (if the sync arrows next to the option are red and
not green), right-click Subscriptions and click Enable Subscriptions or
select Enable Subscriptions from the Database menu.
6. In the middle section of the Database Manager window, click to select each
database user whose subscription you will create. You can select multiple
users at once by holding the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click to
select each user.
Note Only server users are available in this list. See Adding a User to a
Server for more information.
7. On the right side of the window (working view), select the check box next to
each layer you want to include in the subscription.
8. Click Create Subscription File.
9. Browse to the location where you want to save the subscription file and name
the file. When you are finished, click Save.

Working With GIS
10. Outside of XMap, send the subscription file to each user you selected in step
6.

Changing Your SQL Server Authentication Password

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
If you have been given rights to access a server with SQL Server Authentication, you
can change your password at any time using Database Manager.
To Change Your Password
Use the following steps to change your SQL Server Authentication password.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open the Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), expand the server for which you
want to change the password.
5. On the left side of the window (tree view), click Server Users.
6. Select your account from the working view on the right side of the screen.
7. From the Server menu, click Change Password.
The Change Password dialog box opens.
8. Type your current password in the Old Password text box.
Note This option is unavailable when the system administrator is changing a
user's password.
9. Type the new password in the Password text box.
10. Re-type the password in the Confirm Password text box.
11. Click OK.
The password is changed.

XMap Database Limitations
XMap 4.5 Database Limitations
You can view layers created using XMap 4.5 in XMap 5.0 GIS or later versions;
however, until they are saved in an XMap 5.0 or later-compatible database, the
following features will not be available:
•

View attribute changes in real while modifying corresponding geometries on
the map

•

Enterprise databases will not be able to be created

•

Database synchronization

•

Check-out/in

•

Redlining

•

Spatial queries

•

Limited attribute data types (the following data types are unavailable:
Double, Boolean, Byte, Small Integer, Big Integer, Memo, Currency,
Document and GUID)

•

Multiple classifications

•

Classification templates

XMap User Guide
•

Attribute column precision for Float and Double during layer import

•

Geocoding

•

GeoID is not a stored attribute column and cannot be accessed by Query or
Label

You can import the layers into an XMap 5.0 or later-compatible database using the
Import Wizard in the GIS Workspace subtab or the New/Duplicate Layer feature in
the GIS tab. Advanced users can convert multiple files using the XMap GIS Bulk
Importer/Exporter.
XMap 5.x Database Limitations
Layers created in XMap 5.x do not support self-intersecting polygons.

Backing Up a Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Backup/Restore feature in Database Manager to create backups (duplicates)
of databases in case of a computer crash or database corruption. You can restore the
backups if such an event occurs, preserving the user’s layers in the database. You
can create multiple backup databases for a single source database.
In case of computer failure, it is strongly recommended that you store database
backups on separate media (CD, DVD, remote server, etc.).
To Back up a Database
Use the following steps to backup a database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click Databases or expand the
Databases menu and select an individual database.
5. From the Database menu, click Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore dialog box opens.
6. Select the database you want to backup from the Source Database dropdown list.
7. Click Backup.
The Backup dialog box opens.
8. Type the name for your backup database in the Name text box.
9. Type the location where you want to save the backup database or click the
browse button to browse to the location.
10. Optional. Type any related information about the backup database in the
Description text box.
11. Click OK.
The new backup database (as well as any other backup databases) that have
been created for the selected Source Database display in the Backup History
table. The backup database consists of two files; a file that contains the data
and a file that contains metadata about the backup.

Working With GIS
Note To remove a backup database from the Backup History table, select the
backup database and click Remove From History. The backup database is removed
from the table but not deleted from the location where you saved it.
To permanently delete a backup database, browse to the location on your computer
where you saved the backup files and delete the files. The backup database displays
in the Backup History table until you select it and click Remove From History.

Restoring a Backed Up Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you create a backup database, you can restore it as the source database using
the Backup/Restore functionality in Database Manager.
To Restore a Database
Use the following steps to restore a backed up database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click DB Manager to open Database Manager.
4. On the left side of the window (tree view), click Databases or expand the
Databases menu and select an individual database.
5. From the Database menu, click Backup/Restore.
The Backup/Restore dialog box opens.
6. Select the database that was originally backed up from the Source Database
drop-down list.
Note Select Select All from the Source Database drop-down list to view a
list of all of the databases that are currently backed up.
7. Select the backup database you want to restore from the Backup History
table and click Restore.
The Restore dialog box opens.
OR
If the backup database that you want to restore does not display in the
Backup History table, click Restore from File, browse to the location where
you saved the backup database, and then click Open.
8. If you want to overwrite the original source database with the backup
database, leave the Restore dialog box as is and click OK. Then, click Yes to
confirm that you want to replace the existing database with the backup
database.
OR
If you want to restore the backup database but not overwrite the original
database, type a new name for the restored database in the Database text
box and then click OK.

Using Layers in a Subscription
Opening a Subscription File

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.

XMap User Guide

Once a database administrator sends you a subscription file, you must open it in
XMap to activate the subscription. A subscription to an Enterprise database allows
you to synchronize your local copy of the layers with the Enterprise database and/or
"mark up" the layer using the redlining tools.
Note Only one subscription file can be active at a time.
To Open a Subscription File
Use the following steps to open a subscription file.
1. Double-click the file either within an e-mail or after you save it locally.
2. If XMap is not already open, XMap launches automatically; however, you will
be prompted to restart the application.
Note If XMap is already open, you will be prompted to restart the
application.
on the toolbar. A progress bar indicates
3. Click the Synchronize button
the synchronization percentage complete.
4. Click OK to acknowledge the synchronization completed.
The layers that were included in the subscription are added to the workspace.
Note If an error occurs during the synchronization process, you will receive
an error message with a option for viewing the error log.
5. To view the layer on the map, click the GIS tab, click the Workspace subtab,
and then select the check box next to the layer in the workspace.
6. To center the layer on the map, double-click the layer in the workspace.
on the
7. To create redline edits against the layer(s), click the Redline tool
toolbar and then use the draw annotation tools to mark up the layer(s). All
redline edits are automatically saved in a Redline draw layer
(RedlineLayer#.an1) file. For more information, see Creating Redline Edits.

Refreshing the Layers in a Subscription

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
To ensure the layers that were part of your subscription are the most recent files
available, click the Synchronize button
on the toolbar. The layers are refreshed
with the latest version from the source database.

Adding Subscription Layers to Your Workspace

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.

on the toolbar for a quick and easy
Click the Add Synchronized Layers tool
way to add all of the layers that are in the active subscription to your workspace.
The tool is active only when at least one layer in the active subscription has been
removed from the workspace.

100

Working With GIS

Using ArcSDE Databases
Importing a Layer from an ArcSDE Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Enterprise.
You can directly import layers from ESRI ArcSDE databases to DeLorme OpenSpace
databases. To import layers, you must establish a connection to an ArcSDE
database.
You can import a new layer, import a layer to append to an existing layer, or import
a layer to replace an existing layer.
To Import a Layer from an ESRI ArcSDE Database
Use the following steps to import a layer from an ArcSDE database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, point to Import, and then click and then click New
Layer, Append Layer, or Replace Layer.
The Import Layer wizard opens.
OR
on the toolbar, and then click Import Click the Import Layers tool
New Layer, Import - Append Layer, or Import - Replace Layer.
4. Under Source, select Database.
Note This option is unavailable if the ArcSDE SDK client tools are not
detected on your system. You can install the tools using these steps; for more
information, see your ArcSDE administrator.
5. Select the database from which you want to add the layer from the Database
drop-down list or click Other to connect to a database.
6. From the Layer drop-down list, select the layer within the database that you
want to import.
The layer information appears in the Layer info box.
7. If you are importing a new layer, you have the option to type a name for the
layer in the Name text box.
8. From the Database drop-down list, select the destination database for the
imported layer or select Other to attach a different database to add layers to.
If you are importing a new layer, you also have the option to click New if you
want to create a new database.
9. If you are appending or replacing a layer, select the destination layer from
the Layer drop-down list.
10. Click Next.
The layer is imported into the destination database you selected in step 8.

Connecting to an ArcSDE Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Enterprise.

101

XMap User Guide
When you import a layer from a database and select Other from the Database dropdown list, the Connect to Database dialog box opens and ArcSDE displays in the
Type drop-down list.
To Connect to an ArcSDE Server
The information needed to complete the Connect to Database dialog should be
provided to you by your system administrator. Make sure you have the correct
information before continuing.
1. In the Server text box, type the name of server on which the ArcSDE
installation resides and the instance (for example, 5151 or esri_sde) in this
format:
server:instance
2. For a database with SQL Server Authentication, type your information in the
Login and Password boxes.
OR
For Windows Authentication, leave the Login and Password boxes blank.
3. To save your login and password information, if applicable, select the Store
login and password check box.
Note This saves all the connection information for the Database selected
under Import From Database in the Import Layer dialog.
4. For non-Oracle databases, once you establish a successful connection to the
ArcSDE instance, click the Search button to locate the database from which
to import (only databases to which access is permitted are listed). If the
search is successful, select the database from the Database drop-down list.
OR
Type the database name in the Database box.
5. Click OK and use the Import Wizard to import the layer from that database.

102

Working With GIS

Installing ArcSDE SDK Tools
Use these steps to install the ArcSDE SDK tools on your computer. For more
information, see your ArcSDE administrator.
1. Browse to the System Properties dialog in your computer's Control Panel.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Click Environment Variables.
4. Under System variables, click Path and then click Edit.
5. At the end of Variable value, type a semi-colon and then the path to the bin
directory.
Example: ..........;C:\ArcSDE\ArcSDE_9.3\bin
6. Click OK.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK.
9. If XMap is open, restart it for the settings to take effect.

103

XMap User Guide

Redlining
Creating Redline Edits

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Redlining refers to the process of adding MapNotes/symbols or drawing shapes to
"mark up" GIS layers without actually editing the layers themselves. Redlines utilize
the draw capabilities of the Draw tab and are saved in a draw layer that is created
when redlining begins.
Redline draw layers have connections with a special type of GIS layer (called Redline
Layer) on an Enterprise Database that the user has a subscription to. After redlines
are made on the map, they will be synchronized with the redline GIS layer during the
subscription synchronization process. The layers are stored as attribute records
within the redline GIS layer, with the draw file imbedded in a column with a
document link that opens the draw file when clicked.
To Create Redline Edits
Use the following steps to create redline edits.
1. View a layer that is part of a subscription.
on the toolbar.
2. Click the Redline tool
The Redline toolbox opens.
,
3. If you want to place a symbol on the map, click the Symbol tool
select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want from the Set dropdown list, and then select the symbol from the Style drop-down list. Then,
click the location on the map where you want to place the symbol.
OR
, select the
If you want to draw a line on the map, click the Line tool
line color and line style, and then draw the line at the map location.
OR
,
If you want to draw freehand on the map, click the Scribble tool
select the scribble color and style, and then draw the scribble at the map
location.
OR
,
If you want to place a MapNote on the map, click the MapNote tool
select the font color and size, and then click the location on the map where
you want to place the MapNote.
OR
,
If you want to draw a polygon on the map, click the Polygon tool
select the polygon fill color and fill style, and then draw the polygon at the
map location.

104

Working With GIS
4. Click the Close button in the upper-right corner of the Redline toolbox to
close the toolbox.
Note You can access the full range of draw options for each symbol type in the
Redline toolbox by selecting the same option in the Draw tab.

Sending Redline Edits to the Source Database

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you create redline edits in the GIS layers included in a subscription, you can
send those edits to the source database by clicking the Synchronize button
on
the toolbar. This also refreshes the layers that were part of your subscription and
retrieves the most recent changes.

Viewing Redline Edits

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
After users synchronize their redline layers with the redline GIS layer in the
enterprise database, those users with permissions to view the redline GIS layer can
review all of the redlines created by those users.
1. Add the redline GIS layer to your workspace.
2. Once the redline layer is in your workspace, select the check box next to the
layer in the Workspace view.
Outlined boxes display on the map (red indicates incomplete redline edits and
blue indicates completed redline edits), depicting the map bounding
rectangles for each redline record.
3. Click the Attributes subtab.
4. If it is not already in Datasheet View mode, click the Datasheet View button
.
The attributes of the layer display. Each record in the redline layer has the
user's name, date, and a copy of the original redline file (.an1).
5. To view a specific redline draw layer:
Click its hyperlink in the Redline Layer column.
A message asks if you want to save or open the file.
OR
Hover your cursor in the specific cell in the Redline Layer column.
A floating arrow displays. Click the arrow and then select Open.
A message asks if you want to save or open the file.
6. Click Save to save the file to your hard drive (ensure that the Open in XMap
check box is selected).
The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map.
OR
Click Open to open the file from its current location (ensure that the Open in
XMap check box is selected).
The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map.

105

XMap User Guide
7. Use the notes and annotations in the draw layer to make the appropriate
edits to the corresponding GIS layers to which the user was subscribed.

Stationing
Stationing

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Stationing is a linear referencing method that calculates numeric values along a line
based on user-defined From and To values. These values are entered into Fr_Station
and To_Station attribute fields for a line in a GIS layer, which are automatically
assigned by XMap to the start and end points of the line.
Stationing is commonly used in the pipeline industry to locate station values
(numeric point locations) along pipelines. For example, field personnel may be given
work orders of sections of pipeline to inspect or repair. These locations may be
referenced by their station values or a range of values along the pipeline. Using a
GIS line layer of the pipeline that has the station values present, the field worker is
able to locate the exact point of the station along the line and navigate to it.
Although stationing has its roots in the pipeline industry, it is a convenient method of
referencing data to a location for any type of linear data.
To Add Stationing Attributes to a Layer
Use the following steps to add stationing attributes to a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. View an existing line layer, create a new line layer, or import a line layer.
4. Highlight the layer to which you want to add stationing points.
5. Click the Attributes subtab.
6. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

7. Add fields "Fr_Station" and "To_Station" to the line layer.
From the Data Type drop-down list, select any numeric type: Integer, Big
Integer, Byte, Double, Float, or Small Integer.
8. Click the Datasheet View

button.

9. Type numeric values in the Fr_Station and To_Station records for the layer.
The Fr_Sation value is automatically assigned to the start point of the line,
and the To_Station is automatically assigned to the end point of the line. The
station value for every location along the line is calculated based on the start
and end point values.

106

Working With GIS
To View Stationing Attributes
Hover over a line on the map that includes stationing data. Stationing values display
in the Info bar at the bottom of the map.

Bulk Importing and Exporting
Bulk Importing

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
XMap includes a command prompt utility that allows you to import multiple files
(from potentially different locations) into a database at one time through usercreated batch files (.bat or .cmd). You can also import entire directories of files using
the wildcard capability of command prompt. Import individual files either through
manual entry of the import commands or by referencing user created .ini files on the
command line. You can use the XMap Bulk Importer to import all file types that can
be imported with the XMap Import Wizard, except for non-spatial types that require
geocoding.
You can import files with the bulk importer through four different mechanisms:
•

Enter import parameters directly into the command line

•

Create a .ini file that specifies the import parameters, then reference this .ini
file in the command line

•

Create a .bat or .cmd batch file that specifies the import parameters for
multiple files, then run this batch file directly in the command line

•

Use a wild card entry to import all files of a like type in the same directory.
This option imports only files of the type that is specified by the wild card and
that contain spatial reference information.

Note For more information on importing parameters, see Bulk Importing
Parameters.
To Import Multiple Files Using the Command Line
All import command lines of this type begin with xmapimport in the command line.
All parameters are separated by a single space and parsed with -- on the command
line.
1. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
2. Type the following in the command line: xmapimport --target-server=server
name --target-db=database name --source-file=file path [--datum=datum of
the file (e.g., NAD83) --coordinate-system=the coordinate system of the file
(e.g., SPCS) --spcs-zone=me-w --spcs-units=surveyfeet] only needed when
spatial reference information is not specified in the file.

107

XMap User Guide
Notes
•

The coordinate information varies depending on the type of coordinate
system you specify (for example, if you select SPCS, you must also
specify the SPCS zone and units).

•

If you created the server on your local machine, type localhost\xmap6
(or localhost\delormemapping if the server was created in a previous
version of XMap). If you are connecting to an "external" server, see
your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information.

3. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is imported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the file
to import.
4. Add the layer to your workspace.
To Import Files Creating an .ini File
This option works on a single file or wild card basis using the parameters described in
previous sections. You can create the initialization file (.ini) using a text editor such
as Notepad or Wordpad. All parameters are separated by a return in the .ini file. The
name and path of the .ini file are referenced in the command line.
1. Open your preferred text editing program, such as Wordpad or Notepad.
2. Type the following parameters in the text document:
target-server=server name
target-db=database name
source-file=file path
datum=the datum of the file
coordinate-system=the coordinate system of the file
Note The coordinate information varies depending on the type of coordinate
system you specify (for example, if you select SPCS, you will also need to
specify the SPCS zone and units).
3. Save the text document with an .ini extension (rather than a .txt extension).
4. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
5. Type the following parameters in the command line: xmapimport the path to
the .ini file you created in steps 1-3.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is imported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the file
to import (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
7. Add the layer to your workspace.
To Import Files Creating a Batch File
This option allows you to automate several iterations of import with a user-created
batch file. You can create batch files with a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad.
Each line of the batch file pertains to a single import command line and contains the
same parameters as would be specified with manual entry in the command line. You
can import multiple file types located in different folders into different OpenSpace
databases using the automated method.
1. Open your preferred text editing program, such as Wordpad or Notepad.

108

Working With GIS
2. Type the following parameters in the text document (text in red reflect the
user's information):
xmapimport --target-server=server name --target-db=database name -source-file=file path --datum=datum --coordinate-system=coordinate
system --spcs-zone=specify --spcs-units=surveyfeet
Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no
character returns.
3. Save the text document with a .bat or .cmd extension (rather than a .txt
extension).
4. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
5. Type the path for the .bat/.cmd file you created in steps 1-3 in the command
line (for example, c:\test_batch.bat).
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is imported (the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the
file(s) to import (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
7. Add the layer(s) to your workspace.
To Import Files with a Wild Card
This option allows you to import all files of the same type located within the same
directory. These files must contain the same spatial reference information. This type
of import is useful for importing entire directories of files in a quick and automated
process. A wild card has an asterisk, a period, and then the extension abbreviation
(for example, *.shp). Type an asterisk to indicate any number of characters. Type a
question mark to indicate any single character or nothing.
1. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
2. Type the following parameters in the command line (text in red reflects the
user's information):
xmapimport --target-server=server name --target-db=database name -source-file=file path (e.g., *.shp)
Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no
character returns.
3. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is imported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the
file(s) to import (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
4. Add the layer(s) to your workspace.

Bulk Importing Parameters

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Type xmapimport on the command line and then press the ENTER key on your
keyboard to display a list of instructions and general required import parameters
(parameters vary based on the type of files being imported).
Notes

109

XMap User Guide
•

File names with embedded spaces should be in quotes (for example,"Yarmouth
Parcels.shp").

•

If the server was created on your local machine, type localhost\xmap6 (or
localhost\delormemapping if the server was created in a previous version of
XMap). If you are connecting to an "external" server, see your Database
Administrator to obtain the server name information.

Viewing the Supported File Types and Required Parameters
Type xmapimport --list-supported-files in the command line and then press the
ENTER key on your keyboard to see a list of supported file types.
File Types That Contain Spatial Reference Information

Supported spatial file types that contain spatial reference information include:
•

ESRI Shapefiles (.shp)*

•

ArcInfo Interchange files (.e00)*

•

MapInfo Table files (.tab)*

•

MapInfo Exchange files (.mif)*

•

DeLorme OpenSpace files (.openspace)

•

DeLorme Draw files (.an1)

•

DeLorme XData files (.dds)

•

OGIS Geographic Markup Language files (.gml or .xml)*

•

AutoCAD Draw file (.dwg)*

•

AutoCAD Data Exchange file (.dxf or .dwf)*

•

ArcSDE Geodatabase layers*

* These files often contain intrinsic spatial reference information, but this is not
always the case. When they do not, additional parameters will need to be supplied in
the command line to enable import. If these parameters are not specified, you will
receive the following notice when trying to import: “The spatial data source does not
offer spatial hints and none were specified on the command line.”
Required parameters for this file type:
xmapimport
--target-server=SQL Server
--target-db=OpenSpace DB
--source-file=file and path OR, for ArcSDE import, --sourcesde=[server,instance,database,login,password](Note If using Windows
Authentication, leave the login and password blank)
Optional parameters include:
--layer-name=name of the layer to be created
--replace-layer=name of the layer to be replaced
--append-layer=name of the layer to append to
Additional parameters required when spatial reference information is not included.

110

Working With GIS

File Types That Do Not Contain Spatial Reference Information
Supported spatial file types that do not contain spatial reference information include:
•

ESRI Shapefiles (.shp) that do not have an accompanying Projection file (.prj)

•

All file types marked with * above

Required parameters for this file type:
XMapimport
--target-server=SQL Server
--target-db=OpenSpace DB
--source-file=file and path OR, for ArcSDE import, --sourcesde=[server,instance,database,login,password]
--datum=datum**
--coordinate-system=coordinate system**
If the coordinate system is UTM, you must specify two additional parameters in the
command line:
--utm-zone-number=zone-number***
--utm-band-letter=band letter***
If the coordinate system is SPCS, you must specify two additional parameters in the
command line:
--spcs-zone=zone**
--spcs-units=units***
** obtain valid options for these parameters by running a separate command in the
command prompt.
*** valid options for these parameters are listed in the instructions that display
when running xmapimport in the command line.
Optional Parameters include:
--layer-name=name of the layer to be created
--replace-layer=name of the layer to be replaced
--append-layer=name of the layer to append to
Viewing a List of Supported Coordinate Systems
Type xmapimport --list-coordinate-systems to see a list of supported coordinate
systems. All files are converted to the Latitude/Longitude coordinate system with the
World Geodetic System datum during import.
Note that the list of supported coordinate systems is for spatial file types that do not
contain spatial reference information. For spatial file types that do contain spatial
reference information, the XMap Import Command Prompt is able to convert from a
much larger library of coordinate systems.
Viewing a List of Supported Datums
Type xmapimport --list-datums to see a list of supported datums.
Note that the list of supported coordinate systems is for spatial file types that do not
contain spatial reference information. For spatial file types that do contain spatial
reference information, the XMap Import Command Prompt is able to convert from a
much larger library of coordinate systems.

111

XMap User Guide
Viewing a List of State Plane Zones
Type xmapimport --list-spcs-zones to see a list of the state plane coordinate
system zones.

Bulk Exporting

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
XMap includes a utility that allows you to export one layer at a time (from potentially
different OpenSpace databases) to one of the supported file formats at one time
through user-created batch files (.bat or .cmd). You can also export individual layers,
either through manual entry of the export commands or with referencing user
created .ini files on the command line. You can use the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter
to export all file types supported in the Export dialog box.
You can export files with the bulk exporter in three different ways:
•

Enter export parameters directly into the command line

•

Creating a .ini file that specifies the export parameters, then reference this
.ini file in the command line

•

Creating a .bat or .cmd batch file that specifies the export parameters for
multiple files, then run this batch file directly in the command line

All exported OpenSpace layers require you to specify at least four parameters in the
command line following the xmapexport command.
The required exporting parameters include (text in red reflect the user's
information):
•

source-server=the SQL server where the database for exporting resides
Note If the server was created on your local machine, type
localhost\xmap6 (or localhost\delormemapping if the server was created in
a previous version of XMap). If you are connecting to an "external" server,
see your Database Administrator to obtain the server name information.

•

source-db=the OpenSpace database the layers are being exported from

•

output-file=the file format and extension for the exported layers

•

source-layer=the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported
OR
source-layerid=the identification number of the layer in the openspace
database

Optional exporting parameters include (text in red reflect the user's information):

112

•

query=name of the query being referenced
OR
queryid=identification number of the query in the database being
referenced

•

attributes=the name of attribute field to include in the exported layer
Note If this parameter is left blank, all attribute fields in the layer will be
exported. Also, not all attribute field data types that are supported in XMap
are supported in the exported file formats.

Working With GIS
To Export Multiple Files Using the Command Line
All export command lines of this type begin with xmapexport in the command line.
All parameters are separated by a single space and parsed with -- on the command
line.
1. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
2. Type the parameters into the command line. An example of the format would
be:
xmapexport --source-server=localhost\delormemapping --sourcedb=database_test --output-file-file=C:\gisdata\states.shp --sourcelayer=states
3. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is exported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the file
to export (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
Note To send the results of a command to a logfile, type '>path\filename.log 2>1'
at the end of the command. Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not
appear in the command line. If no path is specified, the logfile will be created in the
default target directory.
To Export Files Creating an .ini File
This option works on a single file basis using the parameters described in previous
sections. You can create the initialization file (.ini) with a text editor such as Notepad
or Wordpad. All parameters are separated by a return in the .ini file. The name and
path of the .ini file are referenced in the command line.
1. Open your preferred text editing program, such as Wordpad or Notepad.
2. Type the following export parameters in the text document:
•

source-server=the SQL server where the database for exporting resides

•

source-db=the OpenSpace database from which the layers are being
exported

•

output-file=the file format and extension for the exported layers

•

source layer=the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported
OR
sourcelayerid=the identification number of the layer in the OpenSpace
database

The following parameters are optional:
•

query=name of the query being referenced
OR
queryid=identification number of the query in the database being
referenced

•

attributes=the name of the attribute field to include in the exported
layer
Note If this parameter is left blank, all attribute fields in the layer will
be exported.

3. Save the text document with an .ini extension (rather than a .txt extension).
4. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.

113

XMap User Guide
5. Type the following parameters in the command line: xmapexport=-the path
to the .ini file you created in steps 1-3.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is exported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the file
to export (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
To Export Files Creating a Batch File
This option allows you to automate several iterations of export with a user-created
batch file. You can create batch files with a text editor such as Notepad or Wordpad.
Each line of the batch file pertains to a single export command line and contains the
same parameters as would be specified with manual entry in the command line.
Multiple layers located in different OpenSpace databases can be exported into
different file formats and directories using this method.
1. Open your preferred text editing program, such as Wordpad or Notepad.
2. Type the export parameters in the text document.
Note Ensure that the text is contained within a single line and there are no
character returns.
3. Save the text document with a .bat or .cmd extension (rather than a .txt
extension).
4. From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click the XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter option.
5. Type the path for the .bat/.cmd file you created in steps 1-3 in the command
line (for example, c:\test_batch.bat).
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
A confirmation message displays after the file is exported; the message
includes the file name, number of geometries, and the time it took for the
file(s) to export (in days, hours, minutes, and seconds).
To send the results of a command to a logfile, type '>path\filename.log 2>1' at the
end of the command. Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear
in the command line. If no path is specified, the logfile will be created in the default
target directory.

Bulk Exporting Parameters

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Type xmapexport on the command line and then press the ENTER key on your
keyboard to display a list of instructions and general required export parameters;
parameters vary based on the type of files you are exporting.
All OpenSpace layers that you export require you to specify at least four parameters
in the command line following the xmapexport command.
The required exporting parameters include (text in red reflect the user's
information):

114

•

source-server=the SQL server where the database for exporting resides

•

source-db=the OpenSpace database the layers are being exported from

Working With GIS
•

output-file=the file format and extension for the exported layers

•

source-layer=the name of the OpenSpace layer being exported
OR
source-layerid=the identification number of the layer in the OpenSpace
database

Optional exporting parameters include (text in red reflect the user's information):
•

query=name of the query being referenced
OR
queryid=identification number of the query in the database being
referenced

•

attributes=the name of the attribute column to include in the exported
layer
Note If this parameter is left blank, all attribute columns will be exported.

•

relax-polygon=yes|no (When no (default value,) polygons may be
restructured when exporting a shapefile to ensure they conform to the
shapefile standard; if the restructuring fails, the polygon is excluded. When
yes, all polygons are exported without being restructured.

To send the results of a command to a logfile, type '>path\filename.log 2>1' at the
end of the command. Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not appear
in the command line. If no path is specified, the logfile will be created in the default
target directory.

Managing Layers in Your Workspace
Workspace Overview

Some of the features that are introduced in this topic are not
included in XMap Professional.
The Workspace subtab is the primary area for using the GIS tab. You can use the
Workspace subtab to manage and analyze layers in your databases, as well as
manage the databases themselves.
What is a Layer?
A layer consists of geometries (points, lines, or polygons) that have corresponding
attribute records and contain information that describes the properties of the
geometries. In the GIS tab, a layer is considered to be the contents of an imported
file that you can view and analyze on the map.
What is a Workspace?
A workspace is the area where you import layers to a database and visualize the
data on the map. Within this area is a table that displays in the center of the
Workspace subtab. To modify which columns display in the workspace, right-click the
bar at the top of the table to see all of the available columns (column names with a
selected check box are currently displaying in the table). You can also sort the table
by a particular column by clicking the column you want to sort by, change the order
of the workspace columns by dragging a column to the desired location, or resize the
width of the columns by dragging the line that separates the column names to a
different position.
115

XMap User Guide
Your workspace is saved in your current project. Each time you create a new project,
the workspace is reset; resetting a workspace does not delete layers.
Managing Databases
Use the Database Manager utility in XMap to:
•

Create a new database

•

Delete an existing database

•

Connect to a server

•

Add users to a server

•

Remove a server

•

Add/remove database users

•

Activate/deactivate databases

•

Create user subscriptions

Managing the Layers in a Database
Use the Layers button in the Workspace subtab to make changes to the local
workspace, such as:
•

Create a new layer to add to a database

•

Import a layer into a database

•

Delete a layer from a database

•

Add a layer from a database to your workspace

•

Remove a layer from your workspace

•

Export a layer as a Shapefile, GML file, text file, or DeLorme OpenSpace
Transfer File

•

Refresh all layers in the workspace (from the database)

•

Rename a layer in a database

•

Copy a layer from one database to another

Modifying How Your Layers Display on the Map
Once you highlight a layer in your workspace, you can use the Tools button (or rightclick menu) to modify how the layer displays on the map. Use the Tools button to:
•

Classify your layer according to the attributes (properties) of the layer

•

Symbolize your layer so that you have complete control of how the layer
displays on the map

•

Label your layer by using a formula based on the attributes in the layer

•

Modify the display properties of a layer

•

View a legend of the visual characteristics of a layer

•

Create a buffer around geometries in a layer

•

Open the Options dialog box to modify the default layer settings

Publishing Your Layer Information to the Web
Once you configure the layers, you can publish them on an XMap Web site and view
them with a Web browser. Use the XMap Web functionality in the Workspace subtab
to view, remove, download, and manage published layers on your XMap Web site.
You can also use XMap Web to share layers.

116

Working With GIS

Downloading a Layer from XMap Web

This Help topic describes features that are available only in
XMap Professional.
Use the Download option to download a layer from an XMap Web site.
To Download a Layer
Use the following steps to download a layer from an XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button and then click Download.
4. From the Select Site drop-down list, select the site that includes the layer
you want to download.
The available layers on that site display in the download table.
Note Only permanent sites display in the Select Site drop-down list.
5. Select the layer you want to download.
6. Click Download.
7. Click OK.

Importing a Layer Into a Database

Not all of the import types listed in this Help topic are
available in XMap Professional.
You can import ESRI (.shp, .e00), MapInfo (.mif, .tab), AutoCAD (.dxf, .dwf, .dwg),
OGIS Geographic Markup Language (.gml, .xml), Geocode Types (.asc, .csv, .dbf,
.txt, .mdb, .xls. .tab), XData datasets (.dds), DeLorme draw files (.an1), and
DeLorme OpenSpace Transfer Files (.openspace) into a database that you can then
query, classify, symbolize, and label. The import process depends on the type of file
you are importing (if the file contains spatial reference information, if it is a geocode
file type, etc.). You can also import layers from an ESRI ArcSDE database.
You can import a new layer, import a layer to append to an existing layer, or import
a layer to replace an existing layer.
To Import a Layer from a File
Use the following steps to import a layer from a file.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, point to Import, and then click New Layer,
Append Layer, or Replace Layer.
The Import Layer wizard opens.
OR
on the toolbar, and then click Import Click the Import Layers tool
New Layer, Import - Append Layer, or Import - Replace Layer.
4. If you are an XMap GIS Enterprise user, under Source, select File.

117

XMap User Guide

5. Under Data File, click the Browse button
and browse to the file location
you want to import. Once you find the file, double-click it or select it and then
click Open.
The Layer text box is automatically completed with the default layer name (the
file name portion of the file location or the name within the file) once you
select the file you want to import. The file information, such as file name,
location, file geometries, attribute fields, and coordinate boundaries, displays
in the information area.
Notes
•

To rename layers once the file is imported, right-click the layer in
Workspace, click Rename, and then type a new name for the layer.
Layer names need not be unique in the database.

•

If the layer you are importing contains many layers, select the layer you
want to import from the Layer drop-down list. You can import only one
layer at a time.

6. Optional. For a new layer, type a new name for the layer in the Name text
box.
7. From the Database drop-down list, select the database that you want to add
the layer to. You can also select Other to attach a different database to add
layers to. If you are importing a new layer, you can select New if you want to
create a new database.
8. If you are appending or replacing a layer, select the destination layer from
the Layer drop-down list.
9. Click Next.
10. If you are importing a layer that contains spatial reference information
(coordinates, datum, and projection), a progress bar displays and the import
process is complete.
OR
If you are importing a layer that does not contain spatial reference
information and is not a Geocode File Type (.asc, .csv, .dbf, .txt, .mdb, .xls,
.tab), go to the next step.
OR
If you are importing a Geocode File Type...
a. Verify how the data displays under Geocode Fields. If it does not
display correctly, under Data Delimiter Type, select the option that
separates your data into the appropriate columns. If your first row is
not a header row, clear the First Row is Header check box.
b. Under Geocode Fields, click the header for each column and select
the appropriate field option from the drop-down list.
c. Under Geocode By, select how you want to locate your field
information (Street Address, ZIP/Postal Code, or Latitude/Longitude).
Note The available Geocode By options are based on which fields are
assigned to the columns in step b.
d. Click Next. If you selected Street Address or ZIP/Postal Code as the
Geocode By option in step c, the import process is complete. If you
selected the Lat/Lon Geocode By option in step c, proceed to step 7.
OR
If you are importing a layer that contains a relative coordinate system...

118

Working With GIS
a. Select a transform from the Solution drop-down list. For more
information about transforms, see Registering an Image). If you select
Bilinear or Linear Conformal, you must also provide rotation and distance
unit information.
and place one point on the image and a
b. Click the Select tool
corresponding point on the map.
OR
If you do not know the rotation or units of the imported file, click the
Select tool and place two pairs of points on the image and the map. XMap
automatically calculates the rotation and scale automatically when you
place two pairs of points.
Notes
•

If you want to delete a pair of points you have placed, highlight the
.

point information in the Point list and click the delete button
•

You cannot pan or zoom the map when the Select tool is enabled.

•

When you place a point on the image, the coordinates for that
point display in the ImageX and ImageY columns of the Point list;
the coordinates are based on the coordinates in the imported
image file. When you place a point on the map, the coordinates for
that point display in the Latitude and Longitude columns.

•

The X and Y values for the image update as your cursor moves
over the image. Move your cursor over the image to view the X
and Y coordinates for a point in the image for the image at a given
point. You should be able to tell what the coordinate format of the
image is by viewing the X and Y coordinates.

c. Optional. Use the Magnify drop-down list in the upper-left corner of
the Image Window to magnify the image in the Image Window and
zoom in on the map in the Map Window until the image and map are
approximately the same viewing resolution.
Note Use the Magnify function and zoom in on the map to place more
accurate points and more accurately register.
d. Optional. Click the Rotate Left tool
OR
Click the Rotate Right tool

to rotate the image left.

to rotate the image right.

e. Optional. If you want to change the color of the background of the
image, select a color from the Background drop-down list.
f.

Click Done.
The image and map are linked and display at the same scale.
Note Click Cancel at any time to cancel the import process.

11. Under Datum Selection, select a coordinate format from the Coordinate
drop-down list and then select the datum that applies to your imported file
(WGS84, NAD83, or NAD27) from the Datum drop-down list.
If you selected this
coordinate system...

Perform this action...

Lat/Lon

Go to step 8.

119

XMap User Guide
UTM/UPS

Type the applicable zone number and band letter
in the text boxes.

SPCS

Select the applicable zone and units from the
drop-down lists.

Note If you select a coordinate format that does not match the data in the file
you are importing, the information area under Converted Boundaries displays,
"Invalid Boundary Coordinates."
12. Click Finish.
Note If you click Cancel while the progress meter is displaying, it cancels the
import process.

Append and Replace Examples
This topics provides additional information about appending and replacing imported
files. Go to Replace Examples.
Append
This import method is used to append, or merge, a new layer to an existing GIS
layer. The new layer must be of the same geometry type as the existing layer, and
attribute columns must have an exact name match in order to append to each other.
In addition, like-named attributes in the incoming layer must be of the same type
family in order to append. The importer will be as tolerant as possible within a type
family, allowing data to convert or widen. For example, a 100-character string
column in the source layer will widen to match a 200-character string in the target
layer, and vice versa.
The following list shows which attributes are compatible, and the direction of
compatibility:
Boolean -> Byte -> Small Interger -> Interger -> Big Integer
String <-> URLs
String -> Memo
Float -> Double
Datetime
Document
Currency
Memo
Notes
•

By definition, any attribute is automatically compatible with itself, and its
precision, if applicable, can widen or narrow.

•

The master attribute and changes tables of the target layer are not emptied.
The incoming data is written to the primary attributes table. The changes
table has an entry written to it for each geometry that is added to the target
layer.

•

Geocoded point layers can be appended only if all their attribute columns
match AND the source layer is geocoded by the same procedure as the target
layer (Address & Address, Zip Code & Zip Code, Lat/Lon & Lat Lon).

•

Layers that are left unregistered during the import process and have not had
any registration applied to them after import can only have other
unregistered layers appended to them. This is possible for .dxf, .dwf, and
.dwg files that have no spatial reference to the earth surface. However, once

120

Working With GIS
registration is applied to a layer, it cannot have other unregistered layers
appended to it.
Append Example
Below are two examples of how an append operation would affect the primary
attribute table. Any attribute columns present in the import but absent in the target
layer will be added. Any columns absent in the import but present in the target layer
will be left in place. All unpopulated records are given NULL values. The spatial effect
of Append is the same as a copy/paste operation;abutting or overlapping geometries
are not joined.
Example 1

SOURCE LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

TARGET LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 46

Pavement

DeLorme Drive

Pavement

Merrill Lane

Dirt

RESULT
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

Rt 46

Pavement

DeLorme Drive

Pavement

Merrill Lane

Dirt

Example 2

SOURCE LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

121

XMap User Guide
TARGET LAYER
DFCC

FOO

BAR

1566

RESULT
ID

Name

Type

DFCC

FOO

BAR

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

1566

OpenSpace Considerations

When appending OpenSpace layers, the following rules apply:
1) If the source layer has a column with a formula that differs from the formula of
the same column in the target layer, the target layer's formula overwrites the
source's layer's formula and is automatically applied to the entire layer.
2) If the target layer is schema 310-330, its classification overwrites the source
layer's classification(s). If the target layer is schema 400+, all classifications are
preserved in both the target layer and source layer. The target layer's active and
default classifications are adopted in the resulting layer.
3) If the source layer and target layer have identically named Extended Attribute
Sets that contain different attributes and join rules, the attribute sets are
automatically unlinked from the source layer when appending occurs. The target
layer maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets.
4) If the source layer has a different label structure than the target layer, the target
layer's formula is adopted and automatically applied to the entire layer.
Replace
This import method is used to replace, or overwrite, an existing GIS layer with a new
layer. The new layer must be of the same geometry type as the existing layer, and
attribute columns must have an exact name match in order to append to each other.
In addition, like-named attributes in the incoming layer must be of the same type
family in order to append. The importer will be as tolerant as possible within a type
family, allowing data to convert or widen. For example, a 100-character string
column in the source layer will widen to match a 200-character string in the target
layer, and vice versa.
The following list shows which attributes are compatible, and the direction of
compatibility:

122

Working With GIS
Boolean -> Byte -> Small Interger -> Interger -> Big Integer
String <-> URLs
String -> Memo
Float -> Double
Datetime
Document
Currency
Memo
Notes
•

The master attribute and changes tables of the target layer are emptied. The
extended attributes tables are not emptied, but they must be manually
rejoined after the import process is completed. The changes table has an
entry written to it indicating a replace operation occurred to ensure
OpenSpace Synchronization still operates. The changes table has an entry
written to it for each geometry that is added to the target layer.

•

By definition, any attribute is automatically compatible with itself, and its
precision, if applicable, can widen or narrow.

•

The same conditions that exist for Append for Geocoded point layers and
unregistered .dxf, etc layers also exist for Replace.

Replace Examples
Below are two examples of how a replace operation would affect the primary
attribute table. Any attribute columns present in the import but absent in the target
layer will be added. Unpopulated records are given NULL values. Any columns absent
in the import but present in the target layer will be left in place, the data will be
erased and populated with NULL values. The spatial affect of Replace is the same as
deleting all geometries in the target layer and pasting in all geometries from the
source layer.
Example 1

SOURCE LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

TARGET LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 46

Pavement

DeLorme Drive

Pavement

Merrill Lane

Dirt

123

XMap User Guide
RESULT
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

Example 2

SOURCE LAYER
ID

Name

Type

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

TARGET LAYER
DFCC

FOO

BAR

1566

RESULT
ID

Name

Type

DFCC

FOO

BAR

Rt 1

Pavement

Deering Ave

Pavement

Higgins Rd

Dirt

OpenSpace Considerations

124

Working With GIS
automatically unlinked from the target layer when replace occurs. The source layer
maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets, and the new result layer adopts it.
4) If the source layer has a different label structure than the target layer, the target
layer's formula is adopted and automatically applied to the entire layer.
3) If the source layer and target layer have identically named Extended Attribute
Sets that contain different attributes and join rules, the attribute sets are
automatically unlinked from the target layer when replace occurs. The source layer
maintains the link for its Extended Attribute Sets, and the new result layer adopts it.

Creating a New Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can create new layers by:
•

Creating an empty layer

•

Duplicating a layer

•

Creating a layer from geometry selections on the map

•

Creating a layer from query results

To Create an Empty Layer
Use the following steps to create an empty layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, point to Create, and then click Empty Layer.
The Create Empty Layer dialog box opens.
4. Select the layer type: Point, Line, or Polygon.
5. From the Shape drop-down list, select the shape for the layer type.
6. In the Name text box, type a name for the layer.
7. From the Target Database drop-down list, select the database where you
want to store the new layer. If the database is not listed, select Other from
the drop-down list and attach the existing database. If you want to create a
new database, select New.
8. Click OK.
To Duplicate a Layer
Important This feature allows for cross-database transfers and is the mechanism
that you should use to upgrade an XMap 4.5 database to an XMap 5.0 or later
database.
This option is available only for the selected layer in the workspace.
Use the following steps to duplicate a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. In the Workspace table, click the layer that you want to duplicate.
4. Click the Layers button, point to Create, and then click Copy Layer.
The Create Copy of Layer dialog box opens.

125

XMap User Guide
5. From the Source Layer drop-down list, select the layer you want to copy.
The layer you selected in step 3 displays in the Layer Name text box. To
change the layer name, type a new name in the box.
6. From the Target Database drop-down list, select the database where you
want to store the new layer. If the database is not listed, select Other from
the drop-down list and attach the existing database. If you want to create a
new database, select New.
7. Click OK.
To Create a New Layer From Current Geometry Selections
This option is activated when geometries in the selected layer in the workspace have
been selected with a GIS tool or within the Attributes Datasheet View. Only one layer
can have active selections at a time.
Use the following steps to create a new layer from current geometry selections.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, point to Create, and then click Layer from
Selection.
The Create Layer from Selection dialog box opens.
4. To change the layer name, type a new name in the Name text box.
5. From the Target Database drop-down list, select the database where you
want to store the new layer. If the database is not listed, select Other from
the drop-down list and attach the existing database. If you want to create a
new database, select New.
6. Click OK.
To Create a New Layer From Query Results
This option is available only when there is an active query for the selected layer in
the workspace.
Use the following steps to create a new layer using query results.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, point to Create, and then click Layer from Query
Results.
The Create Layer from Query Results dialog box opens. The name of the
active query displays in the Active Query text box and the number of query
results display.
Note To change the active query, click Cancel to exit the Layer from Query
Results dialog, click the Query subtab, and select the query you want to
make active from the Query drop-down list. To proceed, repeat steps 2–4.
4. To change the layer name, type a new name in the Name text box.
5. From the Target Database drop-down list, select the database where you
want to store the new layer. If the database is not listed, select Other from
the drop-down list and attach the existing database. If you want to create a
new database, select New.
6. Click OK.

126

Working With GIS

Viewing Layer Information in the Workspace Subtab

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
The Workspace subtab displays all of the GIS layers in your project; you can view
the following information:
•

The layer name (right-click and then click Rename to edit; double-click to
center the map on the layer)

•

The database in which the layer is stored

•

The server on which the database resides

•

The date on which the layer was last updated

•

The date on which the layer was created

•

The Z-level (display order) of the layer

•

The map on which the layer displays; primary, secondary, or both (doubleclick to edit)

•

The layer type (point, line, or polygon)

•

The minimum data zoom level at which that layer displays on the map
(double-click to edit)

•

The maximum data zoom level at which the layer displays on the map
(double-click to edit)

•

The geometry shape (spherical, planar, topological (line layers only),
geocode, unregistered, or redline)

•

The database version used for the layer (401 represents an XMap 6 database;
400 represents an XMap 5.x database; 310 represents an XMap 4.5 database)

•

The user's role for the database

•

The number of geometries in the layer

•

The active classification for the layer (double-click to edit the classification)—
available only when more than one classification has been created for the
layer

If any of the columns do not display, right-click the table heading in the Workspace
subtab and click the column name you want to view. To show/hide a column from
the table, right-click the table heading and click the column name you want to
show/hide. You can also right-click the table heading and click Show All Columns to
view all of the available columns.
Note To sort columns, click the column header, drag it to the new position, and
drop it. The sort order is saved in your project file.

Adding and Removing Layers In Your Workspace

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can use the Manage Layers function to change the set of layers currently listed
in your workspace. Click the remove Database Connection button
Manage Layers dialog box to deactivate the selected source database.

in the

127

XMap User Guide
To Add a Layer to Your Workspace
Use the following steps to add a layer to your workspace.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, and then click Manage.
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
OR
on the toolbar.
Click the Manage Layers button
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
4. From the Source Database drop-down list, select the database that contains
the layer(s) you want to add to your workspace or select Other to attach a
new database to add layers to.
The available layers for that database display under Layers in the Database.
5. Under Layers in the Database, click the layer that you want to add to your
.
workspace and then click the Add button
The layer displays in the Layers in the Workspace list.
OR
Under Layers in the Database, double-click the layer that you want to add
to your workspace.
The layer displays in the Layers in the Workspace list.
Note You can also click the Add All button
database to your workspace.

to add all of the layers in the

6. Click OK.
To Remove a Layer From Your Workspace
This process removes the layer from the workspace, but does not remove it from the
database. For information on removing a layer from a database, see Deleting a
Layer.
Use the following steps to remove a layer from your workspace.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button, and then click Manage.
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
OR
on the toolbar.
Click the Manage Layers button
The Manage Layers dialog box opens.
4. From the Source Database drop-down list, select the database that contains
the workspace you want to remove or select Other to attach a new database
you want to modify.
The available layers for that database display under Layers in the Database
and the layers in the workspace display under Layers in the Workspace.
5. Under Layers in the Workspace, click the layer in the workspace that you
.
want to remove and then click the Remove button
The layer displays in the Layers in the Database list.
OR

128

Working With GIS
Under Layers in the Workspace, double-click the layer in the workspace
that you want to remove.
The layer displays in the Layers in the Database list.
Note You can also click the Remove All button
layers in the workspace.

to remove all of the

6. Click OK.
Note You can also remove a layer from the database by highlighting the layer(s) in
the workspace table, clicking the Layers button, and then clicking Remove. Or, just
right-click the highlighted layers that you want to remove and click Remove.

Viewing a Layer on the Map

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can view several layers on the map at once.
To View a Layer on the Map
Use the following steps to view a single layer or multiple layers on the map.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Optional. Add layers to your workspace.
4. To view a layer on the map, ensure the check box next to each layer you
want to display is selected.
OR
To view multiple layers on the map, hold the CTRL key on your keyboard
while you click each of the layers you want to display. Then, click the Layers
button and click the Check Selected option.
5. To determine which map (primary, secondary, or both) in which to view the
layer, double-click the Map column for the layer you want to view. Then,
select Both, Primary, or Secondary.
Note If you want to hide multiple layers on the map, hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys
on your keyboard while you click each of the layers you want to hide. Then, click the
Layers button and click the Clear Selected option.

Viewing a Legend for all Visible Layers

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Legend feature to view a legend for all of the visible layers in your
workspace. The legend title is the name of the layer's active classification, which is
set to match the layer name by default. Use the Symbolize dialog box to modify the
Legend Class labels.
To View the Legend
Use the following steps to view the legend for all visible layers.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace tab if it is not selected.

129

XMap User Guide
3. Select the check box next to each layer you want to make visible in the
legend.
Note To select multiple layers, hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys on your
keyboard while you click each of the layers you want to include in the legend.
Then, click the Layers button and click Check Selected.
4. Click Tools and then click Legend to view the legend information.
OR
Right-click the layer(s) for which you want to view legend information and
click Legend.
5. Click the Close button
Legend window.

in the upper-right corner of the legend to close the

Deleting a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you delete a layer, it is permanently removed from the database.
To Delete a Layer
Use the following steps to delete a layer in a database.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. In the Workspace list, click the layer you want to delete. To highlight
multiple layers for deletion, hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys on your keyboard
while you click each layer you want to delete.
4. Right-click the layer(s) in the list and click Delete.
A confirmation message displays.
OR
Click the Layers button and then click Delete.
A confirmation message displays.
5. Click Yes to delete the layer(s) from the database.
Note You can also delete layers from a database using the Manage Layers dialog
box. Click the Manage Layers tool

on the toolbar; under Layers in the

Database, click the layers you want to delete; and then click the Delete button

Exporting a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you edit your layer, you may want to export the layer to another program that
supports shapefiles, GML files, text files (point layers in XMap 5.0 GIS Enterprise and
later only), or DeLorme OpenSpace transfer files (XMap 4.5 and later).
DeLorme OpenSpace transfer files contain all of your GIS data, including
classification, symbolization, attributes, query information, etc. (shapefiles and GML
files do not). If you have an active query against the layer you are exporting, you

130

Working With GIS
can choose to export the results of the query only. You can also control which
attribute fields are exported by turning them on/off in the Attributes Design View.
Note Not all attribute field data types are supported in the export file types (for
example, .shp, .gml, .txt).
To Export a Layer
Use the following steps to export a layer as a shapefile, GML file, text file, or
DeLorme OpenSpace transfer file.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Highlight the layer you want to export in the workspace table.
4. Edit the layer as needed, by changing the attributes, classifying, symbolizing,
querying, etc.
5. Click the Layers button and then click Export.
The Export Layer dialog box opens.
6. Browse to the location where you want to save the exported file, type the file
name in the File Name text box, and, from the Save as Type drop-down
list, select to save the file as a shapefile, ESRI GML file, text file, or DeLorme
OpenSpace Transfer File.
Note If you choose .shp as the type, a .prj file that stores all of the project
information for the layer is created.
7. If you want to export only the active query results, select the Export Results
of Active Query check box.
8. Click Save.

Refreshing Your Database Connection

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
XMap has a Refresh View option that refreshes the data connections for each
selected layer in the workspace, getting the latest updates from the SQL server. This
is especially helpful when multiple users are accessing the same layers in a
database.
To Refresh Your Database Connection
Use the following steps to refresh your database connections and get the latest
update from the SQL server.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button and then click Refresh View.
OR
Right-click in the workspace table and click Refresh View.

131

XMap User Guide

Modifying the Properties of a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Layer Properties dialog box to modify a layer's name, minimum and
maximum data zoom levels, geometry shape, layering level and more.
To Modify the Properties of a Layer
Use the following steps to modify the properties of a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer for which you want to view/modify the properties.
4. Right-click the selected layer and then click Properties.
The Layer Properties dialog box opens.
OR
Click the Tools button and then click Properties.
The Layer Properties dialog box opens.
5. To change the layer's name, type a new name in the Layer Name text box.
Tip You can also change a layer's name in the workspace table by clicking
the layer name twice. Be sure to click the layer name twice instead of doubleclicking; double-clicking centers the map on the layer and does not activate
the layer name cell for editing.
6. To change the geometry shape of the layer, select an option from the
Geometry Shape drop-down list.
•

Planar (default)-This geometry shape is best for medium or largescale mapping and is a simpler, and subsequently faster when
performing spatial analysis, way of storing spatial data. It does not
take the curvature of the earth into account, so line and polygon
geometries that span long distances do not appear curved on the map.

•

Spherical-This geometry shape is best for large-scale mapping and is
more complex than Planar. As a result, spatial analysis operations may
take more time. It does take the curvature of the earth into account,
so line and polygon geometries that span long distances appear curved
on the map.
Note Changing a layer to or from the Spherical Geometry type may
lock up the database while you perform the operation.

•

Topological (line layers only)-This geometry shape is used to store
connections between nodes of intersecting lines. Once two or more
nodes are connected, any repositioning of that node automatically
repositions all the line segments that share that node. The Topological
geometry shape is stored as a Planar type.

•

Unregistered (.dxf, .dwg, and .dwf layers only)-This geometry shape
is used for imported layers (dxf, .dwg, .dwf) that have no spatial
reference on the Earth. Until these layers are registered with the
Register tool, you cannot perform spatial analysis. Once registration is
completed for a layer, it is automatically assigned the Planar type.
Geocode (geocoded layers only)-This geometry shape is used for
geocoded point layers and has special attribute properties. When you

•

132

Working With GIS
edit the attributes of a geometry by which the layer was geocoded, the
spatial location of that geometry is repositioned accordingly.
•

Redline (redline layers only)-This geometry shape is used for the GIS
Redline layer automatically produced in Enterprise databases. GIS
Redline layers are special layers that are the repositories of all redlines
produced by the redlining/sync process as part of an Enterprise
database subscription. The Redline geometry shape is stored as a
Planar type.

If the layer is a point layer, Planar is the only Geometry Shape option available
unless the point layer was geocoded and then the option is Geocode Points. If
the layer is a polygon layer, the Geometry Shape options are Planar and
Spherical. If the layer is a line layer, the Geometry Shape options are Planar,
Spherical, and Topological. If the layer is a redline layer, Redline is the only
Geometry Shape available.
Note The Geometry Shape option is disabled when there are uncommitted
edits against the layer.
6. To change the minimum and maximum zoom levels at which the layers
display on the map, select the zoom levels from the Min. Zoom Level and
Max. Zoom Level drop-down lists.
7. To change on which map the layer is viewed (primary, secondary, or both),
select the option from the Map drop-down list.
8. To change the layering level, click inside the Layering Level text box and
edit the value. For more information, see Reordering Layers.
9. If you want to show labels related to the layer, select the Labels check box.
10. Click OK.

Creating a Buffer Around a Geometry

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Buffer feature in XMap to create a buffer around a geometry based on a
specific distance. This tool is helpful in GIS spatial analysis when proximity issues are
of concern, such as site planning or risk assessment.
To Create a Buffer
Use the following steps to create a buffer around a geometry.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click Tools and then click Buffer.
The Buffer Layer dialog box opens.
4. From the Source Layer drop-down list, select the layer that for which you
want to create a buffer (only layers in the workspace will display in this list).
5. Select the Source Geometries option:
•

All to build buffers around all geometries in the source layer.

•

Selected to build buffers around selected geometries in the source
layer. (Selections are made with the GIS tools on the toolbar or by
selecting attribute records within the Attributes subtab.)

133

XMap User Guide
Note This option is grayed out when there are no selections in the
source layer.
•

Query Results to build buffers around geometries in the source layer
that are contained within the results of the active query.
Note This option is grayed out when there is no active query in the
source layer.

5. Under Output Location, select New Layer or Existing Layer.
6. If you selected the New Layer option in step 5, specify the name of the new
layer in the Layer Name text box. Then, select the database for the new
layer from the Target Database drop-down list or select Other to attach a
new database to add layers to.
OR
If you selected the Existing Layer option in step 5, from the Layer Name
drop-down list, select an existing polygon layer in your workspace that will
include the buffer information.
7. Type the buffer distance in the Distance text box. Then, select the distance
measurement (feet, meters, miles, kilometers, nautical miles) from the dropdown list.
8. Select the Merge Overlapping Buffer Regions check box if you want to
convert buffer polygons that overlap each other into one continuous polygon.
OR
Clear the Merge Overlapping Buffer Regions check box if you want to
retain the individual buffer polygons even when the buffers overlap.
9. Click OK.

Adding Geometries to a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an empty/existing
layer.
Notes
•

on the toolbar, the default map
When you click the Edit Points tool
mode, which provides several right-click features when you click the map, is
disabled on the map area (primary, secondary, or both) where the layer is
displayed. To return to the default map mode, click the Navigation tool
on the toolbar.

•

While adding polygon or line geometries, you can disable snapping by holding
the ALT key on your keyboard. To enable the measurement information box,
which can display on the map when adding geometries, hold the SHIFT key
while you draw.

•

To undo your last action, click the Undo button

•

To save all of the changes you make to a layer, click the Manual Commit

your last action, click the Redo button

134

on the toolbar. To redo

Working With GIS

Mode tool
. If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each
time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab, click
the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic
Commit Mode tool

to automatically commit your changes.

To Add Geometries to a Layer
Use the following steps to add geometries (points, line, or polygons) to a layer.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
on the toolbar
2. To add points to a point layer, click the Draw Point tool
and then click the location on the map where you want to place the points.
OR
on the toolbar and
To add lines to a line layer, click the Draw Line tool
then click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment
you want to add, or drag the cursor to create a freehand line. To finish the
line, double-click the last point of the line.
If the layer to which you are adding lines to is a topological line layer, the
start and end nodes are annotated with the following symbols:
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with three
or more nodes (for example, a four-way intersection). The number on
the symbol indicates the number of connections at that node.
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with two
other nodes (for example, a three-way intersection).
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with one
other node (for example, a two-way intersection).
Used for the start or end node of a line that has no connections with
other nodes (for example, a dead end).
A node and a shape point are coincident.
OR
on the
To add polygons to a polygon layer, click the Draw Polygon tool
toolbar and then click the map to enter each point of the polygon. To finish the
polygon, double-click the last point of the polygon.

135

XMap User Guide

Editing Points in a Polygon/Line Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.

on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS
Use the Edit Points button
data in an empty/existing layer.
Notes
on the toolbar, the default map
When you click the Edit Points tool
mode, which provides several right-click features when you click the map, is
disabled on the map area (primary, secondary, or both) where the layer is

•

displayed. To return to the default map mode, click the Navigation tool
on the toolbar.
•

To undo your last action, click the Undo button
your last action, click the Redo button

•

on the toolbar. To redo

To save all of the changes you make to a layer, click the Manual Commit
Mode tool
. If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each
time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab, click
the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic
Commit Mode tool

•

to automatically commit your changes.

Many right-click options are available when editing topological lines,
including:
•

Deleting points

•

Joining/splitting lines

•

Breaking the selected node—breaks the selected node from the
nodes it is connected to but keeps the other nodes connected

•

Breaking multiple nodes—breaks all nodes away from each other at
the selected point of connection

•

Extending a line

•

Deleting an object

To Edit Points in a Polygon/Line Layer
Use the following steps to edit shape points in a polygon/line layer.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the polygon/line
layer you want to edit.
on the toolbar and select a geometry. The
2. Click the Edit Points tool
shape points in the geometry display as white squares outlined in black.
If you edit a line or polygon layer, the start and end nodes are annotated with
the following symbols:
Used when the edited shapepoint is being snapped to the start node

136

Working With GIS
of a polygon geometry or the end node of a line geometry.
Used when the edited shapepoint is being snapped to the shapepoint
of another geometry.
Used when the edited shapepoint is being snapped to the edge of
another geometry when there are no shape points.
If you edit a topological line layer, the start and end nodes of the lines in the
layer are annotated with the following symbols:
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with three
or more nodes (for example, a four-way intersection). The number on
the symbol indicates the number of connections at that node.
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with two
other nodes (for example, a three-way intersection).
Used for a start or end node of a line that has connections with one
other node (for example, a two-way intersection).
Used for the start or end node of a line that has no connections with
other nodes (for example, a dead end).
A node and a shape point are coincident.
3. Move your cursor over the shape point you want to edit. The cursor turns into
a

when you hover over shape points.

4. Drag the point you want to edit to the new position.

Moving or Changing the Scale of a Geometry

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.

on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in an
Use the Edit tool
empty/existing layer.
Notes
•

•

To undo your last action, click the Undo button
your last action, click the Redo button

•

on the toolbar. To redo

To save all of the changes you make to a layer, click the Manual Commit
Mode tool

. If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each

137

XMap User Guide
time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab, click
the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic
Commit Mode tool

to automatically commit your changes.

•

You cannot edit read-only geometries.

•

Hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard to add/remove an object to/from a
multi-selection.

To Move a Geometry
Use the following steps to move a geometry.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
2. Click the Edit tool on the toolbar

3. Move your cursor over the geometry (a gray box displays over each object as
you hover it) and click the object you want to edit. Small white squares
indicate the edges and corners of the object.
Note To move multiple geometries, drag your cursor to encompass all of the
geometries you want to move. Then, position your cursor over one of the
geometries and move it in the direction you want to move all geometries.
4. Drag the object to the new location.
To Change the Scale of a Geometry
Use the following steps to change the scale of a geometry.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
2. Click the Edit tool on the toolbar

Rotating a Geometry

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.

on the toolbar to edit existing GIS data or build GIS data in
Use the Rotate tool
an empty/existing layer.
Notes
•

138

Working With GIS
on the toolbar.
•

To undo your last action, click the Undo button
your last action, click the Redo button

•

on the toolbar. To redo

To save all of the changes you make to a layer, click the Manual Commit
. If you do not want to be prompted to save your changes each
Mode tool
time you switch the Active Layer or when you work outside of the tab, click
the down arrow next to the commit changes tool and select the Automatic
Commit Mode tool

•

to automatically commit your changes.

The rotate tool is not available for topological line layers.

To Rotate a Geometry
Use the following steps to rotate a geometry.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
2. Click the Rotate tool

on the toolbar.

3. Click the geometry on the map that you want to rotate.
4. Position your cursor over one of the green circles and drag the object until it
has reached the new position.
Note Geometries are rotated based on the geographic center point of the
object, which may produce confusing results.

Deleting a Geometry

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.

Use the Edit tool

on the toolbar to delete geometries on the map.

Notes
•

•

To undo your last action, click the Undo button

•

To save all of the changes you make to a layer, click the Manual Commit

your last action, click the Redo button

139

XMap User Guide

Commit Mode tool
•

to automatically commit your changes.

You cannot edit read-only geometries.

To Delete a Geometry
Use the following steps to delete a geometry.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
2. Click the Edit tool on the toolbar

3. On the map, click the geometry you want to delete.
4. Right-click the geometry and click Delete Object.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.

140

Working With GIS

Making COGO Edits

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
COGO editing (coordinate geometry editing) is used for precision data creation or
editing. Points, lines, or polygons can be built, edited, or centered by coordinates,
angle/distance measurements, or bearing/distance measurements.
COGO editing is useful when you know the exact location of points or the shape
points of the line or polygon geometries you would like to create or edit. It is also
helpful when you know the exact location of the points, lines, or polygons on which
you want to center.
To Make COGO Edits
Use the following steps to use the COGO dialog box.
1. Select the layer you want to edit from the Active Layer drop-down list on the
toolbar.
.
2. Click the COGO tool
The COGO Editing dialog box opens.
3. If you want to place your point/line/polygon by coordinate, click the
Coordinates tab. The information that is required in this tab varies
depending on the coordinate system chosen in the Display settings in the
Options dialog box.
OR
If you want to place your point/line/polygon by angle and distance
measurements, click the Angle tab. The angle information is based on the
angle from the last point that was placed. The distance information is the
distance from the last point that was placed.
OR
If you want to place your point/line/polygon by bearing and distance
measurements, click the Bearing tab. The bearing information is not related
to the last point, rather fixed angular measurements.
4. Select the Zoom to Points check box if you want the map to center on each
COGO placement you make in the next step.
OR
Clear the Zoom to Points check box if you do not want the map to center on
the COGO points.
5. For point layers, type the coordinates/angle/bearing of the point in the
applicable text boxes and then click Apply. Repeat this step for each point
that you want to place.
OR
For line layers, type the coordinates/angle/bearing for the first point in the
line in the applicable text boxes and then click Apply. Repeat this step for
each line segment that you want to place.
OR
For polygon layers, type the coordinates/angle/bearing of a corner of the
polygon in the applicable text boxes and then click Apply. Repeat this step
for each corner of the polygon that you want to place.
6. Click Finish to close the COGO point/line/polygon.

141

XMap User Guide
in the upper-right corner of the COGO Editing
7. Click the Close button
dialog box to close the dialog box.
Note
You can also center single/multiple geometries with the COGO tool.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer you
want to edit.
on the toolbar and then, on the map, click the
2. Click the Edit tool
geometry (or geometries) that you want to center.
on the toolbar.
3. Click the COGO tool
The COGO Editing dialog box opens.
4. Adjust the coordinates/angle/bearing values to center the geometries at
that location.

Analyzing Topological Line Layers

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.

on the toolbar to make selections on the map that
Use the Magic Wand tool
allow you to edit the attributes of the selected lines. You can run dynamic attribute
queries against topological line geometries based on connectivity. The tool works by
highlighting all line geometries (within the extent of the current map display) that
have the same attribute criteria as the selected line and that are connected to a line
selected with the tool. The magic wand tool becomes active on the toolbar only when
a topological line layer is selected in the Active Layer drop-down list.
Notes
•

Hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard to add additional geometries to the
selection and query them one at a time.

•

The Magic Wand tool is unavailable for spatial queries.

•

XMap Professional users can access User Input queries but cannot create queries
or edit the topological line layers.

To Analyze Topological Line Layers
Use the following steps to analyze a topological line layer.
1. Ensure you have a topological line layer in your workspace and then select it
from the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar.
2. Click the Query tab and create a query.
3. Select the User Input check box.
The query displays in the Magic Wand drop-down list.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 for each query you want to create.
5. Select the query from the Magic Wand drop-down list.
The cursor changes to selection mode.
6. Click to select a line on the map.
All lines that satisfy the attribute query criteria equal to the selected line and

142

Working With GIS
are connected to that line will be highlighted.
Note Only the section of that line that is displaying in the map rectangle is
selected. To select a larger segment, press the W key on your keyboard or
click the Magic Wand tool on the toolbar again.

Copying/Cutting and Pasting Geometries

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can copy/cut and paste geometries in a layer or between layers.
To Copy/Cut and Paste Geometries
Use the following steps to copy/cut and paste geometries in a layer or between
layers.
1. From the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar, select the layer that
includes the geometry (or geometries) you want to copy.
2. Click the Edit tool on the toolbar

3. On the map, right-click the geometry that you want to copy/cut.
4. To copy the geometry, click Copy.
OR
To cut the geometry from the layer, click Cut.
Note To select multiple geometries to copy at the same time, press the
SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click each geometry.
5. To paste the geometry in the current layer, right-click the location on the map
where you want to paste the geometry and click Paste.
OR
To paste the geometry in a different layer, ensure the layer is in your
workspace (and selected to be shown on the map) and then select a different
layer from the Active Layer drop-down list on the toolbar. Right-click the
map and click Paste.
The geometry is placed in the same location where it was in the original layer.
To move the geometry to a different location, see Moving or Changing the
Scale of a Geometry.

Classifying, Symbolizing, and Labeling a Layer
Classifying
Classifying a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can classify a layer based on one of the following three options:
•

Unique Value–When you classify a layer in a database with a unique value,
each attribute with fewer than 100 values displays differently on the map.

143

XMap User Guide
•

Range–When you classify a layer with a range, the data in the layer can be
grouped, given color (or size) characteristics, and labeled so that it can be
visually analyzed.

•

Single Value–When you classify a layer in a database with a single value, you
make all the records look the same on the map. For example, they all have
the same fill color on the map.

Classifying a Layer with a Unique Value

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you classify a layer in a database with a unique value, each attribute with
fewer than 100 values that you classified is put into its own class and displays
differently on the map.
Note If you classify a layer with a unique value on a float/double column,
undesirable results may occur due to precision limitations. Try classifying the layer
with a range instead.
To Classify a Layer with a Unique Value

Use the following steps to classify a layer with a unique value.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer you want to classify.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. To edit/view an existing classification for the selected layer, select it from the
Classification drop-down list.
OR
To create a new classification for the selected layer, click the Manage button
and then click New.
6. From the Type drop-down list, select Unique Value.
7. From the Field drop-down list, select the field in your layer that you want to
classify.
Note for small layers Only fields containing fewer than 100 unique values
display in the Field drop-down list. The options in the Field list are based on
the visible attributes in the Design View of the Attributes subtab. When you
select Unique Value as the classification method, all visible numbers and
strings are available in the Field drop-down list.
8. If you selected a numeric field in step 7, select the field by which you want to
divide the field in step 6 from the Normalize By drop-down list.
Note When you select a field to normalize by, classes are created based on
the ratio of data in the first field to the second field for each attribute record.

144

Working With GIS
9. If you selected a numeric field in step 7, select the decimal place to which you
want to round your value from the Round At drop-down list.
10. From the Vary By drop-down list, select how you want to vary your value.
Note The Custom option allows you to customize classifications that do not
follow a set scheme or pattern. If you change the symbolization of a class in
an existing classification, the Vary By option automatically changes to Custom
and any new classes that you add to the classification are assigned the
default symbology for that layer's geometry type; for example, green in color.
11. If you selected Fill Color in step 10, select a color scheme from the Scheme
drop-down list.
•

Sequential–Displays a color that progresses from low to high (or high
to low) in color value.

•

Qualitative–Displays colors that vary in color hue to represent
different legend classes.

•

Diverging–Puts equal emphasis on mid-range critical values and
extremes at both ends of the data range.

Then, select a color pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.
12. Optional. Click the Reverse Order button
your classes are varied.

to reverse the style for how

13. Optional. To edit an existing classification, click the Recalculate button
to recalculate the classification.
14. Optional. To add a class to your classification, click the Add Class button
. Double-click in the Value and/or Legend Label fields to edit the
values.
15. Optional. To remove a class from your classification, click the Remove Class
button

16. Click OK.
Note Once you create a unique value classification, you can use the classification
menu on the toolbar to edit the classification of a selection on the map. The
classification tool on the toolbar is available only for active layers with a unique value
classification and only after you click either the edit points tool, the edit tool, or the
draw tool and select a geometry.

Classifying a Layer with a Range

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you classify a layer with a range, the data in the layer is clustered into classes
based on a statistical algorithm and each class is varied by color or size)
characteristics.

145

XMap User Guide
The Classification drop-down list in the Classify Layer dialog box displays all
classifications created for a layer.
To Classify a Layer with a Range

Use the following steps to classify a layer with a range.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer you want to classify.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. To edit/view an existing classification for the selected layer, select it from the
Classification drop-down list.
OR
To create a new classification for the selected layer, click the Manage button
and then click New.
6. From the Type drop-down list, select Range.
7. From the Field drop-down list, Select the field in your layer that you want to
classify.
Note The options in the Field list are based on the visible layers in the
Design View of the Attributes subtab. When Range is selected as the
classification method, all visible numeric fields are available in the Field dropdown list.
8. From the Normalize By drop-down list, select the field by which you want to
divide the field in step 7.
Note When you select a field to normalize by, classes are created based on
the ratio of data in the first field to the second field for each attribute record.
9. From the Method drop-down list, select the method you want to use.
•

Equal Interval–Divides the range of attribute values into equal sized
sub-ranges.

•

Natural Break–Identifies breakpoints among groups using the Jenk's
Optimization statistical formula and finds groupings and patterns
inherent in the data.

•

Quantile–Divides the range of attribute values so that each group
contains the same number of records in the classification field.

•

Standard Deviation–Measures the difference between a single record
and the average of all of the records in the layer.

•

Maximum Break–Identifies large gaps between groups and finds
groupings and patterns inherent in the data.

•

Custom–Lets you manually update the classification boundaries of any
of the other methods.
Note Minimum and maximum range values cannot overlap.

10. If you selected Standard Deviation in step 9, from the Classes drop-down
list, select the number of standard deviations you want to use.
OR

146

Working With GIS
If you did not select Standard Deviation in step 9, in the Classes text box,
type how many classes you want to set in the range method.
11. From the Round At drop-down list, select the decimal place to which you
want to round your range.
12. From the Vary By drop-down list, select how you want to vary your ranges
(options vary based on layer type).
Note The Custom option is used for classifications that do not follow a set
scheme or pattern and are customized by the user. If you change the
symbolization of a class in an existing classification, the Vary By option will
change to Custom automatically and any new classes that are added to the
classification will be assigned the default symbols for that layer's geometry
type (for example, green in color).
13. If you selected a color option in step 12, from the Scheme drop-down list,
select a color scheme.
•

Qualitative–Displays colors that vary in color hue to represent
different legend classes.

•

Sequential–Displays a color that progresses from low to high (or high
to low) in color value.

•

Diverging–Puts equal emphasis on mid-range critical values and
extremes at both ends of the data range.

Then, select a color pattern from the Pattern drop-down list.
to reverse the style for how
14. Optional. Click the Reverse Order button
your ranges are varied. For example, if you selected to vary your range by
color and the color represents the lowest value as the lightest color and the
highest value as the darkest color, you can click the reverse button to have
the darkest color represent the lowest value and the lightest color represent
the highest value (or vice versa).
15. Optional. If you are editing an existing classification, click the Recalculate
to recalculate the row counts for each class.

button

16. Optional. To add a class to your classification, click the Add Class button
. Double-click in the Min, Max, Legend Label fields to edit the values.
17. Optional. To remove a class from your classification, click the Remove Class
button

18. Click OK.
The classification is saved for future use. To view it again, select it from the
Classification drop-down list.

147

XMap User Guide

Classifying a Layer with a Single Value

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you classify a layer in a database with a single value, all of the records are in
the same class and look the same on the map. For example, they all have the same
fill color on the map. By default, single-value classifications are automatically
assigned to all layers.
To Classify a Layer with a Single Value

Use the following steps to classify a layer with a single value.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer you want to classify.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. To edit/view an existing classification for the selected layer, select it from the
Classification drop-down list.
OR
To create a new classification for the selected layer, click the Manage button
and then click New.
6. Select Single Value from the Type drop-down list.
7. Click OK.

Saving a Classification to a Template File

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Save as Template feature in the Classify Layer dialog box to save the
parameters of a selected classification into a template that you can apply to another
layer. The Save as Template feature is useful only when the layer to which you are
applying the template has the same attribute fields (name and data type) as those
used in the original template. If the layer does not have the same attribute fields as
those used in the template, an error will appear when applying the template to the
layer.
To Save a Classification to a Template File

Use the following steps to save a classification as a template.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
148

Working With GIS
3. Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to save as a
template.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. From the Classification drop-down list, select the classification you want to
save as a template .
6. Click the Manage button and then click Save as Template.
The Save Template dialog box opens.
7. Browse to the location where you want to save the template, name the
template, and click Save.
Note Classification templates have .xmc extensions.
8. Click OK.

Creating a Classification From a Template File

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Load Template feature in the Classify Layer dialog box to attach a
classification template to classification. The layer to which you are applying the
template must have the same attribute fields (name and data type) as those used in
the original template. If the layer does not have the same attribute fields as those
used in the template, an error will appear when you apply the template to the layer.
To Apply a Template to a Classification

Use the following steps to attach a template to a classification.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer that you want to classify.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. Click the Manage button and then click Load Template.
The Open Template dialog box opens.
6. Browse to the location where the template was saved and click Open.
Note Classification templates have .xmc extensions.
7. Optional. Recalculate or classify the layer based on the settings in the
template.
8. Click OK.

149

XMap User Guide

Copying a Classification

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can copy an existing classification if you want to make minor adjustments to it
without overwriting the classification. Copied classifications are created as new,
independent classifications.
To Copy a Classification

Use the following steps to create a copy of an existing classification.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to copy.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. From the Classification drop-down list, select the classification you want to
copy.
6. Click the Manage button and then click Copy.
7. The original classification is retained and the new classification is named
"Copy of ."
8. Click OK.

Renaming a Classification

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Classifications names are based on the layer name by default. You can change the
default classification name using the Rename feature in the Classify Layer dialog box.
The classification is used in the print legend.
To Rename a Classification

Use the following steps to rename a classification.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to rename.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR

150

Working With GIS
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. From the Classification drop-down list, select the classification you want to
rename.
6. Click the Manage button and then click Rename.
The Classification text box opens for editing.
7. Edit the classification name and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
8. Click OK to close the Classify Layer dialog box.

Deleting a Classification

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Because all completed classifications are retained, you may want to delete an
existing classification that you no longer need.
To Delete a Classification

Use the following steps to delete an existing classification.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer that contains the classification that you want to delete.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Classify.
The Classify Layer dialog box opens.
5. From the Classification drop-down list, select the classification you want to
delete.
6. Click the Manage button and then click Delete.
7. Click OK.

Symbolizing and Labeling
Symbolizing and Labeling Overview
You can symbolize your layer so that you have complete control of how the layer
displays on the map. The symbolize options vary based on the type of layer—point,
polygon, or line—you are modifying. With the Symbolize Layer dialog box, you can
make line changes, color changes, symbol changes, and font changes (for labels).
Tip Click the icon next to the layer name to quickly open the Symbolize Layer dialog
box.

151

XMap User Guide

Symbolizing a Line Layer
Use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to customize the layer's visual properties or
select to show/hide certain elements or classes of the layer produced by a
classification. If you change the visual property of a class produced from a
classification, the Vary By scheme is automatically set to Custom in the Classify
Layer dialog box.

To Change the Color/Outline/Label Properties of a Line Layer

Use the following steps to change the color/outline/label properties of a feature in a
line layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer you want to symbolize.
4. To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box:
Click the layer icon next to the layer name.
OR
Click the Tools button and then click Symbolize.
The Symbolize Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Symbolize.
OR
XMap GIS Editor and Enterprise only Right-click a line on the map and
click Symbolize.
Under Symbolization, each row in the table displays each of the classes in the
layer. Each column in the table indicates:
This
Column...

Displays...

Field
name/Feature

The minimum and maximum (or unique) values of each
class.

Sample

The current visual property for each class.

Legend Label

The current label for each class. The Null Class indicates
any object for which the attribute value falls out of the
classification. The Highlight Features label lets you visually
identify which records have been queried.
Note Records that are symbolized with a highlight are
saved in the layer when it is published to XMap Web.

152

Working With GIS
6. To change the opacity of the color of your feature, from the Opacity dropdown list, select Opaque (0% transparent), Transparent (100%
transparent), Blended (50% transparent), or XOR (combination of the
source and background pixels—most useful when records with the same
symbolization overlap).
7. To change the line color of your feature, click the Color button and select a
standard or custom line color. Then, select a line width from the Width dropdown list and a line style from the Style drop-down list.
8. To change the outline color of your feature, click the Outline Color button
and select a standard line color or create a custom line color. Then, select
how wide you want your outline to display from the Width drop-down list and
an outline style from the Style drop-down list.
Note An outline is placed underneath a line. Therefore, if the outline is
thinner than the line, the outline may not be visible. To ensure an outline will
be visible, make sure the outline is at least 1 pixel greater than the line.
Tip By outlining a line, you can make a line look like a highway.
9. To change the properties of your label, ensure the Show Label check box is
selected and then:
a.

Select a different font from the Font drop-down list.

To change the font style, click the Bold button

, Italic button

, or

Underline button
. You can also click More Styles for additional font style
options.
Tip Select the Outline option under More Styles to outline the text with white,
making the text easier to read on the map.
c.
To change the font color, click the Font Color button
standard font color or create a custom font color.

and select a

To change the font size, select a size from the Size drop-down list.

To hide the label on the map, clear the Show Label check box.
Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels, the text may appear
cluttered on the map. If this is the case, ensure the Declutter Text check box
is selected to remove some of the text on the map.
10. Repeat the steps for each layer feature you want to symbolize.
11. Click OK.

Note
You can also show/hide a feature on the map:
To show a feature that is currently disabled, select the feature and then select the
Show Feature check box under Line Feature.
OR
To hide a feature, select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box
under Line Feature. The feature displays as “Disabled” in the Symbolization dialog
box. To hide multiple features, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click
the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box. To hide
a block of features, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the first
and last records in the block.

153

XMap User Guide

Symbolizing a Point Layer
You can use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to modify the symbols, modify the text
properties, and show/hide certain features in a layer.
To Change the Symbolization of a Point Layer

Use the following steps to change the symbolization of a point layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select (highlight) the layer you want to symbolize.
4. To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box:
Click the layer icon next to the layer name.
OR
Click the Tools button and then click Symbolize.
The Symbolize Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Symbolize.
OR
XMap GIS Editor and Enterprise only Right-click a point on the map and
click Symbolize.
Under Symbolization, each row in the table displays each of the classes in the
layer. Each column in the table indicates:
This Column...

Displays...

Field
name/Feature

The minimum and maximum (or unique) values of each
class.

Sample

The current visual property for each class.

Legend Label

The current label for each class. The Null Class indicates
any object whose attribute value falls out of the
classification. The Highlight Features label lets you
visually identify which records have been queried.
Note Records that are symbolized with a highlight are
saved in the layer when it is published to XMap Web.

The field you chose while classifying the layer displays each of the features for
that layer. Each of the features are selected by default to show on the map.
5. Click the feature for which you want to change the properties.
Note To select multiple features, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while
you click multiple features. To select a block of features, press the SHIFT key
on your keyboard while you click the first and last records in the block. To
select all features, press CTRL + A.
7. To change the opacity of the color of your feature, from the Opacity dropdown list, select Opaque (0% transparent), Transparent (100%
transparent), Blended (50% transparent), or XOR (combination of the
source and background pixels—most useful when records with the same
symbolization overlap).
8. To change the type of symbol you want to display, select a symbol set from
the Set drop-down list and then use the symbol list below the Set drop-down
154

Working With GIS
list to select a new symbol.
Note To add a new symbol set, click the Add button and then use the dialog
box to add a new symbol set. The symbol set must contain .dim or .bmp
symbols (.bmp symbols do not scale well).
9. To change the color of your "stock" symbol, click the Color button and select
a standard fill color or create a custom fill color.
10. To change the size of your "stock" symbol, select a size from the Size dropdown list.
11. To change the properties of your label, ensure the Show Label check box is
selected and then:
a.

Select a different font from the Font drop-down list.

To change the font style, click the Bold button

, Italic button

, or

and select a

To change the font size, select a size from the Size drop-down list.

To hide the label on the map, clear the Show Label check box.
Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels, the text may appear
cluttered on the map. If this is the case, ensure the Declutter Text check box
is selected to remove some of the text on the map.
12. Repeat the steps for each layer feature you want to symbolize.
13. Click OK.

Note
You can also show/hide a feature on the map:
To show a feature that is currently disabled, select the feature and then select the
Show Feature check box under Point Feature.
OR
To hide a feature, select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box
under Point Feature. The feature displays as Disabled in the Symbolization dialog
box. To hide multiple features, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click
the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box. To hide
a block of features, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the first
and last records in the block.

Symbolizing a Polygon Layer
Use the Symbolize Layer dialog box to modify the layer's color, text, and outline
properties or select to show/hide certain features.
To Change the Color/Outline/Label Properties of a Polygon Layer

Use the following steps to change the color/outline/label properties of a feature in a
polygon layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.

155

XMap User Guide
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select (highlight) the layer you want to symbolize.
4. To open the Symbolize Layer dialog box:
Click the layer icon next to the layer name.
OR
Click the Tools button and then click Symbolize.
The Symbolize Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Symbolize.
OR
XMap GIS Editor and Enterprise only Right-click a polygon on the map
and click Symbolize.
Under Symbolization, each row in the table displays each of the classes in the
layer. Each column in the table indicates:
This Column...

Displays...

Field
name/Feature

The minimum and maximum (or unique) values of each
class.

Sample

The current visual property for each class.

Legend Label

The field you chose while classifying the layer displays each of the features for
that layer. Each of the features are selected to be shown on the map by
default.
5. Click the feature for which you want to change the properties.
Note To select multiple features, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while
you click multiple features. To select a block of features, press the SHIFT key
on your keyboard while you click the first and last records in the block. To
select all features, press CTRL + A.
6. To change the opacity of the color of your feature, from the Opacity dropdown list, select Opaque (0% transparent), Transparent (100%
transparent), Blended (50% transparent), or XOR (combination of the
source and background pixels—most useful when records with the same
symbolization overlap).
Tip The Blended option is very useful for viewing polygons and map data.
7. To change the fill color of your feature, ensure the Show Fill check box is
selected, click the Fill Color button, and select a standard fill color or create
a custom fill color. To change the fill style for your feature using one of the
many hatch-fill options, click the Fill Style drop-down list and select a style.
OR
To hide the fill color on the map, clear the Show Fill check box.
8. To change the outline color of your feature, ensure the Show Outline check
box is selected, click the Outline Color button next to Outline under
Polygon Features, and select a standard line color or create a custom line
color. Then, select how wide you want your outline to display from the Width
156

Working With GIS
drop-down list.
OR
To hide the outline color on the map, clear the Show Outline check box.
9. To change the properties of your label, ensure the Show Label check box is
selected and then:
a. Select a different font from the Font drop-down list.
b. To change the font style, click the Bold button

, Italic button

or Underline button
. You can also click More Styles for
additional font style options.
c. To change the font color, click the Font Color button
select a standard line color or create a custom line color.

and

d. To change the font size, select a size from the Size drop-down list.
e. To hide the label on the map, clear the Show Label check box.
Tip Once you modify the font properties of labels, the text may
appear cluttered on the map. If this is the case, ensure the Declutter
Text check box is selected to remove some of the text on the map.
10. Repeat the steps for each layer feature that you want to symbolize.
11. Click OK.
Note
You can also show/hide a feature on the map:
To show a feature that is currently disabled, select the feature and then select the
Show Feature check box under Polygon Feature.
OR
To hide a feature, select the feature and then clear the Show Feature check box
under Polygon Feature. The feature displays as “Disabled” in the Symbolization
dialog box. To hide multiple features, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while
you click the features you want to hide and then clear the Show Feature check box.
To hide a block of features, press the SHIFT key on your keyboard while you click the
first and last records in the block.

Adding a Symbol Set to the List of Available Symbol Sets
When you symbolize a point layer, you can identify the points with a variety of stock
symbols. However, you can also use the Add button in the point layer Symbolize
dialog box to add a different symbol set to the list of available symbol sets.
To Add a Symbol Set

Use the following steps to add a symbol set to the list of available symbol sets.
1. Click the Add button in the Symbolize Layer (for a point layer) dialog box.
The Add Symbols dialog box opens.
2. Under Add New Symbol Set, click Browse.
3. Browse to the location where your .dim symbol set file is located, select the
file, and then click Open.
4. Click Add to List.
The symbol set displays under Existing Symbol Sets.
Note Select the new symbol set in the Existing Symbol Sets list to preview
the symbols it contains.
157

XMap User Guide
5. Click OK to return to the Symbolize Layer dialog box.

Deleting a Symbol Set from the List of Available Symbol Sets
Use the following steps to delete a symbol set from the list of available symbol sets.
1. Click the Add button in the Symbolize Layer (for a point layer) dialog box.
The Add Symbols dialog box opens.
2. Under Existing Symbol Sets, click to highlight the symbol set you want to
remove.
3. Click Delete From List.
4. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
5. Click OK to return to the Symbolize Layer dialog box.

Labeling a Layer
You can use the attribute information in your layer to label the features on the map
using the Set Label dialog box.
Notes
•

To view labels created using these steps, the Show Label check box on the
Symbolize Layer dialog box must be selected.

•

Labels have a 100-character limit in XMap 4.5-compatible databases and a 1000character limit in XMap 5.0 and later-compatible databases.

To Label a Layer

Use the following steps to label a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select (highlight) the layer you want to label.
4. Click the Tools button and then click Label.
The Label Layer dialog box opens.
OR
Right-click the layer and click Label.
The Label Layer dialog box opens.
5. Type any text you want to display in the label in the Label Formula text box.
6. Optional. Under Label Columns, select a column header from the file to add
to move the header to the
as a label. Then, click the right arrow button
label area. Repeat this step for each column header you want to include in the
label. As you add headers to the label area, the Label Formula updates and
shows an example of what the label will look like.
Note You can click Clear to clear the selections you made in steps 5 and 6.
7. Optional. To reorder how the label displays, select the column under
Selected Columns you want to move and then click the up arrow

158

Working With GIS
move the column near/at the beginning of the label or click the down arrow
to move the column near/at the end of the label.
8. Click OK.
Tips
•

Once you have modified the font properties of labels, the text may appear
cluttered on the map. If this is the case, ensure the Declutter Text check
box is selected in the Symbolize Layer dialog box.

•

To create a multi-line label, type \n between the segments of the label that
you want to separate in the Label Formula text box.

Using XMap Web
Creating an XMap Web Site

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you logged into XMap Web for the first time, you were asked to create an
XMap Web site. If you want to create additional sites, follow these steps.
To Create an XMap Web Site
Use the following steps to create an XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Create Site.
The Create New Site dialog box opens.
4. Type the appropriate information in the text boxes. Text boxes with asterisks
next to them are required.
5. Select the security for your site from the Site Access drop-down list.
•

Anonymous–Users can access the selected site without restrictions.

•

Mixed–Users can access the default layers without entering login
information; login required to access secure layers.

6. Click OK.
You will receive an e-mail from DeLorme once your new site is set up.

Logging Into XMap Web

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Registered users can use the XMap Web button in the Workspace subtab to create a
site on the Internet where you can publish layer information for your personal use or
share layer information with other registered users.
To Log In
Use the following steps to log in.
1. Click the GIS tab.
159

XMap User Guide
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click any of the XMap Web shortcut
options.
The Login dialog box opens.
4. Type your e-mail address and password in the text boxes.
Note If you forget your password, click the hyperlink below the text boxes. If
you are a new XMap Web user and do not have a password, click Sign Up
and complete the registration information.
5. Click Sign On.
Tip You can select to have your computer remember your e-mail address and
password by selecting the Remember My E-mail and Password on This Machine
check box.

Logging Out of XMap Web

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can log out of XMap Web from any of the XMap Web dialog boxes. Logging out is
a useful way of ensuring your site is not altered by other users in a multiple-user
environment.
To Log Out
Use the following steps to log out of XMap Web.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace tab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click any of the XMap Web options
except Download Layer.
A dialog box opens.
4. Near the bottom-left corner of the dialog box, click the link to log out.
The Login dialog box opens.

Publishing a Layer to Your XMap Web Site

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you have established a site in XMap Web, you can publish your layers on the
site.
To Publish a Layer
Use the following steps to publish a layer on your XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select the layer you want to publish from the workspace table.
4. Click the XMap Web button and then click Publish Layer.
The Publish Layer dialog box opens.

160

Working With GIS
5. Select the site you want to publish the layer on from the Select Site dropdown list.
All of the layers available on that site display in the table.
6. If you want the layer to published with a different name other than the layer
name in the Workspace subtab, type the new name in the Layer Name text
box.
7. Click OK.

Removing a Layer From Your XMap Web Site

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Remove Layer option in the XMap Web shortcut menu to remove a layer
from your XMap Web site.
To Remove a Layer From Your Site
Use the following steps to remove a layer from your XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Remove Layer.
The Remove Layer(s) dialog box opens.
4. Select the site that includes the layer you want to remove.
5. Select the check box next to the layer you want to remove.
6. Click Apply.
7. Click OK.

Downloading a Layer From XMap® Web

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Professional, XMap GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Download Layer option in the XMap Web shortcut menu to download a layer
from your XMap Web site or a shared XMap Web site.
To Download a Layer using XMap GIS Editor or XMap GIS Enterprise
Use the following steps to download a layer from an XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Download Layer.
The Download Layer dialog box opens.
OR
If you have not selected the option to remember the login e-mail address and
password on this computer, the Login dialog box opens.
Once you log in, the Download Layer dialog box opens.
4. From the Select Site drop-down list, select the site that includes the layer
you want to download.
The available layers on that site display in the download table.
Note Only permanent sites display in the Select Site drop-down list.

161

XMap User Guide
5. Click Download next to the layer you want to download.
6. Click OK.
To Download a Layer using XMap Professional
Use the following steps to download a layer from an XMap Web site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the Layers button and then click Download Layer.
The Download Layer dialog box opens.
OR
If you have not selected the option to remember the login e-mail address and
password on this computer, the Login dialog box opens.
Once you log in, the Download Layer dialog box opens.
4. From the Select Site drop-down list, select the site that includes the layer
you want to download.
The available layers on that site display in the download table.
Note Only permanent sites display in the Select Site drop-down list.
5. Click Download next to the layer you want to download.
6. Click OK.

Managing Your Site

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you publish layers on your site, you can use the Manage Site Layers option to
change the visibility of the layers and the ability to download them.
To Manage the Layers on Your Site
Use the following steps to manage the layers on your site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Manage Site.
The Manage Site Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the site you want to manage from the Select Site drop-down list.
5. Select the desired security for your site from the Site Access drop-down list.
•

Anonymous–Users can access the selected site without restrictions.

•

Mixed–Users can access the default layers without entering login
information; login required to access secure layers.

•

6. Click the Layers tab if it is not already selected.
7. Select the check box in the Allow Download column next to each layer you
want to share with other users.
8. Under Startup Layer, select the layer you want the website to center on
when the site is opened.
9. To change the visibility of a layer, select the check box in the Initial
Visibility column for that layer.

162

Working With GIS
10. To change the minimum and maximum zoom level for a layer, select the
zoom level number from the Min Zoom Level and/or Max Zoom Level
drop-down lists.
11. If you selected Mixed or Login Required in step 5, select the check box in the
Allow Access column for the layers you want to be available by default.
12. Click Apply.
13. Click OK.
To Manage the Data on Your Site
Use the following steps to manage the data on your site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Manage Site.
The Manage Site Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the site you want to manage from the Select Site drop-down list.
5. Select the desired security for your site from the Site Access drop-down list.
6. Click the Data tab.
7. Select the check box in the Enabled column for each data option you want
users to have access to by default.
8. To change the visibility of the data, select the check box in the Initial
Visibility column for that data option to display by default.
9. Click Apply.
10. Click OK.
To Manage the Accessibility to Your Site
Use the following steps to manage the accessibility of your site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Manage Site.
The Manage Site Settings dialog box opens.
4. Select the site you want to manage from the Select Site drop-down list.
5. Select the desired security for your site from the Site Access drop-down list.
6. Click the Users tab.
7. If you selected Mixed or Login Required in step 5, select Yes from the
Require User Approval list to require the admin of the site to approve the
use of logging into the site to view secure layers. Select No from the list to
give Mixed and Login Required users immediate access to secure layers.
8. To update a user's access level or status, click to select the user and then
select an option from the applicable drop-down list.
•

Admin–An admin controls every part of the XMap Web site, from
updating user information to determining which layers on the site can
be downloaded. There can be only one admin per site.

•

User–A user can view layers on that site that the site's admin has
selected to be visible by default.

•

Granted–A user or admin has full access.

•

Pending–A user has access to the site, but has not registered yet.

•

Denied–A user does not have access to the site.
163

XMap User Guide
9. If you selected Mixed or Login Required in step 5, you can adjust the default
layers that display on your site using the Can(not) View and Can Download
options at the bottom of the dialog box.
•

To view a layer by default, verify it is displaying under Can View. If it
is not, select it under Cannot View and then click the left arrow
button to move the layer to the Can View list. If you want the user to
be able to download the layer, select the Can Download check box
next to the layer name.

•

To remove a layer from the default list, select the layer name under
Can View and then click the right arrow button to move the layer to
the Cannot View list.

To Update User Information for Your Site
Use the following steps to update user information for your site.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click Manage Site.
The Manage Site Settings dialog box opens.
4. From the Select Site drop-down list, select the site you want to manage.
5. From the Site Access drop-down list, select the security for your site.
6. Click the User Details tab.
OR
Click the Users tab and click the Information button
for whom you want to update information.
7. Click the New Record button

next to the user

8. Type/select the user's name, address, city, state, ZIP/Postal Code, country,
phone number, e-mail address, and password in the applicable text boxes.
You can also type notes related to the user in the Notes text box.
9. Click the Save button

Viewing a Report for Your XMap Web Site

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the View Site Reports option in the XMap Web to create and view monthly and
custom reports for your XMap Web site.
To View Monthly Site Reports
Use the following steps to view site reports.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click View Site Reports.
The Site Reports dialog box opens.
4. Click Monthly Reports.
5. Click the report month you want to view. The report information displays in
the dialog box.

164

Working With GIS
6. Click Download Results to download a text file containing the report
information.
OR
Click View Line Chart to view a line chart of your report information.
7. Click OK.
To View Custom Site Reports
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the XMap Web button and then click View Site Reports.
The Admin Reports dialog box opens.
4. Click Custom Reports.
5. Select the type of custom report you want to view (Map Statistics, Browser
Statistics, OS Statistics, or Site Statistics).
6. From the Choose Grouping Method drop-down list, select to group the
report by day, month, week, or quarter.
7. Type the start and end dates for your report in the applicable text boxes.
8. Click Get Report.
The report information displays in the dialog box.
9. Click Download Results to download a text file containing the report
information.
OR
Click View Line Chart to view a line chart of your report information.
10. Click OK.

Attributes-Datasheet View
Editing the Attributes of a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Attributes subtab to view and/or edit the attributes of a layer. The columns
that display in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab are field headings that
were selected to be "visible" in the Design View of the Attributes subtab. You can
make some headings invisible by clearing the appropriate check boxes in the Design
View.
To Edit the Attributes of a Layer
Use the following steps to edit the attributes of a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Attributes subtab.
3. If it is not already in Datasheet View mode, click the Datasheet View button
.
The attributes of the layer display.
4. From the Layer drop-down list, select the layer for which you want to edit the
attributes.

165

XMap User Guide
5. If you want to view all of the attributes for the selected layer regardless of
what is currently displaying on the map, select All from the Show drop-down
list.
OR
If you only want to view only the attributes in the current map rectangle,
select Map Region from the Show drop-down list.
OR
If you want to only view attribute information for geometries you click on the
map, select Toolbar Select from the Show drop-down list.
6. Optional. From the Query drop-down list, select a query against which to run
the layer.
Note This option is unavailable when there have been no queries made
against the layer.
7. To change a value in the layer, double-click inside the cell you want to modify
(attribute information that appears in bold, such as GeoIDs and XMapgenerated area, length, perimeter values, etc. are not editable), type your
edits in the appropriate cell, and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Notes
•

Use the arrow keys or the TAB key to move through the cells in the
table.

•

Press the ESC key on your keyboard to cancel the editing process.

Notes
•

You cannot edit the Area, Length, Perimeter, or other XMap-generated fields
because they are maintained by XMap. These fields are automatically updated
when a geometry is edited.

•

When editing dates, ensure the date is between 1/1/1753 and 12/31/9999. If
you have a date that is outside of these parameters, change your date value
to a string value in the source database.

•

Geocoded point layers have special properties that may significantly alter the
layer when edited.

Tips
•

To edit multiple records, press the SHIFT key on the keyboard to select the
records. Then, hold the ALT key on the keyboard while you double-click within
the row you want to edit. Make the change and then press ENTER. Click Yes
when asked if you are sure you want to apply the edit to all of the selections.

•

Click a heading in the Datasheet View to sort the contents of the layer by that
heading.

•

To change the size of a column in the Datasheet View, drag the bar to the
right of the heading name to the new column size.

•

To view the history of changes made against each geometry in a layer, click
until the drop-down list displays and
and hold the View Changes button
then select the format for which to view the changes (vertical table,
horizontal table, or not at all). This feature is available only for XMap 5.0 and
later-compatible databases.

•

166

You can link documents and URLs to certain attributes. For more information,
see Linking Documents and URLs to Attributes.

Working With GIS

Linking Documents and URLs to Attributes

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Add Field feature in XMap to create multiple custom fields, including
Document and URL fields. You can then customize these fields in the Datasheet View
of the Attributes subtab to link documents/websites to particular attributes.
To Link a Document to an Attribute
Use the following steps to link a document to an attribute.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Highlight the layer to which you want to add a field.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
The Attributes dialog area displays.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

6. Click Options and then click Add Field.
The Field Creation dialog box opens.
7. Type a name for your new field in the Field Name text box; for example,
Documents.
8. From the Data Type drop-down list, select Document.
9. Click OK.
.
10. Click the Datasheet View button
Your new field is added at the end of the Attributes table.
11. Find the attribute to which you want to link a document. Then, hover your
cursor over the new field's cell.
An arrow displays.
12. Click the arrow and then click Upload.
The Upload File dialog box opens.
13. Browse to the file to which you want to link the attribute and then click Open.
A hyperlink to that document displays. The document is embedded in the
source database.
To Link a URL to an Attribute
Use the following steps to link a URL to an attribute.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer to which you want to add a field.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
The Attributes dialog area displays.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

6. Click Options and then click Add Field.
The Field Creation dialog box opens.

167

XMap User Guide
7. Type a name for your new field in the Field Name text box; for example,
URL.
8. Select URL from the Data Type drop-down list.
9. Click OK.
10. Click the Datasheet View button
.
Your new field has been added at the end of the Attributes table.
11. Find the attribute to which you want to link a URL. Then, double-click in the
new field's cell.
The text box is activated.
12. Type the URL in the text box and then press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
A hyperlink to that URL displays.

Viewing the Attributes of a Geometry on the Map

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
To view the attributes of a geometry that is in the active layer on the map, right-click
the location on the map and then click Show Attributes. You can also select the
geometry with one of the GIS tools, such as the selection tool. The attribute
information for that geometry is highlighted in the Datasheet View of the Attributes
subtab and is also highlighted on the map.

Viewing Redline Edits

168

Working With GIS
A floating arrow displays. Click the arrow and then select Open.
A message asks if you want to save or open the file.
6. Click Save to save the file to your hard drive (ensure that the Open in XMap
check box is selected).
The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map.
OR
Click Open to open the file from its current location (ensure that the Open in
XMap check box is selected).
The draw layer is added to your project and displays on the map.
7. Use the notes and annotations in the draw layer to make the appropriate
edits to the corresponding GIS layers to which the user was subscribed.

Using Right-Click Options in the Datasheet View

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Several right-click options are available in the Datasheet View when you right-click
inside the attributes table. Below are the right-click options and their descriptions.
If you click this
right-click
option...

Then the following will result...

Zoom to Selection

The map zooms to display all of the selected records.

Reverse Selection

All of the selected records become unselected and unselected
records become selected.

Clear Selection

Clears the selection.

Select All

All of the records in the Attributes subtab are selected in the
attributes table and on the map.

Copy to Clipboard

Each selected record in the attributes table is copied and can
be pasted into another program.

Place Point*

When selected for a record, the corresponding point
geometry is selected with the Edit Tool, and the cursor
changes to the Edit tool. Click the map to move the point
from its previous location to the clicked location.

Geocode
Selection*

When selected, the selected records are re-geocoded (placed
on the map according to the attributes they were geocoded
by). This option is relevant when a user removes their map
data (Streets or Topo) after geocoding a layer during import,
and they edit the attributes of the geometry that were used
in geocoding.

Zoom to Query
Results**

The map zooms to display all of the geometries that satisfy
the query results.

Zoom to Record

The map centers on the selected record.

Refresh

The attributes table refreshes (updates) to include any
changes that were made.

169

XMap User Guide
* These right-click options display only for geocoded point layers.
** This right-click option displays only when there is an active query.

Searching for Attributes

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
Professional, XMap GIS Editor, and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Attribute Search feature in the Attributes subtab to quickly search for
particular attributes within a layer. Once the search is complete, the results are
saved as a query and display in the Query drop-down list as Attribute Search.
Note Attribute Searches filter the attribute table in the Datasheet View to only show
the results of the search; the geometries are not highlighted or filtered on the map.

To Search for Attributes
Use the following steps to use the Attribute Search dialog box.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Attributes subtab.
3. If it is not already in Datasheet View mode, click the Datasheet View button
. The attributes of the layer display.
4. From the Layer drop-down list, select the layer from which to search the
attributes.
.
5. Click the Attribute Search button
The Attribute Search dialog box opens. The name of the layer you selected
displays in the Name text box.
6. From the Attribute drop-down list, select the Attribute field for which you
want to search.
7. Type the specific attributes for which you want to search in the Values text
box. Separate multiple values with a comma or a comma and a space (for
example; portland,me OR portland, me).
Note If you copy a column of attributes or multiple attributes from an
application such as Microsoft® Excel and paste them into the Values text box,
they are automatically comma delimited.
8. Click Apply.
The Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab is filtered and shows only the
results of the search.
Note To view all of the attributes of the layer, select Cancel Query from the
Query drop-down list.
9. Click Close.

170

Working With GIS

Attributes-Design View
Showing/Hiding Attributes in a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Attributes Datasheet View to view and/or edit the attributes of a layer. The
columns that display in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab are headings
that were selected to be visible in the Design View of the Attributes subtab. You can
make some headings invisible by clearing the appropriate check boxes in the Design
View.
To Show/Hide Attributes in a Layer
Use the following steps to show/hide attributes in a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Highlight the layer for which you want to show/hide attributes.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button
The following table describes the columns in the Design View.
Column Name

Description

Attribute Set

Displays the name of the attribute set that contains
the attributes for that layer.

Source Name

Displays all of the headings available within the
layer.

Field Name

Displays any associated field labels for the heading.

This column is editable by double-clicking within the
cell you want to edit, making the necessary change,
and then pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Visible

Selected check boxes indicate that the fields display
in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab, the
Classification dialog box, and the layer export
results.

Data Type

Displays the data type for that particular field.

Description

Displays user and DeLorme-added descriptions.
This field is editable by double-clicking within the cell
you want to edit, making the necessary change, and
then pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard.
XMap-managed fields are not editable.

6. From the Attribute Sets drop-down list, select a dataset . Select All Sets to
view attributes for all of the datasets or select a particular set to view the
attributes contained in that dataset. Your selection determines which
attributes display in the Datasheet View and Design View.

171

XMap User Guide
7. To show an attribute in a layer, ensure the check box under Visible in the
row for that attribute is selected.
OR
To hide an attribute in a layer, clear the check box under Visible in the row
for that attribute.
8. Click Options and then click Save.
Note To undo a previous change before you save, click Options and then click
Reset to return the table to the previously saved view.

Adding a Field to a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Add Field function within the Design View to add a field to the layer.
To Add a Field to a Layer
Use the following steps to add a field to a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Highlight the layer to which you want to add a field.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button
6. To add a field to the layer, click Options and then click Add Field.
The Field Creation dialog box opens.
7. Type a name for your new field in the Field Name text box.
8. Select a data type from the Data Type drop-down list.

172

Data Type

Description

Big Integer

A 64bit integer (-9 quintillion to 9
quintillion).

Boolean

A true/false value represented by 1 and 0.

Byte

An 8bit integer (0-255).

Currency

A currency value from -900 trillion to +900
trillion.

Date time

A date and time value covering 1/1/1753
through 12/31/9999.

Document

A binary object with a maximum size of
2GB.

Double

A 64bit floating point number.

Float

A 32bit floating point number.

Integer

A 32bit integer (-2 billion to 2 billion).

Memo

An ANSI string of unknown length (up to 2

Working With GIS
billion characters).
Small
Integer

A 16bit integer (-32,000 to 32,000).

String

A simple ANSI character string (0-8000
characters).

URL

An ANSI string which identifies as web
resource.

9. If you selected String, Unicode String, or URL, type the number of characters
of the string/URL in the String Size text box.
10. Under Fields, select a data type from the drop-down list.
11. Optional Double-click a field or function name to insert that field/function into
the formula text box. For more information, see Function and Operator
Descriptions.
Note The fields available are based on the data type you chose.
12. Click OK.
Notes
•

To undo a change, click Clear.

•

After you add a field, to edit the formula, right-click it in the Description column
of the Design View and then select Edit Formula.

•

Dates must be between 1/1/1753 and 12/31/9999. If you have a date that is
outside of these parameters, change your date value to a string value.

•

Formulas are not required.

Editing a Field's Formula

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you add a field with a formula, you can edit the formula at any time by rightclicking the formula in the Description column of the Design View and then selecting
Edit Formula. Then, edit the formula using the Add Field dialog.

Deleting a Field from a Layer

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Delete Field feature to delete custom fields you have added to your layer or
to delete default fields that came with your imported layer. When you delete a field
from a layer, it is permanently deleted from the database (including all involved
elements such as labels, dependent formulas, classifications, etc.).
To Delete a Field from a Layer
Use the following steps to delete a field from a layer.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Click the layer from which you want to delete a field.

173

XMap User Guide
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

6. Click the Options button and then click Delete Field.
A confirmation message displays.
OR
Right-click the field you want to delete and then click Delete Field.
A confirmation message displays.
7. Click OK to permanently delete the field from the database.
OR
Click Cancel if you do not want to delete the field from the database.

Function and Operator Descriptions

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
The following definitions describe some of the terms used in the function descriptions
table below.
Data_type–One of integer, float, string or datetime. String may have an optional
length specification: string(integer). For example, string(40).
Date_expression–An expression yielding a datetime result.
Datepart–A special specifier used in date functions. Jump to the bottom of this topic
for a list of datepart specifiers.
Expression–The result of combining several functions or operators.
Field–The name of a field in the table, enclosed in brackets. For example:
[Population2000]. A field has an associated data type in the table.
Logical_expression–An expression yielding either TRUE or FALSE.
Float_expression–An expression yielding a float result.
Integer_expression–An expression yielding an integer result.
Numeric_expression–An expression yielding a numeric result, either integer or
float.
String_expression–An expression yielding a string result.
Function

Basic Function Syntax

Description

AND

logical_expression AND
logical_expression

Returns TRUE if both of two logical
expressions are TRUE, and FALSE
otherwise. The result type is
logical_expression.

AVG

AVG( field )

Returns the average of a field's
values. The result type is the same
as the data type of field.

CAST

CAST( expression AS
data_type )

Transforms an expression of one
data type into another data type.
The result type is as specified by
data_type.

174

Working With GIS
CEILING

CEILING(
numeric_expression )

Returns the smallest integer greater
than or equal to a number. The
result type is integer_expression.

CHARINDEX

CHARINDEX(
string_expression ,
string_expression [,
integer_expression] )

Returns the index to the beginning
of the first string expression in
second string. An optional starting
location may be specified. The result
type is integer_expression.

CONTAINS

CONTAINS(
string_expression ,
string_expression )

Return TRUE if the first string
contains an instance of the second
string, and FALSE otherwise. The
result type is logical_expression.

COUNT

Return the number of rows in table.
The result type is
integer_expression.

DATEADD

DATEADD( datepart,
numeric_expression,
date_expression )

Returns a new datetime value based
on adding an interval to the
specified date, in units specified by
datepart. The result type is
date_expression.

DATEDIFF

DATEDIFF( datepart,
date_expression,
date_expression )

Returns the interval between two
datetime values, in units specified
by datepart. The result type is
integer_expression.

DATENAME

DATENAME( datepart,
date_expression )

Returns a string representing the
specified datepart of the specified
date. The result type is
string_expression.

DATEPART

DATEPART( datepart,
date_expression )

Returns an integer representing the
specified datepart of the specified
date. The result type is
integer_expression.

DAY

DAY( date_expression )

Returns an integer representing the
day datepart of the specified date.
The result type is
integer_expression.

EQUALS

expression EQUALS
expression

Returns TRUE if the two expressions
are equal and FALSE otherwise.
'EQUALS' is synonymous with the '='
operator. The result type is
logical_expression.

FLOOR

FLOOR(
numeric_expression )

Returns the largest integer less than
or equal to a number. The result
type is integer_expression.

GETDATE

GETDATE()

Returns the current date/time as a
datetime value. The result type is
175

XMap User Guide
date_expression.
IF

IF( logical_expression ,
value_if_true ,
value_if_false )

Returns one value if a condition you
specify evaluates to TRUE and
another if it evaluates to FALSE. The
result type is derived from
value_if_true and value_if_false,
which must either be both string or
both numeric. If numeric, then if
either of the values is float, then the
return type is float_expression, and
otherwise it is integer_expression; if
string, then the result type is
string_expression.

IS [NOT]
EMPTY

field IS [ NOT ] EMPTY

Returns TRUE if the string field field
is empty and FALSE otherwise. NOT
may be use to reverse the sense of
the test. The result type is
logical_expression.

IS [NOT]
NULL

field IS [ NOT ] NULL

Returns TRUE if field is NULL and
FALSE otherwise. NOT may be use
to reverse the sense of the test. The
result type is logical_expression.

LEN

LEN( string_expression )

Returns the length of a string. The
result type is integer_expression.

LEFT

LEFT( string_expression ,
number_of_characters )

Return the leftmost
number_of_characters characters of
a string, where
number_of_characters is of type
integer_expression. The result type
is string_expression.

LTRIM

LTRIM( string_expression
)

Return a string with spaces removed
from its left end. The result type is
string_expression.

LOWER

LOWER( string_expression
)

Returns a string with its letters
converted to lowercase. The result
type is string_expression.

MAX

MAX( field )

Return the maximum value of a
field. The result type is the same as
the data type of field.

MID

SUBSTRING(
string_expression , start ,
length )

Return the length characters of a
string beginning at start. start and
length are both of type
integer_expression. MID is
synonymous with the SUBSTRING
function. The result type is
string_expression.

176

Working With GIS
MIN

MIN( field )

Return the minimum value of a field.
The result type is the same as the
data type of field.

MONTH

MONTH( date_expression
)

Returns an integer representing the
month datepart of the specified
date. The result type is
integer_expression.

logical_expression OR
logical_expression

Returns TRUE if either of two logical
expressions are TRUE, and FALSE
otherwise. The result type is
logical_expression.

POWER

POWER(
numeric_expression ,
power )

Raise a number to a power. power
must be of type integer_expression .
The result type is float_expression.

PREFIX

PREFIX( string_expression
, string_expression )

Return TRUE if the first string begins
with the second string, and FALSE
otherwise. The result type is
logical_expression.

REPLACE

REPLACE(
string_expression ,
string_expression ,
string_expression )

Returns the string generated by
replacing all occurrences of the
second string expression in the first
string expression with the third
string expression. The result type is
string_expression.

RIGHT

RIGHT( string_expression
, number_of_characters )

Return the rightmost
number_of_characters characters of
a string. number_of_characters
must be of type integer_expression.
The result type is string_expression.

RTRIM

RTRIM( string_expression
)

Return a string with spaces removed
from its right end. The result type is
string_expression.

ROUND

ROUND(
numeric_expression ,
number_of_digits )

Round number to number_of_digits
decimal places to the right of the
decimal point (negative values of
number_of_digits are to the left of
the decimal point). number_of_digits
must be of type integer_expression.
The result type is float_expression.

SQRT

SQRT(
numeric_expression )

Returns the square root of a
number. The result type is
float_expression.

STUFF

STUFF( string_expression
, start , length ,
string_expression )

Return the string formed by
replacing the length characters of
the first string beginning at start
with the second string. length and

177

XMap User Guide
start must be of type
integer_expression. The result type
is string_expression.
SUBSTRING

SUBSTRING(
string_expression , start ,
length )

Return the length characters of a
string beginning at start.
SUBSTRING is synonymous with the
MID function. length and start must
be of type integer_expression. The
result type is string_expression.

SUFFIX

SUFFIX( string_expression
, string_expression )

Return TRUE if the first string ends
with the second string, and FALSE
otherwise. The result type is
logical_expression.

SUM

SUM( field )

Return the sum of the values of a
numeric field. The result type is the
same as the data type of field.

UPPER

UPPER( string_expression
)

Returns a string with its letters
converted to uppercase. The result
type is string_expression.

YEAR

YEAR( date_expression )

Returns an integer representing the
year datepart of the specified date.
The result type is
integer_expression.

numeric_expression +
numeric_expression

Returns the result of adding one
number to another. If either of the
expressions is floating point, then
the result type is floating point;
otherwise the result type is integer.

numeric_expression numeric_expression

Returns the result of subtracting one
number from another. If either of
the expressions is floating point,
then the result type is floating point;
otherwise the result type is integer.

numeric_expression *
numeric_expression

Returns the result of multiplying one
number by another. If either of the
expressions is floating point, then
the result type is floating point;
otherwise the result type is integer.

numeric_expression /
numeric_expression

Returns the result of dividing one
number by another. If either of the
expressions is floating point, then
the result type is floating point;
otherwise the result type is integer.

numeric_expression %
integer_expression

Returns the remainder of dividing
one number by an integer. If the
first expression is floating point,

178

Working With GIS
then the result type is floating point;
otherwise the result type is integer.
&

string_expression &
string_expression

Returns the concatenation of two
strings. The result type is a string.

expression = expression

Returns TRUE if the two expressions
are equal and FALSE otherwise. '='
is synonymous with the EQUALS
operator. The result type is
logical_expression.

expression <> expression

Returns TRUE if the two expressions
are not equal and FALSE otherwise.
The result type is
logical_expression.

expression <= expression

Returns TRUE if the first expression
is less than or equal to the second
expression, and FALSE otherwise.
The result type is
logical_expression.

expression < expression

Returns TRUE if the first expression
is less than the second expression,
and FALSE otherwise. The result
type is logical_expression.

expression > expression

Returns TRUE if the first expression
is greater than the second
expression, and FALSE otherwise.
The result type is
logical_expression.

expression >= expression

Returns TRUE if the first expression
is greater than or equal to the
second expression, and FALSE
otherwise. The result type is
logical_expression.

Datepart Specifiers
Dates are made up of dateparts: hours, minutes, seconds, years, months, days, and
so on. For example, the month datepart of the date July 4, 1776 is 7. The day part is
4, and the year part is 1776. In a field creation formula, datepart specifiers are used
as parameters to date functions (e.g. YEAR(), DATEDIFF(), etc.).
D: A datepart representing the day part of a date. 'DD' is a synonym for 'D'.
DW: A datepart representing day of the week for a date.
DY: A datepart representing the day of the year for a date. 'Y' is a synonym for 'DY'.
HH: A datepart representing the hour part of a date.
M: A datepart representing the month part of a date. 'MM' is a synonym for 'M'.
MI: A datepart representing the minutes part of a date. 'N' is a synonym for 'MI'.
MS: A datepart representing the milliseconds part of a date.
Q: A datepart representing quarters. 'QQ' is a synonym for 'Q'.

179

XMap User Guide
S: A datepart representing the seconds part of a date. 'SS' is a synonym for 'S'.
WK: A datepart representing the week part of a date. 'WW' is a synonym for 'WK'.
YY: A datepart representing the year part of a date. 'YYYY' is a synonym for 'YY'.

Importing a Set to Link to an Attribute

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Each layer contains a set of attributes relative to that layer; you can import an
additional attribute set relative to that layer. Once you import the attribute set, you
can link it to the layer's attributes to view additional information about the layer.
To Import a Set to Link to an Attribute
Use the following steps to import a set to link to an attribute.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select a layer from the workspace list.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

6. Click Options.
7. Click Manage Sets and then click Import.
The Append Attributes dialog box opens.
OR
Click Import.
The Append Attributes dialog box opens.
8. Click the browse button to locate the file you want to import (supported file
types include: .xls, .dbf, .sds, .txt, .csv, .tab, .asc, .mdb, .mdw, .mda).
The name of the set displays in the Set Name text box and descriptive text
displays in the Set Statistics area.
Note The Set Name text box is editable.
9. If you are importing a file other than a text file, select the table/spreadsheet
you want to append from the list.
10. Click Next.
11. If the file you are importing is a text file, select whether it is a tab delimited,
comma delimited, or other delimited text file. If you want to use the first row
as the header, select the Use First Row as Header check box.
12. Click Finish. See Linking a Set to an Attribute for more information.
Note If your imported set includes date information, ensure the dates are between
1/1/1753 and 12/31/9999. If you have a date that is outside of these parameters,
change your date value to a string value in the source database.

180

Working With GIS

Linking a Set to an Attribute

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Once you import an attribute set using the option in the Design View of the
Attributes subtab, you can link that attribute set to view more specific attribute
information for your layer.
Notes
•

XMap supports only one-to-one linking.

•

Once you link an attribute set to a layer, you can unlink it by clicking the
Options button, clicking Manage Sets, selecting the attribute set, and then
clicking Unlink.

To Link a Set to an Attribute
Use the following steps to link a set to an attribute.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select a layer from the workspace list.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
.

5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button
6. Click Options.
7. Click Link.
The Link Attribute Sets dialog box opens.
OR
Click Manage Sets and then click Link.
The Link Attribute Sets dialog box opens.

8. Under Layer Attribution, select the existing layer or previously imported
attribute set you want to link to the imported file from the Set drop-down list.
Then, select the attribute in the attribute set that has an identical field in the
imported file from the Attribute drop-down list
9. Under Additional Attribution, select the attribute set that contains the
attribute selected in step 8 from the Set drop-down list. Then, select the
attribute you want to link from the Attribute drop-down list. The attribute
selected must be the same type as the attribute selected in step 8 (for
example, if you selected a "string" attribute in step 8, you must select a
"string" attribute in this step).
10. The results display in the various tabs in the Link table at the bottom of the
dialog box. The table below describes the various tabs in the Link table:
Tab Name

Description

Results

Displays all of the records that were successfully
linked.

Unmatched in

Displays all unmatched records in the Layer
Attribution Set. Unmatched records can be edited so
that they can be successfully linked.

181

XMap User Guide
Unmatched in

Displays all unmatched records in the Additional
Attribution Set.

Duplicates in

Displays any duplicate records from the Layer
Attribution Set. Duplicate records can be edited so
that they can be successfully linked.

Duplicates in

Displays any duplicate records from the Additional
Attribution Set.

11. Click OK.

Selecting a Geometry to be Read Only

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can use the Design View in the Attributes subtab to save existing geometries to
be read only, ensuring that the geometry will not be edited. Read-only geometries
display in the Attributes table with a yellow padlock

next to them.

To Make a Geometry Read Only
Use the following steps to set a geometry to be read only.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select the layer that includes the geometry you want to modify as read only
from the workspace list.
4. Click the Attributes subtab.
5. If it is not already in Design View mode, click the Design View button

6. In the table, select the Visible check box for the Source Name ReadOnly.
7. Click the Datasheet View button
.
The attributes of the layer display and the new ReadOnly column displays.
8. To select an individual geometry, click to select it in the Attributes table.
Double-click in the ReadOnly cell and select True from the drop-down list.
Then, press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
To select multiple geometries:
a.
Hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click each geometry you want
to make read only, or hold the SHIFT key to select a block of geometries.
b.
Hold the ALT key on your keyboard and double-click in one of the geometries'
ReadOnly cells.
c.

Select True from the drop-down list.

Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.

e.
At the confirmation message, click Yes to confirm that you want to apply the
edit to the entire selection.

182

Working With GIS

Query
Creating a Query

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Query subtab to build custom attribute queries to run against the layer
selected in the workspace. You can also use the Query subtab to create spatial
queries, allowing you to see patterns between two layers. Queries saved in a
database are available to everyone you share your data with either as a DeLorme
OpenSpace transfer file or on your XMap Web site.
You can customize your default query option settings.
To Create an Attribute Query
Use the following steps to create an attribute query using the GIS tab.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Select the layer you want to query from the Layer drop-down list; only layers
in the workspace display in this list.
4. If a query is already displaying in the Query subtab, click the Manage button
and then click New.
5. Optional. To name the query something other than the default (the default
name is Query#), click the Manage button and then click Rename.
The Query text box activates and lets you edit the query name.
6. Click the cell under Attribute.
A drop-down list displays all of the attribute fields in the selected layer. Select
the field you want to query.
Note Selecting the GEOMETRY attribute creates a spatial query (see next
section below).
7. Click the cell under Operator and select an operator from the drop-down list.
The options in this list vary based on the attribute field's data type.
8. Click the cell under Criteria. A drop-down list displays all of the records
available for the field selected in step 6. Select the value (or enter a custom
value) that you want to use in your query.
9. If you want to create a complex query, click the cell under Logical Operator
and select a logical operator (And, Or, or And Not) from the drop-down list.
10. Optional. If you want to allow Web users or other XMap users to enter their
own values for the query, select the User Input check box next to the query
you want to share.
11. Optional. Repeat steps 6-10 in the next row(s) if you are creating a complex
query.
12. Click Run.
13. If you selected User Input in step 10, the Run Query dialog box opens. Verify
the query is correct and then click Run.
14. All objects that satisfy the query are highlighted on the map and the number
(count) of query results displays under Query Results. You can change how
query results display on the map using the tools in the Query tab. You can

183

XMap User Guide
change how the highlight is symbolized by clicking the Edit button to the
right of the Query table.
Note To decrease the time it takes to run a query, disable the Count function
by clicking the Query button and then clicking Count to toggle the feature
on/off.
To Create a Spatial Query
Use the following steps to create a spatial query using the GIS tab.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. If a query is already displaying in the Query subtab, click the Manage button
and then click New.
4. Optional. To name the query something other than the default (the default
name is Query#), click the Manage button and then click Rename.
The Query text box activates and lets you edit the query name.
5. Click the cell under Attribute and select the GEOMETRY option from the
drop-down list.
6. Click the cell under Operator and select an operator from the drop-down list.

184

•

INTERSECTS–Available for all geometry types. Returns any geometries
in the source layer that touch the boundary of, partially contain,
completely contain, are partially within, or are completely within the
geometries in the specified layer/criteria.

•

CONTAINS–Available for only for polygon layers. Returns any
geometries in the source layer that completely contain the geometries
in the specified layer/criteria.
Note If any portion of a polygon or line is outside of the polygons in
the source layer, the polygons will not be returned in the query
results.

•

IS CONTAINED BY–Available for all geometry types. Returns any
geometries in the source layer that are completely contained by the
geometries in the specified layer/criteria.

•

DOES NOT INTERSECT–Available for all geometry types. Returns the
inverse of INTERSECTS for the selected source layer.

•

DOES NOT CONTAIN–Available only for polygon layers. Returns the
inverse of CONTAINS for the selected source layer.
Note If any portion of a polygon or line is outside of the polygons in
the source layer, the polygons are returned in the query results.

•

IS NOT CONTAINED BY–Available for all geometry types. Returns the
inverse of IS CONTAINED BY for the selected source layer.

•

WITHIN A DISTANCE OF–Available for all geometry types. Returns any
geometries in the source layer that are within the user-specified
distance of the geometries in the specified layer/criteria. If you select
this option, the Edit Query dialog box opens and you are prompted to
specify the distance parameters.

•

IS NOT WITHIN A DISTANCE OF–Available for all geometry types.
Returns the inverse of WITHIN A DISTANCE OF for the selected source
layer. If you select this option, the Edit Query dialog box opens and
you are prompted to specify the distance parameters.

Working With GIS
7. Click the cell under Criteria. A drop-down list displays all applicable layers
that are loaded into Workspace (the list varies depending on the source layer
and operator chosen), as well as the following options:
•

SELECTED–Acts against the geometries in the active selection, if any.
(Selections are made with the Selection tool, Edit tool, Edit Points tool,
or Rotate Geometry tool).

•

MAP CENTER–Acts against the coordinate of the current map center
and updates the query every time the map center is changed.

•

COORDINATE–Acts against the user-specified coordinate. If you select
this option, the Edit Query dialog box opens and you are prompted to
specify the coordinates (in latitude/longitude format only) or you can
click Map Center to use the current map center

8. Click the cell under Logical Operator and select a logical operator (And, Or,
or And Not) from the drop-down list.
9. Optional. Repeat steps 5-8 in the next row(s) to create a complex spatial
query.
10. Click Run.
11. All objects affected by the query are highlighted on the map and the number
(count) of query results displays under Query Results. You can change how
query results display on the map using the edit tools in the Query tab.
Note To decrease the time it takes to run a query, disable the Count function
by clicking the Query button and then clicking Count to toggle the feature
on/off.
Note Click the Delete button
that row in the query.

in the left column of the Query table to delete

Tips
•

You can copy a query and use it as a base for another query. To copy a query,
click the Manage button and then click Copy. The copied information is placed
in a new query.

•

You can combine spatial and attribute queries to build powerful complex queries.

Changing How Query Results Display on the Map

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
The Query subtab has a Map Effect feature that lets you change how query results
display on the map:
•

Highlight–Depicts the query results on the map based on the selected query
results color/style.

•

Filter–Changes the look of the geometry so that only the area(s) affected by
the query display on the map.

•

None–Does not show any visual cue of the query results on the map but
shows how many records were affected if the Count option is enabled.
Selecting this option makes the query process run more quickly.

If you selected the Highlight Map Effect option in the Query tab, query results display
on the map with the specified highlight color. You can use the editing tools in the
Query tab to create custom highlight colors for your query results. The steps for

185

XMap User Guide
creating a custom highlight color/design vary based on the type of layer you are
querying.
Notes
•

To delete the default highlight color or any other custom highlight colors you've
created, right-click the highlight feature in the Symbolization table and click
Delete Feature.

•

To add multiple highlight colors, right-click the Symbolization table and select
Insert Feature. The highlight colors are in the Symbol drop-down list to the
right of the Query table (in the Query Results group box).

•

After running a custom highlight query, changing the active classification of the
layer may cause the currently highlighted objects to display with a different
symbolization.

To Change How Query Results Display on the Map
Use the following steps to change how query results display on the map.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Click the Manage button, click Map Effect, and then select Highlight,
Filter, or None. The option with a selected check box next to it is the
currently selected option).
Proceed with the steps below if you chose Highlight in step 3.
4. Under Query Results, click Edit.
The Symbolize Highlight Query dialog box opens.
5. Right-click in the Symbolization table and click Insert Feature.
6. You can change highlight options—the options available depend on the type of
layer:
•

To change the opacity of the color of your feature...
•

•

To change the highlight color/design for a polygon layer...
•

To change the fill color of your feature, click the Fill Color button next
to Fill under Polygon Features and select a standard fill color or
create a custom fill color. To change the fill style of your feature, click
the Fill Style drop-down list and select the style.
OR
To hide the fill color on the map, clear the Show Fill check box.

•

To change the outline color of your feature, ensure the Show Outline
check box is selected, click the Outline Color button next to Outline
under Polygon Features) and select a standard line color or create a
custom line color. Then, select how wide you want your outline to
display from the Width drop-down list.
OR
To hide the outline color on the map, clear the Show Outline check
box.

To change the highlight color for a line layer...
•

186

From the Opacity drop-down list, select Opaque (0% transparent),
Transparent (100% transparent), Blended (50% transparent), or
XOR (combination of the source and background pixels—most useful
when records with the same symbolization overlap.

To change the line color of your feature, click the Color button and
select a standard or custom line color. Then, select a line width from

Working With GIS
the Width drop-down list and a line style from the Style drop-down
list.
•

•

To change the outline color of your feature, click the Outline Color
button, and select a standard line color or create a custom line color.
Then, select how wide you want your outline to display from the
Width drop-down list.
Note An outline is placed underneath a line. Therefore, if the outline
is fewer pixels wide than the line, the outline may not be visible. To
ensure an outline will be visible, make sure the outline is at least 2
pixels greater than the line.

To change the highlight color for a point layer...
•

To change the type of symbol you want to display, select a symbol set
from the Set drop-down list and then use the symbol scroll list below
the drop-down list to select a new symbol.
Note To add a new symbol set, click the Add button and then use the
dialog box to add a new symbol set. The symbol set must contain .dim
or .bmp symbols (.bmp symbols do not scale well).

•

To change the color of your symbol, click the Color button and select
a standard fill color or create a custom fill color.

•

To change the size of your symbol, select a size from the Size dropdown list.

To change the properties of your label...
•

Ensure the Show Label check box is selected and then:

Select a different font from the Font drop-down list.

To change the font style, click the Bold button

, Italic

, or Underline button
. You can also click More
button
Styles for additional font style options.

To change the font color, click the Font Color button
and select a standard line color or create a custom line color.

To change the font size, select a size from the Size drop-down
list.

To hide the label on the map, clear the Show Label check box.

Tip Once you modify the font properties of your labels, the text may
appear cluttered on the map. If this is the case, ensure the Declutter
Text check box is selected.
11. Click OK.

Changing How Query Results Display in the Attributes Subtab

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
The Query subtab contains an Attributes Effect feature that lets you change how
query results display in the Attributes subtab.
To Change How Query Results Display on the Map

187

XMap User Guide
Use the following steps to change how query results display on the map.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Click the Manage button, click Attributes Effect, and then select Highlight,
Filter, or None. The option with a selected check box next to it is the
currently selected option.
•

Highlight–Highlights the query results yellow in the Attributes subtab.

•

Filter–Filters the Datasheet View of the Attributes tab so that only the
query results display.

•

None–Does not show any visual cue of the query results in the
Attributes subtab but will show how many records were affected as
long as the Count option is enabled. Select this option to make the
query process run more quickly.

Deleting a Query

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
You can delete a query from a workspace or a database.
To Delete a Query
Use the following steps to delete a query.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Select the query you want to delete from the Query drop-down list.
4. Click the Manage button and then click Delete.

Cancelling a Query

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you cancel a query, the map and attribute effects used by the query are no
longer applied to the layer but the query is still available in the Query list in the
Query subtab and the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab.
To permanently delete a query from a workspace or database, see Deleting a Query.
To Cancel a Query
Use the following steps to cancel a query.
1. Create a query.
Note You must click Run to make the Cancel option available.
2. Click Options and then click Cancel.
The query results are no longer highlighted on the map or in the Attributes
subtab, but the query is available in the query list in both the Query and
Attribute subtabs.
Note The query will not disappear from the query view until you click out of
the Query subtab.

188

Working With GIS

Layering
Reordering Layers

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
When you import layer, the layer is automatically set to appear at Z-level 4500. You
can use the Layering subtab to drag and drop layers and adjust their Z-levels. Layers
are placed according to their Z-level; layers with a high Z-level are placed on top of
the map display, layers with a low Z-level are placed on the bottom of the map
display.
To Reorder Layers
Use the following steps to reorder layers.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not selected.
3. Select the check box next to each layer you want to reorder.
4. Click the Layering subtab.
The Layering dialog area displays. All standard, DeLorme layers display in
light gray font. Custom layers display in bold font.
Note You can only move custom layers.
5. Click to select the custom layer you want to move and then drag the layer to
the desired position. When you drag the layer, a light gray line displays
between each layer you pass (see graphic below).
Note You can also double-click in the layer's Z-Level cell and re-type a new
Z-level for the layer. Doing this automatically moves the layer to the
appropriate position.

6. To move the layer between existing layers, release the mouse button when
the light gray line displays between the two layers you want to move your
layer above/below. The Z-level adjusts according to the placement of the
layer.
OR
To move the layer so that it has the same Z-level as an existing layer, release
the mouse button when the existing layer is highlighted (see graphics below).

189

XMap User Guide
The graphic below depicts what the table looks like when you drag the custom layer on
top of existing layer.

The graphic below depicts what the table looks like once the custom layer has been
moved and assigned the same Z-level as the existing layer.

Checking Layers Out and In
Checking Layers Out and In

This Help topic describes features that are available in XMap
GIS Editor and XMap GIS Enterprise.
Use the Check-out/in subtab to create check-out layers for editing portions of or an
entire source layer. The area that a check-out layer includes is then locked until the
layer is checked back into the source layer, ensuring that new edits are not
overwritten. Once the check-out layer is checked back into the source layer, all edits
that were made will be available to the XMap users who have access to that layer.
Notes
•

Only layers in Enterprise databases can be checked out and in.

•

After a check-out layer has been created, you can cancel (and delete) it by
highlighting it and then clicking the Cancel button in the Check-out/in
subtab.

•

Once a layer has been enabled for check-outs, you can disable it by selecting

190

Working With GIS
the Disable Layer for Check-outs check box.
•

All geometries that intersect the selected checkout grids (both the geometry
itself and the MBR) are included in the check-out.

•

Any geometries that are part of a check-out will be locked for editing in any
other subsequent check-outs. Locked geometries display with a lock icon next
to the Geoid number in the Datasheet View of the Attributes subtab.

•

Check-out layers cannot have check-outs made against them.

•

Check-out layers display with check-out grids over them as a reference.

•

The number of check-out layers that have been created for a particular layer
display underneath the Check-out Grid Size drop-down list.

To Check-out a Layer
Use the following steps to create a check-out layer.
1. Click the GIS tab and then click the Check-out/in subtab.
2. Select a layer that you want to check-out from the Source Layer drop-down
list. If the layer is not enabled for check-out/in, you receive a message
asking if you want to enable it. If you select not to enable the layer, you will
be asked to select a different layer.
3. Under Parameters, select the grid size for the source layer check-outs from
the Check-out Grid Size drop-down list; this option is only available only
when there are no other check-outs in the source layer.
Note You may need to adjust the data zoom level of the map if you choose a
small grid size.
4. Click Select and then click inside the grids on the map that include the area
you want to check-out. To select multiple grids, drag your cursor over each of
the grids you want to include in the check-out or hold the CTRL or SHIFT keys
on your keyboard while you click inside multiple grids.
Note To remove an individual selected grid, press the SHIFT key and then
click inside the grid. To remove multiple selected grids, drag your cursor over
each of the selected grids that you want to remove from the check-out region
(be sure to start the drag method within a selected grid).
5. Click Check-out.
The Check-out Layer dialog box opens.
6. Type a name for your check-out layer in the Layer Name text box.
7. Select a destination database for the check-out layer from the Target
Database drop-down list; the target database and the source database
cannot be the same. If the database you want is not listed, you can select
Other to attach a new database to add the check-out layer to or New if you
want to create a new database.
Note You must have a database role of XMap Checkout Creator or higher to
create a check-out layer. You must have a database role of XMap
Administrator or XMap Owner for the target database to save the check-out
layer in that target database.
8. Optional. Type comments related to the check-out layer in the Comments
text box.
9. If you want to add the check-out layer to your workspace automatically,
select the Add Layer to Workspace check box.

191

XMap User Guide
Note If you do not select the Add Layer to Workspace check box, you can
add the layer to your workspace layer using the Manage Layers dialog box.
10. Click Check-out.
The grids selected in step 4 are highlighted on the map with the layer name
selected in step 6. The check-out layer's user name, layer name, target
database, creation date, grid count, and comments display in the Checkout/in table.
Note If any warnings were detected during the check-out process, you
receive a message asking you if you want to continue (and also if you want to
save the warnings in a text file by clicking Save to File).
To Check-in a Layer
Important Once a check-out layer is checked-in, the changes cannot be undone.
Be sure to visually inspect the attribute and geometry changes in the check-out layer
before checking them into the source layer.
Use the following steps to check-in a check-out layer.
1. Click the GIS tab and then click the Check-out/in subtab.
2. Select the source layer that contains the check-out layer you want to check-in
from the Source Layer drop-down list.
3. Click Check-in.
The layer is checked into the source layer and the check-out layer is deleted
from its database.

192

Printing
Printing a Map
You can print a 2-D or 3-D map based on your paper size or screen size. If you
choose to print a map based on your paper size, you can also print a multi-page map
that you can assemble using the Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map instructions.

To Print a Map
Use the following steps to print a map.
1. Locate the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab.
3. Click the Map subtab.
4. Under Map, select Left map, Right map, or Both maps.
Note If the left or right and/or both options are unavailable, it is because
only one map view is displayed. To make all selections available, use the map
resize tool to expose the left and right map views. To print a full-page 3-D
map, use the map resize tool to expose only the left map window.
5. Under Print Layout, select Page (the map print area is based on the paper
size you have specified in the Setup options) or Screen (the map print area is
based on the screen size).
The print area for a Page map displays as a red box on the map, which may
not always be visible. The overview map and the print area for a Screen map
display as a blue box on the overview map.
6. If you selected Screen in step 5, go to step 7. If you selected Page in step 5,
the following options are available.
•

Under Print Layout, select a layout option (Single, 2 x 2, or 3 x 3).
The print area displays on both the map and the overview map.

•

If you selected 2 x 2 or 3 x 3 on the map layout graphic, and you do
not want to print all the pages in the multi page map, click each page
you do not want to print. The page appears dimmed or gray. (You can
click a dimmed/gray page again to print it.)
Note In the example below, page 4 will not print for the 2 x 2 map.

•

Verify this is the location and photo zoom you want to print.
•

If not, pan the map to a new location and zoom to the correct
level.
OR

•

To change the photo zoom, select an option from the Photo
Zoom drop-down list or type the photo zoom in the text box.
Note Changing the photo zoom enlarges or reduces the map
features and changes the map print area. If you increase the
photo zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc. display larger
and your map print area is reduced. If you decrease the photo
zoom level, map text, lines, symbols, etc. display smaller and
your map print area is enlarged. The reduction/enlargement

193

XMap User Guide
percentages for your photo zoom level display under the Photo
Zoom drop-down list.
•

If you want to use other tabs and functions but not lose your current
print area or other settings, select the Lock Print Center check box.
Selecting this check box locks the print area and changes the tab label
to red.

•

Select the Print Preview check box to zoom the map and view the
entire print area. Clear the check box to return to your previous data
zoom level.

•

Add text or graphics to your map

7. To change printers or make choices for transparent/yellow background, paper
orientation, paper size, and paper source, click Setup. The Print Setup dialog
opens.
Note From the Setup dialog box, click Properties to view additional
options. If the options are available, set the graphics mode to use raster
graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics. Consult your printer
manual for additional information.
8. Click the Print button to print your map.
Tips
•

To save a map to a file, see Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG Image.

•

To adjust the print area of a Page map, select the Lock Print Center check
box, select the Select tool
position.

, and then drag the frame to the new

Printing a Route and Directions
You can print maps of your route and route directions for any route you create.
Additionally, you can save your directions or along the way results in a text file. For
more information, see Saving Route Directions as Text.
For specific recommendations on best printing results, see your printer manual.

To Print a Route
Use the following steps to print an existing route.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
Note If you do not have a route on this project, the route options are
unavailable.
2. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer,
change printer properties, select a transparent/yellow background, select
paper size, and select paper orientation. Click OK when finished.
If the options are available under Printer Properties, set the graphics mode
to use raster graphics and set TrueType fonts to print as graphics.
3. Select the route you want to print from the Name drop-down list. Only routes
contained in the current project display in this list.
4. Under Options, select from one of the following choices:

194

•

Overview–Provides an optimized map of your route and the route
summary—trip distance, trip time, start, total stops, and finish.

•

Travel Package–Provides maps of the route with corresponding
directions.

Printing
•

Turn Details–Prints 2" x 2" maps of each of the turns in your route
directions.

•

Directions–Provides action-based directions (turn, merge, bear,
depart, arrive, and continue) including the time frame for each action.
Note You can save route directions as a text file.

•

Along the Way–Prints the search results of a previous Advanced Find
search within a current route. The search results are listed as they are
listed in the Find results. The Along the Way option is only available if
you have recently performed a find/category within current route
search in the Advanced Find subtab. For more information, see
Performing an Advanced Search.

•

Strip Maps–Provides detailed maps in the direction of travel of the
route along with directions that appear in the map margin. Strip maps
are not printed North Up like other printed maps. They are printed so
that the direction of travel is always at the top of the printed map.

5. If you selected Travel Package or Strip Maps in step 4, select the miles per
page that you want your route to cover from the Miles Per Page drop-down
list.
Note When setting the number of miles per page, keep in mind that the
number of miles is not the distance of the route. Instead, it equals the width
of the strip map and determines the scale of the map.
6. Select Increasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to end the
route directions with the total time and distance.
OR
Select Decreasing from the Trip Time/Distance drop-down list to start the
directions with the total time and distance — similar to a countdown.
7. Optional. To view a preview of your selection, click View.
8. Click Print.

Printing a Profile
You can print a profile you have created.

To Print a Profile
Use the following steps to print a profile.
1. Create a profile.
2. Click the Print tab and click the Profile subtab to display the Profile options.
3. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box and select a printer,
change printer properties, select paper size, and select paper orientation.
Click OK when finished.
4. Under Profile, select On Map or Profile Only. If you select On Map, select
whether you want to print the profile as shown on the Left or Right map.
IF you
select this
option...

THEN you will print...

On Map

The background map with the main Profile graph at
the bottom of the page.

Profile Only

The main Profile graph without the map.

195

XMap User Guide

Note Click the Copy to Clipboard button
to
copy your profile to the clipboard so that you can
paste it into a graphics program such as Microsoft
Paint or Adobe Photoshop. When you copy the map
to the clipboard, the map is saved at current
monitor resolution.
5. If you want to print all of the profile's Statistical Data Options, select the
Profile Stats check box.
The statistics are printed on the same page as the profile.
to save your profile as a bitmap or JPEG
6. Optional. Click the Save button
image. Rename the file (if necessary) and click Save.
7. Optional. To view a preview of your selection, click View.
8. Click Print to print the map using the selected print options.

Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map
You can add text (framed or unframed) and graphics (north arrows, scale bars,
images, and GIS legends) to your map.
and

•

To modify the properties of a text/graphic item, click the Select tool
click the item on the map.

•

To make graphic items added to your map the same size, press and hold the
SHIFT key on your keyboard or drag to select two items, right-click, select Make
Same Size, and select Width, Height, or Both from the menu.

•

After you add text/graphic items to your map, you can align, snap, or layer them
on the map.

To Add Text to Your Map
Use the following steps to add text to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see
Printing a Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Framed Text tool
OR
Click the Unframed Text tool

.
.

5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your text. A text box
displays.
When not in editing mode, you can reposition your text by dragging the text
box to the new position.
6. Type the text in the text box. To type more than one line of text, press
SHIFT+ENTER on your keyboard to advance to another line. Press the ENTER
key on your keyboard when finished typing your text.
7. Under Layout Tools, select the font, style, and size for your text from the
drop-down lists.

196

Printing

8. To underline your text, click the Underline tool

9. To change the color of your text, click the Font Color tool
Color dialog box, you can:

. From the

•

Click to select an alternative color. Click OK when finished.

•

Click Define Custom Colors and create a custom color by assigning
red/green/blue or hue/sat/lum values. Click Add to Custom Colors
and then click OK.
to align the text in your text box to the left.

10. Click the Align Left button
OR

to align the text in the center of the text box.

Click the Center button
OR
Click the Align Right button
right.

to align the text in your text box to the

11. Click the Text Box Size button
if you want the size of your text box to
grow with the amount of text typed.
The Text Box Size button is a toggle button. If the button is not activated,
any text placed on the map is placed in a default-sized text box. You can
resize the default size text box by selecting the text box on the map and
dragging any of the white boxes on the corners/sides of text box.

To Add a North Arrow to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a North arrow to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see
Printing a Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
. All of the North Arrow styles display to the

4. Click the North Arrow tool
right.

5. Select the North Arrow style and then click the location on the map where you
want to add the graphic.
Once you place the North Arrow on the map, you can resize it by dragging
any of the white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic. Reposition the
North Arrow at any time by dragging the graphic to the new position.

To Add a Scale Bar to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a scale bar to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see
Printing a Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Scale Bar tool

. All of the Scale Bar styles display to the right.

197

XMap User Guide
5. Select the check box to the left of the Scale Bar style options and then select
the Scale Bar style.
AND/OR
Select the Scale check box to display the current scale on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Scale Reference Length check box to display the scale reference
length on the map.
AND/OR
Select the Zoom check box to display the current data zoom level on the
map.
6. Click the location on the map where you want to add the graphic.
Once you place the Scale Bar on the map, you can resize it by dragging any
of the white boxes on the corners/sides of the graphic.

To Add an Image to Your Map
Use the following steps to add an image to your map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see
Printing a Map.
3. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
4. Click the Image tool

5. Click the location on the map where you want to add your image. The Select
Image File dialog box opens.
You can reposition the image at any time by dragging it to the new position.
6. Select an image file (.jpg, .bmp, or .gif) to place on your map and then click
Open. The image displays on the map and the file name displays in the text
box next to the Image tool under Layout Tools.
You can update the image at any time by clicking the Browse button
browsing to an alternative image.

and

7. Select the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box to maintain the image's widthto-height ratio while resizing.
8. Select the Preview Image check box to preview the image on the map.

To Add a GIS Legend to Your Map
Use the following steps to add a GIS legend to your map.
1. Click the GIS tab.
2. Click the Workspace subtab if it is not currently displaying and then select
the check boxes next to each layer for which you want to add the legend to
your map.
3. Click the Print tab and then click Map to view the Print/Map dialog area.
4. Select your Map and Print Layout options. For more information, see
Printing a Map.
5. Under Layout Tools, click and hold the text and graphics button to reveal the
hidden text and graphic tools.
6. Click the GIS Legend tool

198

Printing
7. Select the layer with the legend you want to add to the map from the Layer
drop-down list.
8. Click the location on the map where you want to add your GIS legend. The
legend displays on the map.
You can reposition or resize legends on the map. To reposition, drag the
legend to the new location. To resize, drag any of the white boxes on the
corners/sides of the legend.
9. Select the Show Highlight Feature check box to view the highlight color in
the legend.

Aligning Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can use the right-click options
to align each object with a certain location on the map.

Aligning Multiple Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to align multiple text and graphic items on the map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map. For more information,
see Adding Text or Graphics to Your Map.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on your keyboard, click each text/graphic item
on the map.
OR
Drag your mouse over the text/graphic items on the map to select multiple
items at once.
4. Right-click one of the items, point to Align, and then click:
•

Left to align the left sides of all of the items; placement is based on
the left side of the left-most item.

•

Right to align the right sides of all of the items; placement is based on
the right side of the right-most item.

•

Top to align the top side of all of the items; placement is based on the
top side of the top-most item.

•

Bottom to align the bottom side of all of the items; placement is
based on the bottom side of the bottom-most item.

•

Vertical Center to center the items based on the average of the
vertical placement of the items.

•

Horizontal Center to center the items based on the average of the
horizontal placement of the items.

•

Center to center the items based on the center of the average area
that the items cover on the map.

•

Stack Vertically to stack the items vertically on top of each other.

•

Stack Horizontally to position the items side-by-side.

Tips
•

To make multiple graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same Size, and
click Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items the
same size, the largest item is always the basis for the size change. Important:
For an item to be made the same size as another item, the item must not be
locked — for example, the Maintain Aspect Ratio check box should be cleared for
199

XMap User Guide
any images, only text items with default size text boxes can be resized, and so
on.
•

To delete multiple text or graphic items, click the Edit tool, drag the mouse on
the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and then press the DELETE
key on your keyboard.

Snapping Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
After you add a text or graphic tool to your map, you can snap each item to the
location you want it by dragging the item along the edges of the map or by dragging
the item to snap it to the horizontal center of the page.
To disable the auto-snap function, hold down the ALT key on your keyboard while
dragging the text/graphic items on the map.

To Snap Text and Graphic Items on Your Map
Use the following steps to snap text and graphic items on a printed map.
1. Add text or graphics to your map.
2. Drag each text/graphic item you placed on the map to the location you want
them on the map. If you drag an item to the edge of the map print area, the
text/graphic snaps to the edge. If you drag the item to the horizontal center
of the edge of the map print area, the text/graphic snaps to the center of the
edge. You can also drag the item to the center of the map print area to snap
it to the center of the printed map.
Tips
•

To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on
your keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, select Make Same Size,
and click Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple items
the same size, the largest item is always the basis for the size change.

•

To delete multiple text/graphic items, select the Edit tool, drag the mouse in a
down-right direction on the map to encompass the items you want to delete, and
then press the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Layering Multiple Text and Graphic Items on a Printed
Map
You may want to layer text or graphic items on your printed map. In this case, use
the right-click Bring to Front/Send to Back options so that each can still be displayed.

To Layer Multiple Text or Graphic Items on a Printed Map
Use the following steps to layer multiple text or graphic items on the map.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
2. Place more than one text or graphic item on your map (see Adding Text or
Graphics to Your Map), placing the text/graphic items on top of each other.
3. If one of the text/graphic items you want to display is partially underneath
another text/graphic item, select the item you want to display, right-click,
and click Bring to Front.
To reverse this step, right-click the item and select Send to Back.
Tips

200

Printing
•

To make multiple text and graphic items the same size, press the SHIFT key on
your keyboard and select each item. Then, right-click, point to Make Same
Size, and click Width, Height, or Both. When you attempt to make multiple
items the same size, the largest item is always the basis for the size change.

•

Changing the Background Color of a Printed Map
When you print a map, a yellow (or black if you are using High Contrast Colors)
background automatically displays on the printout. If you want a transparent
background — for example, if you are printing transparencies — you can change the
Print settings to print with a transparent background.

To Print Maps With a Transparent Background
Use the following steps to turn off the yellow background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, select the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a transparent background.

To Print Maps With a Yellow/Black Background
Use the following steps to turn on the yellow/black background when printing a map.
1. Center the map on the area you want to print.
2. Click the Print tab and then click the Map subtab.
3. Select the Print Layout options. For more information, see Printing a Map.
4. Click Setup.
The Print Setup dialog box opens.
5. At the bottom of the dialog box, clear the Print Maps with a Transparent
Background check box.
6. Click OK.
All map printouts print with a yellow background (or black if you are using
High Contrast Colors).

Manually Assembling a Multi-page Map
After you have printed the sheets for your multi-page map, you are ready to
assemble the map.
Before you begin, be sure you have a clear work surface large enough to
accommodate the final map size.
You will need the following tools to assemble your map:
•

Pencil

•

Razor knife
201

XMap User Guide
•

Straight-edge ruler (longer than the edge of the longest sheet)

•

Permanent tape (invisible or "magic" type)

•

Removable tape

To Manually Assemble a Multi-page Map
Use the following steps to manually assemble a multi-page map.
1. For each sheet that needs to be trimmed, mark the edges of the sheet to
indicate the areas to trim.
2. Use the straight edge ruler and razor knife to trim each sheet to the thin
black line bordering the map.
Note For adjacent sheets, trim only one page. This makes piecing the sheets
together easier.
The following diagrams of a 2 x 2 and 3 x 3 multi-page map provide
additional information on where to trim the sheets. The arrows indicate the
edges to be trimmed.
2 x 2 multi-page Map

3 x 3 multi-page Map

202

Printing

3. Align two adjacent sheets, placing the trimmed edge on top of the nontrimmed edge.
Notes
•

Piece together the multi-page map one seam at a time. This is
especially important for a 3 x 3 multi-page map.

•

Build the multi-page map from the inside out to minimize any
misalignment.

4. Using two small pieces of removable tape, tack together the aligned sheets.

Note This is a temporary measure. Steps 6 through 10 describe how to
completely secure the sheets.

203

XMap User Guide
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until all the sheets are pieced together.
6. With the multi-page temporarily pieced together, use small pieces of
removable tape to secure the corners and edges of the multi-page map.

Note Place the removable tape on the corners and edges, not along the
seams.
7. For each seam, fix the tape to the work surface, not on the sheet, so the tape
is in alignment with the seam.
8. Spool off enough permanent tape to cover the entire seam. Be careful not to
let the tape touch the map until you are ready to apply it (in step 9).
9. Keeping the length of the tape taut, carefully apply the tape to the seam until
both sides are fixed to the work surface.

10. Press the tape along the seam to remove any air gaps.

204

Printing
11. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until all seams are completely pieced together.

12. Using the straight-edge ruler, carefully trim the edges of the map at the
seams (where the tape is affixed to the workspace).
13. Peel off the removable tape at the corners and the edges. You are now ready
to display your multi-page map.

205

Finding a Location on the Map
Find Overview
There are four Find options you can use to search for and locate places and other
map items. The search options available depend on your datasets.
•

QuickSearch–Search for places, addresses, cities/towns, ZIP/Postal Codes,
and coordinate positions. If the item you are looking for is not recognized, the
Advanced tab displays automatically.

•

POIs–Search for specific points of interest, such as hotels, restaurants,
hospitals, department stores, etc. Search a specified distance from the
current map center or along an active route.

•

GPS Radar–Search for points of interest, waypoints, and GIS points within a
designated distance from your current location while tracking a route with a
GPS receiver.

•

Advanced–Control what you are looking for with the Find field, and where
you are looking for it with the Within field while you conduct a more detailed
search.

Performing a Basic Search
Use the QuickSearch tab to locate places, addresses, ZIP/Postal Codes, coordinate
positions, and more. To search for other items, such as an area codes, street
intersections, or a category (such as Park, Interstate, and so on), use the Advanced
subtab. The search options available depend on your datasets.

To Perform a Basic Search
Follow the steps below to use the QuickSearch tab.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the QuickSearch subtab.
OR
Press CTRL+F on your keyboard.
2. Type a name, address, ZIP/Postal Code, town name, coordinate, draw object
label, address book contact name, street intersection, etc. in the Search For
text box. See Searching Tips for a description of input formats.
OR
Select From Address Book from the Search For drop-down list to find an
address book entry in your DeLorme Address Book and then click OK.
Notes
•

The Book check box (under the Address Book buttons) must be
selected to search for address book contacts. For more information,
see Searching for Address Book Contacts.

•

Do not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or six
characters for a Postal Code search (you do not need to include spaces
in a Postal Code).

•

Address searches should be in the following formats: street address,
city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code OR street address, city,
state, Zip/Postal Code.

3. Click Search. If your search is:

206

Finding a Location on the Map

Very Successful—The results list displays and, if there is one
excellent match, the map centers on that place. A MapTag displays if
the MapTags check box is selected. The only time a MapTag is not
placed is when you find and then go to a labeled area that has no
single map point associated with it (for example, a large park).

Successful—The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list
of search results until you find the one you want to locate. To center
an item on the map, double-click it or select it and then click Go To. A
MapTag displays if the MapTags check box is selected.
Tip Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map
without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more
information on viewing results, see Tips on Viewing Search Results.

Not Successful—The Advanced dialog area displays. The program
makes its best guess about the type of search you were trying and
your search word(s) display in the upper-right text box. Click Search
to proceed. For more information, see Performing an Advanced
Search.

Notes
•

Use a comma to separate city and state/country (Atlanta, Georgia; Montreal,
Canada), major point of interest and state (Mt Washington, NH), parts of an
address (444 E Pk Drive, Milford, CT or 444 E Pk Dr, 06460), or coordinate
points (N 43.8, W 70.2).
Tip You can find major landmarks or points of interest, such as Yellowstone
National Park and Mount Rushmore, without using the state as part of the
search criteria.

•

Separate street intersections with an ampersand (Congress St & High St,
Portland, ME or Congress St & High St, 04101).

•

Avoid entering a period in your text.

•

Click the Search For down arrow to view a drop-down list of previously used
search words and examples.

•

The Search For drop-down list keeps a history of your successful search
words during a session and between sessions. To delete your search history,
select Clear History from the drop-down list. Click No to delete the search
history in the QuickSearch drop-down list. Click Yes to delete the search
history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs.

•

Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard;
center a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a
result as a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book
Entry; or assign it a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just right-click a search
result and select the applicable option from the menu.

Performing an Advanced Search
The Advanced search option allows you to perform more detailed searches by
controlling what you are looking for using the Find field and where you are looking
for it using the Within field.
•

The fields available for selection under Within vary based on your Find
selection.

•

Type text in the fields and use the drop-down list to see examples and your
recent searches.

207

XMap User Guide
•

The fill-in fields located in the center of the tab vary based on both your Find
and Within selections.

You can also search for more types of items than you can in the QuickSearch tab,
such as by category, street intersection, and more.

To Perform an Advanced Search
Follow the steps below to use the advanced search function.
1. Click the Find tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
Note This screen automatically displays if you performed an unsuccessful
QuickSearch.
2. From the Find drop-down list, select the Find type from the list.
When more than one match is available, the closest match displays first in the
Results list.
Click a Find type in the list below for more information.
•

Name
Use Name to locate a city, town, landmark, object label, and so on.

•

Street Address
Use Street Address to locate by street number and name, highway
number, and so on.
You can use standard abbreviations like Rd (Road), St (Street or
Saint), Mt (Mount), Dr (Drive), and Ct (Court).

•

Street Intersection
Use this search to locate the intersection of two specified roads.

•

ZIP/Postal Code(s)
Use at least a partial ZIP/Postal Code to locate the covered regions.
The results display in a browse list.
Use at least a partial ZIP/Postal Code to locate the covered regions.
The results are displayed in a browse list. This means you are taken
into the ZIP/Postal Code database at the closest matching, valid
ZIP/Postal Code. You can browse through results in either direction.
Use at least a partial ZIP Code to locate the covered regions. The
results are displayed in a browse list.

•

Name and/or Category
Searches for a specific name in a specific category. For example, if you
want to find a particular restaurant in your town, you would type
restaurant in the Keywords text box, type the name of the restaurant
in the Name text box, and then type your location information in the
available text boxes.
For more information on category searches, see Keywords for
Category Searches.
Note Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.

•

Category
Searches for a category of items within the specified area. For more
information on category searches, see Keywords for Category
Searches.
Notes

208

Finding a Location on the Map

•

In all category searches, the Keywords field is optional. If the
Keywords field is left blank, all objects in the selected Within
area display in the Results list.

•

Category keywords must be at least three characters in length.

Area Code and Exchange
There are no Within options for Area Code and Exchange search. Use
at least a partial Area Code and Exchange to locate the covered
regions. This is not an individual phone search. The results display in a
browse list.

•

Latitude/Longitude
A single result is returned using a latitude/longitude coordinate search.
There are no Within options. Coordinates must be in one of the many
formats recognized by the program and are based on your Display
settings in the Options dialog box.

3. From the Within drop-down list, select an option. Available choices are based
on what you selected as your Find type.
Click a Within type in the following list for more information.
•

World
Searches for a name or ZIP/Postal Code within these countries.

•

US/Canada
Searches for ZIP/Postal Code within the United States and Canada.
Available only when ZIP/Postal Code(s) is selected as the Find
parameter.

•

City or County
Searches for the specified name within the ZIP/Postal Codes
associated with the city/county and state/province specified in the text
boxes.

•

ZIP/Postal Code
Searches for the specified name within a ZIP/Postal Code. Displays a
ZIP/Postal Code text field. A U.S. search for a ZIP+4 Code is treated
the same as a five-digit ZIP Code. A Canadian search for a 3-character
Postal Code is treated the same as a six-character Postal Code.
Searches for the specified name within a ZIP/Postal Code. Displays a
ZIP/Postal Code text field. A U.S. search for a ZIP+4 Code is treated
the same as a 5-digit ZIP Code. A Canadian search for a 3-character
Postal Code is treated the same as a 6-character Postal Code.
Searches for the specified name within a ZIP Code. Displays a ZIP
Code text field. A search for a ZIP+4 Code is treated the same as a
five-digit ZIP Code.

•

U.S. State
Searches for a name within a specific U.S. state. This option is
available only when Category or Name and/or Category is selected as
the Find parameter.
Note If you are searching within a larger state, this type of search
may take longer than others because a lot of data is being searched to
obtain a result.

•

Current Map City

209

XMap User Guide
Searches for the specified name within the boundaries of all ZIP/Postal
Codes associated with the city at the current map center.
•

Current Map Rectangle
Searches for the specified location within the currently visible map
area.

•

Distance from Map Center
Performs a search in all directions from the center of the map using
the specified distance. Also called a radius search. The minimum
distance you can use is 50 feet; the maximum distance is 100 miles.

•

Current Route
Searches for objects within the specified distance from your currently
active, calculated route. The minimum distance you can use is 500
feet; the maximum distance is 10 miles. Results are listed in the
sequence they occur along the route, from start point to finish point.
Note This search may take longer than other types of searches.

4. Type information in the text boxes to the right of the Find and Within fields.
The text boxes available are based on the selected Find and Within fields.
Tip A few text boxes are optional and you may get more results by leaving
them blank. To see if a text box is optional, hold your cursor over the text
box label or down arrow and read the ToolTip for that text box.
5. Click Search or press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
The Results list displays your search results with closest matching items at
the top of the list.
6. Scroll or browse through the list of search results until you find the one you
want to locate. To center an item on the map, select it and then click Go To
or double-click it.
A yellow MapTag displays at the location if the MapTags check box is
selected.
Tips
•

Single click an item in the results list if you want to highlight it on the map
without adding a MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more
information on viewing results, see Tips on Viewing Search Results.

•

Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard;
center a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a
result as a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book
entry; or assign it a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just right-click a search
result and click the applicable option.

Note The program keeps a history of your search words during a session. If you
want to delete your Advanced search history, click the QuickSearch subtab and
select Clear History from the Search For drop-down list. Then, click Yes to delete
the search history in both the QuickSearch and Advanced subtabs.

210

Finding a Location on the Map

Performing a POI Search
Points of interest (POIs) are available with XMap Street Level Data and
Topographic Data. To purchase data, please visit www.delorme.com, or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
The POIs subtab gives you an easy way to find the places of interest you are looking
for. You can search over four million places of interest including Wal-Mart stores,
post offices, hospitals, and much more.
•

Some POIs contain extended information, such as website links, hours of
operation, and so on. To view this extended information, right-click the POI
search result, point to Add, and then click Detailed MapNote to view the
information on the map. Or, right-click the POI search result and click Info to
view the extended information in the Info tab.

•

POI searches will find more objects than may be currently visible on the map. To
on the toolbar
see all POIs on the map, click the Options button
(or click the menu arrow and click Options), click the Map Features tab, select
the Points of Interest (Minor) and the Business Points of Interest (Minor)
check boxes, and click OK.

To Find a Point of Interest
Use the following steps to find a point of interest with the POIs subtab.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the POIs subtab.
3. Type the name of the point of interest you are searching for (for example,
Wal-Mart or Sheraton) in the Name text box.
4. Type the category that best fits your POI name (for example, type Hotel if
you are searching for a Sheraton, type Department Store if you are
searching for Wal-Mart) in the Keywords text box. See Keywords for
Category Searches for more information.
OR
Select an appropriate keyword from the Keywords drop-down list examples
and history.
5. Type the distance you want to search in the Distance text box. Type the
number of miles followed by "mi" — for example, 5 mi.
6. Select From Map Center or Along Current Route.
7. Click Search. If your search is:

Very Successful–The results list displays and, if there is one excellent
match, the map centers on that place and a yellow box displays at the
location of the POI match.

Successful–The results list displays. Scroll or browse through the list
of search results until you find the one you want to locate. To center
an item on the map, double-click it or select it and then click Go To.

Tips
•

Single click an item in the results list to highlight it on the map without adding a
MapTag or centering it in the map view. For more information on viewing results,
see Tips on Viewing Search Results.
211

XMap User Guide
•

Use the right-click feature to copy search result information to the clipboard;
center a search result on the map (go to); select all search results; add a result
as a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Waypoint, or Address Book entry; or
assign it a start, stop, or finish in a route. Just right-click a search result and
click the option you want.

Finding Points Near Your Current Location
Points of interest (POIs) are available with XMap Street Level Data and
Topographic Data. For more information, please visit www.delorme.com, or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
Use the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab to search for points of interest (POIs) such
as gas stations, restaurants, accommodations, rest areas, and so on near your
current location (if tracking with a GPS) or near the center of the map. You can also
search for waypoints you created using the Draw tab and GIS points. If you enable
the speech button, you can hear the nearest search result. Once you find the
waypoint, GIS point, or POI you want, you can use the GPS Radar subtab to center
the map on the route on that point or POI and get directions to it.
Notes
•

In GPS NavMode, GPS Radar results display in an orange bar at the bottom of
the map area. Important To enable GPS Radar in NavMode, you must select
the Repeat Search Every check box and enter the number of minutes for
repeating the search.

•

A GPS Radar search finds items that are the shortest driving distance from your
current location—within just a few miles. Unless you select the Only in
Direction of Travel check box, some of the search results may be behind you.
GPS radar calculates a route to each point and the fastest destination for you to
drive to is listed first. If you are on a one-way road or freeway, GPS Radar takes
into account the fact that you need to drive further to get off at an exit. You can
click each item in the result list to see each option, to highlight the route to each
destination, and to see a description of each one as well as driving directions.
This should help you choose the best one for your needs.

•

The time required for a GPS Radar search varies by the distance, density of
objects in the area, the categories chosen, and whether you are searching only
in the direction of travel.
•

If you are using GPS NavMode, a long search will automatically be
interrupted; click the More Info button on the orange status bar to open the
GPS Radar subtab and adjust your settings for a shorter search.

•

If you are using GPS tab view, click the Interrupt button to interrupt a long
search and see a listing of the nearby points. Driving directions will not be
provided.

To Find Points Near Your Location
Use the following steps to find points near your location.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. If you are not tracking with a GPS, type a specified location in the Search
For text box and click Search.
3. Click the GPS Radar subtab.

212

Finding a Location on the Map
4. Under Search For, select the point you want to locate within the specified
area.
Note You can also use the custom search to search for multiple POI types,
such as "Chinese restaurant or Mexican restaurant."
To use the Custom search to search for waypoints or GIS points, use search
general or specific terms such as "draw symbol," "map pin," "GIS layer," "GIS
point," "GIS layer or waypoint", " for example, "hydrant," or
"waypoint."
5. Select the Only in Direction of Travel check box if you do not want GPS
Radar to search for points of interest that are outside of your direction of
travel; for example, points of interest that are behind you.
by clicking it if you want to hear the nearest
6. Enable the Speech button
search result in the computer's voice.
7. If you want to automatically repeat your search after a designated amount of
time, select the Repeat Search Every check box and then select the number
of minutes for automatically repeating the search. This is required if you are
using GPS NavMode.
Note Searches are not repeated when the GPS position is stationary.
8. Select a distance in miles from the Search Area scroll list to limit your search
to a certain driving distance from your current location.
9. Click Search.
The search results display in the list box to the right of the Search button.
10. Click a search result to select it.
A green, highlighted line displays on the map between your current/specified
location and the point of interest's location.
Note Click Recenter to center the map on the selected point in the route.
Click Insert Stop to insert the selected search result into your current route.
11. Select the Info option to view the information about the point, including the
distance from the current location.
OR
Select the Directions option to view directions to the point from your
current/specified location.

Finding a Symbol by its Name
Within the Draw tab, you can attach a name to any symbol you add to your map. For
more information on adding symbols to the map, see Adding a Waypoint, Symbol,
MapNote, or Text Label to the Map.
You can use a name to help locate a symbol you have already placed on a map using
the QuickSearch feature on the Find tab. For example, if you named a symbol "My
House" when you placed it on the map, use the following steps for conducting a
search on the unique symbol name.

To Find a Symbol by its Name
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its name.
1. Click the Find tab.

213

XMap User Guide
2. Using QuickSearch, type the symbol name followed by the town and state
abbreviation (for example, My Office, Yarmouth, ME) in the Search For
text box.
3. Click Search. The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the
Search For text box. The symbol name displays in the Name column.
4. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your
selection on the map. The map view centers on the item. A MapTag displays
the symbol name at the symbol location.
Note To display MapTags, select the MapTags check box on the Find tab.

Tips on Viewing Search Results
These tips can help you view Find tab search results.
•

To make it easier to view a long list of search results, increase the height of
the tab by dragging the top of the tab area up or by clicking the increase (up)
at the top of the tab.
tab height arrow

•

To sort results by another column, click the column header. An arrow
identifies the sort column. Click a second time to reverse the sort order.
Note This feature is not available when in browse mode; see last item in this
list.

•

To copy the information for the selected item or items, press CTRL+C on your
keyboard. You can then paste the text into another program, such as a word
processing program.

•

Right-click an item in the results list to display the following options:

Copy to Clipboard–Copies the detailed information for the selected
item or items and is available for pasting into another program.

Go To–Centers the map on the selected item.

Select All–Selects all items in the list and highlights up to 350 on the
map. If you right-click again with all items selected, you can select
Copy to Clipboard; point to Add and then click MapTag, MapNote,
Detailed MapNote, Address Book Entry, or Waypoint; or point to
Route and click Insert Stop. You must have the MapTags checkbox
on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag.

Add–Adds a MapTag, MapNote, Detailed MapNote, Address Book
Entry, or Waypoint for the selected item or items. You must have the
MapTags checkbox on the Find tab selected to add a MapTag.

Route–Places a start, stop, or finish point at that location on the map
based on your selection. The location is listed in the Start text box,
Stop text box, or Finish text box in the Route tab.

•

To locate an item on the map without moving the map, single click an item in
the results list. It is highlighted on the map as long as it is in the current map
view. This is especially helpful when you are at the data zoom level you want
but point labels are not displaying.
Notes To select multiple items, press and hold the CTRL key while clicking
up to 350 items in the results list. If the items are listed continuously, click
the first item in the list and then press and hold the SHIFT key while clicking
the last item you want.

•

You can adjust column widths. The new size is retained until changed again.
You cannot rearrange the column order. Different search types result in
different column orders.

214

Finding a Location on the Map
•

There are two types of results lists:

Most searches provide a fixed number of results. If all
of the results do not fit in the screen area, a scroll bar
automatically displays.

Name in ZIP/Postal Code searches, Name in U.S. or
Canada searches, and Area Code/Exchange searches
provide results you can browse. This means the entire
database displays with the best match highlighted. It
is possible to continue browsing to the first or last
item in the database.

Scroll
Bar

Browse
Buttons

Keywords for Category Searches
Your DeLorme application recognizes hundreds of English words to generate both
general and specific searches using category keywords. Try entering words that
seem appropriate.

Keyword Samples
The list below shows a few of the categories that expand to reveal sample keywords.
Sample keywords may be listed in more than one category.
Boundaries, Map, and Surveying
Border
Boundary
Contour
Crosshair
Grid
Line
Point
ZIP/Postal Code
Buildings and Structures
Airport
Bridge
Business
Landmark
Library
Businesses
Hotel
Gasoline
Restaurant
Pizza
Education and Cultural
College
Local Park
Park

215

XMap User Guide
School
State Park
University
Natural Features
Beach
Canyon
Crater
Desert
Forest
Glacier
Hill
Island
Mountain
River
Stream
Valley
Water
Miscellaneous
Cemetery
Hiking
Mine
Note
Park
Object Types
All of the stock draw symbols (such as blue map pin, red flag, canoe, etc.)
Draw symbols
XData objects
GIS Layers
Phone objects
Objects in non-DeLorme data
Roads and Trails
Bridge
Exit
Ferry
Foot Trail
Highway
Hiking
Interstate
One Way
Railroad
Road
Street

216

Finding a Location on the Map
Trail
Tunnel
Travel Amenities
Airport
Exit
Landmark
Rest Area
Unique Natural Features
Geographic Feature
Landmark
Locale
Mining
Trail
Park or Other Open Space
Tourist Attraction

Notes on Category Searches
The following list provides notes you may find helpful for performing category
searches.
•

Category keyword searches must be at least three characters in length.

•

Keywords are not case-sensitive. Using all capital letters or no capital letters
does not affect the search.

•

Some generic keywords (water, for example) match many categories and
display a dialog box with specific categories. Select or clear these categories,
depending on what you want to locate.

•

In the Keyword Category samples below, some keywords are used together to
narrow the search. The following two examples provide information on how
results may differ using words together and separately:
•

Example 1–Using Local Road provides many category results, such as
Ferry Crossing Local Road, Local or Rural Road, and Railroad Local
Line.

•

Example 2–Using Road provides over 100 results from more
categories.

•

Partial words are recognized when performing a search.

•

You can use keywords in any order. You get the same results using Local
Road as for Road Local.

•

A keyword may find categories related to the word rather than including the
word.

•

Use the word "or" in the Keywords text box to search for multiple categories.
For example, "pizza" or "fast food."

217

XMap User Guide

MapTags: Converting, Moving, Hiding, and Deleting
When you search for and go to a Find search result, a
yellow MapTag displays at that location if the MapTags
check box on the Find tab is selected. If MapTags are
cluttering your view of the map, you can move the
text area of the MapTag, hide them from view, or
delete one, several, or all MapTags.

To Convert MapTags to MapNotes
To change all of the MapTags on the map to MapNotes, which can be retained when
you save the project, right-click the map, click Manage Draw, and then click
Convert All MapTags to MapNotes. A new draw layer called MapNotes is created
in your project.

To Move a MapTag
You cannot detach a MapTag from its anchor point; you can move only the text area.
Use the following steps to move the MapTag text area.
1. Use the Find tab, search for a place, street address, coordinate, category
item, or street intersection. MapTags are placed on the map at each point you
locate.
2. Click the Select tool

3. Click the text area for the MapTag you want to move and drag it to the
position on the map where you want it. The anchor point does not move.
4. Click the Select tool again to resume normal map operations.

To Hide MapTags
The MapTags check box controls if existing MapTags display on the map.
•

MapTags are visible when the MapTags check box is selected.

•

MapTags are hidden from view when the MapTags check box is cleared. Select
the MapTags check box at any time to display existing MapTags.

To Delete MapTags
You can delete one, several, or all MapTags.
To delete MapTags from the Find tab:
•

To delete one MapTag, click the Select tool

, click the MapTag, click the

Delete Tag tool
, and click the Select tool again.
OR
Right-click the MapTag you want to delete and select Delete MapTag.
•

, hold down the SHIFT
To delete several MapTags, click the Select tool
key on your keyboard while clicking the MapTags, click the Delete Tag
tool, and click the Select tool again.

218

Finding a Location on the Map

•

To delete all MapTags, click the Delete Tag tool
. A message box displays
"Delete all MapTags?" Click OK to confirm deletion. Click Cancel to retain all
MapTags.

To delete MapTags from other tabs:
•

Right-click the MapTag and click Delete MapTag.

219

Using Address Book Contacts
Searching for Address Book Contacts
You have several ways to search for address book contacts:
•

Use the QuickSearch function on the Find tab to search for the name of a
contact; browse for the contact or type the name of the contact

•

Use the Route tab to search for an address book entry as a route start, stop,
or finish; browse for the contact or type the name of the contact

•

Use the toolbar to search for an address book entry as a route start or finish;
browse for the contact or type the name of the contact

With these functions, you can select the option from the
applicable drop-down list or you can type the name of the contact directly in the text
box to find the entry. If you type the name of the contact, you must select the Book
check box in the Find tab (underneath the Address Book buttons). To disable the
address book search functionality, clear the Book check box.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Importing Existing Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually
entering each record. Imported address book items are merged with your existing
address book. Items with identical names are not replaced during the import
process.

To Import an Existing Address Book
Use the following steps to import an existing address book and view its contents on
the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
.
2. Click the Address Book button
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Import.
4. Click Browse to find the .dab, .txt, .csv, or .tab address book file. Click the
file and then click Open.
5. If the first line of the title contains column names, select the First Row is
Header check box.
6. If you want to adjust the column headers for your address book information,
select a default column label from the available drop-down lists.
There is a list for Name, Street Address, City, State Abbreviation, ZIP/Postal
Code, Telephone, Latitude, Longitude. The information in your address book
displays to the right of these lists.

220

Using Address Book Contacts
7. Click OK.
The address book contacts are imported into the program. All street address
or latitude/longitude matches display on the map with the following symbol
and the name of the contact.
Note If your contacts do not display on the map, check the Located? column
in the Address Book dialog box to verify a successful match was made. If Not
Located displays next to any of your records, either address/coordinate
information was not provided with the contact or the address/coordinate
information could not be found in the program.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Manually Entering Address Book Information
You can import an existing address book or build a new address book by manually
entering each record.
You can also add an address book entry by right-clicking the map, selecting Create
Address Book Entry, and following steps 4–6 below. If you right-click the map at
the location for the address book entry, some of the information, such as
coordinates, street name, city, state, etc., automatically complete the Edit a
DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box.

To Manually Enter Address Book Information
Use the following steps to manually enter address book information.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click New.
The Edit a DeLorme Address Book Entry dialog box opens.
4. Enter the information for the entry.
5. From the Update Location drop-down list, select the method for updating
the location on the map; From Street Address, From Lat/Lon, or No (if
you do not want to update the location.
6. Click OK.
7. Repeat steps 2-6 for each contact you want to add.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Centering the Map on an Address Book Contact
You can center the map on any address book contact you have with the Go To
function in the Address Book dialog box.

To Center the Map on an Address Book Contact

221

XMap User Guide
Use the following steps to center the map on an address book contact.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the contact.
4. Click Go To.
The map centers on the selected contact.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Editing a Contact In Your Address Book
Once you have imported your address book contacts, you may need to edit the
information if your contacts have moved, changed phone numbers, etc. Instead of
importing the information again, you can simply edit the information.

To Edit a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to edit a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Double-click the record you want to edit.
OR
Click the record you want to edit and then click Edit.
4. Edit the applicable information.
5. If you want to move the contact, select the method to place it on the map
from the Update Location drop-down list.
6. Click OK.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Manually Moving a Contact on the Map
Once you have created a contact in an address book, you can manually move it on
the map using the move address book entry function.

To Manually Move a Contact's Location on the Map
Use the following steps to manually move a contact's location on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.

222

Using Address Book Contacts

2. Click the Move Address Book Entry button
Your cursor changes to
book contact.

when you hover over the location of an address

3. Click and drag the contact to a different location on the map.
The Located status for that record (in the Address Book dialog box) changes
to Manual.
4. Click the move address book entry icon again to resume normal map
operations.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Relocating Address Book Contacts
Once you import an address book from a previous version of your application, you
can relocate your address book entries (except for manual entries) so they match
the most recent data. You are prompted to do this the first time you open the
address book after installing a new version of your application; however, if you do
not relocate the entries at that time, you can do it later.
Important If you do not relocate your address book, the entries may not be
accurately placed according to the latest DeLorme road data.

To Relocate Contacts In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to relocate address book entries (except manual entries) on
the map.
1. Click the Find tab.
.
2. Click the Address Book button
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Relocate All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to relocate the entries.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Showing/Hiding Address Book Contacts on the Map
Once you add contacts to your address book, you can show or hide the contact
information on the map.

To Show/Hide Address Book Contacts on the Map
Use the following steps to show/hide address book contacts on the map.
1. Click the Find tab.

223

XMap User Guide
2. Select the Book check box to show address book contacts on the map and
enable address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
OR
Clear the Book check box to hide address book contacts on the map and
disable address book searching with the Find tab, Route tab, and toolbar.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Deleting a Contact In Your Address Book
Once you successfully create an address book, you can delete the contact
information at any time.

To Delete a Contact In Your Address Book
Use the following steps to delete a contact in your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click the record you want to delete.
4. Click Delete.
5. Click OK to confirm the deletion.
6. Click Done.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Deleting Your Entire Address Book
Once you have created an address book, you can delete the records it contains one
at a time or all at once.

To Delete an Entire Address Book
Use the following steps to delete an entire address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Clear All.
A confirmation message displays.
4. Click OK to delete the address book.
5. Click Done.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

224

Using Address Book Contacts
•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

Exporting Your Address Book
You can export your address book to another program using the Export function in
the Address Book dialog box. Exported address books are in DeLorme Address Book
binary format (*.dab) or comma-separated file (*.csv) format. Latitude and
longitude values are not exported.

To Export Your Address Book
Use the following steps to export your address book.
1. Click the Find tab.
2. Click the Address Book button
.
The DeLorme Address Book dialog box opens.
3. Click Export.
The Save As dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the location where you want to save the exported address book
file.
5. Type the file name for your exported file in the File Name text box.
6. Select DeLorme Address Book (*.dab) or Comma-separated File
(*.csv) from the Save as Type drop-down list. DeLorme Address Book files
retain all of their information and can be imported into compatible DeLorme
programs. Comma-separated files do not contain coordinate information. You
can view text files in third-party applications such as Microsoft Excel.
7. Click Save.
8. Click OK to acknowledge the export location.
9. Click Done.
Notes
•

The address book has a 200-record limit.

•

You can resize and move the Address Book dialog box.

•

You can resize the columns inside the Address Book dialog box.

225

Searching for Phone Book Listings
Using Phone Data
The Phone tab in XMap requires DeLorme Phone Data, available from DeLorme.
For information, visit www.delorme.com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-5615105.
You can install the phone data to your hard drive or use it from the DVD.

To Install Phone Data to your Hard Drive
If you install the phone data to your hard drive, it is always accessible when you use
the Phone tab.
To install the data:
1. Insert the Phone Data DVD into your computer's DVD drive.
The Installation Wizard opens.
2. Follow the on-screen steps to install the phone data to your hard drive.

To Use Phone Data from the DVD
You can use the phone data from the DVD without installing it to your hard drive.
1. Insert the Phone Data DVD into your computer's DVD drive.
The Installation Wizard opens.
2. Click Cancel, click Yes when prompted, and then click Finish to exit the
wizard.
3. Click the Phone tab.
4. Click Data.
The Browse for Folder dialog box opens.
5. Browse to your computer's DVD drive and click the Phone folder.
6. Click OK.
The states/provinces on the DVD are available in the State/Prov drop-down
list in the Phone tab.

226

Searching for Phone Book Listings

Searching for a Phone Book Listing
With the Phone tab, you can search for a name and address based on a given phone
number or search for a phone number based upon a specified name and/or address.
You can pick and choose your selections to add to map, make a dataset, and so on.
Notes
•

The Phone tab in XMap requires DeLorme Phone Data, available from
DeLorme. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call DeLorme Direct
Sales at 800-561-5105.

•

A hyphen (-) before the name in a search result indicates a business
listing.

•

An asterisk (*) before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call
preference The person or business listed has registered a preference to not
be solicited by telephone (as provided by law). DeLorme products cannot
be relied upon as a method for legal compliance with state and federal
regulations. A number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of the
following is true:
The phone number is unlisted. Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to
have their phone number be available from directory assistance but not
published in any phone directories.
Note Customers paying for non-published service desire complete privacy
of their phone number, which means it is not published in the phone book
and is unavailable from directory assistance. Non-published numbers are
not available in Phone Data.
The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission's National Do Not
Call Registry.
You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your
registration at https://www.donotcall.gov.
The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations.
You can register your preference for mail and e-mail solicitations with the
Direct Marketing Association at http://www.the-dma.org/.

•

Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the
Phone text boxes.

•

Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do
not know the state for your query.

To Search for a Phone Book Listing
Use the following steps to search for a phone book listing.
1. If you have not installed the phone data to your hard disk drive, you can
access it from the DVD.
2. Click the Phone tab to display the Phone dialog area.
3. Select the Residential check box to view residential phone book listings.
AND/OR
Select the Business check box to view business phone book listings.
AND/OR
Select the Hide Multiple YP Headings check box to display only one Yellow
Pages heading for each business phone number.
4. Select the country you want to search within from the Country drop-down
list.
227

XMap User Guide
The States/Provinces drop-down list updates according to the selected
country.
Note If you are using an older version of DeLorme Phone Data, only U.S. will
be available in the Country drop-down list. Phone Data 2009 and later
includes both U.S. and Canadian phone data if you install all of the regions.
5. Type/select the name, street address, city, state, and/or ZIP/Postal Code to
search for the phone number(s) associated with that information.
OR
Type the phone number to search for the name, address, city, state/province,
and ZIP/Postal Code associated with that phone number.
OR
Type yellow page keywords in the Yellow Pg text box to find all of the phone
book listings available based on your search criteria.

228

Searching for Phone Book Listings
Notes
•

Type a city in the City text box to narrow your yellow page search. Do
not enter more than five digits for a ZIP Code search or three digits for
a Postal Code search.

•

Yellow page keywords must be at least three characters in length.

Text Box

Tip

Name

Name searches do not require punctuation.
Type the last name first.
The Phone tab recognizes partial last names. You may get
better results (for longer names or if you are unsure of the
spelling) if you only type a portion of the name.
Many business names are abbreviated in phone book
listings. For best results, try additional searches using
alternate spellings or abbreviations.

Street
Address

Street name descriptors (e.g., street, road, drive) should
not be used for address searches. However, you can use
street name abbreviations (e.g., st, rd, dr).
You can use street address ranges (such as 100-200 Main
St) for address searches.

City

Long city names may be abbreviated in the Phone data. Try
shortening the city name until the search finds the city
name you recognize, then use that abbreviation. You must
also select a State, or type a full or partial ZIP/Postal Code
or phone number.
City listings may have variances in spelling, such as "Saint
Louis" rather than St Louis".

ZIP/Postal
Code

ZIP Code searches must contain at least three digits. Postal
Code searches must contain at least three characters.

Phone

Phone number searches must contain at least six digits (the
area code and exchange; no punctuation is necessary).

Yellow Pg
(Yellow
Pages)

Yellow page searches should be singular (for example, type
restaurant instead of restaurants).
If you use multiple words, all of the words are required to
form a match.
There are over 34,000 yellow page headings possible. Use
keywords you would expect to find in the yellow pages.
Yellow page searches must be at least three characters in
length.

6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click Search.
The search results display in the Search Results area on the lower-left corner
of the dialog area.
Notes
•

If you do not receive any results from your yellow page search, use an
alternative keyword for your search attempt. For example, if you are
looking for a clothing store, type “clothing” instead of “clothes.” Or, if

229

XMap User Guide
the alternative keyword still does not work, search (by name) for a
clothing store and see what category it is listed under (the category
displays in parenthesis at the end of the result).
•

If more than 1000 search results match your search criteria, the More
button becomes activated. Click More to browse to the next 1000
search results.

7. Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click
Add (or right-click the search results and click Add) to add your search result
to the Selection area in the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search
result at a time. You can also double-click a search result to add it to the
Selections area
OR click Add All (or right-click the search results and click Add All) to
include all of your search results to the Selection area.
Note The Selection area has a 1,000 listing limit, as described in the license
agreement.
8. Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections
area:
•

Click Map (or right-click your selections and click Map) to add your
phone book listings to the map. To add all of the phone book listings in
the Selections area to the map, right-click the selections, click Select
All, and then click Map. Once a phone selection is on the map, you
can view details about the listing by right-clicking its symbol and
clicking Info.
Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the
map and mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol
on the map. Phone selections (symbol and label) that are placed on
the map appear in red if they have been located reliably to a street
address. Otherwise, the approximate location appears light gray on the
map.

•

Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove (or right-click a
listing and click Remove) to remove the phone book listing from your
list of selections.

•

Click Remove All (or right-click on your selections and click Remove
All) to remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area.
All mapped selections will be removed from the map.

•

Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections
area in a .txt file. The default location is C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Datasets..

•

Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections
area to the XData tab as a dataset (using the Import Wizard).
Note This option is unavailable when the XData tab is hidden with
Tab Manager.

•

Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it
on the map.

•

Double-click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that
listing.

Note You can also copy, search, and sort search results and selections using rightclick mouse options.

230

Searching for Phone Book Listings

Finding Phone Book Listings for a Specific Road
You can right-click a road to view all of the residential and business phone book
listings on that road.
Notes
•

The Phone tab in XMap requires DeLorme Phone Data, available from
DeLorme. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call DeLorme Direct
Sales at 800-561-5105.

•

A hyphen (-) before the name in a search result indicates a business
listing.

•

An asterisk (*) before the name in a search result indicates a Do Not Call
preference. The person or business listed has registered a preference to
not be solicited by telephone (as provided by law). DeLorme products
cannot be relied upon as a method for legal compliance with state and
federal regulations. A number is flagged as Do Not Call if at least one of
the following is true:
The phone number is unlisted. Unlisted phone numbers allow customers to
have their phone number be available from directory assistance but not
published in any phone directories.
Note Customers paying for non-published service desire complete privacy
of their phone number, which means it is not published in the phone book
and is unavailable from directory assistance. Non-published numbers are
not available in Phone Data.
The phone number is on the Federal Trade Commission's National Do Not
Call Registry.
You can register your home or mobile phone number or verify your
registration at https://www.donotcall.gov.
The address is on a mail preference list that limits mail solicitations.
You can register your preference for mail and e-mail solicitations with the
Direct Marketing Association at http://www.the-dma.org/

•

Click Clear at any time to remove all of your search criteria from the
Phone text boxes.

•

Select the Any State option to include all states in your search or if you do
not know the state for your query.

To Find Phone Information for a Specific Road
Use the following steps to find available phone information for a specific road. If you
did not install the phone data to your hard drive, you can use the DVD.
1. To find all of the phone listings for a particular address, search for a phone
book listing, right-click a search result, and then click Search This Address.
All of the phone listings for that address display.
OR
To find phone information using the map, pan the map or click the Find tab
and use the QuickSearch function to locate the road you want to use for your
phone book listing search. Then, right-click the road and click Phone
Listings.
All the phone book listings for that road (in that city) display in the Search
Results area on the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Notes If more than 1,000 search results match your search criteria, the

231

XMap User Guide
More button becomes activated. Click More to browse to the next 1,000
search results.
2. Click one or more search results in the Search Results area and then click
Add (or right-click the search results and click Add) to add your search result
to the Selection area on the lower-right corner of the dialog area.
Note Press the CTRL key on your keyboard to select more than one search
result at a time. You can also double-click a search result to add it to the
Selections area.
OR
Click Add All (or right-click the search results and click Add All) to include all
of your search results to the Selection area.
Note The Selection area has a 1,000 listing limit, as described in the license
agreement.
OR
Click Clear All (or right-click on the search results and click Clear All) to
remove all of the search results from the Selection area.
3. Use one of the following options to modify the selections in the Selections
area:
•

Click Map (or right-click on your selections and click Map) to add your
phone book listings to the map. If only one item is selected, the map
centers on the object. To add all of the phone book listings in the
Selections area to the map, by right-click the selections, point to
Select All in the menu, and then click Map. To view details about a
phone selection once it's on the map, right-click its symbol and click
Info.
Note Mapped businesses are indicated with a square symbol on the
map and mapped residences are indicated with a small house symbol
on the map. Phone selections (symbol and label) that are placed on
the map appear in red if they have been located reliably to a street
address. Otherwise, the approximate location appears light gray on the
map.

•

Click a listing in the Selections area and click Remove (or right-click a
listing and click Remove) to remove the phone book listing from your
list of selections.

•

Click Remove All (or right-click your selections and click Remove All)
to remove all of the phone book listings from the Selection area. All
mapped selections are removed from the map.

•

Click To File to save all of the phone book listings in the Selections
area in a .txt file.
The default location for the file is C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
Click To XData to copy all of the phone book listings in the Selections
area to the XData tab as a dataset (using the XData Import Wizard).
Note This option is unavailable when the XData tab is hidden with
Tab Manager.

•

232

•

Click a previously mapped listing in the Selections area to highlight it
on the map.

•

Double-click a listing in the Selections area to center the map on that
listing.

Using the Draw Tools
Draw Overview
You can add draw objects, such as routable roads, routable trails, waypoints, tracks,
text, symbols, MapNotes, images, lines, arcs, splines, circles, polygons, and
rectangles to your map with the tools provided in the Draw tab. You can save draw
objects in a single draw file or in multiple draw files. You can view draw files
individually or with other draw files.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

What is a Draw File?
Imagine a draw file as a sheet of glass laying on top of your map. You can add
various objects to the draw file to help enhance or pinpoint specific areas on the
map, but these objects do not become part of the map. They exist in a draw file that
overlays the map.
There are five different types of draw files: draw, road, trail, waypoint, and track.
You can create more than one draw file and overlay one on top of the other while still
viewing the map beneath. See Editing/Locking Draw Files.
When you clear or delete a draw file, the objects in the draw file do not display and
are deleted along with the draw file. When you create and save draw files, they are
saved within the current project.
Some additional draw file facts:
•

A draw file is automatically generated the first time you add a draw object to
the map.

•

As you create draw files, they are added to the current project.

•

You can add draw files to multiple projects.

•

You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.

•

Draw files are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Draw with the default
name; for example, DrawLayer#.an1, with # indicating the number order in
which the file was created. You can rename draw files to better identify your
specific information. See Creating a New Draw File.

•

You can have multiple draw files displaying at once while working on your
map. Work can be done on one draw file at a time, while viewing other files
beneath it. You can select different draw files to be the active, editable file
from within the Draw tab. For more information, see Editing/Locking Draw
Files.

•

Draw files created in a particular project are displayed only if that project is
currently displaying. For example, if DrawLayer27 is created in a project
named Yarmouth Zoom 14 only, DrawLayer27 does not display if a project
named Old Port is currently displaying.

•

Routable roads and routable trails are not tied to a project; they do not
change even when a project is changed.

233

XMap User Guide

What Are Draw Objects?
Draw objects are those objects you add to a draw file with the tools provided in the
Draw tab. Draw objects consist of line, area, or point objects. You can copy, move,
delete, and add draw objects to other draw files and add them to another project.
•

•

Line objects are those objects consisting of line segments and points, such
as:
•

Routable Roads

•

Routable Trails

•

Tracks

•

Lines

•

Arcs

•

Splines

Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line objects,
such as:
•

Polygons

•

Rectangles

•

Circles

Point objects consist of one anchor point attached to either a waypoint,
symbol, MapNote, image, or text label. The anchor point is the pixel position
on the symbol that corresponds to the geographic coordinate of the point
selected on the map when the symbol is placed.

Draw objects added to a draw file contain points that give the object its shape or
allow you to snap one object to another object. Points display and act in different
ways within the various draw objects.
•

Points in Routable Roads, Routable Trails, Tracks, Lines, Splines, and
Polygons
Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails, tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
•

Shape points are the points you place on the map when creating the
object. They give the object its shape. When you select a draw object
on the map, shape points display along the active object as small
magenta squares.
The line object below was drawn with the spline tool.

•

234

End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a
draw object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within
an active line, spline, or polygon:

Using the Draw Tools
•

A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected
line segment.

•

A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line
segment.

The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.

Notes
•

When you click the start or last end point of the line segment
within a line draw object and the Show Measurement check box is
available (when using the Polygon or Line tool) and selected, it
displays the bearing or angle of that point of the line, the length of
the line segment (leg), and the total length of the entire line
object on the map.

•

When you click the start or end point of the line segment within a
polygon draw object, a text box displays the bearing or angle of
that point of the line, the length of the line segment (leg), and the
total area of the polygon on the map.

Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails, tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
•

•

End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a
draw object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within
an active line, spline, or polygon:
•

A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected
line segment.

•

A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line
segment.

235

XMap User Guide
The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.

Notes
•

•

Draw objects such as routable roads, routable trails,tracks, lines, splines, and
polygons consist of shape points and end points.
•

•

End points are the first and last points of individual line segments on a
draw object. When you select a shape point of a line segment within
an active line, spline, or polygon:
•

A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected
line segment.

•

A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected line
segment.

The same spline with end points indicating a selected spline segment.

236

Using the Draw Tools

Notes

•

Points in Rectangles, Circles, and Arcs
Draw objects such as rectangles, circles, and arcs also contain points, but
they are treated differently.
Rectangles–Contain shape points at the four corners, but the lines between
the shape points contain no editable end points. When you click one of these
shape points, a text box displays the width, height, and area of the rectangle
on the map.
Circles–Contain no shape points, but have a central point that does not
display until you snap it (see Note below) to another object. Clicking the circle
displays a central crosshair within the circle and a text box containing
information on the area and radius of the circle on the map.
Arcs–Contain three shape points. When you click any of the points, a text
box displays the angle or bearing of the selected point, the radius of the arc,
and the total length of the arc line on the map.
Only the first and second points you placed on the map when creating the arc
are treated as start and end points (i.e., show red or green when clicked).
The central magenta shape point, or third point you placed, determines the
shape of the arc.
Note For information on snapping a draw object to another draw object, see
Snapping Draw Objects.

•

Points in Point Draw Objects
Point objects, such as waypoints, symbols, and text, do not have shape or
end points. Text label objects contain a point at the bottom center of the text
label box and are only visible during a snap.

•

Points in MapNotes
MapNotes do not have shape or end points. They contain an anchor point at
the end of the text box. Clicking the MapNote displays a central crosshair at
the anchor point.

237

XMap User Guide

Viewing Hidden Draw Tools
The Draw tab tools allow you to add routable roads, trails, waypoints, tracks, lines
(straight lines, arcs, and splines), shapes (polygons, rectangles, and circles),
MapNotes, text labels, images, and symbols to a draw file. Some of these tools are
hidden tools available in pull-out menus.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To View the Hidden Draw Tools
Five draw tool options have pull-out menus with hidden tools. These draw tools each
have a small arrow at the bottom-right of the draw tool button as shown in this
.

sample

Use the following steps to view the hidden draw tools.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold one of the visible tools shown below to display and select one
of the options. Selecting a hidden tool changes the default option.
Routable Road/Routable Trail Tool
Tracks/Waypoints Tool
Line/Arc/Spline Tool
Polygon/Rectangle/Circle Tool
MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image Tool

Geocaching Features
Geocaching is a fun outdoor activity that uses a GPS device for treasure hunting.
Geocaching is enjoyed by all kinds of people—from families with small children to
active outdoor adventurers. You use your GPS device to follow clues to caches
hidden by other geocachers.
Your application has several features designed to enhance the interaction between a
GPS device and the cache information provided at Geocaching-The Official Global
GPS Cache Hunt Site.
•

238

Use the import file option in the Draw tab to import:
•

Geocaching.com Location (.loc) files. These files contain the cache
code, cache name, and the latitude and longitude for the cache
location.

•

GPS Exchange (.gpx) files have full cache descriptions and hints that
you can view in the Waypoint comment field.

Using the Draw Tools
•

When you import geocaches, you create a link back to the detailed
www.geocaching.com website from each waypoint.

Draw File Management
Creating a New Draw File
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
There are five different types of draw files:
•

DrawLayer—Created when you add a line, arc, spline, circle, rectangle,
polygon, symbol, MapNote, or text label to the map.

•

RoadLayer—Created when you add a routable road.

•

TrailLayer—Created when you add a routable trail to the map.

•

WaypointLayer—Created when you add a waypoint to the map.

•

TrackLayer—Created when you add a track to the map.

A draw file is automatically created when you add a draw object to the map and
there are no draw files of that type included in or contained in the current project.
You can control the creation of new draw files in the draw file editing area.
To Create a New Draw File
Use the following steps to create a new draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A selected check box next to the draw file's name in the file list indicates the
file is displaying on the map.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type. For example,
all roadlayer files are grouped together in the list, all drawlayer files are
grouped together, and so on.
3. Click New and then click Draw, Road, Trail, Waypoint, or Track.
The new file is now the active draw file. Each draw file type has an active file.
4. Optional. If you want to rename the draw file:
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type
the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not
double-click). Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key
on your keyboard.
5. Optional. If you want to ensure no changes are made to a particular draw file,
select the Lock check box for that draw file in the draw file editing area.
6. Click Save.
7. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
Note You can save new draw files any time. For more information, see Saving a
Draw File.

239

XMap User Guide

Saving a Draw File
After you finish adding draw objects to a draw file, you can save them in a draw file
that you can view or edit later. Any time you edit a draw file, click Save to save your
changes.
To Save a New Draw File
Use the following steps to save a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File.
3. Click Save.
Draw files are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Draw with .an1
extensions.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

Deleting a Draw File
You can delete a draw file you just created or one you previously saved.
To Delete a Draw File
Use the following steps to delete a draw file.
1. Open the project that contains the draw file you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type (for example,
all road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped
together, and so on).
4. Select a draw file from the file list and then click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to
cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to
cancel.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

Hiding Draw Files
You can hide draw files you created. This removes from view all the draw objects in
that file without permanently deleting them.
To Hide a Draw File
Use the following steps to hide a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
Note The draw file editing area is categorized by draw file type. For example,

240

Using the Draw Tools
all road layers are grouped together in the list, all draw layers are grouped
together, and so on.
3. Hide any files in the file list by clearing the check box next to the file name.
•

A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map.

•

A draw file with a cleared check box does not display on the map.

4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

Editing/Locking Draw Files
You can edit the current active (editable) draw file. You can also lock a draw file,
making it uneditable.
To Edit a Draw File
Use the following steps to edit a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Verify the draw file you want to edit is displaying on the map. A draw file with
a selected check box displays on the map.
4. Verify that the file is selected in the Active column in the file editing area.
5. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
6. Click the Select tool
you want to edit.

and then click the draw file object on the map that

7. Click File and then click Save to save the changes you made to the draw file.
8. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.
To Lock a Draw File
Use the following steps to lock a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Select the Lock check box for each draw file you want to lock.
Note Clear the Lock check box to make changes to a draw file.
4. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

Exporting Draw Files to Text Files
You can export draw files as text files. Draw objects exported to text files contain
coordinate information for each line, area, or point object. You can open these text
files in other DeLorme products.
To Export Draw Files to Text Files
Use the following steps to export an existing draw file to a text file.
1. Click the Draw tab.

241

XMap User Guide
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column
shows the active layers.
3. From the file list, click the draw file to export.
4. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
5. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Export.
6. Select Text File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
7. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is root
name of the layer.
8. Select the datum and coordinate format for the text file.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
You can export track or waypoint files as GPX files. GPX files derived from tracks
contain the elevation, time, and GPS status for each point in the track. GPX files
derived from a waypoint file include the waypoint name, comment, URL, lat/lon,
elevation, time, GPS status and the symbol name. You cannot export more than one
waypoint/track layer into a single GPX file.
To Export Track or Waypoint Files to GPX Files
Use the following steps to export an existing track or waypoint file to a GPX file.
1. Open the project containing the track or waypoint file you want to export.
OR
Create a new track or waypoint file for exporting.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
A draw file with a selected check box displays on the map. The Active column
shows the active layers.
4. Select the track or waypoint file to export from the file list.
5. Click Export.
The Export Draw File dialog box opens.
6. Browse to a directory in which to save the file or use the default destination
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Export.
7. Select GPX File from the Save as Type drop-down list.
8. Type a name for the file in the File name text box. The default name is
DrawExport.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Done to return to the main Draw tab area.

242

Using the Draw Tools

Importing Files to Draw Files
You can import many types of files as draw files. The file items display as draw
objects within the draw file.
You can also use the Exchange dialog to download waypoint and tracks to the Draw
tab. See the Help topics under Using Handheld Devices for more information.
See the chart at the end of this topic to learn what is imported for each type of file.
Important To add a track Draw file (*.an1), to a project, click the Add button on
the Map Data tab. For more information, see Adding/Removing Files in a Project.
To Import Files
Use the following steps to import a file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click Import.
The Import Draw File dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the source folder of the file. The default location is C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Export.
5. From the Files of type drop-down list, select the type of file you want to
import.
6. If you selected Text File or All Files from the Files of Type drop-down list,
select the file's coordinate and datum from the applicable drop-down lists.
OR
If you selected GPS Log File format, select how you want the file to display on
the map from the Import As drop-down list.
7. Select the file and then click Open. The draw objects in the imported file
display. A new draw file is automatically created for the imported file.
8. Click Done to return to the Draw dialog area.
Notes
You can import a file containing survey information as long as the survey information
is formatted correctly.
•

The file must start with Begin Survey and end with End.

•

The second line must be a coordinate.

•

The remainder of the file can be made up of lines or arcs. A line is defined by
direction and length.

•

A curve is defined by the word curve, followed by a letter representing the
side of the arc to put the radius. This is followed by the length of the radius
and the length of the arc. The arc is completed with a bearing from the start
to finish point.

•

For more information, see Sample Survey File.

If you import this
type of file...

That results from this
source...

The following is imported...

Address Book (.txt,
.csv)

Address Book File

Draw objects display with the
current symbol and style
selections.

243

XMap User Guide
Notes
Files must be tab or commadelimited.
Format: name, address, city,
state, ZIP Code, phone.
Files must be less than 250
records long.
Text File (.txt)

Lat/Lon Text File

Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.

GPS Log File (.gpl)

Any DeLorme product
that supports GPS
tracking

Line or waypoint object
displays with the current line
preferences.

GPX File (.gpx)

DeLorme product on
third-party application

May contain one or more
routes, tracks, or waypoints,
as well as comments.
Notes
When you import a GPX file,
all the waypoints, tracks,
comments, and routes found
in the file are imported at the
same time.
When you download a GPX file
from www.geocaching.com,
the hints on the website are
added to the Comments
column of the file. When you
export the file to an
Earthmate PN series GPS
device, the comments are
included.

Location File (.loc)

Waypoint file from
www.geocaching.com

Coordinate information, name,
and URL link.

Magellan Track File
(.log)

Magellan Track Log

Latitude, longitude, elevation,
name and date/time (if
specified).

Magellan Waypoint
File (.upt)

Magellan Waypoint File

Latitude, longitude, elevation,
name, comment, and symbol
are imported.

Draw Layer Files

Topo USA 2.0 (.ano)

Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.

MapDocs (.sa7,
.sa8, .sa9, .mn5,
.mn6, .mn7)

Street Atlas USA 8.0,
8.0, and 9.0.

AAA Map'n'Go 5.0, 6,
and 8.0

244

Draw objects display with the
current symbol and line style
selections.

Using the Draw Tools

Formatting a Text File to Import as a Draw File
These are the formatting conventions, with examples, for creating a text file to
import as a draw file.
Draw Object

Format

Example

Line

BEGIN LINE

LAT, LON

43.807801,-70.164440

LAT, LON

43.807629,-70.163801

LAT, LON

43.807211,-70.162746

END

43.806707,-70.163400
43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END

Spline

BEGIN SPLINE

LAT, LON

43.807801,-70.164440

LAT, LON

43.807629,-70.163801

LAT, LON

43.807211,-70.162746

LAT, LON

43.806707,-70.163400

END

43.806696,-70.163905
43.807125,-70.164768
43.807801,-70.164440
END

Arc

BEGIN ARC

LAT, LON

43.807801,-70.164440

LAT, LON

43.807704,-70.162775

LAT, LON

43.807211,-70.162746

LAT, LON

43.807430,-70.163644

END

Polygon

BEGIN POLY

Rectangle

LAT, LON

43.808692,-70.165392

LAT, LON

43.808692,-70.162493

LAT, LON

43.806621,-70.162493

LAT, LON

43.806621,-70.165392

END

43.808692,-70.165392
END

Circle

BEGIN CIRCLE

LAT, LON, Radius

43.807662,70.163935,0.114611

END

245

XMap User Guide
Symbol

MapNote

Text Label

BEGIN SYMBOL

LAT, LON, Name, Symbol
Name
END

43.807662,70.163935,DeLorme,
Blue Pin

BEGIN NOTE

LAT, LON, Text
END

43.807662,70.163935,DeLorme

BEGIN TEXT

LAT, LON, Text

43.807662,70.163935,DeLorme

END

Copying a Map Line to a Draw File
Map lines that you can copy to draw objects include segments of all types of roads
and highways, railroads, power lines, pipelines, rivers or streams, Zip Code
boundaries, and grid lines.
To Copy a Map Line
Use the following steps to copy a map line to a draw file.
1. Pan the map and zoom to the data zoom level.
OR
Open the project with the map view you want.
2. Right-click the object on the map you want to bring into the draw file, point to
Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw Object, and then click the object in
the list.
The object is copied into the draw file using the current line style selections.

Saving a Track as a GPS Log
You can save any track as a GPS log with the right-click feature.
To Save a Track as a GPS Log
Use the following steps to save a track as a GPS log.
1. Place a track on the map.
2. Right-click the track, point to Manage Draw, and then click Save as GPS
Log File.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default
location is C:\...\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.
The original track is retained in its draw file and a new GPS log is created.

246

Using the Draw Tools

Viewing the Contents of a Draw File
Once you create a draw file (draw, road, trail, waypoint, or track layer), you can
view the contents of that file using the More button in the File view of the Draw tab.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To View the Contents of a Draw File
Use the following steps to view the contents of a draw, road, trail, waypoint, or track
file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected
check box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to view.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file contents table displays. The
information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is
selected.
•

Draw layer contents include the draw object label (name), comments
about the draw object, the URL assigned when the draw object was
added to the map, the date and time the object was last modified, and
the draw object type (symbol, line, polygon, circle, etc.).

•

Road layer contents include the routable road name, comments about
the routable road, the URL assigned when the routable road was added
to the map, the date and time the routable road was last modified, and
the length of the road (in the measurement chosen in the Display
settings).

•

Trail layer contents include the routable trail name, comments about
the routable trail, the URL assigned when the routable trail was added
to the map, the date and time the routable trail was last modified, and
the length of the trail (in the measurement chosen in the Display
settings).

•

Waypoint layer contents include comments about the waypoint, the
URL assigned when the waypoint was added to the map, the date and
time the waypoint was last modified, the coordinates of the waypoint,
the elevation of the waypoint, and the symbol name.

•

Track layer contents include comments about the track, the URL
assigned when the track was added to the map, the date and time the
track was last modified, the start and finish time of the track, the total
time of the track, the distance of the track (in the measurement
chosen in the Display settings), and the number of readings that the
track includes.

5. Optional. Double-click a draw object in the table to center the map on its
location.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Go To.
6. Optional. To sort the columns of data in the table in ascending order, click the
column header. Click the column header again to sort in descending order.

247

XMap User Guide
7. Optional. To modify a draw object's name, comment, or URL, in the table,
click the draw file in the draw file editing area and then click it again (do not
double-click). Type the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key
on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the draw file in the draw file editing area and click Rename. Type
the new name in the Name box and press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
Note To add a line break to text in the Comment field, press CTRL+ENTER
on your keyboard.
8. Optional. To view the contents of a track file in a dialog box, right click the file
in the draw file editing area and click Details.
9. Optional. To launch a Web browser for a draw object that includes a URL,
right-click the file in the draw file editing area and click Launch Browser.
10. Optional. To delete a draw object, click the draw object in the table and click
the Delete button.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to
cancel.
OR
Right-click the draw object in the table and click Delete.
Click Yes in the confirmation message box to delete the object or click No to
cancel.
11. Optional. Click Less to return the tab height to its default height.
Note To edit the Comments field, click once in the cell, type your text in the box,
and then press ENTER on your keyboard. When you hover your cursor over a
comment, the entire comment displays as a ToolTip.

Copying a Draw File
There are two different ways to copy a draw file. You can create an exact copy of an
existing file, retaining its draw file type, or you can copy the contents of an existing
file and save it as a different file type (for example, convert a road layer to a draw
layer).
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Copy a Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
3. Click to select the file that you want to copy.
4. Click Copy To.
A menu displays the available layer types; Road, Trail, Waypoint, Track, and
GIS Layer.
Note If a layer type is not available in the menu, it is because the original
draw file that you are copying does not contain data that is pertinent to that
file type. For example, you cannot copy a draw layer that contains area
objects (such as circles) to a road layer that requires line objects.

248

Using the Draw Tools
5. If you want to create an exact copy of the original file, select the layer type
that matches the original file. GIS Layer has options for New Layer, Append
Layer, and Replace Layer. When you select an option, the Import Source
Selection dialog box opens so you can define the import parameters.
A new file is created and inserted into the table.
OR
If you want to copy the file and save it as a different layer type, select the
option you want.
A new file is created and inserted into the table.
Tip You can also change a draw object type using the right-click feature. For more
information, see Changing Draw Object Types.

Changing Draw Object Types
When you add a draw object to the map, a draw file is automatically created that
includes that object. The draw file type varies depending on the draw object that was
created.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
Draw Object Type

Draw File Type

Routable Road

Road Layer

Routable Trail

Trail Layer

Waypoint

Waypoint Layer

Track

Track Layer

Area Object (Polygon, Circle, Rectangle)

Draw Layer

Point Object (MapNote, Text Label,
Symbol, Image)
Line Object (Line, Arc, Spline)
You can right-click a draw object on the map and change it to a road, track, trail,
waypoint, or draw layer, depending on the type of draw object you selected. When
the draw file type is changed, the original draw file is maintained and a copy is made
and switched to the new draw file type, leaving you with two files: the original draw
file and the copied draw file, which has a new draw file type.
To Change a Draw Object
Use the following steps to change a draw object type.
1. Use the Draw tab to place a draw object on the map.
2. To change a routable trail, track, or line to a road layer, right-click the object
on the map, point to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Road
Layer.
OR
To change a routable road or routable trail to a track layer, right-click the
object on the map, point to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active
249

XMap User Guide
Track Layer.
OR
To change a routable road, track, or line to a trail layer, right-click the object,
point to Manage Draw, and then click Copy to Active Trail Layer.
OR
To change a routable road, routable trail, waypoint, or track to a draw layer,
right-click the object on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to
Draw Object, and then click the object to copy to.
OR
To create a copy of an existing area object, point object, or line object, rightclick the object on the map, point to Manage Draw, point to Copy to Draw
Object, and then click the object to copy to.
OR
To change a track to a GPS log, right-click the track on the map, point to
Manage Draw, and click Copy Track to GPS Log.
OR
To change a symbol to a waypoint, right-click the symbol on the map, point
to Manage Draw, and click Copy Symbol to Waypoint.
Tip You can also change a draw file type using the File section of the Draw tab. For
more information, see Copying a Draw File.

Renaming a Draw File
Once you create a draw file, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
To Rename a Draw File
Use the following steps to rename a draw file.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected
check box displays on the map.
3. Right-click the draw file and click Rename.
The file name area activates.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
The file name area activates.
4. Type the new file name in the cell and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.

Creating a Direct Route from a Line Object
Once you have placed a routable road, trail, line, arc, or spline on the map, you can
use the right-click feature to create a direct route using the points in that line object.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Create a Route from a Routable Road, Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline
Use the following steps to create a direct route from a road, trail, line, arc, or spline.

250

Using the Draw Tools
1. Place a routable road, trail, line, arc, or spline on the map.
2. Right-click the line object on the map and click Create Route from Line.
The original line object is retained in its draw file and a new direct route is
created.
3. To view information about the route, click the Route tab and then click the
Directions subtab.

Copying a Draw Object From One Draw File to Another
You can copy draw objects from one draw file to another using the right-click feature
in the draw file list. Copying retains the draw object in the original draw file while
placing a copy of it in a selected draw file. If you want to move a draw object to
another draw file, see Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File.
To Copy a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to copy a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you created display in a table. A draw file with a selected check
box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The
information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is
selected.
5. Right-click the draw object that you want to copy to another draw file, point
to Copy To, and then click the draw file you want to copy the object to.
The draw object remains in the original draw file and is copied to the selected
draw file.

Moving a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
You can move a draw object to a different draw file using the right-click feature in
the draw file list. In order to move a draw object to another draw file, a secondary,
compatible draw file must exist.
Moving a draw object removes it from the current draw file. If you do not want to
remove it, but copy it to another draw file, see Copying a Draw Object from One
Draw File to Another.
To Move a Draw Object to a Different Draw File
Use the following steps to move a draw object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. A draw file with a selected
check box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the contents you want to copy.

251

XMap User Guide
4. Click More. The tab area increases in height and the file details table
displays. The information that displays in the table is dependent on the file
type that is selected.
5. Right-click the draw object you want to move, point to Move To, and then
click the draw file you want to copy the object to—all compatible draw files
display in the Move To list.
The draw object is moved to the new destination.

Using Draw Objects
Copying and Placing Draw Objects
You can copy any draw object you place on the map.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Copy Draw Objects
Use the following steps to copy draw objects.
1. Open the project that contains the draw object you want to copy.
2. Click the Draw tab.
and then click the
3. To copy a single draw object, click the Select tool
draw object on the map. A box displays around the active object.
OR
To copy multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
over the draw objects you want to copy.

and then drag a box

4. To copy, press the CTRL+C keys on your keyboard.
5. To paste, press CTRL+V on your keyboard. The newly copied object is placed
directly on top of the original (copied) object.
6. To move the copied object, use the table below.
If the draw object is
a...

Then...

Routable Road, Routable
Trail, Track, Line, Arc,
Spline, Polygon,
Rectangle, Circle, or
MapNote

Press and hold the SHIFT
key on your keyboard
and drag the object to
the new location.

Symbol or Text

Drag the object to the
new location.

Tips
•

To undo the move of the pasted draw object, click the Undo button
to
undo the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo

•

If you undo the first move of the pasted object, the object is placed back on
top of the original (copied) object.

button

252

Using the Draw Tools
•

To copy and move a single object, select the draw object you want to copy,
press the CTRL key on your keyboard, and drag the draw object to the new
location.

•

If the item you copied does not successfully paste, it may be because you
clicked out of the map display. To focus the cursor back on the map, click
inside the map display. Then, try pasting again.

Moving Draw Objects
You can move any draw object you place on the map using the Draw tab from one
location to another.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Move Draw Objects
Use the following steps to move draw objects.
1. Open the project that contains the object you want to move.
2. Click the Draw tab.
and click the draw object you want to move. A box
3. Click the Select tool
displays around the active object.
You can move draw objects in different ways:
If the object is a(n)...

Then...

Routable Road, Routable
Trail, Track, Line, Arc, Spline,
Polygon, Rectangle, or Circle

Press and hold the SHIFT key on your
keyboard and drag the object to the new
location.
OR
Press the arrow keys on your keyboard
to move the object up, down, right, or
left.

Symbol or Text

Press the arrow keys on your keyboard
to move the object up, down, right, or
left.
OR
Drag it to the new location.

MapNote

To move the entire MapNote, press and
hold the SHIFT key on your keyboard
and drag the object to the new location,
or position your cursor between the
MapNote text and the anchor and drag
the entire MapNote to the desired
location.
OR
To move the MapNote's anchor, drag the
MapNote's anchor to the new location.
OR
To move the MapNote's text, drag the
MapNote's text to the desired location.

253

XMap User Guide
Tip To undo a draw object move, click the Undo button

to undo the last

action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo button

Notes You can also move draw objects or their points by typing a new
coordinate or distance and bearing/angle number within the corresponding text
boxes.

Type new coordinates and click Apply to move circles, symbols, text,
and MapNotes. The whole object moves to the entered location. If you
change the distance and bearing numbers, the object moves in
relationship to the object's last location.

Type new coordinates and click Apply to move individual end points
(small red circles) in line segments in routable roads, trails, lines,
splines, polygons, rectangles, and arcs. If you change the distance and
bearing numbers of the individual points (not recommended for
rectangles), the end point's distance and bearing/angle change in
relationship to the start point of the segment.

Renaming a Draw Object
Once you create a draw object, you can rename it in the draw file list or on the map.
To Rename a Draw Object in the File List
Use the following steps to rename a draw object in the file list.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click File to open the draw file editing area.
All the files you have created display in a table. Any draw file with a selected
check box displays on the map.
3. Click to select the file that includes the draw object you want to rename.
4. Click More.
The tab area increases in height and the file details table displays. The
information that displays in the table is dependent on the file type that is
selected.
5. Right-click the draw object and select Rename.
OR
Click within the file name cell once. Then, click it again (do not double click).
6. The file name area activates. Type the file name and press the ENTER key on
your keyboard.
To Rename a Draw Object on the Map
Use the following steps to rename a draw object on the map.
1. Open the project that contains the draw object you want to rename.
2. Right-click the waypoint, point to Manage Draw and click Edit Draw Object
Text. The waypoint text box opens.
Note If you have more than one waypoint close together, you may have to
select from a list.
OR
, click the waypoint, and click the waypoint again
Click the Select tool
(do not double-click). The waypoint text box opens.

254

Using the Draw Tools
3. Type the new name in the box and press ENTER on your keyboard OR click
away from the box.

Deleting Draw Objects
Once you place a draw object on a draw file, you can delete the object. You can also
delete multiple or all draw objects in the active draw file.
To Delete One Draw Object
Use the following steps to delete a draw object.
1. Open the existing project that contains the draw object you want to delete.
2. Click the Draw tab.
and then click the draw object on the map to
3. Click the Select tool
select it. A box displays around the selected object.
4. Click Delete in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the object and then select Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
to
Tip To bring back the last draw object you deleted, click the Undo button
undo the last action. You can undo approximately 200 events in a single project.
Note You can also delete a draw object using the right-click feature in the draw file
list. Click the File button in the Draw tab, click to select the Draw File that contains
the object you want to delete, click More, right-click the object, and then click
Delete.
To Delete Multiple Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete several draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
, click the first draw
2. To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
object on the map to select it, and then press and hold the SHIFT key on your
keyboard while clicking each additional draw object you want to delete. A box
displays around each selected object.
OR
To select multiple draw objects, click the Select tool
the draw objects you want to delete.

, drag a box over

3. Click the Delete button in the Draw dialog area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
OR
Right-click the object and then click Manage Draw/Delete Draw Object.
A message box displays asking if you want to delete the draw objects from
the current file.
•

If you click Yes, all selected draw objects in the file are deleted. You
cannot undo this action.

•

If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.

255

XMap User Guide
To Delete All Draw Objects
To delete all draw objects from an unsaved draw file, click the Draw tab and, click a
draw object button that represents the draw file you want to clear (for example, if
) and then click
you want to clear a RoadLayer, click the Routable Roads tool
Clear All. A message box displays asking if you want to clear all draw objects from
the current file.
•

If you click Yes, all draw objects in the file are cleared. You cannot
undo this action.

•

If you click No, no objects are cleared from the file.

Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

Snapping Draw Objects
You can snap any draw object to the exact coordinates of a point in another draw
object. You can also snap the central shape point of an arc to another object.
To Snap a Draw Object to the Coordinates of Another Object
Use the following steps to snap a draw object to the coordinates of another draw
object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
and then click the draw object on the map.
2. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small,
magenta squares.
3. Select an end point from any of the line segments within the draw object.
It displays as a red or green circle.
4. Drag the point to:
•

Any other shape point within a line, spline, polygon, arc, or rectangle.

•

The center point of a circle.

•

The anchor of a symbol.

•

The base point of a text label.

•

The text box anchor point of a MapNote.

When you drag your shape point over a point on the draw object, a yellow
. Release the point you dragged when the
diamond defines the snap point
snap point displays. The active draw object is then snapped to the other
object's point coordinate.
Tip To undo a draw object snap, click Undo to undo the last action. If you decide
not to undo the last action, click Redo.
Notes
•

Do not snap one end point of an arc to the other end point in the same arc.

•

To turn the snapping feature off, press the ALT key on the keyboard while
dragging the draw object.

256

Using the Draw Tools
To Snap the Central Shape Point of an Arc to Another Object
Use the following steps to snap the central shape point of the arc to another object.
1. Click the Draw tab.
and then click the arc on the map.
2. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the active object. Shape points display as small,
magenta squares.
3. While pressing the SHIFT key on the keyboard, drag the center point of the
arc line over a point on the draw object until the snap point (the yellow
diamond) displays.
4. Release the arc. It is snapped to the other object's point coordinate.

Adding Points to Draw Objects
You can add points to routable road, trail, line, spline, and polygon draw objects to
change the shape of the object.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Add Points to Draw Objects
Use the following steps to add points to routable roads, trails, lines, splines, and
polygons.
, and then click the draw object
1. In the Draw tab, click the Select tool
you want to edit.
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the
draw objects display as small, magenta squares.
2. Click the line between two shape points in the object and drag.
A new point is created, as well as a new line segment within the object. The
new segment displays with its first and last end points, as well as a text box
indicating the new point's bearing or angle, length of the new segment (leg),
and total object's length on the map.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button
to undo the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo
button

Deleting Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
You can delete points from routable road, routable trail, track, line, spline, and
polygon draw objects to change the shape of the object.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Delete Points and Line Segments from Draw Objects
Use the following steps to delete points and line segments from draw objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
and click the draw object you want to edit.
2. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the line indicating it is active. The shape points of the
linear objects display as small, magenta squares.

257

XMap User Guide
3. Select the shape point.
The point displays as either a green or red end point depending upon the line
segment it is associated with.
4. Click Delete in the Draw display area.
OR
Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.
The point is deleted, as well as the line segment within the draw object that
was associated with that point.
Tip To undo the addition of the point to the draw object, click the Undo button
to undo the last action. If you decide not to undo the last action, click the Redo
button

Labeling a Draw Object
You can label any draw object. Once you label a draw object, you can search for it
using the QuickSearch function in the Find tab or by typing the draw object label in
any of the routing fields in the Route tab.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Label a Draw Object
See the labeling procedures below for each of the draw objects.
For this Draw
Object...

Use this labeling procedure...

Routable Roads
Routable Trails

Type the name of the street/trail in the text box
available in the Draw dialog area.

Arcs

1. Place the object on the map.

Circles
Polygons

, click the draw object
2. Using the Select tool
once.
A gray box displays around the draw object.

Rectangles

3. Click the draw object again. A text box displays.

Splines

4. Type the label name in the text box and then press
the ENTER key on your keyboard.

Lines

Tracks
Waypoints
Images
MapNotes
Symbols
Text Labels
Waypoints

258

1. Place the object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
2. Type the label for your draw object in the Label
section of the text box.
Note When viewing a hyperlinked draw object on the
map, the object displays as an active hyperlink. If you
want to click the object without opening the hyperlink,
press the CTRL key on your keyboard while you click the
draw object.

Using the Draw Tools

Routable Roads, Trails, Tracks, Lines, Arcs , and
Splines
Drawing Routable Roads or Trails on the Map
The Routable Road and Routable Trail tools allow you to add a new road or trail to a
draw layer in the current project. You can then incorporate any new roads you add to
a route when you create a route. You must be at data zoom level 11-0 or greater
when adding roads or trails with the Routable Road tool or Routable Trail tool.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Draw Routable Roads or Trails
Use the following steps to add routable roads/trails to a road layer.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Routable Road/Routable Trail tool
the tool you want.

and select

3. Type the name of the road or trail you want to add in the Road/Trail Name
text box.
Name each routable road/trail you add so you can locate it using the find
feature.
4. Hover the mouse pointer over existing roads and trails to display the yellow
diamond symbol . The yellow diamond symbol indicates where on an
existing road the point for your new road will connect (connection point).
Notes
•

The new road must connect to an existing non-limited access road for
routing to occur on the new road.

•

Each time you intersect an existing road or trail, hover the mouse
over the road/trail to display the yellow diamond symbol and click to
create a connection point before continuing to draw. If you draw the
line over the road/trail without creating a connection point, routing
cannot occur along the intersection.

5. Once you locate the connection point for your new road or trail, click the map
to place the first point. Click point-to-point or drag to add the new road/trail
to the draw layer.
The following information is available as you add each point in your road or
trail:
•

The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes.

•

The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous
point display in the corresponding text boxes.

6. To finish the line draw for the new road or trail, enter the last point on the
map screen and click Done.
The new road or trail displays on the map with the name you typed in the
Road/Trail Name text box.
You can also finish the line draw by pressing the ENTER key on your keyboard
or double-clicking while entering the last point of the line.

259

XMap User Guide

Drawing a Line, Arc, or Spline on the Map
You can add lines, arcs, and splines to a draw file and adjust their line style, color,
width, and display them with map line features.
•

Use lines to mark boundaries or to add railroads or utility lines. You can draw
lines with varied line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect
actual map line types.

•

Use arcs to add curved line features to a draw file. You can draw arcs with
varied line styles, weights, and colors, including lines that reflect actual map
line types.
Note An arc is created by entering only three points on the map. The first
and second points determine the distance of the first arc base from the last
arc base. The third point, placed between the first two, determines the radius
of the arc and fixes the arc in place.

•

Use splines to add trails or any other map feature that contains curves. You
can draw splines with varied line colors, weights, and styles, including lines
that reflect actual map line types.
Note As you draw a spline, points are entered in much the same way as
those entered when creating a line. The difference between a line and a spline
is that when you enter each point, the line segment between the points
curves instead of staying straight.

Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Draw a Line, Arc, or Spline
Use the following steps to draw a line/arc/spline.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool
you want.

and select the tool

3. Select a line/arc/spline style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a
line/arc/spline color.
5. If available, select a line/arc/spline width from the Width drop-down list.
6. If available, select the Highlight check box to make your line/arc/spline
appear translucent on the map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the
points on the map as you draw the line/arc/spline.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the
bearing or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the
line/arc/spline on the map. Labels display when end points are clicked if the
Show Measurement check box is selected.
8. To draw a line or spline, click the map to designate the start and end points of
each line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
OR
To draw an arc, click the map to designate the start and end points of the arc.
•

260

The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes
to the right of the line options.

Using the Draw Tools
•

The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous
point display in the corresponding text boxes.

9. To finish the line/arc/spline, click the last point on the map screen and then
click Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the line/arc/spline.

Drawing a Track on the Map
You can add tracks to the map and adjust their line style, color, width, and display
them with map line features.
To Draw a Track
Use the following steps to draw a track.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool

and select the Track tool

.
3. Select a track style from the Style drop-down list.
4. Click the color button next to the Style drop-down list to select a track color.
5. Select a track width from the Width drop-down list.
6. Select the Highlight check box to make your track appear translucent on the
map.
7. Select the Show Measurement check box to display information about the
points on the map as you draw the track.
As you add each point, a text box displays next to your pointer indicating the
bearing or angle, leg (line segment) length, and total length of the track on
the map. Labels display when end points are clicked if the Show Measurement
check box is selected.
8. Click the map to designate the start and end points of each line segment.
You can also drag your cursor on the map to draw a squiggly line.
•

The coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes
to the right of the line options.

•

The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its previous
point display in the corresponding text boxes.

9. To finish the track, click the last point on the map screen and then click
Done.
OR
Click the last point on the map screen and press the ENTER key on your
keyboard.
OR
Double-click the last point of the track.
Tip To get information about a track, right-click it on the map and click Info. The
Info tab opens with information about the track.

261

XMap User Guide

Editing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline
Once you create a line object (routable road, routable trail, line, arc, or spline) you
can edit (including reshaping or changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete
it at any time.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Edit a Line Object
Use the following steps to edit the shape of a routable road/trail, line, arc, or spline.
1. Open the project containing the draw layer with the line object you want to
edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the line object you want to edit is not active, click File and activate the
draw file in the file list. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool

and then click the line object you want to edit.

•

A box displays around the selected line.

•

The shape points used to create the line object display as small,
magenta squares.

5. Perform any of the following edits to the line object:
•

To edit any label on the line object, select it twice, then type the label
in the text box that displays next to the line object.
OR
Select the line object and edit its label.

•

Reshape the line object by dragging any of its points to a new location.
When you select a shape point of a line segment within an active line
object:

•

A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected
line segment.

•

A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected
line segment.

Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option
and edit the numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.
Note You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the dropdown arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the
distance text in the Distance and Bearing/Angle option.

6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.

Editing a Track
Once you download a track from a GPS receiver, you can edit (including reshaping or
changing line color or width), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
To Edit a Track
Use the following steps to edit a track.
1. Open the project containing the draw file with the track you want to edit.
262

Using the Draw Tools
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the track you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and select
the draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done.
4. Click the Select tool

and click the track you want to edit.

•

A box displays around the selected track.

•

The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta
squares.

5. Change any of the track style, color, or weight options of the existing track.
•

To edit any label on a track, click the Select tool, select the line twice,
then type the label in the text box that displays next to the track.

•

Reshape the track by dragging any of the points in the line to a new
location. When you select a shape point of a line segment within an
active line:

•

A small green circle indicates the start end point of the selected
track segment.

•

A small red circle indicates the last end point of the selected
track segment.

Select the Coordinate or the Distance and Bearing/Angle option
and edit their numbers. Click Apply to initiate the changes.

6. Click Done to finish your edit.
OR
Press the ENTER key on your keyboard.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.

Placing a Routable Road, Routable Trail, Line, Arc, or Spline at a
Specific Location
You can place any line object (routable road, routable trail, line, arc, or spline) at a
specific coordinate location.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Place a Line Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place your line object at a specific coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a routable road or trail, click and hold the Routable
and select the tool you want.
Road/Routable Trail tool
OR
To place a line/arc/spline, click and hold the Line/Arc/Spline tool
and select the tool you want. Then, select the line, style, width
(if available), and color for your line/arc/spline.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle
option in conjunction with the Coordinate option, and enter the appropriate
coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the
text style options box.

263

XMap User Guide
Note If you are placing an arc, enter new numbers into the Distance and
Bearing/Angle text boxes for the two base points of the arc only. When the
central shape point of the arc is selected, the text options change from
Distance and Bearing/Angle to Radius and Direction. Enter the appropriate
radius number and direction to change the radius for this point.
4. Click Apply and repeat the procedure for the second point.
The line object displays on the map at those coordinates, distance, and
bearing or angle.
OR
After placing the first point coordinate, move your pointer to the map screen
and place the other points by hand by clicking on the screen.
5. To place additional points, lines, or other draw objects on the map in
reference to the first line, enter a specific distance and bearing into the
corresponding text boxes and click Apply.

Joining and Breaking Linear Objects
You can join two or more routable roads/trails, tracks, lines, arcs, or splines into a
single entity. You can also break routable roads/trails, tracks, lines, or splines. You
cannot break arcs.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
To Join
Use the following steps to join linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
, press and hold the SHIFT key on the keyboard,
2. Click the Select tool
and select any lines, arcs, or splines you want to join.
OR
and drag a box around the linear objects you want
Click the Select tool
to join.
Note When joining the preceding types of line objects, you can mix and
match lines, arcs, and splines. The result is always a line. However, when you
join multiple splines, the resulting joined object is a spline.
3. Right-click, point to Manage Draw, and then click Join Lines.
OR
Join the lines by pressing CTRL+J or the keyboard shortcut combination you
assigned for the joining function.
The selected lines are joined.
Note Any other objects selected during the multi-select process are ignored.
To Break
Use the following steps to break linear objects.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool

264

and select the line object you want to break.

•

A box displays around the active line.

•

The shape points used to create the line display as small, magenta
squares.

Using the Draw Tools
3. Click the shape point where you want to break the line, right-click, point to
Manage Draw, and then click Break Line.
OR
Break the line by pressing CTRL+B or the keyboard shortcut combination you
assigned for the breaking function.
The line is broken into two segments at the designated point and you can edit
each line separately.
Note It is important that you perform steps 2 and 3 consecutively. If you
pan the map, use another tab, and so on between steps, you may need to
repeat the steps again to break your linear object.

Circles, Rectangles, and Polygons
Drawing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can add area objects (circles, rectangles, and polygons) to a draw file in your
current project. Area objects are those objects consisting of one or more closed line
objects.
•

Use circles to designate circular map features.

•

Use rectangles to designate land boundaries or any other rectangular map
feature.

•

Use polygons to designate water bodies, land boundaries, or any other
irregular map feature.

Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or
changing line color or weight), copy, move, or delete it at any time.
Note The best way to measure a large area on the map is with the circle, rectangle,
and polygon tools in the Draw tab. When you draw an area object on the map, the
area displays next to the object on the map. If you click off of the object, you can
view the area again by clicking the Select tool in the Draw tab and then clicking the
area object on the map.
To Draw a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to add circles, rectangles, or polygons to the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
hidden options. Select the tool you want.

to view its

3. From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to the area
object.
4. Click the Fill Color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select the
color for your fill style.
5. Select an outline style for your circle from the Outline drop-down list.
6. Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your area
object.
7. Select the width for your area object outline from the Width drop-down list.
8. Select the Show Measurement check box to display area (and radius
information for circles) on the map as you draw the object.
9. To draw a circle, click the location for the circle's center on the map and drag
away from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as soon as you

265

XMap User Guide
achieve the radius you want. The radius of the circle and the coordinates of
the circle's center display in the corresponding text boxes to the right of the
circle fill option area.
OR
To draw a rectangle, click the location for the rectangle's upper-left corner
on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width, height, and area
for the rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size you want. The
coordinates of the upper-left corner point display in the corresponding text
boxes to the right of the fill options. The distance and bearing/angle of the
final corner point from the first corner point display in the corresponding text
boxes to the right of the fill options.
OR
To draw a polygon, click the map to enter each point of the polygon. The
coordinates of each point display in the corresponding text boxes to the right
of the fill options. The distance and bearing/angle of each new point from its
previous point display in the corresponding text boxes. Labels display when
end points are clicked if the Show Measurement check box is selected.
and then click the area object on the map.
10. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
11. Click the object again. A text box displays. Type the label in the text box and
press the ENTER key on your keyboard.

Editing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Once you have created an area draw object, you can edit (including reshaping or
changing line color or weight), copy, move, or delete at any time.
To Edit a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon
Use the following steps to edit an area draw object.
1. containing the draw file with the area object you want to edit.
2. Click the Draw tab.
3. If the object you want to edit is not in the active draw file, click File and
select the draw file from the draw file dialog area. Then, click Done. The
Draw dialog area displays.
and then click the object on the map.
4. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
OR
To edit multiple objects, click the Select tool
around the objects that you want to edit.

and then drag a box

5. Change the object's fill, outline, and/or width option.
OR
If you selected a single circle, drag one of the magenta squares around the
circle to change the circle's size. The center of the circle remains in its original
location.
OR
If you selected a single rectangle, click one of the corner points of the
rectangle and drag to change its width, height, and area on the map.
OR
If you selected a single polygon, click one of the shape points of the polygon
and drag to change its bearing or angle, the leg length, and polygon area on
the map. Reshape the polygon by dragging any of the points in the polygon to
266

Using the Draw Tools
a new location. When you select a shape point of a line segment within an
active polygon, a small green circle indicates the start end point of the
selected line segment and a small red circle indicates the last end point of the
selected line segment. Select the Coordinate option or the Distance and
Bearing/Angle option and edit their numbers. Click Apply to initiate the
changes.
Notes You can display either bearing or distance by clicking the drop-down
arrow next to the Bearing or Angle text located below the distance text in the
Distance and Bearing/Angle option. You can also delete points and line
segments from or add points to a polygon.
6. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard to finish your edit.
OR
Click outside the object's active box on the map.

Placing a Circle, Rectangle, or Polygon on the Map
You can place any area object (circle, rectangle, or polygon) at a specific coordinate
location.
To Place an Area Object on the Map
Use the following steps to place a circle, rectangle, or polygon on the map.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
the tool you want.

and select

3. Select the circle fill, outline, and/or width options.
4. To place a circle on the map, enter the coordinates for the circle's center into
the corresponding text boxes. Then, enter the radius for the circle into the
radius text box.
OR
To place a rectangle on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the
Distance and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate
option. Enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the rectangle's
upper-left corner point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill
options box.
OR
To place a polygon on the map, select the Coordinate option or use the
Distance and Bearing/Angle option in conjunction with the Coordinate
option, and enter the appropriate coordinates or numbers for the first polygon
point into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the fill options box.
5. Click Apply.
Note If you are placing a polygon on the map, repeat the procedure for the
other points.

Waypoints, Symbols, MapNotes, Text Labels, and
Images
Adding a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image to the
Map
You can add point draw objects to a draw file in your current project. Point objects
consist of one anchor point attached to a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, image, or text

267

XMap User Guide
label. The anchor point is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the
geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed.
•

Use the Waypoint tool to label waypoints on a map. You can exchange
waypoints with a GPS receiver.

•

Use the Symbol tool to identify certain areas on the map such as houses,
monuments, or points of interest.

•

Use the MapNote tool to point to and label a specific area on the map. See
Map Notes for more information.

•

Use text labels to name features or give details about features on the map.

•

Use the Image tool to add, edit, or place .bmp, .jpg, and .gif images on the
map.

To Add a Point Object to the Map
•

Add a MapNote, text label, or symbol
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text/Label/Symbol/Image tool and
select the tool you want. Then, select the font, style, size, and color
for your point object's label from the text style options.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
and browse to the document
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
you want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and
click Open. The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or
distance and bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the
corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text
boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
Notes
These steps describe how to add Draw MapNotes. To show/delete Route
MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
You can also add a MapNote by right-clicking the map on the point you want
to label, pointing to Add MapNote, and then selecting a MapNote option.

•

Add a waypoint
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the Tracks/Waypoints tool and select Waypoint
. Then, select the waypoint symbol from the Symbols options.
You can also select a different font, style, size, and color for the
waypoint name.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
and browse to the document
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
you want to link your point object to. Then, click the file name and
click Open. The address appears in the URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or
distance and bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the

268

Using the Draw Tools
corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text
boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.
•

Add an image
From the Draw tab:
1. Click and hold the MapNote/Text Label/Symbol/Image tool and
select Image
. Under Images, select an existing image, or click
Add, browse to an image, and click Open to add a new image to your
Images selection.
Note To delete an image from the Images selection, select the image
and then click Delete.
2. Click the location for the point object on the map.
The URL/Label text box opens.
and browse to the document
3. Optional. Click the Hyperlink button
you want to hyperlink your point object to. The address appears in the
URL field.
4. Type the name or phrase into the Label field. The coordinates or
distance and bearing/angle numbers of the location appear in the
corresponding Coordinate or Distance and Bearing/Angle text
boxes.
5. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the
object's active area when you are finished.

Tip Search for a point object by its label name using the QuickSearch function in the
Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish, Stop, or Via text boxes
when creating a route in the Route tab.

Editing a Waypoint, Symbol, MapNote, Text Label, or Image
Once you add a point object to a draw file, you can edit (name only), copy, move, or
delete it at any time. You can edit multiple point objects at the same time by
dragging a box around the objects you want to edit. Any changes are made to all of
the point objects included in the box.
To Edit a Point Object
Use the following steps to edit a waypoint, symbol, MapNote, text label, or image.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool

and then click the point object on the map twice.

3. Type a new name or phrase in the Label field, change the name's font, style,
size, or color; select a new symbol; or click the Hyperlink button to change
the URL address.
4. Press the ENTER key on your keyboard or click the map outside of the point
object's active area when you are finished.

Placing a Waypoint, Symbol, Text Label, or Image at a Specific
Location
You can place any point object (waypoint, symbol, text label, or image) at a specific
coordinate location.

269

XMap User Guide
To Place a Point Object at a Specific Location
Use the following steps to place a waypoint, symbol, text label, or image at a specific
coordinate location.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. To place a waypoint, click and hold the Track/Waypoint tool

and

select the Waypoint tool
. Select the waypoint symbol from the
Symbols options. You can also select a different font, style, size and color for
the waypoint name.
OR
To place a symbol, click and hold the MapNote/Text
Label/Symbol/Image tool

and select the Symbol tool

. Select the symbol from the Symbol Selection list. You can also select
a different font, style, size and color for the symbol name.
OR
To place a text label, click and hold the MapNote/Text
. Select the
Label/Symbol/Image tool and select the Text Label tool
font, style, size, and color from the text style options. A sample of how your
text display appears to the left of the options.
OR
To place an image, click and hold the MapNote/Text
Label/Symbol/Image tool to view its hidden options. Select the Image
. Under Images, select an existing image or click Add, browse to an
tool
image, and click Open to add a new image to your Images selection.
3. Select the Coordinate option, or use the Distance and Bearing/Angle
option in conjunction with the Coordinate option, and type the appropriate
coordinates or numbers into the corresponding text boxes to the right of the
text style options box.
4. Click Apply. The point object displays on the map at those coordinates,
distance, and bearing or angle.
5. If you are placing a text label, enter the text and press the ENTER key on
your keyboard or click the map outside of the text label active area when you
are finished.

Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes
You can add your own MapNotes to a map. MapNotes have a white background that
make them highly visible on the map. They can contain multiple lines of text and can
be moved off of the labeled area without losing their visual links with the points. You
can use MapNotes for directions or explanations.
Notes
•

This Help topic describes the steps necessary to move and delete Draw
MapNotes. To show/delete Route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing
Preferences.

•

When you use right-click functionality to add a MapNote, it is light blue unless
it is a blank MapNote.

270

Using the Draw Tools
•

You can search for a MapNote by its label name using the QuickSearch
function in the Find tab or by typing the label name in the Start, Finish,
Stop, or Via text boxes when creating a route in the Route tab.

To Move a MapNote
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool

3. Click the MapNote to select it.
The MapNote is enclosed with a box.
4. You can:
•

Drag the stem to a new location to move the MapNote.

•

Drag the text box to a new location, leaving the anchor point in the
same location on the map.

•

Drag the anchor point to a new location, leaving the text box in the
same location on the map.

To Delete a MapNote
Use the following steps to delete a MapNote.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click the Select tool

3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Press the DELETE key on your keyboard.

271

XMap User Guide

Custom Symbols
Custom Symbols Overview
DeLorme XSym lets you create and edit your own symbols, which you can edit and
add to maps within DeLorme mapping programs. The symbols created are 24 x 24
pixels. New and edited symbols are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) and can
contain up to 250 symbols. Symbol set files are located at C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Symbols.
The DeLorme XSym Dialog Box
The XSym dialog box provides all the tools you need to create and edit symbols for
your DeLorme mapping program. Click an area on the diagram below to view
information on the various parts of the dialog box.
Tip To close the pop-up information box that displays when you click the diagram,
click outside the image or click another part of the image.

Opening a Symbol Set
Open an existing symbol set (.dim) to add new symbols or edit existing ones.
272

Using the Draw Tools
To Open a Symbol Set
Use the following steps to open a symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens. The symbol selection for the new
symbol set displays under Symbols in Set and the Symbol Editing Grid
displays the first symbol of the new symbol set.

Creating a New Symbol Set
Symbols created in DeLorme XSym are saved within a symbol set (.dim file) which
can contain up to 250 symbols.
To Create a New Symbol Set
Use the following steps to create a new symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select [New...] from the drop-down list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set. The
default name for the new symbol set is CustomSymbolSet.
5. Import a bitmap into your new symbol set.
OR
Create a new symbol to add to your new symbol set.
To Create a New Symbol Set from an Existing Symbol Set
You can make a copy of an existing symbol set and save it as a custom symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to copy from the drop-down
list.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbol Set Name, type the name for your new symbol set.
You can edit symbols, create symbols, or import bitmaps for your new symbol
set.

Creating a New Symbol
With DeLorme XSym you can add a new symbol to an existing or new symbol set
(.dim) file. You can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it
under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.

273

XMap User Guide
To Create a New Symbol
Use the following steps to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set you want to add your new symbol to
from the drop-down list OR select New to create a new symbol set.
4. Under Symbols, click Edit to display the DeLorme XSym dialog box.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and the tools under Transparency and
Anchor to create the new symbol.
•

To undo the last action, click the Undo button

•

To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
Symbol.

under Edit Symbol.
under Edit

7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once a name is assigned to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence
of that symbol placed on the map retains the new symbol name in addition to
the default symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•

As you create a symbol, an image preview displays to the upper-left of the
Symbol Editing Grid. You can make edits to the symbol in either the Image
Preview or the Symbol Editing Grid. Any edits done in one view are mirrored
in the other view.

•

See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into
XSym, Dragging a Bitmap into XSym

Editing a Symbol
With DeLorme XSym, you can edit an existing symbol in a symbol set (.dim) file and
save the change or save it as a new symbol to be added to another symbol set. You
can assign a new category name for the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab
in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Edit a Symbol
Use the following steps to edit a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.
4. Click Edit. The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the symbol selection of the default
symbol set or from another symbol set you have created. The symbol displays
in the Symbol Editing Grid.

274

Using the Draw Tools
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to
edit the symbol.
•

To undo the last action, click the Undo button

•

To repeat the last action, click the Redo button

under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.

7. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
Note Once you assign a name to a symbol in a symbol set, each occurrence
of that symbol you place on the map retains the new symbol name in addition
to the default symbol name of "symbol."
8. Click OK when finished.
Note
•

•

See also: Importing a Bitmap, Copying and Pasting, Pasting a Bitmap into
XSym, Dragging a Bitmap into XSym

Finding a Custom Symbol
The symbol name you assign to a symbol in XSym is different than the label you
attach to the symbol on the map using the symbol draw tool. You can use the
symbol name to help locate a custom symbol you have already placed on a map
using the Advanced feature under the Find tab.
To Find a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to find a symbol by its symbol name.
1. Click the Find tab and then click Advanced.
2. Select Category from the Find drop-down list
3. Select the applicable option from the Within drop-down list.
4. Type the symbol name in the Keywords text box.
5. Click Search.
6. Click OK.
The closet matches display in the list view to the right of the Search For text
box. The Symbol Name displays in the Map Feature Type column just before
the symbol's feature type (draw object).
7. Double-click the item or select the item and click Go To to locate your
selection on the map.
The map view centers on the item. If you assigned a name for the symbol
under the Draw tab, a MapTag displays the name at the symbol location.
If you did not assign a name for the symbol, a MapTag displays the Symbol
Name at the symbol location.
Notes
•

If you do not assign a symbol name to a symbol in XSym, you can locate it
with the generic keyword of "symbol" or by the name or phrase given the
symbol in the Draw tab. For more information, see Finding a Symbol by its
Name.

275

XMap User Guide
•

If you assigned a Symbol Name to a custom symbol in XSym and placed the
symbol on the map, the Symbol Name displays in the demographic
information area when you right-click the symbol and select Info.

Importing a Bitmap
You can import a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol, but any bitmap
you import must be 24 x 24 pixels or less. You can assign a new category name for
the symbol to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Import a Bitmap
Use the following steps to import a bitmap to use as a symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
4. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
5. Click Import to display the Open Bitmap File dialog box. Browse to the
location of the bitmap and click Open.
The imported bitmap displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important
Notes below.
6. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to
edit the symbol.
•

To undo the last action, click the Undo button
•

To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
Symbol.

under Edit Symbol.
under Edit

If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a
message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and
the image is reduced.

•

If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the
edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.

•

276

Using the Draw Tools

Copying and Pasting
You can copy and paste portions of a symbol or whole symbols to create new
symbols or edit existing ones.
To Copy and Paste in XSym
Use the following steps to copy a symbol or portions of a symbol to edit an existing
symbol or to create a new symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, select a symbol from the symbol selection.
6. In the Draw Tool Box, click the Select tool.
7. Select the area of the symbol you want to copy or select the whole symbol,
and then click the Copy button

under Edit Symbol.

8. Click the Paste button
under Edit Symbol. The copied image is pasted
into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing Grid. Drag the pasted piece into
the place you want it within the current symbol.
OR
To create a new symbol with the copied image, click New under Symbols in
Set to clear the Symbol Editing Grid, and then click the Paste button to add
the pasted image into the grid.
Note You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it
under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program. To assign a symbol
name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the Symbol Name
text box under Edit Symbol.
9. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•

To undo an action, click the Undo button

•

To repeat an action, click the Redo button

under Edit Symbol.
under Edit Symbol.

Pasting a Bitmap into XSym
You can copy a bitmap or part of a bitmap to the clipboard and paste the image into
DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Ideally, the pasted bitmap should be 24 x 24
pixels in size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol to help locate it
under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Paste a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to paste a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.

277

XMap User Guide
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Open a bitmap in another image editing program, and select the bitmap or a
part of the bitmap you want to copy. Press CTRL+C on your keyboard to copy
the selection to the clipboard.
under Edit Symbol.
7. Click the Paste button
The copied image is pasted into the current symbol in the Symbol Editing
Grid. See important Notes below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to
edit the symbol.
•

To undo the last action, click the Undo button

•

To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
Symbol.

under Edit Symbol.
under Edit

9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•

If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a
message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and
the image is reduced.

•

If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the
edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.

•

Dragging a Bitmap into XSym
You can drag a bitmap into DeLorme XSym to use as a symbol. Using drag to bring
in an image is much like importing a bitmap into XSym. Ideally, the new bitmap
should be 24 x 24 pixels in size. You can assign a new symbol name for the symbol
to help locate it under the Find tab in the DeLorme mapping program.
To Drag a Bitmap into XSym
Use the following steps to drag a bitmap into XSym.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.

278

Using the Draw Tools
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Under Symbols in Set, click New to clear the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Browse your computer to locate the bitmap (.bmp) file.
7. Drag the file into XSym.
The bitmap image displays in the Symbol Editing Grid. See important Notes
below.
8. Use the tools in the Draw Tool Box and under Transparency and Anchor to
edit the symbol.
•

To undo the last action, click the Undo button
Symbol.

•

To repeat the last action, click the Redo button
Symbol.

under Edit
under Edit

9. To assign a symbol name to the current symbol, type a name or phrase in the
Symbol Name text box under Edit Symbol.
10. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•

If you attempt to import a bitmap larger than 24 x 24 pixels into XSym, a
message box warns you the selected bitmap is larger than 24 x 24 pixels and
the image is reduced.

•

If the bitmap is less than 24 x 24 pixels, the remaining area is filled to the
edge of the Symbol Editing Grid with one of the symbol pixel colors.

•

Removing a Symbol
You can remove a symbol from the default symbol set or from any other symbol set
you have created.
To Remove a Symbol
Use the following steps to remove a symbol from a symbol set.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol to remove from the symbol selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Click Remove.
The symbol disappears from the symbol selection under Symbols in Set and
the next symbol within the selection displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
7. Click OK when finished.

279

XMap User Guide

GPS Device Custom Symbols
You can use DeLorme XSym to create custom symbol sets for use with your DeLorme
PN-Series GPS device or a compatible third-party GPS device.
If you are assigning waypoint IDs to symbols for a third-party device, use the
Waypoint ID text box (shaded green) to make the assignment. If you are assigning
symbols to use with a PN-Series GPS, click the button in the GPS area (shaded
orange). The image on the button changes based on the symbol you have selected.

PN-Series Devices
You can create a custom symbol set and assign the symbols to the symbols on your
PN-Series GPS.
To Assign Symbols to Symbols on a PN-Series GPS
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Waypoint/Track tool
options. Select the Waypoint tool

to view its hidden

3. Create a new symbol set.
4. Create a symbol.
5. Under GPS, click the symbol button (the image on the button varies) to open
the PN-Series symbol set.
6. Click the PN-Series symbol to which you want to map your symbol.
7. Click OK.

Third-Party GPS Devices
You can create a custom symbol set that includes all of the waypoint symbols on
your third-party GPS device. By creating this custom symbol set, the waypoints you
create display the same in both the mapping application and on your third-party GPS
device, no matter where they originated.
Third-party GPS waypoint symbols are identified by their waypoint ID number, which
is assigned by the device's manufacturer. To successfully view third-party GPS
waypoint symbols in the mapping application, you must assign the proper waypoint
identification number to each symbol you add to the custom symbol set.
Important To create a custom symbol set of your third-party GPS device's
waypoint symbols, you must contact the device's manufacturer to obtain the graphic
files and the waypoint ID number associated with each symbol.

280

Using the Draw Tools
To Assign a Waypoint ID to a Custom Symbol
Use the following steps to assign a waypoint ID to a custom symbol.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Waypoint/Track tool
options. Select the Waypoint tool

to view its hidden

3. Create a new symbol set.
4. Paste the third-party GPS device's waypoint symbol into XSym.
5. Use the transparency option to make the area behind the symbol transparent.
6. Type the waypoint identification number for the symbol in the Waypoint ID
text box.
7. For each additional symbol, click New and then repeat steps 4–7.
8. Click OK when finished.
Notes
•

Waypoint ID numbers vary by manufacturer and model.

•

If you import multiple waypoints from a third-party GPS device without assigning
a waypoint ID to each first, all of the waypoints display in the mapping
application with a single default symbol.

•

If you do not know the identification number for a third-party GPS device's
waypoint, import the waypoint file into the mapping application. Then, use one
of the two methods below to learn the waypoint ID:
o

Open the symbol set that holds the waypoint and view the waypoint's ID
number in XSym.

Click the Info tool on the toolbar and click the symbol on the map.
The waypoint ID displays in the Info tab.

Symbol Editing Tools
Draw Tool Box
DeLorme XSym has a Draw Tool Box that lets you create and edit symbols within the
Symbol Editing Grid independently of the DeLorme mapping program. The tools
provided help you to create unique symbols to add to your map.
The following are the tools available in the Draw Tool Box.
Pencil—Draw freehand lines within the grid.
Line—Draw lines by clicking and dragging to the end point you want
within the grid.
Ellipse—Create an ellipse by clicking and dragging until you achieve the
size or shape of the ellipse you want.
Filled Ellipse—Create a filled ellipse by clicking and dragging until you
achieve the size or shape of the filled ellipse you want.

281

XMap User Guide
Rectangle—Create a rectangle by clicking and dragging until you
achieve the size of the rectangle you want.
Filled Rectangle—Create a filled rectangle by clicking and dragging until
you achieve the size of the filled rectangle you want.
Fill—Use the fill tool to fill an area of the grid with a color chosen from
the color palette.
Select—Use select to choose an area of the symbol to copy from the
Symbol Editing Grid and then paste into the same symbol or another
symbol in the grid.

Using the Transparency Option
The transparency option in DeLorme XSym lets you display a selected color as
transparent in the final symbol image you place on a map within a DeLorme mapping
program. For example, you may want to view the symbol object without the square
of the surrounding background color. You would then select the background color to
appear transparent.
To Make Part of a Symbol Transparent

Use the following steps to make part a symbol transparent.
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Click and hold the Symbol/MapNote/Text Label/Image tool
to view its hidden options. Select the Symbol tool

3. Under Symbols, select the symbol set that contains the symbol you want to
edit.
4. Click Edit.
The DeLorme XSym dialog box opens.
5. Select the symbol you want to edit from the Symbol Selection.
The symbol displays in the Symbol Editing Grid.
6. Select the Transparent option under Transparency.
.
7. Click the Select Color tool
The pointer changes to a dropper tool.
8. Select the color on the symbol you want to appear transparent.
The Transparent Color display box updates with the selected color, and the
Image Preview displays the chosen color area as transparent.
9. To display all colors, select the Opaque option under Transparency.
The Image Preview reflects this change.
10. Click OK when finished.
Note Be sure the color in the symbol you want to appear transparent is not
repeated in another part of the symbol you want to display as opaque. Select a new
color from the color palette and fill the area on the symbol you want to display as
transparent with the new color. Use the Select Color tool to select the new color in
the symbol grid.

282

Using the Draw Tools

Anchor Position
Being aware of Cursor Position is important for choosing the anchor position of a
symbol. The anchor is the pixel position on the symbol that corresponds to the
geographic coordinate of the point selected on the map when the symbol is placed.
Any newly created symbol, whether imported, pasted or dragged into the XSym
Symbol Editing Grid, has a default position of center anchor.
XSym lets you change the anchor position of your symbol.
To Select the Anchor Position

Use the following steps to select the anchor position of a symbol.

button.
1. Once your symbol is created, click the Anchor Position
When you pass your pointer over the Symbol Editing Grid, it changes to a
small cross hair (plus sign).
2. Click the pixel grid within the symbol to position your anchor.
The anchor location pixel coordinate numbers display after the position text to
the right of the Anchor Position button. The large cross hair in the Symbol
Editing Grid moves from its default anchor position to the new anchor
position.
To Center the Anchor Position

Click Center Anchor to place the anchor point in the exact center of the Symbol
Editing Grid.

Cursor Position
Any symbol created in XSym is 24 x 24 pixels square. Each of these pixels is
represented in the Symbol Editing Grid. When you move your cursor over the
Symbol Editing Grid, the cursor position by pixel number displays to the right of the
Cursor Position text next to the Image Preview (as shown below).
Image Preview and Cursor Position

As you move the cursor over the grid, the numbers update according to where you
are in the 24 x 24 grid. The first number in the above sample, 16, refers to the
number of pixels across (the X coordinate) from the upper left corner of the grid,
beginning with zero. The second number, 14, refers to the number of pixels down
(the Y coordinate) from the upper-left corner of the grid, beginning with zero.

283

Using XData
XData Overview
•

The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the XData tab.

•

Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

•

Supported file formats include:

•

Microsoft Access (.mdb, .mdw, and .mda)

•

Microsoft Excel (.xls)

•

Microsoft Visual FoxPro (.dbf)

•

dBase (.dbf)

•

Text files (.txt, .csv, .tab, and .asc)

XData labels, names, and URLs cannot be more than 255 characters.

You can use the XData tab to import your data so you can view the location of each
record on detailed maps. To geoplace (locate) your records on the map, the data file
must contain either a coordinate (in decimal degrees), a city and state, a ZIP/Postal
Code, or a complete physical address (street address, city, state) for each record.
Whatever your business needs, you have powerful database management tools to
help you plan accordingly.
You can:
• Import most database, spreadsheet, and text file formats for use within the
program.
•

Select symbols (or design your own) to represent the locations of your
records.

•

Display or hide databases so you can use them one at a time or together. You
can also use your data with other program functions.

•

Customize an existing dataset and then save the new dataset by using the
Export function.

•

Create a route using your XData records as a start, stop, and/or finish point.

Importing Data
You can import your own data and view the location of each record on detailed maps.
To locate (or geoplace) your records on the map, the file must contain either a
coordinate, a ZIP/Postal Code, or a complete physical address (street address, city,
state) for each record.
•

The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show
the XData tab.

•

Supported file formats include:
•

Microsoft Access (.mdb, .mdw, and .mda)

•

Microsoft Excel (.xls)

•

Microsoft Visual FoxPro (.dbf)

284

Using XData

•

dBase (.dbf)

•

Text files (.txt, .csv, .tab, and .asc)

XData labels, names, and URLs cannot be more than 255
characters.

To Import a Database
Use the following steps to import a database into the current map file.
1. Click the XData tab.
Each dataset included in the current map file is listed under Available
Datasets.
Note If the check box is selected, it indicates that the dataset is displayed on
the map. Clear the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click Import to open the Import Wizard.
3. On the Select Data Source screen, click Data Source to locate and select the
file from the Open dialog box and then click Next.
Note If your file is not available in the directory as expected, you may need
to change the file type in the Files of Type drop-down list.
4. If your data source is a .csv or .txt file, complete this step. If not, go to step
5.
The Select Schema screen displays. Verify how the data displays in the
columns. If it is not displaying correctly, under Schema Type, select the
option that separates your data into the appropriate columns. If your first row
is not a header row, clear the First Row is Header check box. Click Next.
The Assign Field Types screen displays.
Notes
•

Select Other under Schema Type to use a non-standard file schema
definition. You can then select any combination of Tab, Space, Comma,
and Other. If you select Other under Delimiter, type the character(s) that
separate your data in the text entry box.

•

The First Row is Header check box is selected by default. The program
attempts to automatically assign field names based on the data in the first
row.

5. Select the column you want to display as a label on the map using the
available radio buttons.
Note You can clear a selection to have no label displayed on the map.
6.
Click the Assignment header for each column and select the appropriate
field option from the menu.
The Status text box indicates how your data will be geoplaced on the map.
7.
Select how you want to locate your field information (street address or
ZIP/Postal Code).
Note The available Locate By options are based on which fields have been assigned
to the columns.
8.
Click Next.
The Select Data Symbol screen displays.
9.
Under Match Status, click Exact, Street Name, Area, or ZIP Center and
then select the unique symbol and text properties you want to display for each
match status.
Assigning different symbols/text to your records based on match status shows a

285

XMap User Guide
visual representation on the map of which records in your dataset were geoplaced
exactly, only by street name, only by area, or only by ZIP Center.
OR
Under Match Status, select the Use the same symbol/text for all categories
check box to identify all of your records on the map using the same symbol without
taking match status into consideration.
Note Click Edit to use XSym to create a new symbol or edit an existing symbol.
For more information, see topics listed under Custom Symbols in the Draw section of
the Help.
10.
Click Next.
The Data Options screen displays.
11.
Type the name for the dataset along with any additional identifying
comments.
The date and time of creation are automatically recorded.
12.
Click Finish.
A progress bar displays with the status of matched records. When the import process
is complete, the dialog box automatically closes, the dataset name displays in the
Available Datasets list, and the symbol you chose displays on the map for every
record which was geolocated.
Note Datasets have .dds extensions and are saved by default to C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Datasets.
Note If you decide to interrupt the import process, you can finish importing the
dataset later by selecting the dataset from the Available Datasets list in the XData
tab and then clicking Resume.

Managing Datasets
The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the
XData tab.
You can manage your dataset after you have imported/copied it as a dataset.

To Manage Your Datasets
Use the following steps to manage your datasets.
1. Click the XData tab.
A list of the datasets available in the current project displays in the Available
Datasets window. From this screen you can:
•

Update the symbols in the selected dataset by clicking Symbolize and
updating the symbol properties.

•

Delete the selected dataset by clicking Delete. The dataset is deleted
from the map, the current project, and from your computer.

•

View the records within the selected dataset by clicking Query. For
more information, see Viewing Dataset Records.

Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is displayed on the map.
Clear the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click a dataset to select it and then click the Query subtab. You can then:
•

286

Edit a record in the dataset by double-clicking inside the cell you want
to edit or by right-clicking the record (in the Query subtab) and
clicking Edit.

Using XData
•

Press the TAB key on your keyboard to advance through the cells in
the record. When you are finished editing the record, press the ENTER
key on your keyboard.

•

Create a route using a record in the dataset by right-clicking the
record you want to use as your start, stop, or finish route point,
clicking Route, and then clicking the route option.

•

Add a blank record to the end of the records list by clicking Add.

•

Duplicate a record in the dataset by right-clicking the record and
clicking Duplicate Record(s). Duplicates of the records will be
available at the bottom of the record list.

•

Delete a record in the dataset by selecting the record and clicking
Delete or by right-clicking the record and clicking Delete Record(s).

•

Center the map on the selected dataset by double-clicking it or clicking
Go To. The map view changes to encompass all of the geoplaced
records within that dataset.
Note To geoplace those records again, click GeoCode or right-click
the records and select GeoCode Record(s).

•

Center the map on a particular record by double-clicking the first
column of the record or by selecting the record and clicking Go To.

Viewing Dataset Records
The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the
XData tab.
After you have imported your data as a dataset, you can view information about the
dataset, view the data records within a dataset, and select a specific record and view
its symbol on the map.

To View Records
Follow the steps below to view records within a particular dataset.
1. Click the XData tab.
A list of the datasets available in the current project is displayed in the
Available Datasets window.
Note A selected check box indicates that the dataset is being displayed on
the map. Clear the check box to hide the dataset's symbols on the map.
2. Click a dataset to select it.
The name, date, and time that the dataset was created display in the Dataset
Statistics window. Any additional comments that you added during the import
process also display here.
3. Click Query.
The records for the selected dataset display in the records window. You can
then:
•

View a dataset other than the one currently selected by selecting the
dataset from the Use Dataset drop-down list. The records contained
within the dataset display in the table below. The Located To column
indicates how each record was geoplaced on the map (by Address,
ZIP/Postal Code, Street, Coordinate).
Note You can adjust the size of the tab area to expand the table.

287

XMap User Guide
•

Limit which records of the dataset display in the table by selecting one
of the options from the Table Display drop-down list. Some of the
Table Display options provide additional drop-down lists to choose a
more limited query. For example, selecting the Records by Placement
option provides an additional drop-down list of options so you can
choose to display only those records placed to specific addresses, only
those records placed manually, and so on.

Additional Viewing Tips
The following list provides information on how to view records or obtain information
about the dataset symbols on the map while in the Query dialog area.
•

To select records and view the corresponding symbol on the map:

To select one record, click the record.

To select multiple records individually, press the CTRL key on your
keyboard while clicking each of the individual records.

To select a block of records, press the SHIFT key while clicking the
record at the beginning of the block, and then click the record at the
end of the block. All of the records are selected.

•

To center the map on the selected record(s), click Go To.
Note To geoplace records again, click GeoCode.

•

To delete one or more records within the dataset, while in the Query dialog
area, select each record using one of the methods described above and then
click Delete. Click Yes to confirm the deletion. Deleted records are
unrecoverable.

•

To view the record of a particular dataset symbol on the map, click Select
and then click the symbol on the map. Only the corresponding records display
in the record window.

•

To resize columns, place the pointer near the column border in the header of
the desired column. When the pointer changes to a double arrow, drag the
column in the direction you want to increase or decrease its size.

•

To arrange the records in ascending order according to a particular column,
click the header of that column. Click the column header again to arrange the
records in descending order.

Creating a Route with XData Records
•

The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show
the XData tab.

•

Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable
trails require a topographic DeLorme dataset. For information,
visit www.delorme.com or call DeLorme Direct Sales at 800561-5105.

Once you import an XData dataset, you can use the individual records within the
dataset to create a route.

To Create a Route with XData Records
Use the following steps to create a route with XData records.

288

Using XData
1. Import a database into the XData tab.
2. Click the Query subtab.
3. Right-click the record you want to use as a start for your route, click Route,
and then click Set as Start.
4. Optional. Right-click the record you want to use as a stop in your route, click
Route, and then click Insert as Stop to add the stop geographically in the
route or click Add as Stop to add the stop in the order it was added to the
route.
5. Right-click the record you want to use as a finish in your route, click Route,
and then click Set as Finish.

Geocoding or Moving a Record's Location
The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the XData
tab.
During the import process, the program attempts to geocode all records. This means
it places the symbol for the record on specific map coordinates (based on address or
coordinate information). Once you have imported your data, you may want to make
changes to the data and manually geocode each record to a new location. How an
item has been located displays in the Located To column of the dataset's records.

To Move a Record's Location
Use the following steps to move a record's location.
1. Click the XData tab.
2. Click Query.
3. Select the dataset you want to view from the Use Dataset drop-down list.
4. Select Records by Placement from the Table Display drop-down list.
5. Select All Placed Records from the Record Placement drop-down list.
6. Scroll right to the Located To column and view how each record in the
dataset was placed.
You can manually geocode any item listed as Not Placed or ZIP Code.
7. Select the record you want to move.
8. To manually place a record that has not been placed on the map, drag the
record from the table to the location on the map. The Located To field for that
record now reads as Manual Placement.
OR
Click GeoCode to geocode a record again.
OR
Right-click the record(s) and then click GeoCode Record(s).

Exporting Data
The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the XData tab.
You can export datasets to another dataset or a text file. It is important to export
datasets because:

289

XMap User Guide
•

If you have modified a dataset after you have imported it, you may want to
save the new dataset for use in as a dataset in your application or as a text
file.

•

If you have exported a copied dataset (resulting from conducting a phone
book listing search) and then used the To XData function within the Phone
tab, you can modify and export it to a new dataset or export it as a text file.

To Export Data
Use the following steps to export data.
1. Click the XData tab.
2. Click Query.
3. Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop-down list.
The records contained within the dataset display in the records window.
4. To limit which records of the dataset are available for export, you can:
Select one of the options from the Table Display drop-down list.
OR
Select records manually from the existing dataset. To select multiple records
individually, press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking each of the
desired records. To select a block of records, press the SHIFT key while
clicking the record at the beginning of the block, and then click the record at
the end of the block; all of the records between the two you clicked are now
selected.
5. Click Export.
6. Under Export Options, select one of the following options:

Export to New Dataset–Exports the file as a .dds file for use within
the program as another dataset.

Export to Text File–Exports the file as a .txt file for use in other
programs.

7. Under Records to Export, select one of the following options.

Entire Dataset–Exports all records in the selected dataset, including
records that have not been placed.

Records in List (#)–Exports the records currently displaying in the
Query table. The number of records is in parentheses. This may be a
subset of the dataset, if you selected one of the Table Display options
from the drop-down list in the Query dialog area.

Only Selected (#)–Exports only those records currently selected in
the Query table. The number of records is in parentheses. These are
the records you selected manually.

8. To export your dataset as another dataset, click Create Dataset and follow
the instructions provided to select a data symbol for each match status, type
a dataset name, and select the map display option(s). Click Finish when
prompted. Exported files are available immediately in the Available Datasets
list in the Datasets dialog area of the XData tab. These files have .dds
extensions and are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.
OR
To export your dataset as a text file, make sure the Export to Text File
option is selected. Type the file name in the File text box and click Save.
Exported files have a .txt extension and are saved by default in the
C:\...\DeLorme Docs\Datasets.

290

Using XData

Printing XData Dataset Records
The XData tab is hidden by default. Use Tab Manager to show the
XData tab.
You can print records from datasets imported with the XData tab. For information on
viewing records from imported datasets, see Viewing Dataset Records.

To Print XData Dataset Records
Use the following steps to print dataset records.
1. Click the XData tab and then click Query.
2. Select a dataset from the Use Dataset drop-down list. Set Table Display or
Record Placement options if they are available for your dataset.
3. Click the Print tab and then click XData to display the Print/XData dialog
area.
The title of the currently selected dataset displays in a text box in the Dataset
Print Title area.
4. Optional. Click Setup to open the Print Setup dialog box; select a printer,
change printer properties, select paper size, and select paper orientation.
Click OK when finished.
5. Click Columns to view the Columns display area if the Print dialog area is
minimized.
6. Under Dataset Print Title, select the Print Title check box to display a title
on each printed page. Select the First Page Only check box to only display
the title on the first printed page.
Note Click Font to change the font, style, size, and/or script.
7. Under Records, select an option.
Note Various options are available under the Records drop-down box
depending on options you chose under the Table Display drop-down box in
the XData dialog area. You can choose specific options available or to print All
Records in the dataset.
Option

Action

Print Column
Names

Displays column names on each printed page.
Clear the check box to have no column names
display.

First Page Only

Displays column names on the first page only.
This option is unavailable if the Print Column
Names check box is cleared.

Print Column
Borders

Displays borders around table columns.

Shade Alternate
Records

Displays shading in alternate rows in the table.

8. Under Columns, select an option.
Note Selected check boxes indicate the columns that will print. Clear a
column check box if you do not want the column to print or click:

291

XMap User Guide
•

Select All to select and print all columns.

•

Select None to clear all columns (no columns will print).

•

Reverse Selection to alternate selections. For example if you have
selected columns 1, 3, and 5 to print and decide you want to print
columns 2, 4, and 6 instead. The Reverse Selection option selects
those columns that were cleared.

9. When all options are selected, click Print.
Note For specific recommendations on best printing results, see your printer
manual.

292

Registering Images
ImageReg Overview
Use the ImageReg tab to register an image to a base map by adding corresponding
control points on the image and the map. Once these control points are then pinned
to the map, the ImageReg tab transforms all points from the image to the map using
a user-selected transformation.

Creating Data for a Registered Image
The information in a WorkFile (the image reference and control point pairs) is used to
make the necessary calculations to create a map dataset. Once the dataset has been
created, it can be used as a base map and utilized in a project map view.

To Create Data for a Registered Image
Use the following steps to create data for a registered image.
1. Register an image or open an existing WorkFile.
2. Click Create Data.
3. In the Name text box under Dataset, type a name for the new dataset to
create.
The dataset has a .dat extension and an associated index file with a .ind
extension.
4. Use the default path to the C:\...\DeLorme Docs\ImageReg directory within
the Path text box or click the browse button if you want to select another path
for the dataset.
5. In the Comments text box, type information related to the registered image.
This information can help you identify the dataset later.
6. Click Process to generate a raster dataset.
7. Click OK when data creation is complete.
The new dataset displays in the map window on top of your original source
data.
8. To view the new image in the entire screen, click WorkFile and click Close to
close the image window.

Opening and Closing Existing WorkFiles
You can save your control point list and a reference to the image in a WorkFile.

To Open an Existing WorkFile
Use the following steps to open an existing WorkFile.
1. Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile.
2. Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Open to load
the image.
The registered image and the points you created display in the Image Window
on the left side of your screen. You are now in the Register mode and the
Point Box displays your point information.

293

XMap User Guide

To Close a WorkFile
Use the following steps to close a WorkFile.
1. Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile.
2. Click Close.
The image window closes and the registration/control point values are
cleared.

Registering an Image
You can register any image to a map by placing control points on both the imported
image and the (previously registered) map.
Note Registration is the process by which you identify matching locations (control
points) on the image and the referenced map.

To Register an Image
Use the following steps to register an image.
1. Locate an area within the source raster image or vector image on your map
window to which you want to register. Click the ImageReg tab and then click
WorkFile.
Note The source raster can be a base map, aerial photo, or satellite image
that has been previously registered.
2. Click Load Image to open the Open File dialog box.
3. Select the image file you want to register from its directory and click Open.
The source image loads and the Image Window displays on the left side of the
screen and the map window is on the right. You are now in Register mode.
4. Select a magnification percentage from the Magnify drop-down box or type a
magnification percentage to increase/decrease magnification and get an
overall view of the image area.
Note You can also increase/decrease the magnification of your source image
using drag and zoom functionality or the Page Down and Page Up keys on
your keyboard — press Page Down to zoom in or press Page Up to zoom out.
5. Optional. Move your cursor to the edge of the image window until a white
hand displays. Drag the hand to move the map in that direction or click on
the image area to center the image on the point clicked.
6. Optional. To aid with readability of the image in the Image Window, click the
Rotate Left tool

to rotate the image left. Click the Rotate Right tool

to rotate the image right.
7. Click within the map window on the right to center the source or base map on
the point clicked. You should enter both the image window and the map
window on the same area for registration.
8. Select a solution from the Solution drop-down list.
•

Affine
Use this transform to correct an image that appears sheared; parallel
lines are acceptable, but lines that should be perpendicular are not.
Use the control point tool to associate points on the layer to register
(left window) with corresponding points on the primary map (right
window). Three control points are required.

294

Registering Images
•

Bilinear
Use this transform to correct an image that appears tilted so that lines
that should be parallel appear to converge; for example, if the data is
in a conic projection. Use the control point tool to associate points on
the layer to register (left window) with corresponding points on the
primary map (right window). Two control points are required at or
near opposite corners of the dataset.

•

Polynomial 2d Order
Use this transform when objects in the image appear curved, such as
when a page is scanned from a bound book near the binding. Use the
control point tool to associate points on the layer to register (left
window) with corresponding points on the primary map (right
window). At least three control points are required. Undesirable
interpolation effects are likely for data points that fall outside the
cluster of control points. Consider placing control points around the
border of the data to register, then adding interior points.

•

Polynomial 3d Order
Use this transform when the image to register contains a more
complex curve. Use the control point tool to associate points on the
layer to register (left window) with corresponding points on the
primary map (right window). At least 10 control points are required.
Undesirable interpolation effects are likely for data points that fall
outside the cluster of control points. Consider placing control points
around the border of the data to register, then adding interior points.
Depending on how the layer to register is distorted, the control points
may define a solution with more curves than required to correct the
distortion. If this occurs, consider using the second order polynomial
or triangulated transform.

9. Click in the image window to place a point.
A point displays on the image with a label for the point number (the label
"Point" with a number is the default label).
Note For helpful hints on placing points, see Hints for Placing Points.
10. Move your cursor to the map window. Center the cursor over the same
intersection location you chose in the image window and click that same point
in the map window.
OR
If you know the coordinates for the intersection point in the map window,
enter the latitude and longitude numbers in the Latitude and Longitude
fields for the current point.
11. Repeat steps 9–10 for each additional point, evenly distributing points
throughout the image. The number of points that are required varies
depending on the solution you chose in step 8.
12. Optional. If you want to register a portion of the image, click the Crop tool
and draw a polygon around the area you want to crop out of the image.
13. Optional. If you want to make an area in your image transparent, click the
to switch to the transparent image mode. Then
Transparency button
click the area within the image that you want to make transparent when
displayed on the map. To alter the tolerance of the transparency, select

295

XMap User Guide
Normal, Sharp, or Broad from the drop-down list.
Notes
•

To reduce 24-bit images to 8-bit, click the Reduce button.

•

To modify the transparency color that displays in the image window,
select a color from the drop-down list to the right of the transparency
button.

14. Click WorkFile.
Note The WorkFile contains the registration points and a reference to the
source image file. WorkFiles are saved in C:\...\DeLorme Docs\WorkFiles.
15. Change the WorkFile name in the WorkFile text box.
16. Click Save.
The WorkFile is available in the table in the WorkFile subtab.
Tips
•

Magnify the image in the image window and zoom in on the map in the map
window until image and source are approximately the same viewing
resolution. For example, zoom in on the source map in the map window to a
street that appears to be about an inch in length on your screen. Now, adjust
the magnification of the image in the image window until the same street is
also about an inch in length on the screen. If your images or maps appear too
pixilated, decrease magnification on the left and zoom out on the right.

•

Clear the Link to Map check box to pan and zoom the map window without
affecting the map center of data zoom level of the image window.

•

Select the Enable check box to preview the map features which were not
made transparent.

•

To undo/redo a transparency selection, click the Undo tool

or Redo

tool. Click Reset to clear all transparency edits to the image.

Modifying Existing WorkFiles
You can modify an existing image by adding or deleting points.

To Modify an Existing WorkFile
Use the following steps to modify an existing WorkFile.
1. Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile.
2. Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Open to load
the image.
The registered image and the points you created display in the image window
on the left side of the screen. You are now in Register mode and the Point Box
displays your point information.
3. Modify the points as appropriate. To change a specific point, enter new
coordinate information by clicking and typing in the point information boxes in
the Point Box or click the point number in the Point Box and then click the
highlighted point in the image or map window and drag it to a new location.
Note If you must move the same point in each window, the best method is
to delete that point and then add a new point. To delete a point, click it in the
Point Box and then click Delete.
4. Click Done when edits are complete.
5. Click WorkFile.
296

Registering Images
6. Change the WorkFile name in the WorkFile text box if you want to save your
previous point information.
7. Click Save.

Deleting an Existing WorkFile
To Delete an Existing WorkFile
Use the following steps to delete an existing WorkFile.
1. Click the ImageReg tab and then click WorkFile.
2. Select an existing WorkFile in the WorkFile directory and click Delete.
The workfile is deleted from the WorkFile directory.
3. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
The WorkFile is deleted from the WorkFile directory.
Note The image to which it refers is not deleted.

Hints for Placing Points
Place control points in locations where it is easy to distinguish the same location on
both the image and the map. For example, you might find it helpful to place control
points at survey points, street intersections, or other point features.
It is also important to remember that the more corresponding control points you
place on your image and map, the better. A large number of control points should
only increase the accuracy of your resulting map.
Note Collinear points should be avoided. A small number of points in a line will not
produce a good solution. See example below.

To Place Control Points on an Image With Flat Terrain

297

XMap User Guide
If your image covers relatively flat terrain
and/or has some distortion, the easiest
method for registering an image on a map
is to find four matching points on the image
and the map. These four matching points
can be on or near the four corners of the
image and base map (see example to the
right). Selecting matching points ties the
image you are registering to the map and
warps it accordingly. The resulting map will
be the most accurate in areas where the
points were more closely matched.
Note If your image covers a large area,
you may want to add some matching points
in the center of the image and map.

To Place Control Points on a Distorted Image and/or an Image With
Varied Terrain
If your image is distorted or covers terrain
with varied elevation, the best method for
registering your image to the map is to
have control points distributed evenly
around the image and the map (see
example to the right).
Note For this method, it is preferable, but
not essential, for the points to be evenly
spaced.

298

Profiling Linear Objects
Creating a Profile
You can use the Profile tab to create elevation graphs of linear objects on the map.
Linear objects can be part of the map or part of a draw layer. A linear object is
profiled from one end of the line to the other. The profile includes statistical data;
you can determine which available data you want to display. You can also create a
profile that includes user data from some athletic devices from Timex and Suunto.
The list below includes samples of map features and draw objects that you can
profile.
•

Routes (created using the
Route tab)

•
•
•
•
•
•

Trails
Roads
Boundaries
Railroads
Power lines

•
•

Streams

•
•
•
•

Lines (created using the Draw tab)

Tracks (created using the Draw tab or imported from
a GPS device)
Arcs (created using the Draw tab)
Splines (created using the Draw tab)
Measure Lines (created with the Measure tool)

Pipelines

Notes

•

You can create profiles only on 2-D maps; however, with split-screen
functionality, you can view the highlight of the profiled object on a 3-D map.

•

To profile an object or route at any time, right-click the item and click
Profile.

•

The Profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to
profile.

•

Double-click a location on the Profile graph to center the map on the location
without changing the data zoom level.

•

The highlighted profile object on the map is retained if you go to another tab
and then return to the Profile tab. The selected object is not retained between
program sessions.

To view all the features available on the Profile tab, click the More button
near the bottom of the tab to expand the view.

To Create a Profile
Use the following steps to create a profile.
1. Center your map on the area with the linear object you want to profile.
OR
Center the route you want to profile on the map.
2. Click the Profile button
it.

on the Profile tab or on the toolbar to activate

3. Move your pointer over the 2-D map. The pointer changes from

when it passes over an object that you can profile.
299

XMap User Guide
4. Select a linear object or route on the map to generate its profile. When you
select the object, it is highlighted and the Profile graph displays in the Profile
tab area.
5. Move your pointer along the elevation profile in the Profile graph.
The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along the top
of the terrain profile. These lines indicate the elevation and distance of the
particular location. A small crosshair follows along the corresponding object
on the map. An Info box displays the profile statistics and user data (see
Statistical Data and User Profile Data for more information).

To Profile Multiple Linear Objects
•

To profile multiple linear objects, press the SHIFT key on the keyboard while
clicking the items you want to profile. Thin vertical dashed lines display in the
Profile graph indicating the beginning and end of each chosen segment.

•

To make it easier to profile multiple linear objects, use the Draw tab to join
them.

•

To clear one of the multiple objects you have profiled, press the CTRL key on
your keyboard while clicking the profiled object on the map.

Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs
The Profile tab lets you view two profile elevation graphs; the profile graph and the
overview profile graph.

To View the Profile Graph

The profile graph automatically displays when you select an object to profile. It
shows a two-dimensional image of the elevation associated with the selected object.
Distance and elevation are indicated below and to the left of the graph respectively.
Use the following steps to view a profile graph.
1. Create a profile of an object or route. For more information see Creating a
Profile.
2. Move your cursor along the elevation profile in the profile graph.

300

•

The intersection of the vertical and horizontal blue lines travels along
the top of the terrain profile. These lines indicate the height and
distance of the particular location as you move along the graph.

•

As you move your cursor along the graph, an info box provides
statistical data about the profile, such as coordinates, elevation, grade,
and so on. See Statistical Data for more information about this data. If
you downloaded an object with supported profile data, the info box
may also include additional data (for example, speed). See User Profile
Data for more information.

Profiling Linear Objects
•

As you move your cursor along the profile graph, a small crosshair
follows along the corresponding object on the map.

3. Click the More button
view.

near the bottom of the tab area to expand the

4. If you generate a profile from a route you have created, select the Show
Text check box to view route numbers, road names, waypoint numbers, and
their associated waypoint names.
Notes The route displays in the profile graph with small markers indicating
the start and finish for the route as well as any waypoints it contains.
5. If the profile object contains additional supported data, such as that
downloaded from an athletic device, a toolbar appears above the graph. See
User Profile Data for more information about viewing and managing this data.
6. View the current statistical information options you have selected to the right
of the profile graph. See Statistical Data for more information about adding,
removing, and reordering the statistics.

Tips
•

You can also profile an object or route on the map by right-clicking the item
and then clicking Profile.

•

To view your object's profile in the opposite direction, click the Reverse
button

The profile order flips horizontally.

•

The profile graph automatically updates when you select a new object to
profile.

•

Double-click a location on the profile graph to center the map on the location
without changing the data zoom level.
OR
Right-click the place on the graph you want to see on the map and click Go
To.

301

XMap User Guide

To View the Overview Profile Graph

Use the following steps to view the overview profile graph.
1. Click More
.
The overview profile graph displays at the bottom of the screen—it is a
smaller version of the main profile graph.
2. To zoom in to a specific part of the profile, place the cursor over one of the
horizontal bars on either side of the overview profile graph. When the pointer
changes to a horizontal arrow, drag the bar towards the center of the
overview profile graph.
•

When you move the bars, the main profile graph adjusts to show the
area within the borders and the right and left vertical scales adjust to
fit the data you are viewing. The area you are not viewing in the main
graph is highlighted with grey in the overview graph.

•

When you hover your cursor over the area within the bars, the cursor
changes to a hand. Left-click to grab the area and drag it horizontally
to reposition the border focus area or to center the selection on that
point.

3. To hide the overview profile graph, click Less

Statistical Data
You can manage the type of statistical data you want to view for a profile graph.
The profile statistic options display to the right of the profile graph. The applicable
selected options display in the info box when move your cursor along the profile
graph. An info box can also contain user data that you add to the mapping
program—see User Profile Data for more information.

To View Your Current Options
To view all options you currently have selected, click the More button
the bottom of the Profile tab to expand your view.

302

near

Profiling Linear Objects

To Remove an Option
Use the following steps to remove an option from the statistics list.
1. Move your cursor over the statistic you want to delete.
An X appears in the cell.
2. Click the X to remove the option.

To Add an Option
When one or more options have been removed, use the following steps to made
additions to the statistics list.
1. Move your cursor over Click to add statistics and click.
A list of available statistic options opens.
2. Click an option to add it.
3. Repeat steps 1-2 to add more options.

303

XMap User Guide
This table describes the statistic options available in the statistic list and/or the
profile info box. List options are bold.
Statistical
Data Option

Description

Linear
Distance*

The flat distance of the profile. Does not take elevation into
account.

Terrain
Distance*

The 3-D distance of the profile accounting for elevation rise
and descent.

Climbing
Distance*

The total distance where the terrain is uphill.

Descending
Distance*

The total distance where the terrain is downhill.

Current
Elevation

The elevation above sea level at a specific point.

Elevation
Gain*

The difference in elevation from the start of the profile to the
end of the profile.

Climbing
Elevation

The amount of ascending vertical distance.

Descending
Elevation*

The amount of descending vertical distance.

Grade

Actually percent grade, rise over run (100 x (rise/run)). For
example, 6 means that for every 100 ft, you gain 6 ft in
elevation.

Average
Grade*

Average of the grade from the start to the current cursor
position (or finish).

Minimum
Elevation

The elevation of the lowest point on a profile.

Maximum
Elevation

The elevation of the highest point on a profile.

Zone**

A named grid system of any of the UTM/UPS, MGRS, or State
Plane coordinate systems used as a basis for coordinate
display. For example, UTM zone 19 specifies the six-degree
swath between longitude 66W to 72W and running from 84S
to 80N. Another example is zone ME-W in the State Plane
coordinate system, which specifies an area that covers the
western half of Maine. When using one these coordinate
systems, the current zone and coordinates east and north (the
eastings and northings) of the zone origin are displayed.

Easting**

The measure of a position relative to the x-axis (horizontal) of
a grid system.

Northing**

The measure of a position relative to the y-axis (vertical) of a
grid system.

304

Profiling Linear Objects
Latitude***

The measure of a position on the earth's surface north or
south of the equator in degrees, minutes, and seconds.
Defined as the angle from the equator's horizontal plane
perpendicular to the polar axis. Latitude is measured in
degrees minutes and seconds. All lines of latitude are parallel
and are often referred to as parallels.

Longitude***

The measure of a position on the surface of the earth east or
west of the Prime Meridian in degrees, minutes, and seconds.
Defined as the angle from the vertical plane running through
the polar axis and the prime meridian. Longitude is measured
in degrees minutes and seconds. All lines of longitude meet at
the poles and are often referred to as meridians.

*Calculated from the start of the profile to the current cursor position. If the cursor is not in the profile
area, then the value is calculated from the start of the profile to the end of the profile.
**This statistical information is available only if UTM/UPS, SPCS, USNG, or MGRS is selected as the
coordinate system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.
***This statistical information is available only if a latitude/longitude format is selected as the coordinate
system in the Display tab of the Options dialog box.

Note For information on manually setting your minimum and maximum elevation,
see Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation.

Manually Setting Minimum and Maximum Elevation
You can manually set a maximum or minimum elevation to display in your profile
graph.

To Manually Adjust Minimum and Maximum Elevation
Use the following steps to manually adjust minimum and maximum elevation.
1. Create a profile.
2. Click the More button

3. To control the maximum height displayed on the profile graph, under Manual
Scale, select the Max Elev check box and type the maximum height in the
text box.
This adjusts the top end of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not
display heights above the defined height.
4. To control the minimum height displayed on the profile graph, under Manual
Scale, select the Min Elev check box and type the minimum height in the
text box.
This adjusts the base level of the vertical scale of the profile graph to not
display heights below the height specified.
Note Distance displays in the units you set in the Options dialog box. For more
information, see Setting Units of Measure Preferences.

305

XMap User Guide

Clearing a Profile
Once you select an object to profile, you can clear the highlighted feature from the
map and the profile graphs from the Profile tab.

To Clear a Profile
Use one of the options below to clear the map object highlight and the currently
displaying Profile graph.
•

on the Profile tab.

Click the Clear button
OR

•

Press the CTRL key on your keyboard while clicking a profiled object on the
map.
OR

•

Right-click the profiled object and click Clear Profile.

User Profile Data
User profile data is data you add to a DeLorme mapping program. You can attach it
to a track or .gpl file using GeoTagger or use the Exchange Wizard to download a
track that contains the data from a device that records GPS data, such as some
athletic devices from Timex and Suunto or an Earthmate PN-Series GPS device.

Types of Data
You can profile several types of data. When you profile a track or a .gpl file that
includes the data, the profile graph displays a colored line for each type of data. The
types of data, their scales, and default graph colors (modifiable) are:
Data Type

Default
Color

Map Elevation

Black

Default type - from map
topographic data

Track Elevation

Scale
ft, mi, m, or km
Matches the units set on the Display tab in
the Options dialog box.

Green

ft, mi, m, or km
Matches the units set on the Display tab in
the Options dialog box.

Speed

Blue

fps, mph, mps, or kmh
Matches the units set on the Display tab in
the Options dialog box.

Pedal Cadence

Purple

rps, rpm, rph
Depends on data.

Heart Rate

Red

Temperature

Maroon

bpm
°F or °C
Depends on data.

306

Profiling Linear Objects

To View Information for a Specific Data Type
When you have multiple types of user data, you can choose which type to focus on
using the "follow" function.
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently
followed data type displays to the right of the graph.
2. To follow a different data type:
•

In the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type and click Follow.
OR

•

Right-click the line for the data type on the graph, point to Follow in
the menu, and click the data type.

3. Move your cursor along the data profile in the profile graph to view the data
in the info box. For more information about viewing the profile graph, see
Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs.

To Hide or Show a Specific Data Type
You can hide and show data on the profile graph.
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently
followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph.
2. To hide or show a data type, on the toolbar, click the data type button to
toggle it on or off.

To Change the User Data Type Color
You can change the user data type default colors or change from a user-defined color
back to the default.
1. Profile a track with user data.
The data types display in the profile toolbar. The scale for the currently
followed data type displays to the right of the profile graph.
2. To change the default data type color:
3. To a new color—on the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type, click
Choose Color, and select a new color in the color dialog box.
OR
4. To the default color—on the toolbar, click the arrow next to the data type and
click Use Default Color.

307

Viewing Your Map in 3-D
Viewing a 3-D Map
On the 3-D tab, you can view your map data in 3-D and change the look of your 3-D
map using the tools on the tab or keyboard shortcuts.
Notes
•

You can view 3-D maps only in the left (secondary) map window; however, you
can expand the left map window to fit the entire map area. For more
information, see Resizing the Map and Tab Areas.

•

You can customize how a 3-D map displays with the 3-D tab in the Options
dialog box. For more information, see Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences.

•

The 3-D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme is for 3-D use. When you select
the scheme, you can use keyboard shortcuts to perform all of the same functions
that you can complete on the 3-D tab. For more information, see Flying Over a
3-D Map.

•

If the 3-D tab does not work properly, it may be because you have turned off
hardware acceleration in your display settings. To check you hardware
acceleration status, view the Advanced Display Settings in the Windows Control
Panel.

To View a Map in 3-D
Use the following steps to view a 3-D map.
1. Expose the left map window using the map resize
from the drop-down list at the top of the left map
A progress bar displays in the lower-left corner of
drawing status.
OR
Click the 3-D tab and then click Show 3-D.
A progress bar displays in the lower-left corner of
drawing status.

tool and then select 3-D
window.
the map to display the 3-D

the map to display the 3-D

2. On the 3-D tab, under 3-D View, select the viewing mode.
The top option is an Outside-looking-in perspective. This view focuses
on the center of the map — this allows you to spin the map around the center
point.
The bottom option is an Inside-looking-out perspective. This view is
from the center of the map — this allows you to spin the map around you.
3. Use the Rotate controls to rotate the 3-D map to the new position.
The reference arrow points to the direction that you will be viewing on the
map, which varies depending on the 3-D View selection you made in step 2).
The degree of map rotation displays above the Rotate arrows. You can rotate
the 3-D map using one of the following methods:
•

Press and hold the left arrow button to rotate the map clockwise.

•

Press and hold the right arrow button to rotate the map counterclockwise.

•

Drag the square map in the Rotate graphic to the new position.

308

Viewing Your Map in 3-D
•

Click anywhere on the square map in the Rotate graphic to move the
map in that direction.

•

Click a directional letter (N, S, W, or E) to rotate the map in that
direction.

•

Click the brown area that surrounds the square map to rotate the map
in that direction.

4. Use the Pitch controls to change the pitch of the 3-D map.
The pitch range depends on the terrain. 90° looks straight up, -90° looks
straight down, and 0° is horizontal.
You can control the pitch using one of the following methods:
•

Press and hold the up arrow to increase the pitch.

•

Press and hold the down arrow to decrease the pitch.

•

Drag the reference arrow to the new pitch.

•

Click anywhere on the graphic to update the pitch.

5. If you selected the Outside-looking-in perspective, you can adjust the
distance from the map center using the Distance up/down buttons, by
clicking the Distance graphic at the distance you want or by dragging the
numeric distance display in the Distance graphic.
OR
If you selected the Inside-looking-out perspective, you can adjust the
elevation of the view over the 3-D map using the Elevation up/down
buttons, by clicking the Elevation graphic at the elevation, or by dragging
the numeric elevation display in the Elevation graphic.
Note Elevation indicates the height above terrain, not the height above sea
level.
6. To pan the 3-D map and simulate a fly-over, drag the circle in the Pan
graphic in the direction you want.
7. Click Hide 3-D when finished.
The map changes to a 2-D view.
OR
Select 2-D from the drop-down list at the top of the left map window when
finished.
Tips
•

When the 3-D map window is open, you can use the grab and pan tool on the
toolbar, Compass Rose navigation tools, zoom tools, and/or the overview map
window to adjust the 3-D map.

•

Scroll along the edges of the 2-D map or pan with the navigation tools to
redraw the 2-D background; the 3-D map redraws with the new map center.

•

Click a point on the 3-D map to center the map on that point.

•

When you move your cursor on the right map, a 3-D cursor echoes that
movement on the left map.

Flying Over a 3-D Map
You can simulate flying over the 3-D terrain. Access these features using the Pan
feature in the 3-D tab or by activating the 3-D Navigation keyboard shortcut scheme.

To Fly Over a 3-D Map Using Keyboard Shortcuts
Use the following steps to fly over a 3-D map using keyboard shortcuts.

309

XMap User Guide
1. View a map in 3-D.
2. Click the Options button
Keyboard Shortcuts tab.
OR

on the toolbar and then click the

Click the 3-D tab, click the Options button
Keyboard Shortcuts tab.

, and then click the

3. Select 3-D Navigation (DeLorme Scheme) from the Scheme drop-down
list.
4. Click OK to activate the selected scheme.
5. To rotate the map to the right, press ALT+D on your keyboard.
OR
To rotate the map to the left, press ALT+A on your keyboard.
6. To increase the pitch, press ALT+W on your keyboard.
OR
To decrease the pitch, press ALT+S on your keyboard.
7. To increase the distance/elevation, press ALT+Page Up on your keyboard .
OR
To decrease the distance/elevation, press ALT+Page Down on your keyboard.
8. To pan the map to the right, press ALT+Right (the right arrow) on your
keyboard.
OR
To pan the map to the left, press ALT+Left on your keyboard.
9. To pan the map forward, press ALT+Up on your keyboard.
OR
To pan the map backward, press ALT+Down on your keyboard.

To Fly Over a 3-D Map Using the Pan Tool
Use the following steps to fly over a 3-D map.
1. View a map in 3-D.
2. Click the 3-D tab to open it and drag the circle in the Pan graphic in the
direction to view.

Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences
Use the 3-D tab in the Options dialog box to customize your 3-D maps with
increased vertical exaggeration, billboards, a GPS tracking cursor type, and more.

To Set Your 3-D Map Preferences
Use the following steps to set your 3-D map preferences.
310

Viewing Your Map in 3-D

on the toolbar and then click Options.
1. Click the Options button
Then, click the 3-D tab. (You may have to scroll the tab area to see the 3-D
tab.)
OR
Click the 3-D tab to open it and click the Options button

•

If you want the right map to rotate/pan in the same direction as the
left map, select the Link 2-D and 3-D Map Rotation check box. The
2-D map updates after the 3-D map finishes panning/rotating.
Note If you do not select this check box, you can use the data zoom
level tools above the left map window to adjust the zoom level of the
3-D map.

•

If you want to view billboards on your 3-D map, select the Show
Billboards check box.
Note If you receive a message saying that 3-D billboards cannot be
displayed, ensure that you have a 32 MB video card with the latest
drivers and that it supports DirectX and transparencies.

•

To select the cursor graphic that you want to display on the 3-D map
when GPS tracking, select the symbol type from the GPS Tracking
Cursor drop-down list.

•

To select a vertical exaggeration value, click one of the vertical
exaggeration graphics (from left to right—flat, 1x, 2x, 4x, or 8x).

2. Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog
box.

311

Routing
Creating a Route
You can create a road, trail, or direct route using the Route tab, right-click feature,
or the toolbar. Once you create a route, you can use the Route tab to view route
directions, edit a route, and display routes on a map.
Routes are calculated using the default routing preferences. To show/remove routing
MapNotes, waypoint labels, state borders, and route vias, enable/disable GPS voice
navigation, or to change the default speed, road type, or routing preference, see
Setting Your Routing Preferences.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.
Important If you have only the left map window open, the route start, finish, via,
and stop icons in the Route tab and on toolbar are grayed out. To activate the
options, use the map resize tool to expose the right map window.
See also, the Creating a Route tutorial in the application’s Help.

To Create a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click New/Edit (if it is not already selected).
2. Click File, click New, and then type the name for your route in the Name
text box.
and then click the point on the map where you want
3. Click the Start tool
to begin your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your start location, select Start From
Address Book from the Start drop-down list, click to select an Address Book
entry, and then click OK.
OR
To use your current GPS position as your start location, select Start From
GPS Location from the Start drop-down list.
OR
Type your start location in the Start drop-down text box. You can type the
name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state
OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
and then click the spot on the map where you want
4. Click the Finish tool
to end your route.
OR
To use an address book entry as your finish location, select Finish From
Address Book from the Finish drop-down list, click to select an Address
Book entry, and then click OK.
OR
Type your finish location in the Finish drop-down text box. You can type in

312

Routing
the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or address.
Notes
An address must be in one of the following formats: street address, city, state
OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find tab)
must be selected to search for address book contact names.
5. Select a calculation method — the program adjusts the default calculation
values based on your selection:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a
vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are
on foot.
6. Select a route type (Road-Shortest, Road-Quickest, Trail, or Direct) from
the drop-down list.
7. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate.
If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you typed, a
dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through the list of
search results until you find the one you want to locate, click the item to
select it, and then click OK.
8. Click Directions to view the route directions.
AND/OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
AND/OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the
current route.

To Create a Route Using the Right-click Function
Use the following steps to create a route.
1. Right-click the map location where you want to begin your route, point to
Create Route, and click Set as Start.
2. Right-click the map location where you want to end your route, point to
Create Route, and click Set as Finish.
3. If the route doesn't automatically calculate, right-click the route, point to
Manage Route, and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road
Shortest, Calculate Trail, or Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you
typed, a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through
the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate, click the
item to select it, and then click OK.
4. Optional. Click the Route tab. Then click the Directions subtab to view the
route directions, the Advanced subtab to display advanced routing options,
Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route, or Back on
Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the current route.

To Create a Route Using the Toolbar
Click here to view the steps for creating a route using the toolbar.

313

XMap User Guide

Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias
You can add or insert stops or vias in any route you create.
•

A stop is a location along a route where you want to stop and then proceed
from.

•

A via is a point on the map that you want your route to go through. You can
use stops and vias to route you through a particular place or along a
particular road.

•

Add stops or vias to follow a route in a particular order.

•

Insert stops or vias to arrange them geographically in the route.

Tips
•

Turn off Auto Calculate when you are adding many stops and vias.

•

Use Add instead of Insert when your start and finish are at the same place.

•

Don't place the finish point until you add all your stops and vias.

•

Place vias near the beginning of the road or trail you want to use.

•

When you calculate the route, if it goes to a via and then returns to the
original path, insert another via toward the end of that road (where you want
to turn onto the next road) to force it to use that road.

•

When using a road as a stop or via, zoom in to ensure you select the correct
road. The selected road segment is highlighted when you click it.

Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Add a Stop or Via To Your Route
The Add Stop/Via function adds stops and vias in the order you add them to the
route. Use the following steps to add a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to
(if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool
(if you are
the Stop tool
adding a via) is labeled Add. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button and
select Add.
3. To add a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click the
location on the map.
OR
•

To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down
list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.

•

To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.

•

314

Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box

Routing
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or
address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats:
street address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find
tab) must be selected to search for address book contact names.
•

Right-click the map to add a last stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to add the last stop or via.
2. Point to CreateRoute, and then click Add as Last Stop or
Add as Last Via.

•

Use the toolbar to add a stop or via.

2. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route
to include the stop or via.
OR
on the toolbar.
Click the Calculate button
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage
Route, and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road Shortest,
Calculate Trail, or Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you
typed, a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through
the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate, click the
item to select it, and then click OK.
3. Click Directions to view the route directions.
AND/OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
AND/OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
AND/OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a stop to the
current route.

To Insert a Stop or Via Into Your Route
The Insert Stop/Via function arranges stops/vias geographically in the route. Use the
following steps to insert a stop or via to your route.
1. Create a route.
2. In the New/Edit dialog area in the Route tab, make sure the button next to
(if you are adding a stop) or the Via tool
(if you are
the Stop tool
adding a via) is labeled Insert. If it is not, click the arrow next to the button
and select Insert.
3. To insert a stop or via to the route, click the Stop or Via tool and then click
the location on the map.
OR
•

To use an address book entry as your stop or via location
1. Select Stop From Address Book from the Stop drop-down
list.
OR
Select Via From Address Book from the Via drop-down list.

315

XMap User Guide
2. Select an Address Book entry, and then click OK.
•

To use your current GPS position as your stop or via location
Select Stop at GPS Location from the Stop drop-down list.
OR
Select Via at GPS Location from the Via drop-down list.

•

Type the stop or via location in the Stop or Via text box
Type the name of an address book contact, user-added waypoint, or
address.
If you type an address, it must be in one of the following formats:
street address, city, state OR street address, ZIP/Postal Code.
The Book check box (underneath the Address Book buttons in the Find
tab) must be selected to search for address book contact names.

•

Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via
1. Right-click the map where you want to insert the stop or via.
2. Point to CreateRoute, and then click Insert Stop or Insert
Via.

•

Use the toolbar to insert a stop or via.

3. If the Auto check box is not selected, click Calculate to recalculate your route
to include the stop or via.
OR
on the toolbar.
Click the Calculate button
OR
If the Auto check box is not selected, right-click the route, point to Manage
Route, and click Calculate Road Quickest, Calculate Road Shortest,
Calculate Trail, or Calculate Direct.
Note If the program is unable to find an exact match for the item that you
typed, a dialog box opens with a list of the closest matches. Scroll through
the list of search results until you find the one you want to locate, click the
item to select it, and then click OK.
4. Click Directions to view the route directions.
AND/OR
Click Advanced to display the advanced routing options.
AND/OR
Click Plan Trip to assign end of day or fuel breaks to your route.
AND/OR
Click Back on Track to add your current GPS position as a via to the current
route.

Changing the Routing Method
You can change your routing calculation method at any time. You may need to do
this to update your routing preferences.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Change the Route Calculation Method
1. From the Route tab, click the New/Edit subtab.

316

Routing
2. Select a calculation method:
Driving–Use this method to calculate the route when you are driving a
vehicle.
Cycling–Use this method to calculate a bicycle route.
Walking/running–Use this method to calculate routes when you are
on foot.
3. Select a route type (Road-Shortest, Road-Quickest, Trail, or Direct) from
the drop-down list.

Changing the Properties of a Stop Along Your Route
You can change the properties of a stop along your route by using the Stop Prefs
function in the Advanced sub-tab under Route.

To Change the Properties of a Stop
Use the following steps to change the properties of a stop.
1. Click the Route tab and then click Advanced.
2. Click a stop from the waypoint list and then click Stop Prefs.
The Stop Time Preferences dialog box opens.
3. To designate the stop as an end of day stop, select the End of Day check
box, click Apply, and then click Done.
AND/OR
To designate the stop as a fuel break, select the Fuel check box, click Apply,
select the Duration check box, select the duration of the fuel break using the
Hrs and Mins drop-down lists, and then click Done.
Note It is not necessary to allocate a fuel stop duration.

Viewing Route Directions
After you create a route, you can view the accompanying route directions.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To View the Route Directions
Use the following steps to view the route directions.
1. Click the Route tab and then click Directions to open the Route Directions
dialog area.
The list of routes you have created display in the route list on the left. A
selected check box indicates the route is displaying on the map.
2. Click a route to select and highlight it.
OR
Double-click a route to center it on the map.
3. The route directions for the selected route display in the right window. Adjust
the size of the tab area to expand the view.
Tip Click the header of a column to open a menu from which you can select
the type of information you want to display in each column.

317

XMap User Guide
4. Click a leg to select it and then click Go To to center the map on the leg.
OR
Double-click a leg to center the map on the leg.
Tip When tracking with a GPS receiver, select the GPS Track check box to follow
along with the route directions in real time as you travel. Click Show Turns to
display the current distance and time to your finish.

Avoiding a Specified Area When Routing
If you know you will be travelling in an area that is under construction or is a highlypopulated area with a lot of traffic congestion, you can draw a
circle/rectangle/polygon over that area to avoid it when you calculate your route.
You can create multiple regions to avoid.

To Avoid a Specified Area When Routing
Use the following steps to designate an area to avoid when calculating your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Draw tab to open the Draw dialog area.
3. Click and hold the Polygon/Rectangle/Circle tool
hidden options. Select the tool you want to use.

to view its

4. Optional. Select one or more of the following:
•

From the Fill drop-down list, select the fill style you want to apply to
the draw object.

•

Click the fill color button to the right of the Fill drop-down list to select
the color for your fill style.

•

Select an outline style for your draw object from the Outline dropdown list.

•

Click the outline color button to select a color for the outline of your
draw object.

•

Select the width for your draw object outline from the Width dropdown list.

•

Select the Show Measurement check box to display measurement
information for your draw object as your draw it on the map.

5. If you selected the Circle tool, click the location for the circle's center on the
map and drag away from center to set the radius for the circle. Release as
soon as you achieve the radius you want.
The radius of the circle and the coordinates of the circle's center display in the
corresponding text boxes to the right of the circle fill option area.
OR
If you selected the Polygon tool, click the map to enter each point of the
polygon.
OR
If you selected the Rectangle tool, click the location for the rectangle's
upper-left corner on the map and drag away from the corner to set the width,
height, and area for the rectangle. Release as soon as you achieve the size
you want.
and then click the draw object on the map.
6. Click the Select tool
A box displays around the object indicating that it is active.
318

Routing
7. Right-click the draw object, point to Manage Draw, and click Route Avoid.
If the object has no name, it the name "Route Avoid" is visible on the map.
8. If you do not have the Auto Calculate option selected in the Route tab, click
the Route tab and then click Calculate to recalculate your route.
Note To undo your route avoid, click the Select tool in the Draw tab and click the
draw object on the map. Then, press the DELETE key on your keyboard.

Saving Route Directions as Text
You can save your directions and along the way results as a text file.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Save Your Route Directions
Use the following steps to save your directions.
1. Click the Print tab and then click the Route subtab.
If you do not have a route in this project, the Route Options are unavailable.
2. Select the route you want to save from the Name drop-down list.
If the route you want to save is not available in the Name drop-down list, you
may not have the correct project open.
3. Under Options, select Directions or Along the Way.
4. Click the Save button

on the Route tab.

5. To rename the .txt file, type the new name in the File Name text box and
click Save.

Setting Your Routing Preferences
Once you master basic routing, you can customize your routing preferences and
create more advanced routes.
The routing preferences allow you to favor or avoid various road types when
calculating your route. You can also set your speed preferences.
The default settings are based on the calculation method you chose when creating
the route.
To change your route calculation method, see Changing the Routing Methods.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Set Your Routing Preferences
Use the following steps to set your routing preferences.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. Select the route type (Direct, Trail, or Road) from the Route Type dropdown list.
4. From the Road Type drop-down list, select the road type for which to set
preferences.

319

XMap User Guide
5. If you selected Trail or Road as your route type in step 3, select Preferred,
Standard, or Avoid from the Routing Preference drop-down list.
Preferred favors this type of road whenever possible, Standard is the default
level, and Avoid avoids this type of road whenever possible. An avoided road
may be used when no other road is available.
6. In the Speed text box, type your average driving speed for this road type.
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route.
7. If you selected Road as your route type in step 3, type your average driving
speed within an urban area for this road type in the Urban Speed text box.
These speeds are used to compute the travel time for a route. The Urban
Speed text box is available only for road routes.
8. Repeat these steps for each road type.
9. When you are finished setting your road preferences, click Review to display
your settings.
10. In the Route Features list, select the check box for each feature you want to
display:
•

Show Location MapNotes–Displays Location MapNotes with their
coordinate information for each point in your route.

•

Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about your route.

•

Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information
for each waypoint and the finish point of your route.

•

Display Waypoint Labels–Displays start/stop/via/finish labels on the
map when the route is created.

•

Include State Borders–Shows or hides state borders in your route
directions (only available when Road is the selected route type).

•

GPS Voice Navigation–Provides spoken route directions when you
are tracking with a GPS receiver. After initializing, the computer
speaks the directions for the next turn in your route. It repeats the
instructions approximately 90 seconds prior to arriving at the turn.

•

Display Route Vias—Shows or hides your route vias on the map.

11. In the Voice Alert text box, type the amount of time (in seconds) that you
want to elapse before the computer alerts you of your next two turns.
Note Because it may take the computer a while to speak turn information, it
is recommended that you designate at least 60 seconds for the voice alert.
12. Click Done.
Note Click Use Defaults to restore all route preferences and road type preferences
to the default settings.

Editing a Route
You can modify existing routes by:
•

Adding, removing, and rearranging stops and vias.

•

Adjusting your route preferences based on road type.

•

Customizing your route based on your driving style and speed.

•

Reversing a route.

Tips
•

320

Zoom in to set accurate points for your route.

Routing
•

Use the right-click option for routing. Just right-click the route, stop, or via,
point to Manage Route, and click the applicable option.

Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Edit a Route
To edit a route, click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab. Select the
route from the Name drop-down list box. The route becomes active. The following
list describes the edit functions.
•

To change the route name, select the name in the Name text box, type the
new route name, and then press the ENTER key on your keyboard.

•

To change a route point, click the corresponding tool and then click the new
spot on the map.
OR
Select a route point on the map and drag it to the new location on the map.
Note If you try to add a start or finish point to an existing route, the "Would
you like to move your Start location or create a New route?" message opens.
Click New to begin creating a new route. Click Move to move the Start or
Finish point to the last location clicked.

•

To add or insert a stop or via to your route, click the corresponding tool and
then click the spot on the map where you want to add or insert your stop or
via. For more information, see Adding and Inserting Stops and Vias.

•

To rearrange stops and vias, click the point to select it and then click the
Move Up

or Move Down

tools to relocate it in the route.

•

To delete a stop or via, select the stop or via in the route list and then click
the Delete button.

•

To change a stop to a via, select the stop and click Make Via. To change a
via to a stop, select the via and click Make Stop.

•

Click Reverse Rte to reverse the order of all of the points in the route.

•

Click Calculate if the Auto check box is not selected in the New/Edit subtab.

•

Click Stop Prefs to make a stop in your route a fuel or end of day stop. For
more information, see Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences.

Editing Roads
You can change the characteristics of any road on a map to:
•

Two Way

•

One Way N or E

•

No Left Turn N or E

•

No Right Turn N or E

•

No Way

•

One Way S or W

•

No Left Turn S or W

•

No Right Turn S or W

321

XMap User Guide

To Edit a Road
Use the following steps to edit a road.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Edit Roads.
3. Select the Display Road Edits check box to show existing road edits on the
map.
4. Click the Select tool

and select the road on the map you want to edit.

5. Select a direction.
•

If you select Two Way, you can also select No Left Turn No Right Turn.

•

If you select One Way, you can also select No Left Turn or No Right Turn.

•

If you select No Way, you cannot select any other options.

Note Click Default to change the road properties to the default settings.
Click Clear All Edits to remove all road options and return all road properties
to their default settings.
6. Click Done.

Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote
The easiest way to label your route points (start, stop, via, and finish) with a
MapNote is to use the Route Preferences section of the Route tab.
If you select more than one option, each category of information (location,
comments, and/or summary) displays in the same MapNote.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Label a Route Point with a MapNote
Use the following steps to label a route point with a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click Route Prefs to display the Route Preferences dialog area.
3. Under Route Features, select the check box next to each MapNote you want
to display at your route points:
•

Show Location MapNotes–Displays the coordinate information for each
point in your route.

•

Show Comments MapNotes–Displays comments about each point of the
route as specified in the Route Advanced subtab.
To modify route comments, click the Route tab, click the Advanced
subtab, select the route, and then click in the Comments column twice
(do not double click) next to the route point you want to create a
comment for. The information you type in the Comments field for that
point is placed in a Comments MapNote when you selected to show it on
the map.

•

Show Summary MapNotes–Displays time and distance information for
each point in your route.

4. Click Done.

322

Routing

Moving Route MapNotes
You can move route MapNotes. The text box moves, but the point stays on the map
location.
To show/delete route MapNotes, see Setting Your Routing Preferences.
To move and delete draw Map Notes, see Moving and Deleting Draw MapNotes.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Move a Route MapNote
Use the following steps to move a MapNote.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Advanced subtab.
2. Click the Move Route MapNotes button

3. Click the MapNote to select it.
4. Drag the text box to the new location.

Displaying and Centering Routes on the Map
All the routes you create are automatically displayed. The active route displays as a
gold line outlined in red. Each inactive route displays as a dashed, orange line
outlined in green. You can choose to display only certain routes without deleting
them from the map.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Display a Route on the Map
Use the following steps to display a hidden route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, select the check box next to the route you want to
display.
OR
To center the map on the route, double-click the route name.

To Hide a Route from the Map
Use the following steps to hide a route from view on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.
2. In the route list on the left, clear the check box next to each route you want
to hide from view on the map.
OR
Right-click the route you want to clear from the map view, point to Manage
Route, and then click Hide Route.

To Center the Map on a Route
Use the following steps to center a route on the map.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the Directions subtab.

323

XMap User Guide
2. Double-click the route in the route list on the left.
Tip To center a route that is not in the current map view, click the Route tab, click
the New/Edit subtab, and select the route from the Name drop-down list.

Saving a Route
The route in memory is retained as you create it. You are prompted to save your
route when you create a new project or exit the program.
•

Creating a new project–When you click File/New in the Files dialog area on
the MapData tab, you are asked if you want to save changes to the most
recently used project. A separate dialog box asks if you want to save changes
to an unsaved route.

•

Exiting the application–The Save Changes dialog box asks if you want to save
your changes.

You can also save the route using the Route tab.
Routes have .anr extensions and are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\Navigation.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Save a Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to save a route using the Route tab.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
3. Click File and then click Save.

Deleting a Route
You can permanently delete routes.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Delete a Route
Use the following steps to delete a route.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Select the route from the Name drop-down list.
3. Click File and then click Delete.
OR
Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Delete Route.

Importing Routes
Routes can be imported from many other DeLorme mapping programs using the
Route tab.

324

Routing
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Import an Existing Route Using the Route Tab
Use the following steps to import an existing route using the Route tab.
1. Click the Route tab and then click the New/Edit subtab.
2. Click File and then click Import.
The Import dialog box opens.
3. Browse to select the route file and then click Open.
The map centers on the imported route and is available in the Name dropdown list.

Setting Your End of Day and Fuel Break Preferences
You can schedule end of day and fuel breaks along a route by using the Plan Trip
option in the Route tab. You can schedule end of day breaks according to the miles
(or other distance unit selected in Map Display) or hours driven and you can
schedule fuel breaks according to your current fuel level, your vehicle's fuel
consumption rate, and so on.
This feature works with the route preferences you have designated with the Route
Preferences option under Route. For more information, see Setting Your Routing
Preferences.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Set Your End of Day and Fuel Stop Preferences
Use the following steps to set your time preferences.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Route tab and then click Plan Trip.
•

Select the Estimate End of Day Breaks check box to schedule end of
day breaks for your trip.
•

•

Select Hours per day to schedule your end of day breaks after
a designated number of hours traveled per day. Then, type the
number of hours you want to travel per day in the Hours Per
Day text box. Use the Flexibility drop-down list to determine
the amount of time you want to be flexible between breaks and
defined stops. For example, if you selected 1.5 Hrs from the
Flexibility drop-down list and have an end of day break within
1.5 hours of a planned stop, the end of day break is moved to
the planned stop.

OR
Select mi per day to schedule your end of day breaks after a
designated number of miles traveled per day. Then, type the
number of miles you want to travel per day in the Mi Per Day
text box. Use the Flexibility drop-down list to determine the
number of miles you want to be flexible between breaks and
defined stops. For example, if you selected 50 mi from the

325

XMap User Guide
Flexibility drop-down list and have an end of day break within 50
miles of a planned stop, the end of day break is moved to the
planned stop.
• Select the Estimate Fuel Breaks check box to schedule fuel breaks
for your trip.
• Type the fuel tank capacity (in gallons) in the Tank Cap text
box.
• Type the fuel consumption rate (in miles per gallon or the
distance unit you have selected in the Display tab of the
Options dialog) for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box.
• Select the amount closest to your current fuel tank level from
the Starting level drop-down list.
• Select the amount of fuel you would like to have in your tank
when warned to stop for fuel from the Warning Level dropdown list.
3. Click Apply.

Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route
The Plan Trip subtab of the Route tab lets you estimate the fuel cost of your route
using the fuel rate (how many gallons of fuel your vehicle uses per mile/kilometer
traveled) and fuel price per gallon.
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Estimate the Fuel Cost of Your Route
Use the following steps to estimate the fuel cost of your route.
1. Create a route.
2. Click the Plan Trip subtab on the Route tab.
3. Click Fuel Cost.
4. Type the fuel rate for your vehicle in the Fuel Rate text box. The fuel rate
can often be found in the vehicle's owners manual.
5. Type the price of your fuel in the Fuel Price text box.
The estimated fuel cost (in U.S. dollars) for your route automatically
calculates when the Fuel Rate and Fuel Price text boxes are completed. The
estimated fuel cost for your route displays in the Total Fuel Cost field.
6. Click Close to close the dialog box and return to the Plan Trip subtab.

Converting a Route to a GPS Log
You can convert any route to a GPS log file (.gpl).
Note Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Convert a Route to a GPS Log File
Use the following steps to convert a route to a GPS log file.
1. Create a route.

326

Routing
2. Right-click the route, point to Manage Route, and then click Save as GPS
Log File. The Save Route as GPS Log File dialog box opens.
3. Browse to the location where you want to save the .gpl file. The default
location is C:\...\DeLorme Docs\GPSLogs.
4. Type the file name in the File Name text box.
5. Click Save.

327

Using GPS
GPS Overview
You can take advantage of the Global Positioning System (GPS) through an interface
with most GPS receivers, such as DeLorme Earthmate devices.
Using your DeLorme application, a portable computer, and your GPS receiver, you
can display a "bread crumb trail" to track your progress as you travel.
You have two ways to use GPS in your mapping application:
•

NavMode–This is the default GPS view—a hands free full-screen view that
you can display in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the
tabs are minimized; however, you can change your display options.

•

GPS tab view–This option allows you to use the GPS tab to control
navigating and tracking. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible,
but you can opt to hide them. It is available only in 2-D mode.

To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode
button appears indented

button on the toolbar. When the

NavMode is on.

Note The button is greyed out
playing back a GPS log file.

unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are

You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button
You can also click the Options button

on the toolbar and click the GPS tab.
on the GPS tab.

2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off, or select the check box to
turn it on.
3. Click OK.
DeLorme software interfaces with different GPS devices as outlined below.
•

DeLorme GPS Devices: DeLorme GPS devices will interface with a current
DeLorme software release.

•

USB GPS Support: DeLorme software can use the data output from a USB
GPS if the device meets one of the following criteria:
•

When the GPS is attached to the computer, it is recognized and
displayed under Ports in the Microsoft Windows Device Manager.

•

The unit is a GARMIN USB device and the GARMIN drivers are
installed.
Note Magellan USB devices are not currently supported.

•

Serial GPS Support: DeLorme software can use the data output from a serial
GPS device. The device must be connected to a free COM port and output a
generic NMEA (National Marine Electronics Association) stream.

•

Bluetooth GPS Support: DeLorme software can use the data output from a
Bluetooth GPS device. You must configure your Bluetooth software to create a
virtual serial port.

328

Using GPS

Safety
Warnings

•

Bring a passenger along to serve as GPS operator while you are
driving a vehicle.

•

Do not use this application with automatic navigation, guidance
systems or for any purpose requiring precise measurement of
distance or direction.

Initializing GPS
Before you can begin GPS tracking, you must connect your GPS receiver to your
portable computer. Select the correct GPS receiver and change location, time, and
preference settings as needed.
Before beginning your GPS setup, read the user manual for your GPS receiver. Also,
ensure you have the appropriate cable and any necessary adapters to connect your
GPS receiver to the communications port of your portable computer.
If you have an Earthmate GPS device, it is not necessary to follow these instructions.
Your device is automatically enabled when it is connected. Just click Start GPS to
begin tracking.

To Initialize Your GPS Receiver
The initializing process can take several minutes before the program detects the
correct communications (COM) port and updates the current settings. Use the
following procedure to initialize your GPS receiver for use with your application.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver to the mode
specified in your user manual, and then turn the on receiver, if necessary.
2. Click the GPS tab and then click Clear Trail to delete any GPS points from
the current map display.
on the toolbar (or click the menu
3. Click the Options button
arrow and click Options) and then click the GPS Settings tab.
OR
Click the GPS tab and click the Options button

4. Select any or all of the following check boxes and click OK when finished. The
description is for the state when the check box is selected:

Use NavMode–Enables a hands free full-screen view that you can
view in 2-D or 3-D.

Snap to route–Automatically locates the place on the route that is
closest to your vehicle's current location.

Start GPS log–Automatically generates a GPS log.

Use High-Contrast colors–Automatically enables high-contrast map
colors.

Magnify map–Automatically magnifies the map view to the specified
magnification (125%, 150%, 175%, or 200%).

Recenter map on GPS–Automatically centers the map on the GPS.

Rotate map in GPS direction–Automatically rotates the 2-D/3-D
map in the direction of travel. Direction of travel always displays as
the top of the screen, regardless of compass direction.

329

XMap User Guide

Auto zoom to turn (2-D only)–Automatically pans and zooms the
map to display both the current GPS position and the position of the
next turn. Select data zoom levels from the Minimum zoom and
Maximum zoom drop-down lists to stop the map from zooming out/in
further than you want it to when approaching the next turn.

Show GPS bread-crumb trail–Automatically displays your GPS
progress on the map as a "bread-crumb" trail up to the maximum
specified number of points. 5,000 points is approximately one hour
and 20 minutes worth of points. This setting does not affect the
number of points captured in the GPS log file. To change the point
number, type the new number in the Trail length box.

Enable GPS Voice Navigation–Provides spoken directions when
tracking a route with a GPS receiver.

Recalculate When Off Route–Automatically recalculates the route
by the designated threshold distance (100 ft, 200 ft, 300 ft, 400 ft, or
500 ft) when the GPS is off of the route.

Enable Stationary Logging–Displays all GPS points on the map
when the GPS device is stationary; for example, when the recorded
speed is below a certain threshold. You must select this option to
record points for Averaging.

Disable Screen Saver–Overrides the system screen saver so that the
display stays activated during GPS tracking.

Start GPS with the Program–Automatically starts GPS tracking each
time you open the program.

Automatically Detect GPS–Automatically sets up your GPS
connection.
Suggestion: If your GPS receiver has a USB cable, select Automatically
Detect GPS to ensure the correct COM port is detected for your device
and that a connection can be made.

Enable WAAS Use–This option is available only when Earthmate is
the selected device (see step 4A). Enables WAAS use. This option is
selected by default.

Enable LED on GPS Device—This option is available only when
Earthmate is the selected device. Turns on the LED on the Earthmate.
When the check box is cleared, the LED on the Earthmate does not
display. This option is selected by default.

OR
Use the following procedures to manually configure your GPS connection. Click
a procedure to view the step-by-step directions.
•

Select the correct GPS device
Use the steps below to select the correct GPS receiver and settings.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver
to the mode specified in your user manual, and then turn the
receiver on.
2. Click the Options button
Settings tab.

and then click the GPS

3. From the Device drop-down list, select the type of GPS
receiver you are using. If your device is not listed, select

330

Using GPS
Generic NMEA.
Note The Settings text box automatically displays the default
settings for the selected device.
4. From the Port drop-down list, select the communications port
you are using to attach the GPS receiver to your computer. See
your computer manual for further information.
•

Manually change the location coordinates
Each time you track with GPS, the initialization process uses the
coordinates from the last initialized location.
Use the following steps to change these coordinates to those of your
choice.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver
to the mode specified in your owner manual, and then turn the
receiver on.
2. Click the Options button
Settings tab.

and then click the GPS

3. Under GPS Options, verify that the Automatically Detect
GPS check box is cleared.
4. Type the coordinates in the text boxes.
Note Coordinates display in the format specified in the Display
tab of the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Use Map Center to set the coordinates to the latitude
and longitude of the current map center.
•

Update the date/time options
You can use the date and time on your computer or you can change
the date and time settings used by the GPS device to those of your
choice.
Use the following steps to change the date and/or time settings.
1. Connect your GPS receiver to your computer, set the receiver
to the mode specified in your user manual, and then turn the
receiver on.
2. Click the Options button
Settings tab.

and then click the GPS

3. To use the date and time on your computer, select the Use
Current System Date/Time check box.
OR
To use the time and date of your choice, clear the Use Current
System Date/Time check box, and then:
•

To manually set the time, select the time zone from the
Zone drop-down box, and if Daylight Saving Time is
currently in effect where you are, select the DST check
box. Then, use the scroll box to select the desired time.
Note Time is displayed in 24-hour format, with
Midnight as 00:00:00.

•

To manually set the date, click the down arrow next to
the Date field and select the date from the calendar.
331

XMap User Guide
5. Click OK to exit the Options dialog and return to the GPS tab in the tab area.
6. Click Start GPS.
Your GPS receiver begins acquiring satellite data and the GPS Status dialog
area displays.
Notes
•

The status of your GPS connection displays on the screen. Once your GPS
receiver acquires a fix on your location, your position on the map displays as
a yellow or green dot that changes to an arrow as you travel. For more
information, see Monitoring Your GPS Status.

•

While your receiver is acquiring data, many red dots display on your map
(except with Magellan receivers). You may have to zoom in to see them
clearly. These red dots are positioned at the readings taken by the GPS
receiver as it is acquiring data.

•

Magellan receivers do not display any data until you are moving.

•

If you have the HotSync manager loaded in the startup (the default
configuration), it reserves the COM port. If that is the one where the GPS
receiver is attached, you must exit HotSync manager for the GPS receiver to
initialize. To do this, right-click the HotSync icon on the taskbar and click
Exit. If you have two COM ports, verify the correct COM port is selected for
use with your application. This pertains to older devices.

•

Any questions or problems regarding the operation of your GPS receiver
should be directed to its manufacturer.

Using NavMode or GPS Tab View
The default GPS view is NavMode — a hands free full-screen view that you can
display in 2-D or 3-D. By default, the Control Panel is hidden and the tabs are
minimized; however, you can change your display options.
The GPS tab view option allows you to use the GPS tab to control navigating and
tracking. By default, the tabs and Control Panel are visible, but you can opt to hide
them. It is available only in 2-D mode.
To turn NavMode on or off, click the NavMode
button appears indented

button on the toolbar. When the

, NavMode is on.

Note The button is greyed out
playing back a GPS log file.

unless you have a GPS device plugged in or are

You can also change your GPS view in the Options dialog box:
1. Click the Options button
You can also click the Options button

on the toolbar and click the GPS tab.
on the GPS tab.

2. Clear the Use NavMode check box to turn it off or select the check box to
turn it on.
3. Click OK.
See the NavMode tutorial in the application’s Help for more information.

332

Using GPS

Tracking a Route with GPS
When tracking, you can follow along a road route you created. As you travel, the
current leg (segment) of your route is highlighted on the map.
Notes
•

To automatically recalculate your route when off track, on the Route tab, select
the Auto check box next to the Back on Track button on the New/Edit subtab.
If you do not want the program to automatically recalculate your route when off
track, clear the Back on Track check box and click Back on Track whenever
you want to recalculate the route based on the current GPS position.

•

If you want to create a log of your travels, select the Start GPS Log check box
in the GPS tab of the Options dialog to log automatically. Or, click the Record
button in the GPS Log subtab to log manually.

•

The Turns option is available only during GPS tracking.

•

Routable roads require a routable DeLorme dataset. Routable trails require a
topographic DeLorme dataset. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call
DeLorme Direct Sales at 800-561-5105.

To Start GPS Tracking
Use the following steps to track your movement as you travel.
1. Create a route.
Important If the current project includes hidden routes, they may
recalculate if you selected the Auto Back on Track check box or if you selected
the Recalculate When Off Route check box in the GPS Settings. To ensure this
does not occur, clear these check boxes or delete the routes you do not want
to recalculate.
2. Connect your GPS device to your computer.
3. Initialize the device. This step is not necessary if you are using an Earthmate
GPS device.
on the toolbar.
4. In NavMode, click the GPS button
Click here for a description of the screen display.
OR
In GPS tab view, click the GPS tab and then click the Status subtab. For
more information, see Monitoring Your GPS Status. Then, click Start GPS or
on the toolbar.
click the GPS button
Click here for a description of the Show Turns area on the Route tab.
•

Next Turn–Displays the next turn and a turn graphic indicating the
direction; the distance to the next turn, based on the units selected on
the Display tab in the Options dialog box; and the time to the next
turn.

•

Next Stop–The distance and estimated time to the next stop.

•

Finish–The distance and estimated time to the finish.

Click the Show More Turns button
the following turn.

to view information for the turn after

click Show List to return to the Directions dialog area.

333

XMap User Guide
•

Compass–The default map setting is North up in 2-D and in the GPS
direction in 3-D. To change the compass, select or clear the Rotate
Map in GPS option on the GPS tab in the Options dialog box.

•

Next Turn–The distance to the next turn, based on the units selected
on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.

•

Dist to Finish–The distance to the finish point on your route, based
on the units selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.

•

ETA–The estimated time of arrival at the finish of your route. This is
based on the time and time zone set on your computer. If your trip
goes beyond the current day, the day of arrival also displays. The ETA
does not include any layover time at a stop.

•

GPS Fix–Indicates if your GPS fix is 2-D or 3-D. If you do not have a
fix or if the GPS is acquiring a fix, "No Fix" displays.

•

Speed–Displays the speed you are traveling, based on the units
selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.

•

Heading–Displays as degrees T (True North) or M (Magnetic North)
based on the bearing selected on the Units area in the Options dialog
box.

•

Radar Results–If you are using GPS Radar, an orange bar displays
the closest search result. Click Stop Here to insert a stop into your
route. Click More Info to open the GPS Radar subtab on the Find tab
and get more information about the result. Click Stop Radar to stop
searching.

•

Progress Bar–The progress bar displays below the orange bar. It
shows how far along you are in your route by distance.

•

Turns–The blue area at the bottom of the screen shows the next turn
in large text and the following turn in smaller text. An arrow showing
the direction of each turn displays next to the text.

•

Zoom In/Out–Click the plus sign in the Turns area to zoom the map
in. Click the minus sign to zoom the map out.

•

Left 2-D or 3-D/Right 2-D–You can choose to view the left map in
2-D or 3-D or the right map in 2-D. Click the button for the view you
want. To view both the right and left map, use the resize tool to
change the map area.

To Stop GPS Tracking
In NavMode, click the GPS button

on the toolbar.

In GPS tab view, click the GPS tab and then click Stop GPS or click the GPS button
on the toolbar.

Getting Back on Track When Off Course
To automatically recalculate your route when off course, select the Auto check box
next to the Back on Track button in the Route tab. If you do not want the program to
automatically recalculate your route when off track, clear the Auto check box and
click the Back on Track button to manually recalculate the route.

334

Using GPS

Panning the Map Automatically While GPS Tracking
When using the application with a GPS receiver to track a route, your map
automatically pans and redraws as you travel, always indicating your position on the
map when Center on GPS is activated.

To Automatically Pan the Map
The following procedure demonstrates how the check box and button work
together to automatically pan the map.
on the toolbar (or click the menu
1. Click the Options button
arrow and click Options) and then click the GPS Settings tab.
OR
Click the GPS tab to open it and click the Options button

2. Under When Tracking, clear the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you
pan the map manually during GPS tracking, Center on GPS displays in the
Control Panel.
OR
Select the Recenter Map on GPS check box. If you pan the map manually
during GPS tracking, the map automatically re-centers itself on your location
after 5 seconds.
3. Click OK.
4. Click the GPS tab and click Start GPS.
OR
Click the GPS button

on the toolbar.

Notes
•

The Center on GPS button displays and is activated by default on the Control
Panel when the Recenter Map on GPS option is selected.

•

If you deactivate the Center on GPS button, you can continue to manually pan
the map or use the search function in the Find tab.

•

When you are done with other tasks, click Center on GPS in the Control Panel
to resume tracking.

Playing Back a Log File
After you log a route with your GPS receiver, you can play it back in the mapping
application and review your entire journey on-screen.
Your log will play back in NavMode unless you have it turned off. For more
information, see Using NavMode or GPS Tab View.
Notes
•

You cannot play back a log file if you are currently tracking with a GPS
receiver.

•

Zooming in on the map allows you to see the log file in greater detail.

•

When you play back a log file in NavMode, the tab area is not minimized; this
allows you to control the playback.

To Play Back a Log File
Use the following steps to play back and review a log file.
335

XMap User Guide
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start
time, start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time,
finish coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log. Log files
have .gpl extensions and are saved by default in C:\...\DeLorme
Docs\GPSLogs.
5. Click Open.
to begin playing back your log.
6. Click the Play button
OR
Drag the slider in the Progress Bar (see graphic at the end of this topic) to
the point in the log you want to play.
Note Playing back a log file defaults to 1x, which occurs in real time and
takes the same amount of time as the original trip did; for example, if your
trip took six hours, the on-screen tracking process also takes six hours.
You can also:
•

From the Playback Speed drop-down list, select an option (2x, 5x, 10x,
25x, or 50x) to increase the tracking speed accordingly.

•

to pause the tracking of the log file. The
Click the Pause button
Pause button turns blue to indicate the file is paused. Click the Play
button to continue playing back the file.

•

to stop the play back. To start the file
Click the Stop button
over, click the Play button again.

•

Click and hold the Rewind button
particular point.

•

Click and hold the Forward button
particular point.

•

Drag the slider in the Progress Bar to view a particular point in the log.
You can drag the slider forward or backward.

to rewind the log file to a
to fast forward the log file to a

Previewing a GPS Log File
There are two ways to view an existing GPS log. You can play it back and watch it in
real time (point-by-point), or you can preview it and view the entire log area without
waiting for the playback to finish.

To Preview a Log File
Use the following steps to preview a log file.

336

Using GPS
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Single click the file you want to view.
The bottom of the Open a GPL File dialog box opens the start location, start
time, start coordinate, total distance, duration, finish location, finish time,
finish coordinate, and the number of readings for the selected log.
5. Click Open.
6. Click File and then click File Preview.
The map centers on your log location.

Viewing File Details for a GPS Log
If you want more information about your GPS log than just seeing where you've
been on the map, the File Details feature in the GPS Log subtab can give you a
variety of information about your journey.
For even more specific information about your log, simply play back or preview your
log and then right-click a specific GPS point on the map to learn the date and time
the point was obtained as well as the speed, bearing, elevation, and GPS status for
that particular point.

To View File Details for a GPS Log
Use the following steps to view log file details.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click the GPS Log subtab.
2. Click Clear Trail to clear any existing GPS points from the map display.
3. Click File and then click Open.
4. Select the file you want to view details for and then click Open.
5. Click File and then click File Details.
A dialog box shows information about your log.
6. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

Monitoring Your GPS Status
Once you initialize your GPS and begun tracking, you can continue to monitor the
status of your GPS connection and other information. Status information accuracy is
affected by speed (3 mph or more) and your GPS status. 3-D status provides the
most accurate information.

To Monitor Your GPS Status in NavMode
Speed
Displays the speed you are traveling based on the units you
selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.

Heading

337

XMap User Guide
Displays the direction you are traveling in as degrees T (True
North) or M (Magnetic North) based on the bearing selected
on the Units area on the Display tab in the Options dialog
box. Heading is provided as a numerical value as well as a
compass direction.
GPS Fix
No GPS–Displays "No Fix"
Acquiring–Displays "No Fix"
2-D–Displays "2-D"
3-D–The GPS receiver is receiving sufficient satellite data to
determine your location. When the status reads 3-D, your
current heading and traveling speed are displayed.
Note If you are tracking with a WAAS-enabled device, a 3-D
fix displays as "3-D DGPS."

To Monitor Your GPS Status in GPS Tab View
Speed and Heading
Speed–Displays the speed you
are traveling based on the units
you selected on the Display tab
in the Options dialog box.
Heading–Displays the direction
you are traveling as degrees T
(True North) or M (Magnetic
North) based on the bearing
selected on the Units area on the
Display tab in the Options dialog
box. Heading is provided as a
numerical value as well as a
compass direction.

Coordinates/Elevation
Coordinates–The coordinate fields display based on the units
you selected on the Display tab in the Options dialog box.
Elevation–Displays the current elevation if the GPS status is 3-D
and is based on the selected Units preference. Elevation can be
displayed with a 2-D status; your position is indicated accurately
on your screen as you travel unless you are in an area where
your elevation varies greatly.

338

Using GPS
GPS Status
No GPS–A red circle with a slash indicates the GPS receiver is not
yet detected by your computer. This status usually displays when
initialization first begins.
Acquiring–A red blinking circle indicates the GPS receiver is not yet
receiving sufficient satellite data to determine your position. This
status displays while the GPS receiver is acquiring satellite data and
can take several minutes.
2-D–A yellow circle indicates the GPS connection is successful but
there is insufficient satellite data to determine your GPS position.
This usually indicates insufficient data for an accurate location due
to:
•

Only three satellites being used

•

Poor signals from the satellites.

Move your receiver to another location until you get better reception.
3-D–A green circle indicates the GPS receiver is receiving sufficient
satellite data to determine your location. When the status reads 3-D,
your current coordinates, elevation, and heading are displayed, along
with the speed you are currently traveling.
Note If you are tracking with a WAAS-enabled device, a 3-D fix
displays as "3-D DGPS."

Monitoring GPS Satellite Information
Click Sat. Info in the GPS tab to view the current satellite status. Sat. Info is a
toggle button that switches to Status. Click Status to return to the original Status
dialog area.
Dilution of Precision
The Dilution of Precision area lists your Position Dilution of
Precision, your Horizontal Dilution of Precision, and your
Vertical Dilution of Precision. For definitions of these terms,
see Glossary Terms.

Satellite Listing
The Satellite Listing window displays the satellites that are
currently visible in the sky. The columns list the satellite
number, elevation, azimuth, and signal-to-noise ratio.
Satellite Listing information is only available for DeLorme
receivers and NMEA-compatible receivers.

339

XMap User Guide
Almanac
When using a DeLorme GPS receiver, the Almanac window
displays the satellite number and its current status.
N–Indicates the satellite is being used for navigation.
E–Indicates ephemeris data is available for the satellite.
T–Indicates the satellite is currently being tracked by your
GPS receiver.
D–Indicates differential data is available for that satellite.
Notes
• Differential data is available on WAAS-enabled
devices.
• Almanac information is available only for DeLorme
receivers.
Skyview
The Skyview diagram indicates visible satellites, their number
(assigned by the Department of Defense), and their position in
the sky relative to your current position. Each satellite is color
coded, based on the quality of data it is transmitting.
Gray–Indicates the satellite's position in the sky.
Red–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite but it is
not receiving data from it.
Yellow–(DeLorme GPS receivers only) Indicates your receiver is
tracking the satellite, ephemeris data is available, but the satellite
is not being used for navigation.
Green–Indicates your GPS receiver is tracking the satellite,
ephemeris data is available, and the satellite is being used for
navigation.
Dark Green–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates your
receiver is tracking the satellite, ephemeris data is available, the
satellite is being used for navigation, and the satellite has DGPS
and WAAS corrections available.
Blue–WAAS-enabled receivers only. Indicates a WAAS satellite
used for corrections.

Viewing Sun and Moon Information
You can use the Sun/Moon subtab in the GPS tab to view information about the
rising and setting of the Sun and Moon relative to a specified date, time, and
location.

To View Sun and Moon Information
Use the following steps to view Sun and Moon information in the GPS tab.
1. Click the GPS tab.
2. Click the Sun/Moon subtab.
3. Click the down arrow next to the date to change the date.
4. Use the scroll arrows to change the time.
5. After you update the date and time, you can view:
340

Using GPS
•

The Sun and Moon traveling across the compass as time passes with
the Sun/Moon compass. In the center of the compass, a shadow grows
and shrinks and changes direction as the Sun moves across the
compass (similar to a sun dial).

•

Sun rise/set and Moon rise/set information.

•

Moon cycle information (such as the day of the moon cycle and the
phase).

Averaging
The Averaging option allows you to load .gpl files and average the data points they
contain. With the Averaging option, you can select and delete average points and
customize the names of average points.

To Average Points
Note Click Undo at any point in the Averaging process to undo your last action.
Click Clear All to remove all of the GPS points from the map window.
1. Click the GPS tab and then click Average.
2. Select a .gpl file from the file directory and click Open.
3. From the Edit Points group box, click the Select Points button

4. Drag a box around the points you wish to average. The points you included
are highlighted.
OR
Press the SHIFT key on your keyboard and click to select individual points.
Note Click Delete to delete selected points.
5. Under Edit Points, click Average.
The selected points are now represented by one averaged point.
6. Type a label for your averaged point in the Point Label text box. The default
label is "GPS Average."
7. Click Save.
The averaged point is now part of the active draw layer and is not a valid GPS
point. All averaged points that have not been saved are saved to the active
draw layer. You can no longer manipulate these points using the GPS
Averaging option.

About GPS
What is GPS?
The Global Positioning System (GPS) applies modern technology to the ancient
basics of navigation. The U.S. Department of Defense has developed and launched a
series of positioning satellites in an orbiting constellation. These satellites are used
as reference points much the same way stars have been used in conventional
navigation.
Using these satellites, a GPS receiver can determine your position anywhere on the
globe. GPS provides accurate information about coordinate position, elevation,
speed, and direction of travel. Many people have discovered the benefits of GPS for
tracking vehicles, recording routes, and much more.

How Does GPS Work?

341

XMap User Guide
The GPS constellation consists of 24 satellites, each carrying several atomic clocks to
ensure the most accurate time possible. The satellites broadcast low-power radio
waves containing the satellite's identity code and the exact time (to the nanosecond)
that the message was sent.
When a GPS receiver picks up a satellite signal, it identifies the satellite and
compares the signal time with its own clock. The time difference represents the time
it has taken for that radio wave to travel from the satellite to the receiver. Since
radio waves travel at the speed of light, the time difference can be used to calculate
the distance from the satellite to the GPS receiver.
The satellite's identity code provides the location of the satellite, and the distance to
the receiver creates a sphere of possible locations for the GPS receiver. Without
more information, the receiver only knows that it is located somewhere on that
sphere.
Two additional satellites are necessary to narrow down the receiver's possible
position. Each of these satellites sends a similar radio message containing time and
identity information. The GPS receiver checks the orbital location of each satellite
and uses the elapsed time to create two additional spheres of possible locations.
These three spheres intersect at two points; however, one of these points is
eliminated because it is far away from the earth's surface. Therefore, the second
point is assumed to be correct. The data from these three satellites provides the
receiver with a two-dimensional location.
Data acquired from a fourth satellite pinpoints the receiver's exact location. This
additional positioning information allows the GPS receiver to calculate its elevation,
which is particularly important for GPS users in mountainous locations.

GPS Position Accuracy
The accuracy of the data your GPS receiver provides is dependent upon many
factors, including the quality of your equipment. A low-quality clock within the
receiver decreases the accuracy of your location. The atmosphere, the ionosphere,
and the number of channels your receiver can handle all affect the accuracy of your
system. Consult your GPS hardware manuals for information on how your receiver
adjusts for errors.
Any buildings, natural structures, or heavy foliage that obstruct the GPS antenna's
view of the sky prevent satellite signals from reaching the receiver and decreases the
accuracy of your position.
Your accuracy will also depend on your level of clearance with the U.S. Department
of Defense. There are two available radio signals that receivers can use: the
Standard Positioning Service (SPS) for civilians and the Precise Positioning Service
(PPS) for military and authorized personnel.

342

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
Voice Overview
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

Using the speech recognition and text-to-speech technology included in your
application, you can issue a series of voice commands to a laptop computer. The
voice commands activate basic navigation, map control, and GPS features, providing
you with hands-free program navigation so you can concentrate on your driving.
When tracking with a GPS receiver, you can receive spoken updates about your route
directions, next turn, next stop, current location, etc.
Notes
•

The Voice label on the Voice tab displays red when the microphone is
activated.

•

Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer Version
5.1. You can also use other speech recognition engines that you may have
purchased separately from other software companies. Such speech
recognition engines must support SAPI 5.1 to be available to you in your
application. See the Speech settings in the Windows Control Panel for more
information about your engine.

•

If you have purchased other "voices" (text-to-speech engines) that are
SAPI 5.1-compatible, they are available in your application.

•

You must have a microphone attached to your computer to use speech
recognition (for input).

•

For tips on using the speech recognition feature and setting up your
microphone, see Speech Recognition Tips.

•

If you are having difficulty hearing the voice output, adjust the volume on
your external speakers or adjust your computer's volume using the
settings in the Windows Control Panel.

•

If you chose the custom installation option when you installed your
application, you were asked whether or not to install a speech recognition
engine for voice input. If you want to use voice input and selected not to
install a speech recognition engine when you installed the program, you
must uninstall and then reinstall the application, making sure to select to
install the speech recognition engine.
Notes
•

The speech recognition engine is automatically installed on
Windows Vista operating systems.

•

If you have another DeLorme product installed and already opted to
install the speech recognition engine, you may not see the option to
install it again.

343

XMap User Guide

Voice Options Overview
The following topics are covered in this section:
•

Voice Overview

•

Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition

•

Training the Speech Recognition Engine

•

Voice Commands

•

Speech Recognition Tips

•

Changing Voice Output

•

Voice Preferences

•

Voice Prompts

Activating and Monitoring Speech Recognition
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

Use the Voice tab to view status information about your microphone and the list of
available voice commands.
•

The Microphone bar (VU meter) indicates the level of sound received from the
microphone.

•

The Command Status area displays either the last recognized voice command
or one of the following error messages:

•

Too noisy

•

No signal

•

Input too loud

•

Input too quiet

The Commands box lists the voice commands for accessing the Voice tab,
navigating, using the map, and using GPS. It shows the availability of the
commands and their shortcut keys. You can double-click a command to issue
it.

To Activate and Monitor the Speech Recognition Feature
Use the following steps to activate and monitor the speech recognition feature.
1. Click the Voice tab.
2. Select the Microphone check box to activate your microphone and to turn on
the speech recognition feature.
The tab name turns red if the microphone is listening to your commands.
Note If your microphone is active when you exit the program, it will still be
active when you re-enter the application.
3. To trigger an audible signal when a voice command is recognized, select the
Beep When Heard check box.
4. To display all of the possible voice commands, including variations of the
commands, select the Show All Commands check box.
Both enabled

344

and disabled

commands are displayed.

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS
is not initialized.

Training the Speech Recognition Engine
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

You should train the speech recognition engine to provide good speech recognition
results. Before training, ensure your microphone is active and the speech recognition
feature is on. For more information, see Activating and Monitoring Speech
Recognition.

To Train the Engine to Recognize Your Speech Patterns
You should train the speech recognition engine to recognize your specific speech
patterns. This is often done by reading a predetermined piece of text supplied by the
creator of the speech recognition engine. If the engine supports multiple user
models, you can train the engine to recognize more than one speech pattern.
Use the following steps to train the speech recognition engine to recognize your
speech patterns.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. Select the microphone you intend to use from the Microphone drop-down
list.
4. Select your preferred user voice model from the User Profile drop-down list.
Note To create a new speech recognition profile for each of your working
environments (noisy, quiet) and users (your spouse, your child), click Speech
in the Windows Control Panel.
5. Select your preferred speech recognition engine from the Recognizer dropdown list.
Note Select the most recent version available in the drop-down list.
6. Click Speech Profile Training to display the speech training wizard specific
to your speech recognition engine.
Note This feature is available only if it is supported by your speech
recognition engine.
7. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Tips
For best results:
•

Use a close-talk microphone that rests near the side of your mouth instead of
a desktop or built-in microphone.

•

Train the speech recognition engine in the same environment in which you
will use it. For example, if you use the engine mostly in the car, perform
training in the car. Perform three training sessions to get the best results.

345

XMap User Guide
•

When training, speak the same voice as you will when giving voice commands
to the computer. Speak distinctly and at an average speed, as if giving a
command.

•

Use the Microphone Wizard to ensure your microphone is working correctly
and to view tips on microphone selection and placement. To use the wizard,
click Microphone Setup on the Voice tab of the Options dialog. Or, from the
Start menu on your computer, browse to the Control Panel and double-click
the Speech icon to open the Speech Properties dialog box.

•

To increase the likelihood of correct speech recognition, on the Voice Settings
tab in the Options dialog box, select the Commands start with check box
and then type the appropriate word/phrase in the text box (if using a single
word, use a word with more than one syllable). For example, if you type
computer, you would then say "Computer, zoom in."

Voice Commands
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

Your application includes Route, Map, GPS, and Voice tab control commands. Select
the Show All Commands check box to view all options, including those which are
variations or unavailable.

Route Tab Commands
The following table shows navigation voice commands for the Route tab. If there is a
keyboard shortcut available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command

Response

What is the next turn?
(F5)

Speaks the next turn name, time to turn, distance to
turn, bearing to turn, and turn direction. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.

What's the next turn?
(F5)
Next turn. (F5)
Show next turn. (F6)

Displays current location and next turn. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.

Center on next turn.

Centers map on the next turn. Displays the Directions
subtab in the Route tab.

What is the next stop?

Speaks the next stop name, distance to stop, bearing to
stop, and time to stop. Displays the Directions subtab in
the Route tab.

What's the next stop?
Next stop
Show next stop. (F7)

Displays current location and next stop. Displays the
Directions subtab in the Route tab.

Center on next stop.

Centers map on the next stop. Displays the Directions
subtab in the Route tab.

346

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
After that.

Speaks the next stop or turn information, depending on
the previous spoken direction.

Are we there yet?

Speaks the finish name, time to finish, and distance to
finish.

Show finish. (F8)

Displays current location and finish on the map.

Center on finish.

Centers map on the finish. Displays the Directions subtab
in the Route tab.

Directions.

Speaks the next turn, next stop, finish, name, time, and
distance. Displays the Directions subtab in the Route tab.

Where am I?

Speaks current route segment, heading, speed, town,
county, and state.

Coordinates.

Speaks the coordinate of your current location.

Shush.

Silences GPS voice navigation, but does not turn it off.

Be quiet.

Silences GPS voice navigation, but does not turn it off.

Voice nav on. (F2)

Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) on.

Voice nav off. (F2)

Turns voice navigation (spoken turn directions) off.

Show route.

Displays your route on the map.

Back on track.

Adds current GPS location as a stop and recalculates the
route.

Continue route from
here. (F9)

Adds current location as a stop and recalculates the
route.

Show turns.

Activates the Show Turns dialog area in the Route tab.

Show directions.

Activates the Directions subtab in the Route tab.

Show list.

Map Commands
The following table shows main map voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut
available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command

Response

Pan left. (ALT+Left)

Pans (or scrolls) the map left.

Scroll left. (ALT+Left)
Pan right. (ALT+Right)

Pans (or scrolls) the map right.

Scroll right. (ALT+Right)
Pan up. (ALT+UP)

Pans (or scrolls) the map up.

Scroll up. (ALT+UP)
Pan down.
(ALT+DOWN)

Pans (or scrolls) the map down.

347

XMap User Guide
Scroll down.
(ALT+DOWN)
Zoom in. (ALT+PAGE
DOWN)

Zooms in one level.

Zoom out. (ALT+PAGE
UP)

Zooms out one level.

Zoom in <#> times.

Zooms in the specified number of levels.

Zoom out <#> times.

Zooms out the specified number of levels.

Zoom level <#>.

Zooms to specified level.

Previous map.

Displays the previous map.

Go back.

GPS Tab Commands
The following table shows GPS voice commands. If there is a keyboard shortcut
available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command

Response

Start GPS. (CTRL+G)

Starts GPS tracking.

Stop GPS. (CTRL+G)

Stops GPS tracking.

GPS status.

Displays the GPS Status subtab.

Monitor GPS.

Displays the GPS Monitor subtab.

GPS Monitor.
Center on GPS. (ALT+P)

Recenters the map on the current GPS location.

Stop centering on GPS.
(ALT+P)

Stops the map from recentering on your current GPS
location.

Stop center on GPS.
(ALT+P)
Clear GPS.

Clears the GPS "bread crumb trail" from the map.

Autorotate map on.
(ALT+R)

Turns automatic map rotation on.

Autorotate map off.
(ALT+R)

Turns automatic map rotation off.

Autozoom map on.
(ALT+Z)

When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom on.

Autozoom map off.
(ALT+Z)

When GPS tracking, turns automatic zoom off.

348

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition

Voice Tab Commands
The following table shows Voice tab voice commands and the response. If there is a
keyboard shortcut available, it is listed after the command.
Spoken Command

Response

What can I say?

Displays the Monitor dialog box.

More commands.

Displays next page of voice commands.

Repeat last
command.

Repeats your last spoken command.

Speech Recognition Tips
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

The following tips provide information on using the speech recognition feature and
setting up your microphone.
•

Speech recognition is only active when your application is the active window.

•

Commands become enabled based on your current GPS status, your data
zoom level, and other factors. Enabled commands do not have a red "x" on
the icon.

•

Disabled commands have a red "x" on the icon.
Note Some commands are disabled if a route is not calculated or if the GPS
has not been initialized.

•

Avoid noisy environments when using voice command navigation.

•

Use a close-talk microphone for best speech recognition results.

•

Properly position your microphone to achieve the best speech recognition
results. For a close-talk microphone, the recommended position is a thumbwidth from the corner of your mouth and slightly to the side. For more
information, see the note at the end of this topic.

•

When issuing commands to the computer, use the same tone that was used
when during the speech recognition engine training.

•

Keep the microphone as far as possible from the car radio or console,
computer speakers, or other speakers.

•

If your microphone is near your speakers, and you are using the microphone
together with voice reminders (GPS VoiceNav), the program may recognize
some of the words that it is speaking and react to them. Here are ways to
eliminate this problem:
•

Make sure that you have chosen the Voice Output device (speakers,
headset) and the Input device (on-board microphone, headset
microphone) that you intend to use with DeLorme GPS voice
navigation. Use the selections that are available in the Voice settings
tab in the Options dialog box.

•

If more than one speech recognizer is available in the drop-down list,
choose the most recent (highest version number).

349

XMap User Guide
•

Your best speech recognition responses will always be to use a closetalk microphone with voice output using the laptop speakers rather
than a headphone speaker so that the computer will not "hear itself."

•

If you are speaking with someone else in the room, have a radio or
television on, and so on, the computer may think those sounds are
commands to follow. Select the Microphone check box on the Voice tab
only when you intend to use it. If you exit the program with the
Microphone check box selected, the program will start speech
recognition again when you restart the program. Voice recognition
requires a lot of disk space and slows down the system if you are not
using it. Remember: the Voice tab displays with red font whenever the
microphone is listening.

•

Use the Commands Start With feature in the Voice tab in the Options
dialog to clearly distinguish commands from other noise and speech.
Set the Commands Start With phrase to something like “computer” or
“Simon Says” to reduce the chances of an unexpected command
recognition. When choosing a phrase, make sure that it is more than
one syllable. The phrases "computer" or "Simon Says" work well. But
the simple word "map" probably will not.

•

Train the speech recognition system in the environment in which you
will use it (for example, in a noisy car).

Note To find out the proper position for your microphone model, or to find tips on
on the toolbar
how to purchase a microphone, click the Options button
(or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu; then, click
Options to open the dialog box), click the Voice Settings tab, and then click
Microphone Setup. Or, from the Start menu on your computer, browse to the
Control Panel and double-click the Speech icon to open the Speech Properties dialog
box.

Changing Voice Output
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

Your application offers text-to-speech technology so you can receive spoken updates
about your route directions, next turn, next stop, current location, time to finish, or
current coordinates when navigating with a GPS receiver. Text-to-speech allows
hands-free navigation of the program on your computer.
Use your text-to-speech engine to change and preview the tone and quality of the
computer's voice.

To Change the Voice Output
Use the following steps to change your computer's voice.
on the toolbar.
1. Click the Options button
OR
Click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu. Then,
click Options to open the dialog box.

350

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
2. Click the Voice Settings tab.
3. From the Voice drop-down list box, select a voice from the list of options.
A description of the selected voice displays to the right of the drop-down list
box.
Note If you have purchased SAPI 5.1-compatible voices from another
software vendor, they are included in this list.
4. From the Device drop-down list box, select the output device from which you
want to hear the computer's voice (for example, your speakers or a headset).
5. To preview the voice, click Test Voice, type a sample sentence, and then
click OK.
The sample sentence is spoken in the selected voice.
6. Use the Voice Volume spin box to adjust the output volume relative to the
other programs you are running. By default, this is set to 100 (maximum).
Note that you cannot set the volume higher than your speakers or Windows
Control Panel settings capabilities.
Note Click Audio Controls to access additional volume settings.
7. Use the Speaking Rate spin box to adjust the rate at which the computer's
voice will speak. A value of 50 is normal.

Voice Preferences
To use voice navigation, you must have a 2-D or 3-D GPS fix and a route
calculated.

The Voice tab in the Options dialog displays a series of Engine Option buttons. These
option buttons allow you to view information or change preference settings in your
speech recognition or text-to-speech engines. Some speech recognition or text-tospeech engines do not support some of the preference options.

To View and Update Speech Recognition Preferences
To change speech input preferences, click the Options button
on the
toolbar (or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu;
then, click Options to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab.
The following options are available under the Speech Recognition area of the dialog
box.
•

Microphone Setup–Opens the Microphone Wizard to adjust speech
recognition whenever you change microphone or noise environments.

•

Speech Profile Training–Opens Voice Training Wizard to train the engine to
recognize your speech patterns. This process may take 10–15 minutes to
complete.

•

DeLorme Training–Opens an abbreviated version of the Voice Training
Wizard. This dialog trains the system on DeLorme voice commands.

•

Add/Delete Words–Opens the Add/Delete Words Wizard with the
pronunciation wizard specific to your speech recognition engine. You can
enter, edit, or view the words in your pronunciation vocabulary. Use this
wizard when the speech recognition has trouble understanding a specific word
that you are saying.

351

XMap User Guide
•

Recognition Settings–Opens the Recognition Profile Settings dialog. Use
this to change preferences for sensitivity and tolerance of errors in
recognizing your voice.
Note Your application comes equipped with Microsoft English Recognizer
Version 5.1. You may have a premium version (for example, Microsoft Office
2003 installs Microsoft English U.S. Version 6.1 Recognizer). Select the most
recent version.

To View and Update Voice Output Preferences
To change voice output preferences, click the Options button
on the
toolbar (or click the arrow next to the Options toolbar button to open the menu;
then, click Options to open the dialog box), and then click the Voice Settings tab.
The following options are available under the Voice Output area of the dialog box.
•

Test Voice–Choose to display the preview voice dialog box for your text-tospeech engine. Type in a sentence and click OK to hear it spoken.

•

Audio Controls–Choose to adjust the speaker volume for all programs on
your computer. This is equivalent to the same adjustment in the Windows
Control Panel.

Voice Prompts
Directions (spoken first or alone)
Proceed…
Continue straight...
Bear right…
Bear left…
Turn right…
Turn left…
Turn hard right…
Turn hard left…
Go east…
Go west…
Go north…
Go northeast…
Go northwest…
Go south…
Go southeast…
Go southwest…

Direction distance modifiers (spoken second)
…in [distance in tenths of a mile]

Other (spoken alone)
At finish. [was: “Destination reached.”]
Last leg.

352

Using Voice Navigation and Speech Recognition
Approaching finish.
Off route.

353

Using Handheld Devices
Handheld Export
Setting Your Handheld Export Preferences
You can customize your map export options so that you export exactly the map data
types and data zoom level ranges you want to view on your handheld device or
Earthmate PN-Series GPS device.
Note You must have Street Atlas USA® Handheld installed to view exported maps
on a PDA.
To Set Your Handheld Export Preferences
Use the following steps to customize your map cutting preferences.
on the toolbar (or click the menu
1. Click the Options button
arrow and click Options) and then click the Handheld Export tab.
OR
Click the Handheld Export tab and click the Options button

2. Under Export Map Format and Location, select DeLorme Earthmate to
send maps to an Earthmate PN-Series GPS device.
OR
Under Export Map Format and Location, select Palm OS/Pocket PC to
send maps to a Palm OS or Pocket PC PDA.
Note Map packages are saved in the location displayed. To change where
you save map packages, click Browse and navigate to the new location.
3. Under Export Data Zooms, select the check box next to each map data type
you want to export. All user map data types are listed. For other data types,
only connected map data types are listed.
Tip XMap USA Topographic Data is the same data that is on the detailed data
DVDs that came with your PN-Series GPS. If you installed the detailed data
for the map you are creating, clear the XMap USA Topographic Data check
box so you do not duplicate data in your map.
4. Under Zoom Range, drag the slider controls to the minimum and maximum
data zoom levels at which to view the data.
5. For Draw Layers or GIS Layers, select Less Detail or Full Detail. Less Detail
creates a smaller file size and the data on the device has less detail than it
does on the map. Full Detail creates a larger file size and the data on the
device is identical to the data on the map.
6. Repeat the steps for each selected map data type. The minimum and
maximum data zoom levels display to the right of each map data type.
7. Click OK to accept the changes and close the Options dialog box.
OR
Click Apply to accept the changes and remain working in the Options dialog
box.
Notes
•

Click Use Defaults to return the slider controls to their default minimum and
maximum values.

•

Raster imagery (such as USGS Quads, aerial imagery, NOAA nautical charts,

354

Using Handheld Devices
and satellite imagery) includes color-coded data zoom level suggestions under
Zoom Range.
•

Green indicates the data zoom levels at which the data is best viewed.
The default values are set to only export data zoom levels that are in the
green area.

•

Red indicates zoom levels at which the data is available but not
necessarily the best viewed.

•

DeLorme Street Level Data and DeLorme Topographic Data are available
separately. For information, visit www.delorme.com or call DeLorme Direct
Sales at 800-561-5105.

•

Maps with multiple data types have large file sizes. To decrease the file size
when exporting multiple map data types, try exporting raster data with small
data zoom level ranges. The following list provides the optimum data zoom
level ranges for each raster data type:
o

GIS Layers — 0-20
User GIS layers in the current GIS workspace. See Adding GIS Layers to a
Map Package for more information.

Draw Layers — 1-20
All draw layers in the current project, excluding waypoints and tracks. See
Adding Draw Layers to a Map Package for more information.

User Raster Data — 0-20
User MrSID and GeoTIFF data in the current project.

Image Data Series — 0-20
User raster data registered to the map using the ImageReg tab.

DeLorme Topographic Data — 9-17
DeLorme XMap USA Topographic Data. All vector data (points, lines, and
polygons), excluding draw objects, in DeLorme Topographic Data and all
user vectors on the map (XData datasets, MapTags, Phone book points,
and so on). The Topographic Data must be installed separately from the
XMap application. If you do not have this data installed, you do not see
this option.

DeLorme USA Street Level Data — 9-17
DeLorme XMap USA/Canadian Street Level Data. All vector data (points,
lines, and polygons), excluding draw objects, in XMap Street Level Data
and all user vectors on the map (XData datasets, MapTags, Phone book
points, and so on). The Street Level Data must be installed separately
from the XMap application. If you do not have this data installed, you do
not see this option.
Note DeLorme Street Level data is not included in the map if the Export
Map Format is set to DeLorme Earthmate.

Satellite Imagery (SAT10) — 9-11
True-color 10-meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT
satellite (Satellites d’observation de la Terre). Downloaded using the
NetLink tab.

USGS Quads (3DTQ) — 12-14
Color contour topographic maps produced by the United States Geological
Survey. Downloaded using the NetLink tab.

355

XMap User Guide

Aerial Imagery (DOQQ) — 15-17
Black and white 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography. Downloaded
using the NetLink tab.

Color Aerial Imagery (DOQQ) — 13-17
True-color 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography. Downloaded using
the NetLink tab.

NOAA Nautical Charts (varies)
Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA). Downloaded using the NetLink tab.

USGS Hi-resolution 133 City Imagery — 13-17
Color aerial imagery over the country's largest metropolitan areas with a
resolution of approximately 1/3 meter (or about 1 foot).

•

For information on how data zoom levels display on Earthmate PN-Series GPS
devices, see Data Zoom Level/Scale Bar Translation.

Creating a Map Package
You can export maps to use on a DeLorme Earthmate® PN-Series device or a
compatible Palm® OS or Pocket PC PDA. You must have Street Atlas USA®
Handheld installed to view exported maps on a PDA.
See the Creating Maps for an Earthmate PN-Series GPS tutorial in the application’s
Help for more information.
To Create a Map Package
Use the following steps to create a custom map to send to an Earthmate PN-Series
GPS or PDA.
1. Set your handheld export preferences using the Handheld tab in the Options
dialog box. Be sure to specify if you are exporting maps to a DeLorme
Earthmate or Palm OS/Pocket PC device.
2. Click the Handheld Export tab.
3. To manually select the export area, choose an appropriate grid size from the
Grid Size drop-down list (see Grid Size Comparisons for more information),
, and click grids on the map to add
click the Select/Edit button
or remove them. Grids selected for export are shaded red.
OR
Select the grid size from the Grid Size drop-down list (see Grid Size
Comparisons for more information), type a location in the Search for and
select a location box, click a result in the results list, and then click the
Preview button

. The default export area is defined with shaded

grids. Click the Select All

button to select the default export area

or click the Select/Edit
selected for export are shaded red.

button to add or remove grids. Grids

Note Click the Clear All button
from the map.

to clear the highlighted grids

4. Type a name for your map package in the Save your map for Exchange
box.

356

Using Handheld Devices

5. Click Save

6. Send the map package to your Earthmate PN-40, Earthmate PN-20, Palm OS,
or Pocket PC PDA.
Notes
•

Your saved map packages display in the Saved Map Packages list.

•

To view a previously exported map, select it from the Saved Map Packages
list and then click View

•

To delete a previously exported map, select it from the Saved Map
Packages list and then click Delete

•

You may experience a performance issue if you try to export a map that
covers a very large area. To improve performance, decrease the size of the
map. If the map does not cover the area you need, export several smaller
maps until they cover the entire area you need.

Grid Size Comparisons
When you use the Handheld Export tab to export maps, you can choose a grid size.
A grid of the same size gets progressively larger in coverage (square area) the closer
it is to the equator. This is because the grid system is based on the
latitude/longitude coordinate system.
60 seconds = 1 minute
60 minutes = 1 degree
A 1.5 degree grid = 9 30 minute grids, 324 5 minute grids, 8,100 1 minute grids, or
202,500 12 second grids.
A 30 minute grid = 36 5 minute grids, 900 1 minute grids, or 22,500 12 second
grids.
A 5 minute grid = 25 1 minute grids or 625 12 second grids.
A 1 minute grid = 25 12 second grids.
Grid
Size

Factor

# of
Grids

Display Range

1.5
degree

9 x 30
minute

N/A

4-20

30
minute

36 x 5
minute

N/A

6-20

5
minute

25 x 1
minute

324

N/A

8-20

1
minute

25 x
12
second

8,100

900

11-20

12
second

N/A

202,500

22,500

625

13-20

357

XMap User Guide

Data Zoom Level/Scale Bar Translation
Your DeLorme application and your Earthmate PN-Series GPS device use different
methods for representing the map's scale. In XMap, scale is represented as a data
zoom level (1-19). The Earthmate PN-Series GPS device uses a scale bar, based on
the measurement units chosen in Device Setup.
The following table describes the correlation between data zoom levels in your
DeLorme application and the scale bars on the device.
Data
Zoom
Level

km/m

mi/ft

NM/ft

NM/m

1000km

500mi

500NM

500km

250mi

250NM

250km

125mi

125NM

125km

64mi

64NM

64km

32mi

32NM

32km

16mi

16NM

16km

8mi

8NM

8km

4mi

4NM

4km

2mi

2NM

2km

1mi

1NM

1km

0.5mi

400m

0.25mi

0.25NM

200m

640ft

200m

100m

320ft

100m

50m

160ft

50m

25m

80ft

25m

12m

40ft

12m

20ft

10ft

Scale Bar Label

0.5NM

Exchanging Information with an Earthmate PN-Series
GPS
Activating an Earthmate PN-Series GPS
358

Using Handheld Devices
You must activate your Earthmate® PN-Series GPS before you transfer maps,
waypoints, tracks, or routes.
Important If you have previously used another Earthmate PN-Series GPS with
XMap® and created maps using the Handheld Export tab, you will be prompted to
update your maps to work with the new device. If you do not update the maps when
you activate the device, you will be prompted to update each map when you send it
to the device.
To Activate Your Earthmate PN-Series GPS
Use the following steps to activate your device before you exchange maps.
1. With XMap open, connect your device to your computer and power it on.
2. PN-40 only: The Connect to Computer screen appears on the device and
Data Exchange is highlighted.
Press ENTER on the device.
on the toolbar to open the
3. In XMap, click the Exchange button
Earthmate PN-Series Exchange Dialog box.
The device is activated when it appears in the drop-down list in the top right
corner of the dialog box.

Exchanging Maps, Tracks, Routes, and Waypoints with Earthmate PNSeries GPS
You can use XMap® to exchange waypoints, tracks, routes, and maps with an
Earthmate® PN-Series GPS device. Click the Exchange button
on the toolbar
to open the Earthmate PN-Series GPS Exchange dialog. You can also open the
Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the Handheld
Export tab or the GPS tab. Before you begin, you must activate your device in XMap.

359

XMap User Guide
See the following topics for information about exchanging information with an
Earthmate PN-Series GPS.
Earthmate PN-40
Sending/Receiving Maps
Sending/Receiving Routes
Sending/Receiving Tracks
Sending/Receiving Waypoints
Firmware Updates
Earthmate PN-20
Sending/Receiving Maps
Sending/Receiving Routes
Sending/Receiving Tracks
Sending/Receiving Waypoints
Firmware Updates

Adding Draw Layers to a Map Package
If you have draw layers (excluding waypoints and tracks) that you want to send to
an Earthmate® PN-40, you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create
a map that includes the data. You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map
to the device.
To Create a Map with Draw Layers
Use the following steps to create a map with draw layers to send to the device:
1. Click the Draw tab.
2. Select each draw layer you want to send to the device.
Selected layers appear on the map.
3. Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map.
4. Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box.
5. Under Export Map Format and Location, select DeLorme Earthmate.
Note Map packages are saved in the location displayed. To change where
you save map packages, click Browse and navigate to the new location.
6. Under Export Map Source, select the map with the draw layer (Left or
Right).
7. Under Export Data Zooms, select Draw Layers.
8. Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the
handheld device.
9. Select Less Detail or Full Detail. Full Detail saves the data as it appears on
the map, but the file size is larger. Less Detail reduces the detail on the map
so the file size is smaller.
to select the grids that cover the draw layers
10. Click Select/Edit
you want to send to the device.
You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size. When selecting
grids, you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large.
You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce
the map output size.
To Send Draw Layers

360

Using Handheld Devices
To send a map package with draw layers to your device, see the Help topic for your
device:
•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/from an Earthmate PN-40

•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/From an Earthmate PN-20

Adding GIS Layers to a Map Package
If you have GIS data that you want to send to an Earthmate® PN-Series GPS device,
you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create a map that includes the
data. You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map to the device.
To Create a Map with GIS Data
Use the following steps to create a map with GIS data to send to the device:
1. Click the GIS tab to open the GIS Workspace.
2. Double-click each GIS layer you want to send to the device.
Selected layers appear on the map.
3. Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map.
4. Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box.
5. Under Export Map Format, select DeLorme Earthmate.
6. Under Export Map Source, select the map with the GIS data (Left or
Right).
7. Under Export Data Zooms, select GIS Layers.
8. Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the
handheld device.
9. Select Less Detail or Full Detail. Full Detail saves the data as it appears on
the map, but the file size is larger. Less Detail reduces the detail on the map
so the file size is smaller.
to select the grids that cover the GIS data you
10. Click Select/Edit
want to send to the device.
You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size. When selecting
grids, you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large.
You can select fewer grids or adjust the GIS Layers zoom ranges to reduce
the map output size.
To Send GIS Data
To send a map package with GIS layers to your device, see the Help topic for your
device:
•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/from an Earthmate PN-40

•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/From an Earthmate PN-20

Notes
•

DeLorme Topographic Data (All vector data (points, lines, and polygons) in
DeLorme Topographic datasets and all user vectors on the map (GIS layers,
XData datasets, MapTags, Phone book points, and so on). The Topographic
Data must be installed separately from the XMap application. If you do not
have this data installed, you do not see this option.) includes GIS data and
any other vector data on the map. This data is saved at a low resolution, so
lines and polygons may not be clear at higher zoom levels on the device;
however, the data is smaller in size.

•

Vector data (points, lines, polygons) may look slightly different in the
software than on the device.
361

XMap User Guide
•

•

Lines
•

Blazed Trail

•

Sewer Line

•

Water Line

•

Drain Line

•

Gas Line

•

Electric Line

•

Telephone Line

•

Ticked Fence

•

Post and Rail Fence

•

Barbed Wire Fence

•

Guard Rail

•

Stone Wall

•

Vegetation Line

•

Completed Dozer Line

•

Line Break Completed

•

Highlighted Geographic Feature

•

Man Made Feature

•

Uncontrolled Fire Edge

•

Fire Break Incomplete

•

Directional Arrow

Polygons
•

Wetlands

•

Bare Ground

•

Rock, Lake or Pond

•

Island

•

Land

•

Mixed Forest

•

Evergreen Forest

Points
•

Only Earthmate PN-Series point symbols are supported on the
PN-Series GPS devices. If you use other symbols in your
application, they will be changed to PN symbols for display on
the device.

Adding User Raster Data to a Map Package
If you have user raster data (MrSID or GeoTIFF data files) that you want to send to
an Earthmate® PN-Series GPS device, you can use the Handheld tab in the Options
dialog to create a map that includes the data. You can then use the Exchange dialog
to send the map to the device.
To Create a Map with User Raster Data
Use the following steps to create a map with user raster data to send to the device:
1. Click the Map Data tab.

362

Using Handheld Devices
2. Double-click the user raster data you want to send to the device.
Selected data appears on the map.
3. Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map.
4. Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box.
5. Under Export Map Format, select DeLorme Earthmate.
6. Under Export Map Source, select the map with the draw layer (Left or
Right).
7. Under Export Data Zooms, select Draw Layers.
8. Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the
handheld device.
to select the grids that cover the draw layers
9. Click Select/Edit
you want to send to the device.
You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size. When selecting
grids, you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large.
You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce
the map output size.
To Send User Raster Data
To send a map package with user raster data to your device, see the Help topic for
your device:
•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/from an Earthmate PN-40

•

Sending/Receiving Maps to/From an Earthmate PN-20

Notes
•

XMap USA Topographic Data (All vector data (points, lines, and polygons) in
DeLorme Topographic datasets and all user vectors on the map (GIS layers,
XData datasets, MapTags, Phone book points, and so on). The Topographic
data must be installed separately from the XMap application. If you do not
have this data installed, you do not see this option.) includes GIS data and
any other vector data on the map. This data is saved at a low resolution, so
lines and polygons may not be clear at higher zoom levels on the device;
however, the data is smaller in size.

•

Vector data (points, lines, polygons) may look slightly different in the
software than on the device.
•

Lines
•

Blazed Trail

•

Sewer Line

•

Water Line

•

Drain Line

•

Gas Line

•

Electric Line

•

Telephone Line

•

Ticked Fence

•

Post and Rail Fence

•

Barbed Wire Fence

•

Guard Rail

•

Stone Wall

363

XMap User Guide

•

Vegetation Line

•

Completed Dozer Line

•

Line Break Completed

•

Highlighted Geographic Feature

•

Man Made Feature

•

Uncontrolled Fire Edge

•

Fire Break Incomplete

•

Directional Arrow

Polygons
•

Wetlands

•

Bare Ground

•

Rock, Lake or Pond

•

Island

•

Land

•

Mixed Forest

•

Evergreen Forest

Points
•

Only Earthmate PN Series point symbols are supported on the
PN series GPS devices. If you use other symbols in your
application, they will be changed to PN symbols for display on
the device.

Deleting Maps, Waypoints, Routes, and Tracks
You can use the Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box to delete maps,
waypoints, routes, and tracks from XMap® and from your Earthmate® PN-Series
GPS.
To Delete a Map, Waypoint, Route, or Track from XMap
To delete a route, waypoint, track, and map that is in your current project, click to
highlight the item (in the left pane of the Earthmate PN-Series GPS Exchange dialog
box) and then click the Delete button OR right-click the item and click Delete.
To Delete a Map, Waypoint, Route, or Track from an Earthmate PN-Series
GPS
To delete a route, waypoint, track, and map that is stored on your Earthmate PNSeries GPS, click to highlight the item (in the right pane of the Earthmate PN-Series
GPS Exchange dialog box) and then click the Delete button OR right-click the item
and click Delete.

PN-40: Sending/Receiving Information
Sending/Receiving Maps to/from an Earthmate PN-40
You can use XMap® to send custom map packages to your Earthmate® PN-40.
Use the Handheld Export tab to create custom map packages of any size that cover
any location in the U.S. The data included in a custom map package is dependent on
the data that is available for the export area as well as the preferences made in the
Handheld Options settings.
Notes

364

Using Handheld Devices
•

You can transfer maps using the Data Transfer option on the device's
Connect to Computer screen and then selecting the device in the
Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box; however, transfer will be slow
as the device is not being used as an external drive.

•

If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device, go to the
Device Setup>Connect to Computer menu and select the option you
want from the USB Setting drop-down list.

•

You can also use an SD card and an SD card reader instead of an SD card
in the device. You do not have to connect your device to your computer.
Just insert the SD card/reader into your computer and in the Exchange
dialog choose that drive to transfer your map to.

•

To rename, delete, or send/receive a map, right-click the item in the
Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option. You can also delete a
map by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button.

To Send Maps

Use the following steps to send maps to your Earthmate PN-40's internal memory or
an SD card in the device.
1. Use the Handheld Export tab and the handheld export settings to create a
map package.
To learn how to create maps, see Creating a Map Package and the Creating
Maps for an Earthmate PN-Series GPS tutorial in the application’s Help.
2. Connect your Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
3. On the device, highlight Map Transfer and press ENTER. Then, highlight
Transfer to SD Card to send the map to an SD card, or Transfer Internal
to send the map to internal memory and press ENTER.
When the Transfer Maps message appears, your PN-40 is ready for transfer.
Set it aside.
4. In XMap, click the Exchange button

on the Handheld Export tab

or click the Exchange button
on the toolbar.
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.
5. If you are transferring to an SD card in the device, select the removable drive
(for example, Removable Disk E: Removable Disk) from the drop-down list in
the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
OR
If you are transferring to internal memory, select the internal memory drive
(for example, EM_USERMAPS E: Removable Disk) from the drop-down list.
The internal memory is treated as if it is an external drive.
6. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Saved Map
Packages, and then click the map package you want to send to your device.
OR
To select all map packages, just click Saved Map Packages.
7. In the right pane of the dialog box, under Map Packages, click Internal
Memory or SD Card.

365

XMap User Guide
8. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
9. Click Done.
10. On your Earthmate PN-40, press ENTER to return to GPS use.
To Receive Maps

Use the following steps to receive maps from your Earthmate PN-40 GPS or SD card
into your mapping application.
1. Connect your Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Map Transfer and press ENTER. Then, highlight
Transfer to SD Card if the map is on an SD card or Internal Memory if the
map is stored in internal memory, and then press ENTER.
When the Transfer Maps message appears, your Earthmate PN-40 is ready for
transfer. Set it aside.
on the toolbar.
3. In XMap, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.
4. If you are receiving maps from an SD card, select the removable drive (for
example, Removable Disk E: Removable Disk) from the drop-down list in the
upper-right corner of the dialog box.
OR
If you are receiving maps from internal memory, select the internal memory
drive (for example, EM_USERMAPS E: Removable Disk) from the drop-down
list.
5. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Saved Map
Packages, and click the map you want to receive into XMap.
OR
To select all map packages, just click Saved Map Packages.
6.

Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.

7. Click Done.
8. On your Earthmate PN-40, press ENTER to return to GPS use.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab.

Sending/Receiving Routes to/from an Earthmate PN-40
You can use XMap® to exchange routes with the DeLorme Earthmate® PN-40 GPS.
Notes
•

To rename, delete, or send/receive a route, right-click the item in the
Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option. You can also delete a map
by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button.

•

If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device, go to the
Device Setup>Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want
from the USB Setting drop-down list.

•

You cannot create trail routes on an Earthmate PN-Series GPS. To follow a

366

Using Handheld Devices
trail route, create a trail route in XMap and then send it to your device using
the instructions below.
•

If you stray off of a trail route's course while navigating with the device, you
will be asked if you would like to recalculate the route. Because the
Earthmate PN-Series GPS cannot create trail routes, the route will be
converted to a direct route if you choose to recalculate. If you do not want to
change the shape of your trail route, be sure to answer No when asked if you
would like to recalculate the route.

•

See also, the Exchanging PN-Series Data, Creating a Route, and Converting
Tracks into Trails tutorials.

To Send Routes

XMap® supports multiple calculation types, including Road-Quickest, Road-Shortest,
Direct, and Trail. Earthmate PN-Series GPS supports Road-Quickest and Direct
routes. If you create a Road-Shortest or Trail route in XMap, you can send it to the
Earthmate PN-40 and it will display on the device's map the same as it did in XMap;
however, the calculation method will display as Road (for Road-Shortest routes) or
Direct (for trail routes) in the route details on the device.
Use the following steps to send routes to your Earthmate PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.
3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Routes, and
then click the route you want to send to the Earthmate PN-40.
OR
To send all routes, just click Routes.
5. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
To Receive Routes

Use the following steps to receive routes from your Earthmate PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer and power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.
3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Routes, and
then click the route you want to receive into your mapping application.
OR
To receive all routes, just click Routes.

367

XMap User Guide
5. Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab.

Sending/Receiving Tracks to/from Earthmate PN-40
You can use XMap® to exchange tracks with the DeLorme Earthmate® PN-40 GPS.
Notes
•

To rename, delete, or send/receive a track, right-click the item in the
Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option. You can also delete a track
by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete button.

•

If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device, go to the
Device Setup>Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want
from the USB Setting drop-down list.

•

See also, the Exchanging PN-Series Data and Converting Tracks into Trails
tutorials.

To Send Tracks

Use the following steps to send tracks to your Earthmate PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.
3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Track Layers,
and then click the track layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate
PN-40.
OR
To send all tracks, just click Track Layers.
Note You cannot replace an existing track on the Earthmate PN-40 GPS if
the track details page for that track is displaying on the device.
5. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
To Receive Tracks

Use the following steps to receive tracks from your Earthmate PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.

368

Using Handheld Devices

3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Tracks, and
then click the track you want to receive into your mapping application.
OR
If you want to receive all tracks, just click Tracks.
5. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the track layer where you want to
receive the track or tracks. If you want to copy the track information into a
new track layer, click New and then click Track Layer.
Notes
•

If you do not perform this step and an existing track layer is
highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box, the track is received in
that layer. If a non-track option is highlighted (for example, a
waypoint layer), a new track layer is automatically created.

•

If you use the Exchange dialog box to send the active track to XMap,
the file name displays as a time/date stamp based on the time/date
information in the active track.

6. Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
7. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending/Receiving Waypoints to/from Earthmate PN-40
You can use XMap® to exchange waypoints with the DeLorme Earthmate® PN-40
GPS.
Notes
•

Waypoints that are exchanged between XMap and the Earthmate PN-40 retain
their exact waypoint symbol only if they are part of the Earthmate PN-Series
symbol set. Otherwise, the closest-matching waypoint symbol is shown.

•

To rename, delete, or send/receive a waypoint, right-click the item in the
Exchange dialog and select the appropriate option. You can also delete a
waypoint by clicking it and then clicking the Delete button.

•

If you bypassed the Connect to Computer screen on the device, go to the
Device Setup>Connect to Computer menu and select the option you want
from the USB Setting drop-down list.

•

For more information, see the Exchanging PN-Series Data tutorial.

To Send Waypoints

Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Earthmate PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.

369

XMap User Guide

3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Waypoint
Layers, and then click the waypoint layer or contents you want to send to the
Earthmate PN-40.
OR
To send all waypoints, just click Waypoints.
5. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
To Receive Waypoints

Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Earthmate GPS PN-40 GPS.
1. Connect the Earthmate PN-40 to your computer with the USB cable and
power it on.
The Connect to Computer screen appears.
2. On the device, highlight Data Exchange and press ENTER.
3. In your mapping application, click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.

on the toolbar.

4. In the right pane of the dialog box:
If you want to receive one waypoint at a time into XMap, click the plus sign
next to Waypoints, and then click the waypoint you want to receive.
OR
If you want to receive all waypoints, just click Waypoints.
5. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Waypoint
Layers, and then click the layer where you want to send the waypoint. If you
want to copy the waypoint to a new waypoint layer, click New and then click
Waypoint Layer.
Note If you do not select a layer and an existing waypoint layer is
highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box, the waypoint is received in that
layer. If a non-waypoint option is highlighted (for example, a track layer), a
new waypoint layer is automatically created.
6. Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
7. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN-40
Occasionally, DeLorme releases updates to the firmware for the Earthmate® PN-40
GPS. If you have activated a device in XMap®, you can check for firmware updates
on the NetLink tab at any time.
The easiest way to transfer an update is to an SD card in your device.
To Transfer an Update to an SD Card in the Earthmate PN-40

370

Using Handheld Devices
Follow these steps to transfer a firmware update to an SD card in your device.
1. Connect your Earthmate PN-40 to your computer and power it on.
2. On the Connect to Computer screen, highlight Data Exchange and press
ENTER.
3. Press the MENU button and go to the Device Setup/Connect to Computer
menu.
4. In the USB Setting drop-down list, select Firmware Transfer and press
ENTER.
The Firmware Transfer screen displays. Set the device aside.
5. On your computer, run the installation program and follow the on-screen
instructions.
6. On your device, highlight Restart and press ENTER.
The device shuts down and powers back on; the update transfer status
displays.
You can also transfer updates to an SD card in an SD card reader. Once the update
is on the SD card, insert the card into your device and power it on to start the
transfer.

PN-20: Sending/Receiving Information
Sending/Receiving Maps to/From an Earthmate PN-20
You can use XMap® to send custom or regional map packages to your Earthmate®
GPS PN-20. Regional map packages contain general road and point data for multistate regions in the U.S.
Regional maps required for the Earthmate GPS PN-20; they are not required for the
Earthmate PN-40.
Use the Handheld Export tab to create custom map packages of any size that cover
any location in the U.S. The data included in a custom map package is dependent on
the data that is available for the export area as well as the preferences made in the
Handheld Options settings.
Notes
•

Because the base maps on the Earthmate GPS PN-20 include only major
roads, it is important that you send regional map package data and/or saved
map package data to your device. Regional map packages do not contain local
roads. To create the most efficient routes on the Earthmate GPS PN-20, it is
strongly recommended that you have regional maps AND saved map package
data on your device. To calculate a route on the device, you must have
regional map package coverage for the route area.

•

To rename, delete, or send/receive a waypoint layer, track layer, route, or
map, right-click the option in the list and select the appropriate option. You
can also delete a map by clicking the item and then clicking the Delete
button.

•

Saving many regional map packages on the device (or on an SD card) will
affect device performance. Save only the regional map packages that you
need.

To Send Maps

Use the following steps to send maps to your Earthmate GPS PN-20 or an SD card.

371

XMap User Guide
1. Use the Handheld Export tab and the handheld export settings to create a
map package.
To learn how to create maps, see Creating a Map Package and the Creating
Maps for an Earthmate PN-Series GPS tutorial in the application’s Help.
2. To save the map package in internal memory or on an SD card that is in the
device: Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable, power it
on, and then select Earthmate GPS PN-20 from the drop-down list in the
upper-right corner of the dialog box.
OR
To save the map package on an SD card with an SD card reader: Insert your
SD card into your SD card reader and then connect it to a USB port on your
computer. Using the drop-down list in the upper-right corner of the Exchange
dialog box, select the removable for your SD card.
Note Saving maps on an SD card with an SD card reader is the fastest
method for saving maps to use on an Earthmate GPS PN-20.
on the Handheld Export tab or click the Exchange button

3. Click

on the toolbar.
4. To send a saved map package, click the plus sign next to Saved Map
Packages in the left pane of the dialog box.
Click the map package you want to send to your device. To send all saved
map packages, just click Saved Map Packages.
OR
To send a regional map package, click the plus sign next to Regional Map
Packages in the left pane of the dialog box.
Click the region you want to send to your device. To send all regional map
packages, just click Regional Map Packages.
5. In the right pane of the dialog box, under Map Packages, select Internal or
External memory.
6. Click Send.
The map is sent to the device/SD card and a progress bar indicates the copy
status.
7. Click Done.
To Receive Maps

Use the following steps to receive maps from your Earthmate GPS PN-20 or an SD
card.
1. To receive a map package from internal memory or on an SD card that is in
the device: Connect your Earthmate GPS PN-20 to your computer with the
USB cable, power it on, and then select Earthmate GPS PN-20 from the
drop-down list in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
OR
To receive a map package on an SD card with an SD card reader: Insert your
SD card into your SD card reader and then connect it to a USB port on your
computer. Using the drop-down list in the upper-right corner of the Exchange
dialog box, select the removable disk option that represents your SD card
reader.
2. Click the Exchange button

372

on the toolbar.

Using Handheld Devices
3. Select Earthmate GPS PN-20 or Removable Disk (for an SD card) from
the drop-down list in the upper-right corner of the dialog box.
4. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Saved Map
Packages (to receive a saved map package) or Regional Map Packages (to
receive a regional map package) and then click the map you want to receive.
To receive all saved or regional map packages, just click Saved Map
Packages or Regional Map Packages.
5. Click Receive.
The map is received into XMap and a progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the Handheld Export tab or the GPS tab.

Sending/Receiving Routes to/from an Earthmate PN-20
You can use XMap® to exchange routes with the DeLorme Earthmate® GPS PN-20.
Notes
•

•

You cannot create trail routes on an Earthmate PN-Series GPS. To follow a
trail route, create a trail route in XMap and then send it to your device using
the instructions below.

•

See also, the Exchanging PN-Series Data, Creating a Route, and Converting
Tracks into Trails tutorials.

To Send Routes

XMap supports multiple calculation types, including Road-Quickest, Road-Shortest,
Direct, and Trail. Earthmate PN-Series GPS supports Road-Quickest and Direct
routes. If you create a Road-Shortest or Trail route in XMap, you can send it to the
Earthmate GPS PN-20 and it will display on the device's map the same as it did in
XMap; however, the calculation method will display as Road (for Road-Shortest
routes) or Direct (for trail routes) in the route details on the device.
Use the following steps to send routes to your Earthmate GPS PN-20.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
2. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

3. Select Earthmate GPS PN-20 from the drop-down list in the upper-right
corner of the dialog box.
4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Routes, and
then click the route you want to send to the Earthmate GPS PN-20.

373

XMap User Guide
OR
To send all routes, just click Routes.
5. Click Send.
The route is sent to the device and a progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
To Receive Routes

Use the following steps to receive routes from your Earthmate GPS PN-20.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
2. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

3. Select Earthmate GPS PN-20 from the drop-down list in the upper-right
corner of the dialog box.
4. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Routes, and
then click the route you want to receive into XMap.
OR
To receive all routes, just click Routes.
5. Click Receive.
The route is sent to XMap and a progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending/Receiving Tracks to/from Earthmate PN-20
You can use XMap® to exchange waypoints, tracks, routes, and maps with the
DeLorme Earthmate® GPS PN-20.
Notes
•

•

See also, the Exchanging PN-Series Data and Converting Tracks into Trails
tutorials.

To Send Tracks

Use the following steps to send tracks to your Earthmate PN-Series GPS.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
2. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

3. Select Earthmate GPS PN-20 from the drop-down list in the upper-right
corner of the dialog box.
4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Track Layers,
and then click the track layer or contents you want to send to the Earthmate
GPS PN-20.
OR
To send all tracks, just click Track Layers.

374

Using Handheld Devices
Note You cannot replace an existing track on the Earthmate GPS PN-20 if
the track details page for that track is displaying on the device.
5. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
To Receive Tracks

Use the following steps to receive tracks from your Earthmate PN-Series GPS.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
on the toolbar.
2. Click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.
3. In the right pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Tracks, and
then click the track you want to receive into XMap.
OR
If you want to receive all tracks, just click Tracks.
4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the track layer where you want to
receive the track or tracks. If you want to copy the track information into a
new track layer, click New and then click Track Layer.
Notes
•

•

If you use the Exchange dialog box to send the active track to XMap,
the file name displays as a time/date stamp based on the time/date
information in the active track.

5. Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
7. Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending/Receiving Waypoints to/from Earthmate PN-20
You can use XMap® to exchange waypoints with the DeLorme Earthmate® GPS PN20.
Notes
•

Waypoints that are exchanged between XMap and the Earthmate GPS PN-20
retain their exact waypoint symbol only if they are part of the Earthmate PNSeries symbol set. Otherwise, the closest-matching waypoint symbol is
shown.

•

For more information, see the Exchanging PN-Series Data tutorial in the
application’s Help.

375

XMap User Guide
To Send Waypoints

Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Earthmate GPS PN-20.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
on the toolbar.
2. Click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.
3. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Waypoint
Layers, and then click the waypoint layer or contents you want to send to the
Earthmate GPS PN-20.
OR
To send all waypoints, just click Waypoints.
4. Click Send.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
5. Click Done.
To Receive Waypoints

Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Earthmate GPS PN-20.
1. Connect your device to your computer with the USB cable and power it on.
on the toolbar.
2. Click the Exchange button
The Earthmate PN-Series Exchange dialog box opens.
3. In the right pane of the dialog box:
If you want to receive one waypoint at a time into XMap, click the plus sign
next to Waypoints, and then click the waypoint you want to receive.
OR
If you want to receive all waypoints, just click Waypoints.
4. In the left pane of the dialog box, click the plus sign next to Waypoint
Layers, and then click the layer where you want to send the waypoint. If you
want to copy the waypoint to a new waypoint layer, click New and then click
Waypoint Layer.
Note If you do not select a layer and an existing waypoint layer is
highlighted in the left pane of the dialog box, the waypoint is received in that
layer. If a non-waypoint option is highlighted (for example, a track layer), a
new waypoint layer is automatically created.
5. Click Receive.
A progress bar indicates the copy status.
6. Click Done.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

States Included in Regional Map Packages
Regional map packages are DeLorme-created, multi-state data regions that provide
much greater detail (.25-mile scale and up, more roads, better routing connectivity,
etc.) than the base map on the device. Not all devices require regional map
packages. Regional map packages contain only XMap USA Topographic Data.

376

Using Handheld Devices
Each regional map package consists of one or more states in the United States. See
the descriptions below to determine which states are included in each regional map
package.
East 1A

East 3A

West 1A

Connecticut

Florida

North Dakota

Massachusetts

Georgia

Nebraska

Maine

North Carolina

South Dakota

New Hampshire

South Carolina

West 1B

New York

East 3B

Idaho

Rhode Island

Alabama

Montana

Vermont

Louisiana

Wyoming

East 1B

Mississippi

West 2A

Indiana

East 4A

Kansas

Ohio

Iowa

Oklahoma

Pennsylvania

Michigan

West 2B

East 2A

Minnesota

Colorado

Delaware

Wisconsin

Nevada

District of
Columbia

East 4B

Utah

Arkansas

West 3A

Maryland

Illinois

Arizona

Missouri

New Mexico

New Jersey
East 2B
District of
Columbia
Kentucky
Tennessee
Virginia
West Virginia

West 3B
Texas
West 4A
Alaska
Oregon
Washington
West 4B
California
Hawaii

Firmware Updates for the Earthmate PN-20
Occasionally, DeLorme releases updates to the firmware for the Earthmate® GPS
PN-20. If you have activated a device in XMap®, you can check for firmware updates
on the NetLink tab at any time. Follow the on-screen installation instructions to
transfer the update to your device.

Exchanging Information with a Third-party GPS Device
Sending Route Information to a Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSor athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
send route points or route directions to your device.
To Send Route Points

377

XMap User Guide
Use the following steps to send route points to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
owner manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

4. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
5. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select
your device.
6. Select Send to Device.
7. Select Route Points from the Object drop-down list.
8. Click Next.
9. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
points you want to send to your device.
10. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point
for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name
check box. Not all devices support starting points. For more information, see
your device manual.
11. Click Send to Device.
12. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
13. Click Finish.
To Send Route Directions
Use the following steps to send route directions to your GPS device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiverthird-party GPS receiver, you may
have to use specific settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS
receiver, set your GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more
information, see your device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

4. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select
your device.
5. Select Send to Device.
6. Select Route Directions from the Object drop-down list.
7. Click Next.
8. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
directions you want to send to your device.
9. Designate a route name and/or a route number for the file on the device
(device dependent).
10. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point
for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name
check box. Not all devices support starting points. For more information, see
your device manual.
11. Click Send to Device.

378

Using Handheld Devices
12. Repeat the steps for each route file you wan to send to your device.
13. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

379

XMap User Guide

Sending Tracks to Your Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSor athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
send tracks to your device.
To Send Tracks
Use the following steps to send tracks to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

4. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
5. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select
your device.
6. Select Send to Device.
7. Select User Map Data - Track from the Object drop-down list.
8. Click Next.
9. Select the track file you want to send to your device from the Track File
drop-down list.
10. Optional. Designate a track name or a track number for the file on the device.
11. Click Send to Device.
12. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
13. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending Waypoints to Your Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSor athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
send waypoints to your device.
To Send Waypoints
Use the following steps to send waypoints to your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
device manual..
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

380

Using Handheld Devices
9. Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint
File drop-down list.
10. To avoid overwriting existing waypoints on your device, type a starting point
for the new points and select the Prefix a Number to the Waypoint Name
check box. Not all devices support starting points. For more information, see
your device manual.
11. Click Send to Device.
12. Repeat the steps for every route file you want to send to your device.
13. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving a Route From Your Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSor athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
receive routes created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your
mapping program.
To Receive a Route
Use the following steps to receive a route from your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

381

XMap User Guide

Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSor athletic device, you can use the Exchange Wizard to
receive tracks created on your device. Once imported, you can use the file in your
mapping program.
Note When you open a track you've imported from your GPS device, you may
notice that the track does not join existing roads. Use the select tool in the Draw tab
to snap the end node of the track to a road. For more information, see Snapping
Draw Objects.
To Receive a Track
Use the following steps to receive a track from your device and save it as a track.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

4. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
5. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select
your device.
6. Select Receive from Device.
7. Select Track from the Object drop-down list.
8. Select User Map Data - Track from the Save As drop-down list.
9. Click Next.
10. Select the track name or track number on the device that you want to
receive. Not all devices support downloading individual track logs. See your
device manual for more information.
11. Select the track file you want to add the track information to. To create a new
track file, select New from the Track File drop-down list and type the new
track file name in the New Track File text box.
12. Optional. Type a label for your track in the Track Label text box.
13. Click Receive from Device.
14. Repeat the steps for every track file you want to receive from your device.
15. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving Waypoints From Your Third-party GPS Device
If you have a compatible GPSdevice, you can use the Exchange Wizard to receive
waypoints created on your device and save them as a draw file or as a waypoint file.
Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive Waypoints as a Waypoint File
Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your device.
1. Connect your device to your computer.
2. If you are using a third-party GPS receiver, you may have to use specific
settings. For example, if you are using a GARMIN GPS receiver, set your
382

Using Handheld Devices
GARMIN receiver interface to GRMN/GRMN. For more information, see your
device manual.
3. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

4. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
5. Under Select Device, select GPS or point to Athletic Device and then select
your device.
6. Select Receive from Device.
7. Select Waypoints from the Object drop-down list.
8. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Save As drop-down list.
9. Click Next.
10. Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the
Waypoint File drop-down list. To create a new Waypoint file, select New
from the Waypoint File drop-down list and type the new waypoint file name
in the New Waypoint File text box.
11. If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol (such as
the default red flag), select the Use Current Waypoint (active waypoint)
option. If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third-party
device, select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then
select the appropriate set from the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a custom symbol set, see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom
Symbol.
12. Click Receive From Device.
13. Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive.
14. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Exchanging Information with a Palm OS Device
Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to
your Palm® OS device. See Creating a Map Package to Send to a DeLorme
Earthmate or PDA for more information.
Note You must have Street Atlas USA Handheld installed to view exported maps on
a PDA.
To Send a Handheld Map
Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Palm OS device.
on the toolbar OR click
1. Click the Exchange button
Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box.

on the

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.

383

XMap User Guide
7. Under Source, select the map you want to send to your handheld device
from the Handheld Map drop-down list.
The maps saved in the specified location display in the list. To view maps
saved in an alternate location, click the browse button and browse to the
location. Then, select the map from the Handheld Map drop-down list.
8. Select the user you want to send the map to from the User drop-down list.
9. Select the media destination from the Destination drop-down list.
10. Click Prepare for Sync.
11. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
12. Repeat the steps for each map you want to send.
13. Click Finish.
The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending User Raster Data to a Palm OS Device
If you have user raster data (MrSID or GeoTIFF data files) that you want to send to a
Palm® OS device, you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create a
map that includes the data. You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map
to the device.
To Create a Map with User Raster Data
Use the following steps to create a map with user raster data to send to the device:
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Double-click the user raster data you want to send to the device.
Selected data appears on the map.
3. Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map.
4. Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box.
5. Under Export Map Format, select Palm OS/Pocket PC.
6. Under Export Map Source, select the map with the draw layer (Left or
Right).
7. Under Export Data Zooms, select User Raster Data.
8. Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the
handheld device.
to select the grids that cover the draw layers
9. Click Select/Edit
you want to send to the device.
You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size. When selecting
grids, you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large.
You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce
the map output size.
To Send User Raster Data
See Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS Device for more information about
sending the map package with the user raster data to the device.

384

Using Handheld Devices

Sending Route Information to Your Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your Palm® OS
device.
To Send Route Points
Use the following steps to send route points to your Palm OS device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Points from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
points you want to send to your device.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Repeats the steps for each route file you want to send to your device.
10. Click Finish.
The route points are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
To Send Route Directions
Use the following steps to send route directions to your Palm OS device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
directions you want to send to your device.
8. Select the User Profile the route file will sync to from the User drop-down
list.
9. Click Prepare for Sync.
10. Repeat the steps for each route file you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending Waypoints to Your Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Palm® OS device.
To Send Waypoints
Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Palm OS device.

385

XMap User Guide

1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the waypoint file you want to send to your device from the Waypoint
File drop-down list.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Repeat the steps for every waypoint file you want to send to your device.
10. Click Finish.
The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving a Route From Your Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Palm® OS device. Once
imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive a Route From Your Palm OS Device
Use the following steps to receive a route from your Palm OS device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Route from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Select Route from the Save As drop-down list to save your route as a route
file.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the route file on the device that you want to receive.
9. Select the route file you want to add the route information to. To create a
new route file, select New from the Route drop-down list and type the new
route name in the text box.
10. Click Receive From Device.
11. Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive.
12. Click Finish. The route information displays.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your Palm® OS device.
Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive Waypoints From Your Palm OS Device

386

Using Handheld Devices
Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Palm OS device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. From the Save As drop-down list, select to save the waypoints as User Map
Data - Waypoints.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the
Waypoint File drop-down list. To create a new waypoint file, select New
from the Waypoint File drop-down list and type the new waypoint file name
in the text box.
9. If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol (such as
the default red flag), select the Use Current Waypoint (active waypoint)
option. If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third-party
GPS device, select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then
select the appropriate set from the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a custom symbol set, see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom
Symbol.
10. Click Receive From Device.
11. Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive.
12. Click Finish.
The waypoint information displays.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving a GPS Log From Your Palm OS Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Palm® OS device.
Once imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive GPS Logs From Your Palm OS Device
Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Palm OS device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Select Device, select Palm OS.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop-down list.
8. Click Receive From Device.
9. Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive.
10. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.
387

XMap User Guide

Exchanging Information with a Pocket PC Device
Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send maps you cut using the Handheld Export tab to
your Pocket PC device. See Creating a Map Package to Send to a DeLorme Earthmate
or PDA for more information.
Note You must have Street Atlas USA® Handheld installed to view exported maps
on a PDA.
To Send a Handheld Map
Use the following steps to send a handheld map to a Pocket PC device.
on the toolbar OR click
1. Click the Exchange button
Handheld Export tab to open the Exchange dialog box.

on the

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Handheld Map from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Under Source, select the map you want to send to your handheld device
from the Handheld Map drop-down list.
The maps saved in the specified location display in the list. To view maps
saved in an alternate location, click the browse button and browse to the
location. Then, select the map from the Handheld Map drop-down list.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
10. Repeat the steps for each map you want to send.
11. Click Finish.
The exported map is available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending User Raster Data to a Pocket PC
If you have user raster data (MrSID or GeoTIFF data files) that you want to send to a
Pocket PC device, you can use the Handheld tab in the Options dialog to create a
map that includes the data. You can then use the Exchange dialog to send the map
to the device.
To Create a Map with User Raster Data
Use the following steps to create a map with user raster data to send to the device:
1. Click the Map Data tab.
2. Double-click the user raster data you want to send to the device.
Selected data appears on the map.
3. Click the Handheld Export tab and zoom to the area of interest on the map.
4. Click the Options button to open the Handheld tab in the Options dialog box.
5. Under Export Map Format, select Palm OS/Pocket PC.

388

Using Handheld Devices
6. Under Export Map Source, select the map with the draw layer (Left or
Right).
7. Under Export Data Zooms, select User Raster Data.
8. Choose the zoom ranges at which you want to view the data at on the
handheld device.
to select the grids that cover the draw layers
9. Click Select/Edit
you want to send to the device.
You can use the Grid Size control to modify the grid size. When selecting
grids, you will receive an error in the Info box if the map output is too large.
You can select fewer grids or adjust the Draw Layers zoom ranges to reduce
the map output size.
To Send User Raster Data
See Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket PC Device for more information about
sending the map package with the user raster data to the device.

Sending Route Information to Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send route points or route directions to your Pocket PC
device.
To Send Route Points
Use the following steps to send route points to your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Points from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
points you want to send to your device.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
10. Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
The route points are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
To Send Route Directions
Use the following steps to send route directions to your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select Route Directions from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.

389

XMap User Guide
7. From the Route drop-down list, select the route file that contains the route
directions you want to send to your device.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
10. Repeat the steps for each route you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
The route directions are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending Waypoints to Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device.
To Send Waypoints
Use the following steps to send waypoints to your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Send to Device.
5. Select User Map Data - Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. From the Waypoint File drop-down list, select the waypoint file you want to
send to your device.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
10. Repeat the steps for each waypoint file you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
The waypoints are available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to send GPS logs you created in your mapping program to
your Pocket PC device.
To Send a GPS Log
Use the following steps to send a GPS log to a Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Send to Device.

390

Using Handheld Devices
5. Select GPS Log from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.
7. Under Source, select the GPS log you want to send to your handheld device
from the GPS Log drop-down list. The logs are saved in the specified location
display in the list. To view logs saved in an alternate location, click the browse
button and browse to the location. Then, select the log from the GPS Log
drop-down list.
8. Click Prepare for Sync.
9. Click OK to return to the Exchange Wizard.
10. Repeat the steps for each GPS log you want to send to your device.
11. Click Finish.
The GPS log is available on your handheld device after your next
synchronization operation.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving a Route From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive a route created on your Pocket PC device. Once
imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive a Route From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the following steps to receive a route from your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Route from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Select Route from the Save As drop-down list to save your route as a route
file.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the route file on the device that you want to receive.
9. Select New from the Route drop-down list and type the new route name in
the text box.
10. Click Receive From Device.
11. Repeats the steps for each route file you want to receive.
12. Click Finish.
The route information displays.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

391

XMap User Guide

Receiving Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive waypoints created on your Pocket PC. Once
imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive Waypoints From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the following steps to receive waypoints from your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select Waypoints from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. From the Save As drop-down list, select to save the waypoints as User Map
Data - Waypoints.
7. Click Next.
8. Select the waypoint file you want to add the waypoint information to from the
Waypoint File drop-down list. If you want to create a new waypoint file,
select New from the Waypoint File drop-down list and type the new
waypoint file name in the text box.
9. If you want all of the waypoints to display with the current symbol (such as
the default red flag), select the Use Current Waypoint (active waypoint)
option. If you want the waypoint symbols to match those on your third-party
GPS device, select the Use Custom Waypoint Symbol Set option and then
select the appropriate set from the drop-down list. For more information on
creating a custom symbol set, see Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom
Symbol.
10. Click Receive From Device.
11. Repeats the steps for each waypoint file you want to receive.
12. Click Finish.
The waypoint information displays.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

Receiving a GPS Log From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the Exchange Wizard to receive GPS logs created on your Pocket PC. Once
imported, you can use the file in your mapping program.
To Receive GPS Logs From Your Pocket PC Device
Use the following steps to receive GPS logs from your Pocket PC device.
1. Click the Exchange button

on the toolbar.

2. Click Use Other Device to open the Exchange Wizard.
3. Under Device Type, select Pocket PC.
4. Select Receive from Device.
5. Select GPS Logs from the Object Type drop-down list.
6. Click Next.

392

Using Handheld Devices
7. Select the GPS log you want to receive from the GPS Log drop-down list.
8. Click Receive From Device.
9. Repeats the steps for each GPS log file you want to receive.
10. Click Finish.
Tip You can also open the Exchange dialog by clicking the Exchange button
on the GPS tab or the Handheld Export tab.

393

Using UMPC and Small-screen Devices
Using UMPC and Small-screen Devices
You can use your mapping application with small-screen devices, such as UMPCs, or
Ultra Mobile PCs. The UMPC control is available in the Options menu. To turn UMPC
and click UMPC Mode to
mode on, click the Options menu arrow
select the check box next to it. To turn UMPC mode off, click UMPC Mode to clear
the check box.
The default interface minimizes the tab area, hides the Control Panel, and shows only
the toolbar buttons you need for navigating and tracking on a small screen;
however, you can add or remove tabs, show or hide toolbar buttons, and customize
the interface to meet your needs. You can also view an overview map at the same
time using the split-screen.
This screen is optimized for UMPC and is displaying GPS with NavMode.

Your XMap license allows you to install a copy of the software on a portable device in
addition to your computer. Please see the license agreement for your software for
further information.

394

Using NetLink
NetLink Overview
NetLink is an online portal within XMap®. You must have an Internet connection to
use NetLink.
The NetLink tab has four subtabs. Within each subtab, follow the on-screen
instructions or click the NetLink Help button

for more information.

Home
Purchase or activate a Map Library subscription, activate a Data Download Dollars
certificate, learn more about our data and imagery, and much more.

Map Library
Purchase Methods
•

Map Library subscription
The most cost-effective method for purchasing datasets is an annual DeLorme
Map Library subscription. For just $29.95 a year, you can download an
unlimited number of our available datasets.

•

DeLorme Data Download Dollars certificate
Included with your purchase is a certificate for $40 worth of data downloads.
This gives you the opportunity to see how imagery and data can enhance
your maps.

•

Purchase
You can always purchase downloads. If you prefer to receive your datasets on
DVD, you must use this method.

Datasets
The following datasets are available.
•

USGS 1:24K (Scanned Maps)
7.5-minute, 1:24,000-scale quadrangle series.

•

SAT10 (Satellite Imagery)
True-color 10-meter resolution imagery from the French based SPOT satellite
(Satellites d’observation de la Terre).

•

Color DOQQ (Aerial Imagery)

•

USGS DOQQ (Aerial Imagery)

True-color 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography.
Black and white 1-meter resolution digital aerial photography.
•

NOAA Nautical Charts (Scanned Maps)
Color bathymetric nautical charts produced by the National Oceanic and
Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

•

USGS Hi-resolution 133 City (Aerial Imagery)
Color aerial imagery over the country's largest metropolitan areas with a
resolution of approximately 1/3 meter (or about 1 foot).

395

XMap User Guide

Downloads
View and receive downloads and software updates. If you have an Earthmate® PNSeries GPS, you can also access firmware updates.

Support
Your connection to DeLorme — links to technical support, the forums, the DeLorme
blogs, and more. You can also submit a map correction to us.

396

Using GeoTagger
Getting Started with GeoTagger
Use the GeoTagger Wizard to:
•

Sync digital photos with GPS log files (.gpl) and track files (.an1) and tag
them to the location you took them. You can place images as an actual image
on the map, a MapNote with a hyperlink, or a symbol with a hyperlink.

•

Match GPS logs and tracks to time-related information downloaded from
supported devices. For example, you can download a track that includes your
heart rate from an athletic device and view the data in the Profile tab. The
program uses the following file formats: Suunto (*.sdf), Timex Trainer CSV
(*.csv), or Generic CSV File (*.csv).

To open the GeoTagger Wizard, click the GeoTagger

button on the toolbar.

Important! Make sure the time and date on your camera or athletic device and on
your GPS device match before you begin. This ensures that your images and data
are correctly matched to the GPS log file or track file. If you do not have the correct
time on your device, you can update the information with the Timestamp Offset
option in the wizard. See Calculating the Timestamp Offset.

Tagging an Image
Once you successfully tag your digital images to a GPS log file or track file, you can
view the points at which the photos were taken on the map in your DeLorme
program.
Before you begin, you must download the GPS log file or track file and digital
photographs to your computer. See Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS
Device for information on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files.

To Tag an Image
1. Click the GeoTagger button
Wizard.

on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger

2. Select Images and click Next.
3. In the Photo Directory box, type the path and file name for the folder (not
specific images) on your computer where the images are stored.
OR
Click Browse to search for the folder on your computer.
4. Under Time Zone, select the time zone where you were when you took the
pictures. See GMT Time Zone Information for a table of time zones by state.
If Daylight Saving Time was in effect (second Sunday in March through first
Sunday in November), select the Adjust for Daylight Saving Time check
box.
5. Under GPS Data, select Track or GPL File.
6. If you selected Track, the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree
menu. Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu, and click the track. You
can select only one track at a time.

397

XMap User Guide
If you selected GPL File, in the GPS Data box, type the path and file name for
the file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
7. Click Next.
The Image list displays the images that will be tagged. Click an image to
preview it in Image Preview window.
8. Under Time Offset, if the time on your camera differed from actual time
when you recorded the data, calculate the offset, type the actual time in the
Matching GPS Time text box.
9. Click Next.
10. Select how you want to place the image on the map.
•

Hyperlink–A MapNote with a hyperlink to the image displays on the
map.

•

Embedded–A MapNote with a thumbnail image hyperlinked to the
image displays on the map.

•

Symbol–A camera symbol with a hyperlink to the image displays on
the map.

11. Click Next.
A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your images.
Click Finish. When you view the GPS log file or track on the map, you can
see where the images are tagged.
OR
An error message displays; usually this is because the timestamps for the
camera and the file or track do not match.

Tagging Data
Once you successfully tag your data to a GPS log file or track file, you can view the
points where the data was recorded on the map and in the Profile tab in your
DeLorme program.
Before you begin, you must download the GPS log file or track file and the data file
[Suunto (*.sdf), Timex Trainer CSV (*.csv), or Generic CSV File (*.csv)] to your
computer. See Receiving a Track From Your Third-party GPS Device for information
on using the Exchange Wizard to transfer files.

To Tag Data
1. Click the GeoTagger button
Wizard.

on the toolbar to open the GeoTagger

2. Select Data File and click Next.
3. In the Data File Location box, type the path and file name for the file.
OR
Click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
4. Under Time Zone, select the time zone for your device.
If Daylight Saving Time was in effect (second Sunday in March through first
Sunday in November) when you recorded the data, select the Adjust for
Daylight Saving Time check box.
5. Under GPS Data, select Track or GPL File.
6. If you selected Track, the list of track layers in the Draw tab displays in a tree
menu. Click the plus sign to expand the tree menu, and click the track. You

398

Using GeoTagger
can select only one track at a time.
If you selected GPL File, in the GPS Data box, type the path and file name for
the file or click Browse to search for the file on your computer.
7. Click Next.
8. For Generic CSV Files only, under Data File, select the appropriate data type
for each category from the drop-down lists.
•

The top row categories are the types of data and units that the
program recognizes. For example, if your device recorded the speed in
kilometers per hour, make sure you select Speed (kmh). If you do not
have data for a particular category, leave it blank.

•

You can use the second row to assign columns of data in your .csv file
to a specific type of data. For example, if you have a temperature field
named "T" —; select T from the drop-down list that is below the
Temperature category in the first row.

9. For Generic CSV Files only, select your device's time format from the Time
Format drop-down list.
10. Under Offset, if the time on your device differed from actual time when you
recorded the data, calculate the offset, type the actual time in the Matching
GPS Time text box.
11. Click Next.
A message displays telling you that you successfully tagged your data. Click
Finish. You can view the data on the Profile tab.
OR
An error message displays; usually this is because the timestamps for the
device and the file or track do not match.

Calculate the Timestamp Offset
The time on your camera or data device must match the time in the track or GPS log
so the images or data display in the correct place. If they do not, you must calculate
a timestamp offset. If possible, do this before you use the GeoTagger Wizard.

To Calculate the Timestamp Offset Before Using the Wizard
Use these steps to calculate the timestamp offset before you use the GeoTagger
Wizard.
1. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
2. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture or
recorded data.
3. Make a note of the time.
4. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps.
5. When you get to the screen with the offset option, highlight the image or data
point in the file list.
The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
6. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.

To Calculate the Timestamp Offset When Using the Wizard
Use the following steps to calculate the timestamp offset if you are already using
the GeoTagger Wizard.
1. Click Cancel to exit the GeoTagger Wizard.

399

XMap User Guide
2. Click the Draw tab and view your track or GPS log.
3. Find a point on the track or GPS log where you know you took a picture or
recorded data.
4. Make a note of the time.
5. Start the GeoTagger Wizard and follow the on-screen steps until you get to
the screen with the offset option.
6. Highlight the image or data point in the file list.
The image or data timestamp displays in the Data Timestamp box.
7. Type the time you made a note of in the Matching GPS Time text box.

400

Sharing Online
Using Eartha Community Atlas
Eartha Community Atlas is an interactive atlas where communities exchange their
common experiences and location-based information using shared, customized,
searchable maps. You can geoplace photos on a map, upload waypoints, upload and
download tracks, and participate in forum discussions.
You do not have to be registered or signed in to browse the website. If you want to
post to a forum or manage map information, you must register and sign in.
on
To launch the Eartha Community Atlas (ECA) wizard, click the ECA button
the toolbar. You can access the website from the first page of the wizard or click here
to open it in a new window. If you need help with the Eartha Community Atlas
website, click Help on the toolbar.

Using MapShare
MapShare lets you create static maps with or without route directions or profiles to
send to your friends, family, and associates.
See the Using MapShare tutorial in the application’s Help for more information. For
help with e-mailing maps, routes, and profiles using the MapShare Wizard, click the
Help button on any screen in the wizard.
To open the MapShare Wizard, click the MapShare button

on the toolbar.

401

Using the XMap API Command Window
XMap API Command Window
XMap includes a command prompt utility (XMapi) that allows you to control the
application via the command line. The interface provides access to simple commands
for performing a variety of basic operations such as panning and zooming the map,
performing quick searches and creating routes. All operations are triggered from the
command line but control the running application.
You can create scripts and use the XMapi executable to run them within your
organization. Any commands that require further input prompt the user through the
standard XMap user interface.

To Open the Command Window
To open the command window:
From the Start menu, point to Programs>DeLorme>XMap 6>Tools, and
then click XMap API Command Window.
The command window opens.

To See a List of Commands and Parameters
To see a list of available commands and their parameters, follow these steps:
1. Open the command window.
2. On the command line, type xmapi
A list of commands and parameters displays. For more information, see API
Commands and Parameters.

To Execute a Command Using the Command Line
To execute a command, follow these steps:
1. Open the command window.
2. On the command line, type a command and parameter. Note All commands
begin with xmapi and all parameters are separated by a single space. For
more information, see API Commands and Parameters.
Example:
Type the following in the command line: xmapi quicksearch "yarmouth,
me" and press ENTER on the keyboard.
XMap launches (if not already running) and switches to the Find tab. A quick
search is run and the application centers the map on Yarmouth, ME.
Note To send the results of a command to a logfile, type '>path\filename.log 2>1'
at the end of the command. Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and will not
appear in the command line. If no path is specified, the logfile will be created in the
default target directory.

To Get Help Within the Command Window
To view help within the command window, including examples, follow these steps:
1. Open the command window.
2. On the command line, type the help command (xmapi help) and the
command you need help for.
Example: Type xmapi help createroute. The following displays:

402

Using the XMap API Command Window
Help for the "findshortcut" command. Searches the keyboard shortcuts for all
commands with a specified search term.
Example: Type "GIS" as the search term. The list of shortcuts appears in this
format: GIS .Show Check-out/in; GIS.Layer Properties, etc. A description is
provided.

API Commands and Parameters
These commands are available in the XMap API Command Window.
Notes:
•

All commands begin with xmapi.

•

Parameters are separated by a space.

•

An optional parameter is indicated with brackets. Example: [data-zoom-step]

•

If your parameter includes spaces, use quotation marks. Example: "2 delorme
dr, yarmouth, me"

•

You may have to complete further actions within the application. For example,
if you run the quicksearch command with the parameter of Boston, the Find
tab will open with a list of matches. Select one to center the map on that
location.

•

To send the results of a command to a logfile, type '>path\filename.log 2>1'
at the end of the command. Results and errors will be sent to the logfile and
will not appear in the command line. If no path is specified, the logfile will be
created in the default target directory.

Command

Description

Parameters

Example(s)

refreshmap

Refreshes the
current map
view.

n/a

zoompoint

Positions the
map on the
specified
location.

latitude longitude
data-zoom-level
[data-zoom-step]

4348 -7009 12 0

Use formats in the
Latitude/Longitude
section of the
Chart of
Supported
Coordinate
Formats.
zoommbr

Positions the
map on the
specified
bounding box.

nwlatitude
nwlongitude
selatitude
selongitude

OR
"N 43 48 30" "W70 9
52" 12 4

"N39 45.717" "W104
57.010" "N39 43.95"
"W104 51.510"

Use formats in the
Latitude/Longitude
section of the
Chart of
Supported

403

XMap User Guide
Coordinate
Formats.
quicksearch

findshortcut

Performs the
QuickSearch
action on the
Find tab.

search-term
See Performing a
Basic Search for
options.

"2 delorme dr,
yarmouth, me"

Searches the
keyboard
shortcuts for all
commands with
a specified
search term.

search-term

Type "route" as the
search term. The list
of shortcuts appears
in this format:
route.back on track;
route.calculate, etc.
A description is
provided.

group.commandname

"find.find street
address in zip" opens
the Find within
ZIP/Postal Code
option in the
Advanced subtab on
the Find tab.

"yarmouth, me"

See the topics
under Using
Keyboard
Shortcuts in the
online Help for
additional
information.
runshortcut

Executes the
specified
keyboard
shortcut. Use
the
group.command
and include all
punctuation.

"route.center on next
stop" centers the
map on the next
stop.

See the topics
under Using
Keyboard
Shortcuts in the
online Help for
additional
information.
createroute

Creates a route
using a start
point, optional
stop(s), and a
finish point.
All locations
must be in the
QuickSearch
format.
If a GPS is
enabled, any

404

Boston

start-location
[stop-location(s)]
finish-location
See Performing a
Basic Search for
options.

"2 delorme dr,
yarmouth, me"
"portsmouth, nh" "4
yawkey way, boston,
ma"
"Bob Smith" "Mary
Jones" "John Doe"
(address book
entries)
"GPS" "yarmouth,
me" (route from

Using the XMap API Command Window
string starting
with "GPS" (all
caps) triggers
the current GPS
location to be
used as the
location.
optimizeroute

Creates a route
between the
specified start
and finish
points, inserting
any stops to the
route in the
order they are
passed in the
command line.
This re-orders
the points to
find a nearoptimal
pathway that
connects the
stops.

current location to
yarmouth, me)

start-location
[stop-location(s)]
finish-location
See Performing a
Basic Search for
options.

"2 delorme Dr,
yarmouth, me"
"portsmouth, nh" "4
yawkey way, Boston,
MA"
"Bob Smith" "Mary
Jones" "John Doe"
(address book
entries)
"GPS" "yarmouth,
me" (route from
current location to
yarmouth, me)

All locations
must be in the
QuickSearch
format.
If a GPS is
enabled, any
string starting
with "GPS" (all
caps) triggers
the current GPS
location to be
used as the
location.
help

Provides help
and examples
for each
command
within the
command
window.

command-name

help findshortcut

405

Legal Information
DeLorme XMap GIS Single-User License Agreement
This is an Agreement between you, the end user, and DeLorme. By using the XMap 6
software (all titles and versions), data, and documentation (the “System”), you are
agreeing to be bound by the terms of this Agreement. The XMap 6 system consists
of three possible software titles: XMap 6 Professional, XMap 6 GIS Editor, and XMap
6 GIS Enterprise Edition.
If you do not agree with the terms of this Agreement, you may not use the System.
Return all materials within thirty (30) days of receipt to the dealer from which you
obtained them or to DeLorme for a full refund.
Any term or condition of an approved purchase order that differs from or adds to the
terms or conditions of this Agreement, as well as any other modification or
amendment to this Agreement, will not be effective unless expressly agreed to in
writing by both parties.

LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS
THE LICENSED SYSTEM
The System consists of DeLorme's patented (U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319; 5,030,117;
5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158; other patents pending) processes for the
formatting, storage, retrieval, and presentation of geographic and geographicallyrelated data; DeLorme's copyrighted computer program for the use of those
processes and related functions; and compilations of geographic and supplemental
data that are proprietary to DeLorme or its licensors. The entire System, including
the software, documentation, data compilations, screen displays, and map printouts
are protected by U.S. and foreign copyright. You have no ownership rights in the
System. Rather, you have a license to use the System as long as this Agreement
remains in full force and effect.

YOUR USE OF THE SYSTEM
Permitted Use. This Agreement permits a registered user to use the System on a
non-exclusive basis for personal, reference, or business purposes on a single
computer at one time. You may install the System on an auxiliary computer in
addition to your principal computer. However, one of these two computers must be
portable and the software may not be used simultaneously on both computers.
Otherwise, once you have installed the System on one computer you may use the
System on a second computer only if you delete the System from the first computer
or purchase a separate license. Installation of any part of the System on a network is
prohibited unless you have a separate network license. For information on network
or multiple-user licensing, contact DeLorme at prosales@delorme.com or 800-2932389. You may use the System as instructed by the documentation to perform its
designed functions only for the purposes authorized by this Agreement.
Paper Map Printout Rights. You may reproduce paper copies of any System map
printouts for personal or household use or, if you are a business or institution, for inhouse purposes provided that distribution and use of such printouts and copies of
printouts is limited to the location where the System is installed or limited to use by
employees based at that location.
Paper Locator Map Distribution Rights. You may distribute to family and friends,
including via fax, paper copies of System map printouts depicting locations of
personal interest. You may distribute to your colleagues, clients, customers or

prospects, including via fax, paper copies of System map printouts depicting the
location of your business or institution or the locations of your business or
institution-related meetings or events and in flyers or brochures that contain no paid
advertising.
GPS Receiver Link. You may use the System with a DeLorme GPS receiver or with
any other GPS receiver recommended by DeLorme to display your approximate
position on the screen, as described and with the limitations explained in the
documentation. You may use the System to transfer waypoints between the System
and GPS receivers recommended by DeLorme for that purpose.
Earthmate PN-Series GPS Device Map Data Distribution Rights. Earthmate PNSeries GPS devices are supported by all of the XMap 6 software titles. You may use
the System for the distribution of duplicate copies of map data to multiple PN-Series
device owners provided you are a licensed XMap 6 GIS Enterprise user and provided
that you do not receive any remuneration in exchange for your distribution of such
map data.
Paper Report Distribution Rights. You may reproduce for distribution to
colleagues or clients up to one thousand (1,000) paper copies of any System map
printouts for use in paper reports such as appraisals or environmental studies,
provided that no such report includes more than fifty (50) different System maps
and that the distribution does not constitute a general and unrestricted publication
for sale or resale or contain paid advertising.
Periodical Illustrations. You may reproduce paper copies of any System map
printouts as illustrations to articles in printed paper periodical works, such as
magazines, newspapers and newsletters, provided that the publication is not
primarily a collection of maps, and provided that a proper legend, as described
below, accompanies the output. Such articles may also be posted on your Web site.
Graphic printers hired by licensee to print DeLorme map images are required to
purchase a license.
Special Presentation Rights. You may use paper copies of System map displays
and printouts in presentations to live audiences only with prior written permission
from DeLorme.
Web Site Map Display Rights. You may display on your personal, business, or
institutional static Web site map images derived from the System, provided that you
include the Legend indicated below and that you provide a link to the DeLorme Web
site at www.delorme.com from any page featuring a DeLorme map image. If you
subcontract a Web developer to display map images, said Web developer must
purchase a license.
Legend. Any System output that is provided to a third party must include the
following credit and copyright notice: “© 2009 DeLorme (www.delorme.com)
XMap®”. You may not remove, alter, or conceal any copyright or trademark notices
appearing on any System output, except that when creating a mural map you need
only retain a single legend with scale, for use in the field.
Phone Database. You may use the phone database available separately from
DeLorme, subject to all of the provisions of this Agreement. Use with Auto Dialer
applications is prohibited. You shall use Phone Data in compliance with any and all
federal, state, and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, including without
limitation, any applicable privacy, do-not-call, telemarketing, or related statutes
regulations or ordinances. You shall defend and indemnify DeLorme, including
attorney fees, against any claims arising out of your violation of this Agreement.
Export of phone data is limited to one thousand (1,000) records at any one time
except as allowed under separate agreement.

Copy Services. You may use a commercial copy service to reproduce paper copies
that are authorized by this Agreement.
NetLink Tab. All data downloaded or purchased through the NetLink tab is subject
to DeLorme’s specific data use license agreement associated with those products.
Commercial resale of NetLink and TopoBird® data is prohibited. See DeLorme’s Web
site for the TopoBird® derivative data use license agreement.
You understand and agree that the trademarks, trade names, service marks,
copyrights, and other proprietary rights of DeLorme are and shall remain the sole
and exclusive property of DeLorme, and that you will not hold yourself out as having
any ownership rights thereto. You further agree that you will make no use of such
rights except as provided in this Agreement.

PROHIBITIONS ON USE
No Resale or Distribution. Except as expressly permitted in this Agreement, you
do not have the right to sell, or to reproduce or distribute for sale, any part of the
System or output of the System alone or in combination with any other text, data,
software, or graphic matter.
No Interactive Use. You do not have the right to combine the System interactively
with the operation of other software unless licensed to do so by DeLorme.
No Modifications or Decompilation. Except through use of any software
modification functions provided with the System, you have no right to modify the
System in any way, incorporate any part or product of it into a compilation, or create
any derivative work. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or
otherwise access source code or the logical structure and contents of the System
database.
No Third-Party/Service Bureau Use. Except as specifically provided in this
Agreement, you may not (a) permit any third party to use the System or transfer,
disclose, or otherwise make available the System to any third party, (b) use the
System in the operation of a service bureau or (c) allow access to the System
through terminals located outside your premises. You agree to secure and protect
the System in a manner consistent with the maintenance of DeLorme’s rights therein
and to take appropriate action by instruction or agreement with your employees who
are permitted access to the System to satisfy your obligations hereunder.
No Copies. The copying of the System, any portion of the System, or any of the
printed materials accompanying the System, is strictly prohibited.
All rights not specifically granted by this Agreement are reserved by DeLorme.
ADDITIONAL USE AND PUBLICATION RIGHTS MAY BE AVAILABLE UNDER A
SEPARATE EXTENDED LICENSE AGREEMENT. CONTACT DELORME AT
PROSALES@DELORME.COM FOR DETAILS AND PRICING.

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMER
Limited Warranty on Media. DeLorme warrants that the media on which the
System is furnished shall, for a period of sixty (60) days from date of receipt (the
"Warranty Period"), be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal
use. If a defect in the media appears during the Warranty Period, return all materials
to DeLorme for replacement or, at DeLorme’s option, a refund of the license fee.
Disclaimer of Warranty. DeLorme does not warrant the completeness or accuracy
of the System, or that its use will meet your needs or be uninterrupted or error-free.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, EXCEPT FOR THE WARRANTIES SET
FORTH ABOVE, THE SYSTEM IS LICENSED “AS IS” AND DELORME DISCLAIMS ANY
AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT

LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
No Consequential Damages. IN NO EVENT SHALL DELORME BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS EVEN IF DELORME HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
No Implied Right of Use. Please note that there may be private in-holdings within
the boundaries of land indicated or designated by the data included in the System as
public. Nothing in this Agreement grants the use of, or is intended to imply the right
to use, private property. You should respect all landowner restrictions. You are
responsible for your own safety and for the consequences of your actions in your use
of the data.

TERMINATION AND TRANSFER
DeLorme may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason including, but
not limited to, if DeLorme finds that you have violated any of the terms of this
Agreement or that you have attempted to exceed the licensed uses in any way.
Termination will be effective upon written notice to you. Upon termination of this
Agreement, you agree to promptly return all copies of the System, documentation,
and other materials furnished to you or made by you, including unauthorized copies.
Termination is in addition to and not in lieu of any other remedies available to
DeLorme. All provisions relating to property rights shall survive termination. You are
not authorized to transfer your rights under this Agreement.

OTHER
This Agreement contains the complete understanding between the parties and
supersedes and replaces any prior or contemporaneous agreement or understanding,
whether oral or written, with respect to its subject matter. This Agreement shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Maine, applicable to agreements wholly
executed and wholly performed in Maine. Any action relating to this Agreement shall
be brought in federal or state court in Maine and the parties consent to the personal
jurisdiction of either such court.
U.S. Government Rights in Commercial Software
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government of all parts of the System except
any USGS data is subject to restrictions set forth in the commercial computer
software license agreement under which the software is delivered by DeLorme and
as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a) or DFARS 227.225-7013
(OCT 1988), as applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.227-14 or FAR 52.227-19, as
applicable.
Copyright © 2009 DeLorme.

Important Notices
Patent and Copyright Notice
XMapTopo USAStreet Atlas USA/StreetAtlas USA Plus is a limited field of use license
under United States Patent law including the following patents owned by DeLorme:
U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,972,319; 5,030,117; 5,559,707; 5,802,492; and 6,321,158. Other
patents pending. All software, data compilations, screen displays and map printouts
are all protected by U.S. and foreign copyright and owned by DeLorme or its
licensors. Purchaser of license acquires no rights that are not specifically set forth in
the License Agreement included in the documentation.

U.S. Government Rights in Commercial Software
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in
the commercial computer software license agreement under which the software is
delivered by DeLorme and as provided in DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7203-3(a)
or DFARS 227.225-7013 (OCT 1988), as applicable, or FAR 12.212(a), FAR 52.22714 or FAR 52.227-19, as applicable.
Copyright © 2009 DeLorme.

Curl License
Copyright © 1996 - 2009, Daniel Stenberg,
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used
in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.

LibTiff License
Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the
above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the
software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon
Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software
without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEFFLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND,OR
ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR
PROFITS,WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE, AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

CSMap License
Copyright © 2008, Autodesk, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Autodesk, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY Autodesk, Inc. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL Autodesk, Inc. OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

Boost License
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th, 2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining
a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the
"Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute,execute, and transmit the
Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit thirdparties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above
license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer,must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software,
unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by a source language processor.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.

JasPer License
JasPer License Version 2.0
Copyright © 1999-2000 Image Power, Inc.
Copyright © 1999-2000 The University of British Columbia
Copyright © 2001-2003 Michael David Adams
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person (the"User") obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction,including without limitation the rights to use, copy,
modify, merge,publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
1. The above copyright notices and this permission notice (which includes the
disclaimer below) shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the
Software.
2. The name of a copyright holder shall not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from the Software without specific prior written permission.
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS
LICENSE. NO USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER
THIS DISCLAIMER. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS"AS
IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT,NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. NO
ASSURANCES ARE PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS THAT THE SOFTWARE
DOES NOT INFRINGE THE PATENT OR OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF
ANY OTHER ENTITY. EACH COPYRIGHT HOLDER DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY TO THE
USER FOR CLAIMS BROUGHT BY ANY OTHER ENTITY BASED ON INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OR OTHERWISE. AS A CONDITION TO
EXERCISING THE RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER, EACH USER HEREBY ASSUMES
SOLE RESPONSIBILITY TO SECURE ANY OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
NEEDED, IF ANY. THE SOFTWARE IS NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND IS NOT INTENDED
FOR USE IN MISSION-CRITICAL SYSTEMS, SUCH AS THOSE USED IN THE
OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES,AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION
SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL SYSTEMS, DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, OR
WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SYSTEM

COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH,PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR
ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE ("HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES"). THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.

ShapeLib License
Copyright © 1999, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

GDAL Proj4 License
Copyright © 2000, Frank Warmerdam
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

GDAL gtiff Format License
Copyright © 2002, Industrial Light & Magic, a division of Lucas Digital Ltd. LLC
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Industrial Light & Magic nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

GDAL hdf4 Format License
Copyright © 1996 Hughes and Applied Research Corporation
Permission to use, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for
any purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice
appear in supporting documentation.

GDAL pcraster Format License
Copyright © 1997-2003, Utrecht University
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Utrecht University nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,

BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE,DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

GDAL grib Format License
The degrib and g2clib source code are modified versions of code produced by NOAA
NWS and are in the public domain subject to the following restrictions:
http://www.weather.gov/im/softa.htm
DISCLAIMER The United States Government makes no warranty, expressed or
implied, as to the usefulness of the software and documentation for any purpose.
The U.S. Government, its instrumentalities, officers, employees, and agents assumes
no responsibility (1) for the use of the software and documentation listed below, or
(2) to provide technical support to users.
http://www.weather.gov/disclaimer.php
The information on government servers are in the public domain, unless specifically
annotated otherwise, and may be used freely by the public so long as you do not 1)
claim it is your own (e.g. by claiming copyright for NWS information -- see below),
2) use it in a manner that implies an endorsement or affiliation with NOAA/NWS, or
3) modify it in content and then present it as official government material. You also
cannot present information of your own in a way that makes it appear to be official
government information..
The user assumes the entire risk related to its use of this data. NWS is providing this
data "as is," and NWS disclaims any and all warranties, whether express or implied,
including (without limitation) any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for
a particular purpose. In no event will NWS be liable to you or to any third party for
any direct, indirect, incidental, consequential, special or exemplary damages or lost
profit resulting from any use or misuse of this data.
As required by 17 U.S.C. 403, third parties producing copyrighted works consisting
predominantly of the material appearing in NWS Web pages must provide notice with
such work(s) identifying the NWS material incorporated and stating that such
material is not subject to copyright protection.

Apache License, Version 2.0
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution
as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright
owner that is granting the License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that
control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the
purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause
the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)
ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions
granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but
not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or
translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made
available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or
attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is
based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original
work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not
include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the
interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of
the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works
thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the
copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of

Legal Information
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form
of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its
representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing
lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by,
or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work,
but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated
in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of
whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated
within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, nocharge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative
Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and
such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License,
each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, nocharge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to
make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor
that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of
their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If
You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated
within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any
patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of
the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or
Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in
Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this
License; and
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You
changed the files; and
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all
copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the
Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works; and
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any
Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution
notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not

pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places:
within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the
Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational
purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to
the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide
additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or
distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies
with the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any
Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor
shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms
or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor
regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names,
trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for
reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing
the content of the NOTICE file.
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions)
on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of
TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or
redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort
(including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law
(such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any
Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this
License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to
damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any
and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been
advised of the possibility of such damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or
Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance
of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent
with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your
own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor,

Legal Information
and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for
any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of
your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

Index
3
3D Fix ................. 329, 337, 344, 350

Assigning a Waypoint ID to a Custom
Symbol ................................... 280

3DTQ Region Coverage ..................41
A

Assigning Keyboard Shortcuts .........55

About GPS ................................. 341

Attribute(s) .. 165, 167, 170, 171, 172,
173, 180, 181, 182, 183, 187

Activating a Database ....................93
Activating Speech Recognition ...... 344
Active Layer .................................33
Add Field ................................... 172
Add Synchronized Layers ....... 33, 100
Add/Delete Words ....................... 351
Adding a Database User .................91
Adding a Field to a Layer.............. 172
Adding a Symbol......................... 267
Adding a Symbol Set ................... 157
Adding a Text Label..................... 267
Adding a User to a Server ..............87
Adding a Waypoint ...................... 267
Adding Data to XMap .....................64
Adding Draw Objects ....260, 261, 265,
267
Adding Files in a Project .................68
Adding Geometries to a Layer ....... 134
Adding Layers to your Workspace.. 127
Adding Points to Draw Objects ...... 257
Adding Stops and Vias ................. 314
Adding Subscription Layers to your
Workspace .............................. 100

Attaching a Database.....................91

Audio Controls ............................ 351
Auto Zoom To Turn ..................... 329
AutoCAD.................................... 117
Automatically Detect GPS ............. 329
Average Grade............................ 302
Averaging .................................. 341
Avoiding a Specified Area When
Routing................................... 318
B
Back on Track............................. 334
Backing Up a Database ..................98
Backup/Restore ...................... 98, 99
Base Data ....................................64
Basic Map Features .......................41
Basic Search .............................. 206
Batch File............................107, 112
Beep When Heard ....................... 344
Big Integer................................. 172
Bitmap .................. 19, 276, 277, 278
Blended ............... 152, 154, 155, 185
Boolean ..................................... 172
Breaking Linear Objects ............... 264

Adding Text or Graphics ............... 196

Buffer........................................ 133

Address Book 220, 221, 222, 223, 224,
225

Bulk Exporting .....................112, 114

Advanced Search ........................ 207

Byte.......................................... 172
C

Aligning Text and Graphic Items on
Your Map ................................ 199
Almanac .................................... 339
Along the Way .....................194, 319
Analyzing Topological Line Layers .. 142
Anchor Position........................... 283
Arc(s)..........................260, 262, 263
ArcSDE...................................... 101
Assembling a Multi-page Map........ 201

Bulk Importing ....................107, 109

Cancelling a Query ...................... 188
Category.................................... 275
Category Searches ...................... 215
Center on GPS ............................ 335
Centering Routes on the Map ........ 323
Centering the Map.........................18
Centering the Map on an Address Book
Contact................................... 221

Change Password..........................97

Clear Trail .................................. 335

Changing Coordinate Grid Properties77

Clearing a Profile......................... 306

Changing Draw Connection Properties
...............................................78

Climbing Distance ....................... 302

Changing Draw Object Types ........ 249

Closing Existing WorkFiles ............ 293

Changing How POIs Display on the
Map..........................................46
Changing How Query Results Display
in the Attributes Subtab ............ 187
Changing How Query Results Display
on the Map.............................. 185

Climbing Elevation ...................... 302
COGO.................................. 33, 141
Commit Changes...........................33
Compass Rose ..............................24
Connecting to a Server ..................87
Contour Properties ........................75

Changing Point Properties ..............74

Contours......................................41

Changing the Background Color of a
Printed Map ............................. 201

Control Panel................................24
Converting a Route to a GPS Log... 326

Changing the Contour Properties .....75

Converting MapTags to MapNotes .. 218

Changing the Elevation Properties ...81

Coordinate Formats .......................21

Changing the Map Colors................45

Coordinate Geometry Editing ........ 141

Changing the Map Magnification ......45

Coordinate Preferences ............ 47, 77

Changing the Properties in Your Data
...............................................73

Coordinates.......................... 47, 337

Changing the Properties of a Stop . 317

Copy to Active Road Layer............ 249

Changing the Radio Coverage Ellipses
Properties .................................80

Copy to Active Track Layer ........... 249

Changing the Raster Properties .......79
Changing the Scale of a Geometry. 137
Changing the Shaded Relief Properties
...............................................79
Changing USGS Quad Line Connection
Properties .................................77
Changing Vector Properties ............75
Changing Voice Output ................ 350
Changing XData Dataset Properties .81
Changing Your SQL Server
Authentication Password .............97
Chart of Supported Coordinate
Formats ....................................21
Checking Layers Out and In.......... 190
Check-out/in .............................. 190
Circle(s) ......................265, 266, 267
Classification Tools ........................33
Classifying a Layer with a Range ... 145
Classifying a Layer with a Single Value
............................................. 148
Classifying a Layer with a Unique
Value...................................... 144

Copy Symbol to Waypoint ............ 249

Copy to Active Trail Layer............. 249
Copy to Draw Object ................... 249
Copy Track to GPS Log ................ 249
Copying a Classification ............... 150
Copying a Draw File..................... 248
Copying a Draw Object From One
Draw File to Another ................. 251
Copying a Map Line to a Draw File . 246
Copying and Pasting .................... 277
Copying and Placing Draw Objects . 252
Copying Your Map to the Clipboard ..19
County Borders.............................41
Create a Layer From Current Selection
............................................. 125
Create a Layer From Query Results 125
Create an Empty Layer ................ 125
Create Dataset ........................... 289
Create Route from Line ................ 250
Creating a Buffer Around a Geometry
............................................. 133
Creating a Classification From a
Template File ........................... 149

Index
Creating a New Custom Scheme......55

Deleting a Database ......................93

Creating a New Database ...............89

Deleting a Draw File .................... 240

Creating a New Draw File ............. 239

Deleting a Field from a Layer ........ 173

Creating a New Layer .................. 125

Deleting a Layer ......................... 130

Creating a New Symbol................ 273

Deleting a Query......................... 188

Creating a New Symbol Set .......... 273

Deleting a Route ......................... 324

Creating a Profile ........................ 299

Deleting a Symbol Set ................. 158

Creating a Query ........................ 183

Deleting an Existing WorkFile........ 297

Creating a Route......................... 312

Deleting Draw Objects ................. 255

Creating a Route with XData Records
............................................. 288

Deleting Files in a Project ...............68

Creating an .ini File ..............107, 112

Deleting Points and Line Segments
from Draw Objects ................... 257

Creating an XMap Web Site .......... 159

Deleting Projects...........................67

Creating Data for a Registered Image
............................................. 293

Deleting Your Entire Address Book. 224

Creating Projects ..........................67

Descending Distance ................... 302

Creating Redline Edits.................. 104
Creating Transfer Files ...................70

DeLorme OpenSpace Transfer Files 117
Descending Elevation................... 302

Creating User Subscriptions ............96

Design View . 167, 171, 173, 180, 181,
182

Criteria ...................................... 183

Dilution of Precision..................... 339

Currency.................................... 172

Directions ................... 194, 317, 319

Current Elevation ........................ 302

Disable Screen Saver................... 329

Cursor Position ........................... 283

Disconnecting from a Server ...........88

Custom Points of Interest ...............44

Display .................................. 45, 46

Custom Reports .......................... 164

Display Route Vias ...................... 319

Custom Symbols ......................... 272

Display Waypoint Labels............... 319

Customizing a DeLorme Scheme .....57

Displaying Basic Map Features ........41

Customizing the Map Feature
Preferences ...............................44
D

Displaying Routes on the Map ....... 323
Diverging ................................... 144

Data ...........................................64

Downloading a Layer From XMap Web
......................................117, 161

Data Zoom Level..................... 17, 24

Drag and Zoom.............................17

Database Creator ..........................87

Dragging a Bitmap into XSym ....... 278

Database Manager . 87, 88, 89, 91, 93,
96, 97, 98, 99

Draw .... 233, 238, 239, 240, 241, 242,
243, 247, 248, 249, 251, 252, 253,
254, 255, 256, 257, 260, 261, 265,
266, 267, 272, 276, 279, 318

Database User Roles......................94
Datasheet View.... 165, 167, 169, 170,
182

Draw Connection...........................78

Date Time.................................. 172

Draw Geometries Tool ...................33

Deactivating a Database ................93

Draw Layer ................................ 239

Deleting a Classification ............... 151

Draw Line Tool............................ 134

Deleting a Contact In Your Address
Book ...................................... 224

Draw Point Tool .......................... 134

Deleting a Custom Scheme.............58

Draw Tool Box ............................ 281

Draw Polygon Tool ...................... 134

Duplicate the Source Layer........... 125
E

Exporting Track or Waypoint Files to
GPX Files................................. 242

Easting ...................................... 302

Exporting Your Address Book ........ 225
F

Edit Points Tool..................... 33, 136
Edit Tool ......................................33

FAQs ............................................ 3

Editing a Contact In Your Address
Book ...................................... 222

File Preview................................ 336

Editing a Field's Formula .............. 173

Find ..... 211, 212, 213, 218, 221, 223,
231, 275

Editing a Route ........................... 320

Filter ..................................185, 187

Editing a Symbol......................... 274

Finding a Custom Symbol ............. 275

Editing Draw Objects .....262, 266, 269

Finding a Symbol by Its Name ...... 213

Editing Points in a Polygon/Line Layer
............................................. 136
Editing Roads ............................. 321
Editing the Attributes of a Layer .... 165
Editing/Locking Draw Files............ 241
Elevation ................. 24, 81, 305, 337
Elevation Gain ............................ 302
Elevation Graphs......................... 300
Elevation Properties.......................81
E-mailing a Transfer File ................73
Enable GPS Voice Navigation ........ 329
Enable LED on GPS Device ........... 329
Enable Stationary Logging ............ 329
Enable WAAS Use ....................... 329
End of Day Breaks....................... 325
Entering Address Book Information 221
Equal Interval............................. 145
ESRI ......................................... 117
Estimate Fuel Breaks ................... 325
Estimating the Fuel Cost of Your Route
............................................. 326
Exchange Wizard . 377, 380, 381, 382,
383, 385, 386, 387, 388, 389, 390,
391, 392
Exchanging Files with a GPS or PDA
............................................. 359
Export to New Dataset ................. 289
Export to Text File....................... 289
Exporting a Custom Scheme ...........59
Exporting a Layer........................ 130
Exporting Data ........................... 289
Exporting Draw Files to Text Files .. 241
Exporting Tab Manager Preferences .53

Finding Phone Book Listings for a
Specific Road ........................... 231
Finding Points Near Your Current
Location .................................. 212
Float ......................................... 172
Flying Over a 3-D Map ................. 309
Formatting a Text File to Import as a
Draw File ................................ 245
Frequently Asked Questions............. 3
Fuel .......................................... 317
Function Descriptions................... 174
G
Game Management Districts ...........41
Geocode ....... 117, 132, 286, 287, 289
Geometry Shape ......................... 132
GeoTIFF.......................................64
Getting Back on Track.................. 334
GIS 33, 83, 87, 88, 89, 91, 93, 96, 97,
98, 99, 101, 105, 115, 117, 125,
127, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 144,
145, 148, 149, 150, 151, 152, 154,
155, 158, 165, 167, 170, 171, 172,
173, 180, 181, 182, 183, 185, 187,
188, 189, 190
Global Positioning System ............ 341
GPS 37, 212, 329, 333, 335, 336, 337,
341
GPS Radar ................................. 212
GPS Voice Navigation ...........344, 351
Grab and Pan ...............................38
Grade........................................ 302
Grid Lines ....................................77
Grids ...........................................41

Index

Handheld .....................354, 383, 388

JPEG ...........................................19
K

Handheld Export ......................... 354

Keyboard Shortcuts55, 57, 58, 59, 309

Heading..................................... 337
Hidden Draw Tools ...................... 238

Keywords for Category Searches ... 215
L

Hide Route ................................. 323

Labeling a Draw Object ................ 258

Hiding Address Book Contacts on the
Map........................................ 223

Labeling a Layer ......................... 158

Hiding Attributes in a Layer .......... 171

Labeling a Route Point with a MapNote
............................................. 322

Hiding Draw Files ........................ 240

Land Cover ..................................41

Hiding Tabs ..................................52

Large POI Symbols ........................46

Hiding Toolbar Buttons ..................33

Latitude ..................................... 302

High-contrast Colors......................45

Layering .................................... 189

Highlight.............................185, 187
Hints for Placing Points ................ 297

Layering Multiple Text and Graphic
Items on a Printed Map ............. 200

Horizontal Resize Tool....................49
I

Legend ................................ 29, 129
Line .......................................... 260

Image ............ 19, 267, 276, 277, 278

Linear Distance ........................... 302

ImageReg ............ 293, 294, 296, 297

Linking a Set to an Attribute ......... 181

Import Layers...............................33

Linking Documents and URLs to
Attributes................................ 167

Importing a Bitmap ..................... 276
Importing a Custom Scheme ..........58
Importing a Layer from an ArcSDE
Database ................................ 101
Importing a Layer Into a Database 117
Importing a Set to Link to an Attribute
............................................. 180

Load Template............................ 149
logfile .................. 112, 114, 402, 403
Longitude .................................. 302
Low Density .................................75
M
Magic Wand Tool................... 33, 142

Importing Data ........................... 284

Magnification ........................ 45, 329

Importing Existing Address Book
Information ............................. 220

Make Stop.................................. 320

Importing Files to Draw Files ........ 243

Manage Layers ................ 33, 93, 127

Importing Routes ........................ 324

Managing Datasets ...................... 286

Importing Tab Manager Preferences.53

Managing Your Site ..................... 162

Importing Transfer Files .................72

Map Center Crosshair ....................41

Info ............................................39

Map Colors ...................................45

Initializing GPS ........................... 329

Map Coordinates ...........................24

Inserting Stops and Vias .............. 314
Integer ...................................... 172

Map Data ... 61, 64, 66, 67, 68, 69, 70,
72, 73, 74, 75, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81

International Labels.......................41

Map Effect.................................. 185

Interval .......................................24

Map Features.......................... 41, 44

iPod ............................................36
J

Map Legend .................................29

Joining Linear Objects.................. 264

Map Rotation Tool .........................24

Make Via.................................... 320

Map Points ...................................74

MapInfo..................................... 117

MapNote .................................... 267

Panning the Map ................... 18, 335

MapShare ....................................36

Parks or Reserves .........................41

MapTags

Password .....................................97

Converting, Moving, Hiding, and
Deleting ............................... 218

Pasting a Bitmap into XSym.......... 277

Maximum Break.......................... 145

PhotoFlight.................................... 3

Maximum Elevation ..................... 302

Picture............ 19, 267, 276, 277, 278

Measure ................................ 39, 47

Pitch ......................................... 308

Memo........................................ 172

Placing Draw Objects .... 263, 267, 269

Microphone .........................344, 351

Planar ....................................... 132

Minimum Elevation ...................... 302

Playing Back a Log File................. 335

Modifying Existing WorkFiles ......... 296

PN 354, 356, 358, 359, 360, 361, 362,
364, 366, 368, 369, 370, 371, 373,
374, 375, 376, 377

Modifying the Properties of a Layer 132
Monitoring GPS Satellite Information
............................................. 339
Monitoring Speech Recognition...... 344
Monitoring Your GPS Status .......... 337
Moving a Contact's Location On the
Map........................................ 222
Moving a Draw Object to a Different
Draw File ................................ 251
Moving a Record's Location........... 289
Moving and Deleting MapNotes .... 270,
323
Moving Draw Objects................... 253
MrSID ................................... 68, 73
N
Natural Break ............................. 145
Navigation Tool....................... 35, 38
NavMode ............................. 38, 332
Northing .................................... 302
O
OGIS Geographic Markup Language
............................................. 117
Opaque ............... 152, 154, 155, 185
Opening a Project .........................67
Opening a Subscription File ............99
Opening a Symbol Set ................. 272
Opening Existing WorkFiles........... 293
Operator.............................174, 183
Options Dialog Box. 40, 41, 44, 45, 46,
47, 55, 57, 310, 329, 351, 354
Overview Map...............................25

Phone......................... 226, 227, 231

PN-20... 354, 356, 358, 359, 360, 361,
362, 364, 366, 368, 369, 370, 371,
373, 374, 375, 376, 377
PN40 .... 354, 356, 358, 359, 360, 361,
362, 364, 366, 368, 369, 370, 371,
373, 374, 375, 376, 377
POI Search................................. 211
POIs.................................... 41, 211
Polygon ..............................265, 266
Portable Maps...............................36
Previewing a GPS Log File ............ 336
Print. 19, 35, 193, 194, 195, 199, 200,
201, 319
Print Maps with a Transparent
Background ............................. 201
Print Maps With a Yellow/Black
Background ............................. 201
Profile .....38, 299, 300, 302, 305, 306
Projects ............................67, 68, 69
Properties .. 74, 75, 77, 78, 79, 80, 81,
132
Publicly Managed Lands .................41
Publishing a Layer ....................... 160
Q
Qualitative ................................. 144
Quantile..................................... 145
Query.... 142, 183, 185, 187, 188, 288
QuickSearch ........................206, 213
R
Radio Coverage Ellipse Connection ..80

Index
Range ....................................... 145

Route Avoid ............................... 318

Raster Properties ..........................79

Route Directions ......................... 317

Read Only .................................. 182

Route Prefs .........................319, 322

Recalculate When Off Route.......... 329
Receiving a GPS Log.............387, 392

Routing Data ................................66
S

Receiving a Route .........381, 386, 391

Satellites ............................339, 341

Receiving a Track........................ 382

Save as GPS Log File ............246, 326

Receiving Waypoints......382, 386, 392

Saving a Classification to a Template
File......................................... 148

Recenter Map on GPS ...........329, 335
Recognition Settings.................... 351
Reconnecting to a Server ...............88
Rectangle ...........................265, 266
Redline ......33, 99, 104, 105, 132, 168
Reference Card .............................59
Refreshing the Layers in a Subscription
............................................. 100

Saving a Draw File ...................... 240
Saving a Map as a Bitmap or JPEG
Image ......................................19
Saving a Project............................68
Saving a Route ........................... 324
Saving a Track as a GPS Log......... 246
Saving Route Directions as Text .... 319

Refreshing Your Database Connection
............................................. 131

Scale Bar .....................................24

Registering an Image .................. 294

Searching for a Phone Book Listing 227

Relocating Address Book Contacts . 223
Removing a Database User.............91

Searching for Address Book Contacts
............................................. 220

Removing a Layer From Your XMap
Web Site ................................. 161

Searching for Attributes ............... 170
Searching For Commands...............59

Removing a Symbol .................... 279

Searching Tips ..............................23

Removing Layers from your Workspace
............................................. 127

Selecting a Geometry to be Read Only
............................................. 182

Renaming a Classification............. 150

Selecting a Keyboard Shortcut Scheme
...............................................55

Renaming a Custom Scheme ..........57
Renaming a Draw Object.............. 254
Renaming a Project .......................69
Reordering Layers ....................... 189
Reordering the Tabs ......................53
Reordering the Toolbar ..................33
Resizing the Map and Tab Areas ......49
Restoring a Backed Up Database .....99
Reverse Route ............................ 320
RoadLayer ................................. 239
Rotate Map in GPS Direction ......... 329
Rotating a Geometry ................... 138
Routable Roads.............259, 262, 263

Schema .......................................89

Selection Tool...............................33
Sending a GPS Log to Your Pocket PC
Device .................................... 390
Sending a Handheld Map to a Palm OS
Device .................................... 383
Sending a Handheld Map to a Pocket
PC Device................................ 388
Sending Redline Edits to the Source
Database ................................ 105
Sending Route Information ...377, 385,
389
Sending Tracks to Your GPS Device380
Sending Waypoints....... 380, 385, 390

Routable Trails .............259, 262, 263

Sequential ................................. 144

Route .....36, 250, 314, 317, 320, 321,
322, 323, 324, 325

Server Name ................................. 3

Server Administrator .....................87

Server User..................................87

Street Colors ................................45

Setting Data to be Used as Routing
Data.........................................66

String........................................ 172

Setting Minimum and Maximum
Elevation................................. 305

Subscription .................................99

Setting Units of Measure Preferences
...............................................47
Setting Your 3-D Map Preferences . 310
Setting Your End of Day and Fuel
Break Preferences .................... 325

Strip Maps ................................. 194
Subscriptions................................96
Sun/Moon .................................. 340
Supported Coordinate Formats........21
Symbol...................................... 267
Symbolizing a Line Layer.............. 152

Setting Your Handheld Export
Preferences ............................. 354

Symbolizing a Point Layer ............ 154

Setting Your Routing Preferences .. 319

Synchronize .................. 99, 100, 105

Shaded Relief ......................... 41, 79

Synchronizing Phone Data with the
Phone Tab ............................... 226

Share Maps ..................................36
Show All Commands.............344, 346
Show Attributes .......................... 168
Show Comments MapNotes .......... 322
Show GPS Bread Crumb Trail ........ 329
Show Location MapNotes.............. 322
Show Summary MapNotes............ 322

Symbolizing a Polygon Layer......... 155

Synchronizing Tool ........................33
T
Tab Configuration...............49, 52, 53
Tab Manager .......................... 52, 53
Template ................................... 149
Terrain Distance ......................... 302

Show Turns................................ 317

Text Label.................................. 267

Showing Address Book Contacts on the
Map........................................ 223

Tips on Viewing Search Results ..... 214
Toolbar..26, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40

Showing Attributes in a Layer ....... 171

Topo Colors..................................45

Showing Tabs ...............................52

Topological.................. 132, 134, 142

Showing Toolbar Features ..............33

Town Borders ...............................41

Single Value ............................... 148

Track ... 242, 246, 261, 262, 333, 334,
335, 359, 380, 382

Skyview..................................... 339
Small Integer ............................. 172
Snapping Draw Objects................ 256
Snapping Text and Graphic Items on
Your Map ................................ 200
Speech Profile Training .........345, 351
Speech Recognition .......344, 345, 349
Speed ....................................... 337
Spherical ................................... 132
Spline ....................................... 260
SQL Server Authentication........ 89, 91
Standard Deviation ..................... 145
Start GPS ...........................329, 335
Statistical Data Options................ 302
Stop Prefs ...........................317, 320
Stops ........................................ 314

TrackLayer ................................. 239
TrailLayer .................................. 239
Training the Speech Recognition
Engine .................................... 345
Transfer File ......................70, 72, 73
Transparent ......... 152, 154, 155, 185
Travel Package ........................... 194
Turn Details ............................... 194
U
UMPC ............................. 40, 41, 394
Unique Value .............................. 144
Unregistered .............................. 132
Urban Area Color ..........................41
URL........................................... 172
Use Custom Map Features ..............44

Index
Use High-Contrast Colors ............. 329

Viewing Two Maps Simultaneously ...51

USGS Quad Line Connection ...........77
USGS Quadrangle Coverage ...........41

Voice..... 343, 344, 345, 346, 350, 351
W

Using the Command Line ......107, 112

Waypoint ................................... 267

Using the Transparency Option ..... 282
V

Waypoint ID ............................... 280

Vector .........................................75

Wild Card................................... 107

Vertical Resize Tool .......................49

Windows Authentication ........... 89, 91

Vias .......................................... 314

Workspace . 3, 99, 101, 115, 117, 125,
127, 129, 130, 131, 132, 133, 144,
145, 148, 149, 150, 151, 158
X

Viewing a 3-D Map ...................... 308
Viewing a Layer on the Map.......... 129
Viewing a Legend for all Visible Layers
............................................. 129

WaypointLayer............................ 239

XData......81, 284, 286, 287, 289, 291

Viewing a Report for Your XMap Web
Site ........................................ 164

XMap 4.5 Database Limitations .......97

Viewing All of the Shortcut Keys for a
Scheme ....................................59

XMap Bulk Importer-Exporter 107, 112

Viewing Dataset Records .............. 287

XOR .................... 152, 154, 155, 185

Viewing File Details for a GPS Log . 337

XSym ... 272, 273, 274, 275, 277, 278,
280, 281, 282, 283
Z

Viewing Hidden Draw Tools .......... 238
Viewing Layer Information in the
Workspace Subtab.................... 127

XMap Administrator ................. 91, 94
XMap Web .... 159, 160, 161, 162, 164

ZIP/Postal Codes...........................41

Viewing Route Directions.............. 317

Z-level ...................................... 189

Viewing the Attributes of a Geometry
on the Map.............................. 168

Zone ......................................... 302

Viewing the Contents of a Draw File
............................................. 247

Zooming In and Out ......................17

Viewing the Profile Elevation Graphs
............................................. 300

Zoom Tools ............................ 17, 24

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows)
Creator Tool                    : Acrobat PDFMaker 8.1 for Word
Modify Date                     : 2009:03:04 10:19:41-05:00
Create Date                     : 2009:03:03 16:11:11-05:00
Metadata Date                   : 2009:03:04 10:19:41-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : 
Title                           : 
Document ID                     : uuid:83c0f424-f86a-4e93-95c9-c48f3e8671e9
Instance ID                     : uuid:e57fc1d5-a9d3-4ab3-a068-ea86053dd940
Page Count                      : 437
Page Layout                     : OneColumn
Author                          :

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Delorme 6 Users Manual

6 to the manual b824f86b-c4c2-4e71-af58-e11e454465f0

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation